Home

HydroGeo Analyst v.3.0 User`s Manual

1. Environmental y x Te a Use as project default Database structure Linked Fields Settinas Description aM Description 07 Database settings 4 Geologic Description J M Lithology Parameter field name Chemicals M from M to Value field name Result_Values IV Description MV soil_type Unit field name Besut Units MV Pattern IV Consistency Unit category Po IV Structure V ASTM Descriptor 4 Color View settings V Odor E formation name Parameter field name Chemicals 4 formation_unit 3 EA moisture Get names from list A V comment a Value field Result_Values Mi Chemicals alue field name Result_Yalues Unit field name Result_U nits Result_Units W4 Hydrogeology Default value W Modelling features Data format y W Well Construction W Soil Testing Default unit y 4 Soil Sampling 4 Monitoring Event 4 Mining Exploration gt X amp amp B 34 Last Change 06 18 2004 2 44 34 PM Close Hee As with other standard fields there is a number of view settings that can be modified by all users These settings include e The names of one or more fields involved in the linked fields set e The default unit e A default value e Data display format e An option to link the first field in a three field linked fields to a list 5 4 Managing Templates 5 4 1 C
2. M Database structure Field Settings Description T v Description Database Settings 4 Geologic Description 4 Lithology Field name IV from soil_type F Do not allow duplicate values V to E EA Description Data type Unit V soil_type STRING y oo JV Pattern V Consistency Ue coles JV Structure ai Y ASTM Descriptor M Color View Settings ste Field name v formation_name Y formation_unit soil_type Read only M moisture Default value Unit Y comment O 4 Hydrogeology H Modelling Format Depth rules H features y Well Construction W Soil Testing Get values from list Soil Sampling mE YAA SOS SN E Soil List v F Allow values only trom list W4 Monitoring Event od A 4 Mining Exploration Validation rules H Geophysics Left Right W Well History FT User Category x x2Q E lt Last Change 06 18 2004 2 44 34 PM Close Help The Database Settings section of the interface allows all users to define e Field name this name will be used only for identification in the SQL Server database e Data type e Unit Category applicable for Double data types only e Units applicable for Double data types only The following field types are available e Long Field must contain an integer value e String Text or numbers use for descriptive items e Double R
3. By default the project Title is the same as the project Seling va Background color Li name and it appears at the top of the Display Window Vetical Exaggeration Factor 50 Interpretation type l Geology This can be moved to any location within the Display 7 p z Color Window by clicking on the Title and dragging it to a EC new location Vete B a ext color Text size 0 03 Background color sets the image background color By Title Date 5 15 2000 default the Background color of the display window is Vibe a black retiene i l Vale A Vertical Exaggeration sets vertical exaggeration factor me Es Text color a EJ for the p roject line color a Frame fill color O E Extend model to plume region When you load plume files into existing 3D projects they may lie outside the 3D domain created based on the cross section extents Use this option to re size the 3D domain to include the plume Interpretation Type sets the cross section interpretation type currently in view Only one interpretation type may be viewed at one time Choose from Geology Hydrogeology or Model The default is Geology Station Label Properties e Visible shows hides station labels e Color sets color of station labels e Size sets size of the station labels Title e Title field allows for entering a project title e Visible shows hides the title e Text color sets the color of the
4. The Display Tree Panel should appear as shown in the A Fe figure here If the panel is not visible click View Model molek tree from the main menu bar or click the button from the toolbar 5 63 Site maps The upper section of the Display Tree Panel contains a tree 1 o structured list of the elements which can be visualized eS while the lower section of this panel contains a table of the ee Display Settings for the selected display element The 1 GBE Display Tree Panel can be used to selectively view a an stations cross sections interpretation layers and legends 1 San x or alter the display settings of the selected elements Sa ee The Display Tree Panel is structured in a hierarchical Bi fashion where the elements within the tree can be expanded 1 T T by clicking on the symbol Hydrogeology Layers A EE Each display element listed in the Display tree has an see associated Setting list that can be accessed by selecting clicking the display element from the tree A brief description of each display property is available by clicking the mouse pointer on the display property This produces a fP Backocundesir tool tip Description of the Property in the bottom of the en tne Display Tree Panel below the Setting table Although each display element has a different set of display settings there are several display settings which are common to most display el
5. Cancel The Properties window contains numerous tabs with options that can be configured e General The General property page is used to set properties related to the database connection and record source e Time Series The Time Series property page is used to customize the date part extraction function syntax NOTE The General and Time Series tabs are not used for a Crosstab query WHI recommends that you do not change any settings in the General and Time Series tabs e Layout Select which fields from your data query should be used in the crosstab report e Fields The Fields property page allows you to set the properties of individual fields in the record source You can set the caption icons subtotal calculations and group footer settings e Preferences The Preferences property page displays the style and alignment properties of row and column fields and allows changes to be made to the properties Crosstab Queries 217 218 e Printer The Printer property page allows you to set properties for document headers footers and page margins e Fonts The Fonts property page allows you to set font properties for various areas of the cross tab query designer e Color The Color property page allows you to set colors for various areas of the crosstab query designer The required settings to generate a crosstab query can be defined in the Layout tab The default settings under the tabs Fields Preferences Printe
6. e Select a Field on which the data is to be contoured e Specify Intervals you may select to define the Contour Interval e g 0 5 1 0 5 etc or the Number of Intervals 5 10 20 50 etc You may also define Custom Contour Lines in the grid in the lower corner Use the and X buttons to add remove contours respectively e Under interpolator Settings select the interpolation method choose from Natural Neighbor Inverse Distance or Kriging e Under Contour Line Settings specify the line color thickness style and label settings Label Renderer will add a label to the lines To use the advanced interpolation settings click the Advanced Settings button and advanced options will be displayed as shown below for Natural Neighbor 250 Chapter 8 Map Manager Interpolator O seal IS a Shark 34 00 57 13902570462 Ends 80 54004651 40058 Nodes 50 Start r 43 4674110323148 End Y 43 464907541 9692 YY Nodes 50 Use Log Interpolation E Restrict Min Walue E Restrict Max Value no Value Min Value Max Real Min Real Max Mag Magi Mag No Value 995 0 Allow_Estrapolation Sdip Tautness_1 1 5 ast et ooo od Tautness 2 T Use Gradient OF Cancel Least easting You may modify the interpolation settings then click OK to return to the main window When you are satisfied with the settings click the Create button to create the contour
7. xX iA ay gt TT Use as project default Field Settings Description Database Settings Field name driling_method M Do not allow duplicate valles Data type Unit STRING y d Unit category r e H V descripti View Settings EM Geologic Descript ES H Lithology 4 Hydrogeology driling_method I Read only H Modelling Default value Unit H features A In M Well Construction E 4 Drilling Protocol Format Depth rules Y from IV t IV diameter ME drilling method Y inclination V azimute H Casing H V Screen 4 Annular Fill H Monitoring Point H V Soil Testing 4 Soil Sampling E 4 Monitoring Event H Mining Explorat H V Geophysics IV Well History TF User Category xX amp 268 34 Last Change 06 22 2004 9 56 50 4M nee E Help e Select a General List from the Get Values from List combo box e Ifthe field should be fixed to contain only values from the list enable the option Allow Values only from List by placing a check mark in the check box e If the list items should be read only in the field then place a check mark in the box beside Read Only e If necessary press the Edit List button to load the List Editor to edit the list Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e Press the Save button to save the changes to the template and close The list items should now show up for the selected field column in HydroGeo Ana
8. Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen Level Intersecting Grid Snapping Bufte Well Snapping Buffer fio Pixels Boundary Snapping Buffer 5 Pinels Vertes Snapping Butter E E Pinels Cancel Help Editor Tab In this tab there are options for specifying the snapping buffers for the selected cross section and its elements The Snapping Buffers are specified in pixels The buffer values determine the distance to which lines and vertices will snap i e join to the nearest line or vertex If a low value for the Snapping Buffer is specified the mouse cursor must be very close to a vertex or line in order for snapping to occur If a high value for the Snapping Buffer is specified then snapping will occur at a distance further away from the destination vertex or line Snapping allows for exact placement of vertices and eliminates the need for repetitive use of zooming in to specific locations If the snapping is used the vertices will be connected but not linked at the desired locations Well Snapping Buffer The default Well Snapping Buffer is 10 pixels When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 10 pixels of another well borehole then the borehole will be highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this station s lithologic interval the line will be automatically snapped to the closest vertex Boundary Snapping Buffer The default Boundary Snapping Buffer is 5 pixe
9. HydroGeo Analyst v 3 0 User s Manual Database Utilities Borehole logging reporting 2D Mapping and Cross Sections and 3D Visualization ae A AO a MOON ee ee 1 3 daran ra mara RARA DG bawed babe ad E Toc Cross Gection a4 Vertical Exaggeration 6 46743 na ROT ABR 1D Eamplhg Cabs ASH VIART CRIS LEO Samplg_Duie O 120704 12an 100 rien FR 15400 Sample Cate SE de e Es 4 niun ib Date 11195000 a ls EP re Es Es E 143 En E Mires sae E E E oii L Bo sivas i i Tt Gero oe Machu Sire TH ge Gravel ft aa Th pie Carie Grivel Mr Si inet Seared SS E Bt F el LATI ER hina TT Boulder Clay Far Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc License Agreement Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc A Schlumberger Company retains the ownership of this copy of the software This copy is licensed to you for use under the following conditions I Copyright Notice This software is protected by both Canadian copyright law and international treaty provisions Therefore you must treat this software JUST LIKE A BOOK with the following single exception Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc authorizes you to make archive copies of the software for the sole purpose of backing up our software and protecting your investment from loss By saying JUST LIKE A BOOK Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc means for example that this software may be used by any number of people and may b
10. In the next section you will learn how to enter Well Construction data for one of the stations Example Entering Well Construction Data In this section you will enter well construction data for one of the boreholes This data will be used for creating and visualizing a Borehole Log Plot BHLP Station List tab BH1 from the list Station Data tab Well Construction from the Data Category combo box Chapter 2 Getting Started M Station List BP Data Query Station Data Category Geologic Description y Select Station x m Y m Elevation m TOC m 7 E BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 Description n Geologic Description We fell Co n struction __ Consister__ Structure ASTMDe Color type _ Description Monitoring Event coarse gravel 0 0 0 0 0 copies o ol loamy sand 0 0 0 0 0 lite Histor el 88 sandy gravel 0 0 0 0 0 Enter the following well construction information Drilling Protocol tab table from the grid type from 0 to 30 diameter 1 0 method Hollow Stem Auger Next enter the Casing information Casing table from the grid You will be prompted to save the changes Yes For this well define the following info Casing interval from 0 to 30 m Steel material 0 5 m diameter Next enter the Screen information Screen table from the grid You will be prompted to save the changes Yes For this well define
11. Other display settings including Title Text size Text color and Frame color can be customized using the display settings options shown in the figure below Setting Value a TYOC Palette o ii i i i Auto reset palette ElColor legend Visible Aa a Title Textsize OT Texteolor O O o Frame Frameline color Framefillcolor m The color legend will automatically appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen whenever a display object using the color palette is plotted e g color map It can be moved to any other location in the Display Screen by dragging and dropping it at the desired location 10 3 7 Cross Section Data Display Settings 338 The Cross Section Data tree contains the properties of the cross sections loaded in the project e Stations e interpretations Each of these display elements contains further settings as described below Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Cross Section Settings The Cross Section contains the name as defined in the Cross Section Editor The entire cross section may be set to Visible or hidden from view The Label Properties allow you to modify the following settings e Visible turns cross section labels on off e Text Color changes text color e Text Size changes text size e Box Visible turns the outline box on off e Box Depth changes the thickness of the label e Box Color changes the label background color
12. oc depth DOUBLE ASIII gt Me region STRING region STRING Total of records 147 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Unit Conversion By default the data from those fields with units will be exported in the same units as the source However any unit from the same unit category can be selected and the appropriate conversions will be made by the DTS For instance a ground surface elevation that is stored in metres in the database can be exported in feet in the destination table Once the mapping is complete Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS 6 2 3 Station Related Settings Similar to the import procedure if you export station data you must specify the projection type and projection for the stations in the exported file Data transfer system Export al 2 NAD 1983UTM Zone 17N H o metes yl EUA Once this 1s complete Export button and Close button to complete the process Exporting Data using the DTS 195 196 Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Queries This chapter provides a detailed description of the Query Builder and Crosstab queries Within a HydroGeo Analyst project it may be necessary to perform different types of queries for data filtering reporting and management A few examples of data queries are provided below e Select wells drilled later than 1995 and earlier t
13. 144 of E E Ero we O Waring lt Back Import Cancel Help NOTE Step 3 is not needed for this data import since there are no station related settings For this example there should be no errors warnings present Import to import the data A confirmation message appears stating that the records will be inserted to the database OK Close to close the DTS The new sample codes should now appear in the project Chapter 2 Getting Started Now you are ready to import the soil chemistry analysis results for these sample codes Import Chemistry Results Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu Package Name and select New Package from the combo box type Soil chemistry data in the box that appears OK Sr a button beside the Specify Import File name field In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls Soil_chemistry_data XLS file located in the Examples folder under the installation folder The default installation folder is D Program Files HGAnalyst Examples Open Next to proceed to the next window in the DTS In the Data Mapping window you must select a new Destination Data Category and Table from the right side of the window In this case the soil chemistry data will be imported to the Soil Sampling category soil_chemistry table Select the appropriate items from the combo boxes as shown in the image below
14. Category Time ag Unit Mass Length Fumping Aate Conductivity Concentration Recharge Designing a Borehole Log Plot 417 418 Choose the Plot Series Type enter Plot Properties as required then click OK to create the plot column Next the Plot Entities must be defined Click on the Plot Entities sub node to expand the Entities options as shown in the following figure Description DataField Borehole Log Designer Sample p i 7 Of x Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 ES Design E E Lithology Lithology Well Construction ES LithologyEntities H E Well Construction 5 6 Plot E D epthPlotEntities es Gravel Medium F Sand WH PXJ S Name DataT able DepthEntity Caption Depth 2 ER Description Depth e 9 DataField ValueEntity Grava ie Caption Depth Plot Column E S o o o o o o o o o o bo O Close Export Y Print Y Help For a Depth Plot you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select the format you wish to use then select the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the DepthEntity select the field containing depth values from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the field containing the values you want to plot from the
15. Soil Sampling Example Global Time 4 Monitoring Event Depth Interval Chemistry_Sample Examination Event M Chemistry_Results Monitoring Point Depth Point W4 Field Props M Water Level Monitoring Point Y Screen_ID Examination Event IV date z 7 time M Table relationships Table is parent to Y depth_to_water_level IV Dry_indicator_Yes_No Y Comments 4 Mining Exploration V Geophysics IV Well History FT User Category HE j Table is child to Primary key Foreign key screen_id station screen_id station station station View settings ame ater Leve FXAQUB 39 i TE Last Change 07 27 2004 2 04 42 PM ne ENE In this example the Water Level table is child to the screen and station tables NOTE The Template Manager does not allow changing the units for a primary key Working With the Template Manager 171 field If this is necessary you must first break the table relationship 5 3 2 Modifying Fields and View Settings For any selected table the Template Manager provides the necessary interface to specify the field properties An interface similar to that shown below is displayed whenever a field is selected in the database browser Template Editor sample Environmental Use as project default X ad 3
16. e Menu Bar Contains program menu commands e Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used features in the Map Manager Chapter 8 Map Manager e Layer Manager Manages activating a layer visualizing and or editing layers e Map Window Contains the visible layers for the map project e Layer Information Displays the projection system for the selected layer e Coordinates Displays the X Y coordinates for the current mouse cursor location and the Map Projection system e Scale Displays the scale for the map window e Active Window Select between the Map Manager window and the Cross Section Editor window The Layer Manager allows you to manage the layers in the map project The icons at the top of the Layer Manager provide some insight into the functionality Layer Manager These features include LOODA d Fr LineLayer e Order Re order a Layer a da by clicking and dragging on aoe the first row bar of the desired pz FlevContouMap layer Or right click on a Boreholes layer and select one of the a boning wes Move options ol e 33 Visible Set the visibility o status of the selected layer a e e Editable Make the ieee ane selected layer editable or not by checking or unchecking the check box Currently only those shape files created in the Map eens Manager are editable Datum D Neth American 1983 Q Label Displays the o Layer name e Symbol Edit the
17. Data Transfer System Import E 10 x St ep 2 Data M appin g Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list In each source table stations must be identified at least by station names Source Destination Table Category Destination table soil_chem Soil Sampling z soil_chemistry na Map source fields to destination fields Use Name Type Conditions Type M station_name Y STRING LONG V sys_sample_code STRING sys_sample_code STRING L y Y STRING E z sample_date DATESTAMP MV chemical_name STRING a M result_value gt DOUBLE DOUBLE IU result_unit STRING STRING 2 2 po X conc_ppm DOUBLE M X fractioncode STRING E v interpreted_qualifiers STRING po z reporting_detection_limit DOUBLE ia X result_comment STRING E X rdl _ppm DOUBLE E X sample_matrix_code STRING po Y sample_type_code STRING E X sampling_reason STRING CO Requires a unit to be selected O Required field 1 Foreignkey Linked Fields Total of records 125 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Data Management 53 Under Destination Soil sampling for the new Destination Data Category soil_ chemistry for the new Destination table Under Source Table Sheet1 if it is not already selected from the combo box Next map the fields and select appropriate units In this example most fields are automatically mapped since the
18. E Create an import package or Spacity a data transfer package select from existing packages The import package contains Package name mappings from previous import gt sessions and allows you to zave time when importing Description multiple source files of the Fe game format Select the data source Save change to this DTS package Well Information Description eo The first step requires selecting the data transfer package and data source A Data Transfer Package DTP is designed to store all settings of desired import operations that may be repeated from time to time For example importing several LAS files containing the same measured parameters The DTP contains information about the data source the selected destination table s matching between source and destination tables and fields source units and a number of other settings You may create an import package or select from existing packages All Data Transfer Packages if any are listed for selection at the beginning of all data transfer operations If an existing package is selected the import routine loads all information stored in the package The information can then be reviewed and updated as desired before as you move through the data transfer operation After selecting the package select the Data Source please note the following limitations e HGA currently supports LAS v 2 0 e Third dimensional data array handling is c
19. Source file name Wayne DAVB Projects Demo_Project temp temp_img bmp Name in the project Wayne D WB Projects Demo_Project temp temp_geo BMP E Cancel Click OK to continue The Raster Image will then appear as a new Map Layer in the Map Project CAD The Map Manager also allows you to import CAD files into a map project file Supported formats include AutoCAD files DXF DWG and MicroStation files DGN CAD layers may be built in a Projection that is different from that used for the current map project therefore when a CAD file is selected the projection system and units may need to be converted to the current projection system and units In addition CAD files may contain graphic features on different layers as such there are options to select the layer to import These options are explained below HINT If you are having difficulties importing your CAD drawing please try exploding all blocks and re saving as a dxf file before attempting to import into HGA Description of Menu Items 239 Selecting Layers When a CAD format is selected using the Layer Import menu navigate to the appropriate file and open it The following dialogue will load Import DXF x Projection Projection Type UTM Coordinate System NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17M Unit meters OF Cancel The top portion of the dialogue lists the projection system properties of the current map project Below this frame is a Tran
20. Zoom In Provides options for zooming into a section of the cross section that is defined by a rectangle drawn around the desired area Place the cursor on the cross section and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for zooming out on the cross section Click this menu item and the cross section window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is not already in a full extent mode Previous Extent Zooms the cross section window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms the cross section window to the next window dimensions View 3D Allows you to view one or more cross sections in 3D with the 3D Explorer Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Export to 3D Explorer xi Select CrossSections Select Surfaces P Select All I Select All Grid Name Select IM relief Cross Section Name gt Select Plumes gt IV Select All wo 119117 Ae Select Grid Name V 3dplume JV Include site map 3D name HG 43D OK Cancel EJ Help Select the Cross sections to display from the dialog by placing a check mark beside each cross section name Or to select all
21. e Clip at limits indicates whether the color map will clipped above the Upper limit and below the Lower limit e Semitransparent sets the color map as semi transparent e Slice field contains a link to the Slice options see Creating Slices and Cross Sections on page 340 below for more details Isoline Maps Isoline Contour maps are a set of lines plotted on a surface whereby each line is connected by a set of points having equal values of a given data type Creating Isoline Maps To create a Isoline map click on the desired element in the Model tree and then right click on the element and select the Add Isolines map option from the pop up menu Alternately contour lines may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create contour map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window with a list of the available surfaces slices The contour map for the selected model element can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section lines Display Settings 333 334 f E A create slices slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal slice no 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Edi Delete Modify If there are no slices in the list then this window can be used to create the desired vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps For more details see Creating Slices
22. 1 364 Chapter 11 The Report Editor The Report Viewer contains three main components e Report Navigation Toolbar provides a number of toolbar icons that allow you to interact with the report described in detail below e Table of Contents can be displayed by clicking on the TOC icon on the toolbar The table of contents allows you to jump to any desired section in the report e Main Body of the Report Preview The main body of the report displays the final report as per the report design and data 11 3 1 Report Viewer Toolbars The Report Editor Viewer offers an extensive list of navigation tools the figure below shows the toolbars used in the Viewer window Ses Slee e Slee p Ae Ho s4 ooloo The following sections describe the toolbar buttons of the viewer window Navigation tools ey Open Static Report Opens a previously saved static report Save Static Report Saves the current report in the Report Editor s native format et Export Report Exports the current report to the desired format E Report Designer Displays the Report Designer window Print Report Sends the current report to printer Show TOC Displays the table of contents for the current report Report Preview Window 365 ee e Do eE Show Ruler Displays a ruler la Search Text Allows you to provide text to search for ih Find Text Searches for text provided in the Search Text text box Copy Page Copies the current pa
23. 1 HGASD sanp ee i SORU o Sener a Axis 534000 535000 536000 537000 538000 H Site maps Boulder Clay Surfaces H Cross Sections Data Clay 4815000 Coarse Gravel Fine Sand Gravel Medium Sand 4814900 Sand Silt Vertical Exaggera 1 0 Interpretation type Geology EJStations Label Pre ETitle _ BLegend 48130 ae 120 48 XJ 41 Rotate Shit Light Position xT gt afo r zj __Uptions V Live Update Apply Rotate model around the screen axes X up down Y left right Z rock side to side The Geologic Interpretations will be displayed by default To better visualize the fence diagram make the following changes to the view and grid orientation At the top of the 3D window locate the Vertical Exaggeration factor field type 10 for the Vertical Exaggeration lt Enter gt on the keyboard Next rotate the grid so that you can view the fence diagram from the side To do so locate the Navigation Tools at the bottom of the window these tools contain 3 tabs that control the Rotate Shift and Light Position options By default the Rotate tab will be selected and will contain three slider bars one for each of the X Y and Z axes X Slider bar and slowly drag this to the left Watch the 3D grid rotate as you do this Stop when you have reached a satisfactory side profile of the fence diagram Next Y Slider bar and slowly drag this to the right W
24. ActiveReport DocumentName The document name appears in the print spooler and can be used to easily identify the report MaxPages Sets or returns the maximum number of pages ActiveReports will process Once the number of maximum pages is reached ActiveReports will stop processing the report This property can be used to limit the number of output pages when running large reports and distributing the results over a slow connection Report Designer Window 359 WaterMark Adds a specified image to the report s background The watermark image can be positioned sized aligned and placed on specified pages by using the other watermark properties 11 2 3 Using the Report Designer 360 Report Explorer The Report Explorer as shown in the figure below allows you to browse through the controls of the active report and facilitates selecting controls for further editing The Report Explorer windows can be accessed by clicking on the Explorer icon f on the toolbar z Controls placed in the report 7 header Controls placed in the Station y Group header E StationID E Detail o e dcRptData re Controls placed in the detail a section of the report 5 B GroupFooter 1 eed Chart2D1 E PageFooter The explorer provides quick access for selection of controls on the report Selecting a control in the Report Explorer activates the corresponding control on the report This makes the control ready to be formatted
25. Administrators Administrators The UALM window contains the tools for managing users and groups The left side of the window displays a tree with the available Groups and Users The main section of the window displays a table containing Name and Descriptions for the selected Group or User In the upper left corner you will find a toolbar with several context sensitive buttons When Groups is highlighted in the tree view the controls apply to Groups When Users is highlighted in the tree view the controls apply to Users Use the Add button to add a new Group or User Use the Edit button to edit the selected Group or User Use the Delete button to delete the selected Group or User Use the Set Password button to set the password for a User this control is only enabled when a User is selected in the tree view Use the y Help button to load the Help details User Access Level Management 137 4 1 4 Group Properties The UALM allows you to set permissions to the various modules in HydroGeo Analyst through the Group Properties To load these options e Select Groups from the tree view in the main UALM window e Click on the P Add button to add a new Group or e Click on the Edit button to edit the properties for a selected Group When there is no HGA project loaded the Group Properties dialog for Application Level objects will appear Group Properties Marne Test Description Enter desc
26. Data Management 33 34 The example below illustrates how to enter Lithology data in the Geologic Description category for several stations Example Entering Lithology Data Ensure that the Station Data tab is still selected and BH1 is the selected station Geologic Description from the Data Category combo box Station List E DataQuey Station Data Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 Description v iz Category Uni _ Description _ 4 3 333 3 3 depth to bedrock Under the Lithology tab enter the following soil description information HINT Use the lt Tab gt or lt Enter gt key on the keyboard after each value to shift to the next column in the grid CIN p EEE HINT After each row press the op Add button to add a new record to the grid The Soil types may be selected from the a pre defined soil classification list you will recall that the DIN 4023 Soil Classification System was selected when the project was created Simply choose an appropriate soil type from the list NOTE All depth dependent data must be entered as depth to 0 5 5 10 10 15 etc and in ascending order Once the data has been entered Record gt Post from the main menu or press the Ta Post button in the toolbar to save the data The grid should be similar to the one shown below Chapter 2 Getting Started
27. E This step allows you to create the Templates tables that will be used to store your data The tables will be Environmental metric created based on a selected template that defines the database structure Database Structure Preview Tables Fields Please select create a template browse through the tables and fields that will be created and click on the Next button to proceed Location description_addins Geologic Description Lithology Hydrogeology Modeling features Well Construction Drilling Protocol Casing Screen a Description lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Selecting the Database Template for your project In this window you may select from a pre defined Database structure or create a new database structure for the project For your convenience there are several Database structures included with HGA which include the necessary tables for storing and managing environmental data These include e WHI s own Environmental Database Template designed for groundwater data management expands U S EPA Regions 2 amp 5 standards e Ontario s Ministry of Environment s MOE Water Well Information System WWIS Template designed for management of water well records and e U S EPA Regions 2 amp 5 Environmental Data Models designed for environmental data management All templates are available in both metric and imperial length units In most cases one of these databa
28. GIF PNG Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save 14 5 4 Copy Plot to Clipboard This option is available for individual plots in the design To copy the selected plot to the windows clipboard right mouse click on the plot name in the tree or right mouse Saving and Exporting 451 click on the plot in the viewer and select Copy to Windows Clipboard from the pop up menu You can then insert the plot into a graphics or word processing application for further modifications 14 5 5 Export Plot Page to Document To export the current plot page design right mouse click on the plot design in the tree and select Export from the pop up menu The plot page design can be saved as an XML file 14 5 6 Printing Click on the Print button in the lower right corner to send the current plot view to your printer 452 Chapter 14 Plotting Appendices 15 1 Appendix A HydroGeo Analyst File Types HydroGeo Analyst uses two types of files to manage users settings of the software and the projects its managing The first file named as HGB WHT is used to store general user settings for the software The second file Project VBH is used to store general information about your project This file stores the project identification and information about the location of your database and the necessary settings for connection Each one of these data files must remain in the same directory as they are originally created Th
29. The ASLD contains one default user group Administrators and one user Admin with no password After installation the Administrator can launch HGA login with the default user credentials and customize the default Administrator user and Administrators user group NOTE At least one user must belong to the Administrator user group at all times If you are working on a network and you want other users to have the same ALSD settings that you have defined then these users must have the same ALSD whi file in their HGA installation folder Simply copy the file to the target machine and overwrite when prompted The settings for the PLSD are saved in the PLSD table which is an encrypted table and is created for each HGA project 4 1 3 Managing Users and Groups 136 The User Access Level Management UALM module 1s loaded from the main window of HGA by selecting Settings Manage User Access Levels from the main menu If you load the User Access Management component and there is no project opened then you will be able to modify the options for managing Application Level objects If you load the User Access Management component and a project is currently opened then you will be able to modify options for managing Project Level objects Chapter 4 Project Manager In both cases the following main window will appear User Access Level Management Description Restricted Users Users have read only access to the objects
30. This dialog displays the server and Server stv gt database hosting your data B Although the dialog allows all Y Windows NT Integrated Authorization power users to modify the ices ame connectivity settings great care 3 esca sa must be taken as any improper p setting may corrupted your project assword Modify these settings only if the Database demo_vow y database is moved to another server is renamed or user access rights are changed C Build Connection String Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security sspi Persist Security Info False Initial atalog demo_vaqw Data Source srv Use Procedure for Prepare 1 Auto Translate T rue Packet Size 4096 Workstation ID aschalew Use Encryption for Data False T ag with column collation when possible F alse J Help For more details on the Project Properties please refer to Chapter 4 HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 105 Miscellaneous Settings This dialog provides access to project coordinates and the soil classification system Miscellaneous Ed Project Location Projection Type Projection Specify the project location and Geographic coordinate related settings prana NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N y UTM The Soil Specification contains C State Planar Units soil names and patterns meters y which will be used Others mes to visualize your lithology data in borehole log plots and cross Project Location Waterloo Ontari
31. e Enter a Name for the new soil type and select a Pattern To select from one of the available patterns select the button beside the soil type and choose from one of the pre existing images for the soil pattern To use your own image right mouse click on the picture field select Get Own Picture and locate the image file To copy one or all soil types from an existing SCS into the new SCS use the following buttons e Choose the desired SCS from the left side of the window e To copy a single soil type use the gt button e To copy all soil types use the button Use the following buttons to arrange the order of the soil types within the selected SCS e To move the selected soil type up use the F button e To move the selected soil type down use the L button To delete the selected soil type within a SCS press the x button Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Press the Save button to save the current SCS settings NOTE If you want to re use this new SCS in a new project you must save the current database template Then create a new project with this database template and the SCS will be available For details on saving database templates see Chapter 5 Exporting the current template as a Database template 3 5 2 Modifying and Deleting a Soil Classification System To modify an SCS select the desired SCS then use the button to load this into the edit window on the right To delete an SC
32. e Send maps to the Report Editor for printing e Created girded data file GRD For more details please refer to Chapter 8 Map Manager 6 Cross Section Editor The Cross Section Editor provides an interface for viewing two dimensional geological cross sections for borehole data and creating and interpreting cross section layers Cross sectional layers can be digitized using conventional GIS drawing tools Once the cross sections have been defined the images may be loaded into the Report Editor for printing or the cross section image may be exported to a graphics file format Additionally one or more cross sections may be sent to the 3D Explorer for viewing site lithology in a fence diagram format The Cross Section Editor allows for three types of layer interpretations e Geologic layers that define the geologic layers eg sand clay till bedrock etc for the displayed stations e Hydrogeologic layers that define the hydrogeologic layers eg Aquifer Aquitard1 Upper Unconfined etc for the displayed stations e Model layers that define unique model layers eg Model Layer 1 Model Layer Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst 2 etc for the displayed stations Model layers may be used in numerical groundwater flow models For more details please refer to Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor 7 3D Explorer The HG Analyst 3D Explorer provides a three dimensional view of one or more cross sections defined in the Cross
33. filling_volume DOUB Example Entering Monitoring Event Data In this section you will define water level data for OW1 the monitoring well that was defined previously in the Station List To do so Chapter 2 Getting Started OW1 from the combo box at the top of the window under Select Station First the screen details must be defined in the well construction category Well Construction from the Data Category combo box Screen tab table from the grid Define the following details Screen ID 1 from 10 to 20 m diameter 0 3 m type plastic slot no 20 HydroGeo Analyst Sample__ D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects S ample_1 Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help Jeea27 Sh FtXBAaAl BERR 2 BOS SOOM iki ill Station Groups Ji Station List di Data Query Station Data A Project 1 Boreholes A Station Data Queries Maps Drilling Protocol Casing Screen Annular Fill Monitoring Points Cross Sections Gj Sample Report m mm HR al Plastic 20 3D Views Borehole Logs Data Category a ore Select Station x coor m Y coor m Elevation m TOC m sc Owl 535915 00000001 4813214 99999 lt 340 5 341 5 AA Now you can define the water level Monitoring Event from the Data Category combo box Yes to save the changes for this record Water Level
34. 141 xn E sf zi 1 E MEL D y Goat 141 hy BPs ir 1554 dE A EL Ou Lai ke a Pa P ar ik E EE MEL n LA ul e ir Lk tf AEE Mal Japi Pre ct ul a ar Hs E TIE WEE dl ay l Pa Be al Y af i I AEE MEL 1 uyi Lm et T ar 1 1 ML fel oi Pa iFa ul The last column displays the calculated sample elevations Z This value should be mapped to Z in the 3D Interpolation to generate your plume NOTE It is recommended that the X Y and Z fields all be displayed with the same length units Interpolation method Available interpolation methods include e Krigging default and e Inverse distance Advanced Settings Press this button to see advanced settings for the selected interpolation method For more details see Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings on page 463 e Interpolate log values This option will interpolate the log values of the data points and then invert the log value distribution This option is useful when interpolating data with a high degree of variance Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Add Data Source Define the various properties relating to the data source e Data Source select a field from the data query that contains the data to be interpolated e g concentration or result value e Name define a name for the parameter Date Field select the field that contains the sampling date if available e Date Granularity This option controls how to accumulate the data items of various date stamps For e
35. 1D e Station Name Name e Station Coordinate X e Station Coordinate Y e Station ground surface elevation Elevation If plotting stations on a map or cross section is desired then the following fields are required e Station X co ordinate e Station Y co ordinate e Station ground surface elevation Elevation Station coordinates are stored in the Stations Table in latitude longitude format by default However each project may contain its own projection and coordinate system settings so that station locations may be entered and displayed in an alternate format e g UTM State Planar etc These options are available in the Template Editor Stations can be added modified or deleted through the Station List tab The Station List tab displays a limited number of fields for viewing and editing for a more detailed view of each station the Station Data tab must be used the information displayed in HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts 89 90 the Stations Table can be found in the Description Data Category within this tab in the Location table as shown below i HydroGeo Analyst Demo_YGW Aschalew HGA_Projects Demo_Y GW Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help ba 2 SA XRa FORRS BONS ROO Ehag Station Groups Ji Station List E Data Query Station Data ul Project Data Category ae Domes Descrintion Select Station X coor m _ Y coor m Elevation m TOC m a
36. 3 Visible e Color fill Ll Semitransparent Ll 39339 7852 0 0 Slice ElLine properties El uto intervals Visible e 40000 0 500 H ElCuetom Values e Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted e Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted e Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will be plotted starting from the Lower limit value Custom values The Custom Values setting is used to assign custom contour values in addition to or in replacement of the regular interval contour values Press the browse button to load the Custom contour values window as shown in the figure below Po OF Cancel Display Settings 335 336 Click to add a value Click E to insert a value Click A to delete a value This setting is commonly used to set logarithmic contour interval values for concentration data Labels Setting Value Name sd Contourmap 3 Visible Iw Color fil O OOOO ml Semitransparent C Mas value 39339 7852 Min value JOD Slice HLine properti El uto intervals Custom Values OXI Visible Testeolor o O o Textsize 2011375 Decimals J3 Multiple Labels Distance 1005 688 Boslabels m B ma 5 028438 C The Labels setting is used customize the appearance of the contour labels Visible shows
37. 4 Then browse to C Program Files and delete the Microsoft SQL Server folder and its contents 5 Then manually delete the folder where HGA was installed to remove any remaining files You will then be able to reinstall HydroGeo Analyst with MSDE and run the demo program 15 5 2 Demo Project Q I cannot open the Demo Project A Try rebooting the computer after installing WHI MSDE A Try deleting the SQL Server Database log file Go to your MSDE installation folder default is C Program Files HGAnalyst then go to the Data folder and delete the WHI_log LDF 15 5 3 System Q Problems accessing SQL Servers with Windows XP Home Edition Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s 471 A This configuration is currently not supported Only the Local instance MSDE can be used Q IfI am using WHI MSDE SQL Server on a local machine where is the SQL Server database stored A The database is stored in the SQL server installation folder for the MSDE instance the default is C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL WHI Data Q I cannot see my WHI instance of MSDE when creating a new project or opening an existing project A Check to see that the SQL Server Service Manager is open and running it is not paused or stopped there should be an icon on your taskbar If the Service manager is not visible in the task bar locate and launch the file sqlmangr exe file in the MSDE installation folder the
38. 80 559577967353 80 5613609731897 43 4749200273619 GB01 43 4744943279344 GB02 43 4770413777749 GB03 43 4777916718678 GB04 43 4753708962492 GBO5 43 4816548678084 GB06 43 4750729468892 GBO 43 4751443684377 GB08 43 4821142327003 GB09 43 4751191676957 GB10 43 4824596079935 GB11 43 4812779610372 GB12 43 4781366586241 GB13 43 4803200569183 GB14 43 4840015977549 GB15 43 4834671503069 GB16 43 478726238141 GB17 43 486065023726 GB18 43 4770928697195 GB19 43 4826569874823 GB20 43 4770928697195 GB21 Rows 68 Close Help Time 0 0 0 70 e Press Close to return to the main HydroGeo Analyst window e Click Yes when a prompt to save the query appears The new data query will now appear as a new node under the Queries node in the Project Browser If additional Conditions are required for a more advanced query follow the steps below e Create a new Query e Under Conditions press the Add button Using the same procedure described above select a field from the tree and drag and drop this into the new Expression field e Select an Operator and Expression value for the Condition e Repeat this step until all Conditions have been specified e The Conditions must now be linked with an additional operator On the right side of the window the Operator column can be expanded and one of the following options may be selected AND OR e Ifitis necessary to enclose one or more conditions double cli
39. Allows you to set whether you want the text field to become smaller if the text does not fill up the allotted frame Chapter 11 The Report Editor DataField Allows you to attach the field to a datafield in a project through a DataControl e g ADO If the field is linked to a DataControl select the desired data field from the drop down menu All fields linked to a DataControl in a current report are listed in the Fields window under the Report Navigator tree Summary DistinctField Specify the field name of the field used in a distinct summary function SummaryFunction Set the function to be used for aggregating data SummaryGroup Set the name of group section for summarization SummaryRunning Determines whether the summary is a running value or not SummaryType Determines the type of summary to be used Check Mark Value Allows you to determine whether the starting condition of the checkmark is True checked or False unchecked Image LineColor Style Weight Set the properties of the lines borders for the object Picture Select the picture you wish to display in the frame Supported graphics formats are bmp ico cur jpg gif and wmf Report Designer Window 357 358 Line SizeMode Specify how the picture will be displayed in the frame Clip will display the picture at original size and if the frame is larger than the frame it will be cut off Stretch
40. DAI E 214 PXDOPUNS Query Results APP OA R S O ON 215 Printing Query Results diia 215 AA A II A A OE 216 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc MAELO CNC ELON peta ic ces ac cee Sahin rs etek cei dase ce reno sae as oe yeeacencbee tonsa 216 Creatine a TOSS TAU CL setas tddi 216 Deia Md cd 218 Field PPLE SINGS st ii 220 Gentratine the Re DOF iia e a 221 Crosstab Table Display EM laa 222 Bic Display SEUA doo Madan ias 223 O Map VIAMA SOR ini ADOUt the Interface ida 225 Descrpuon ot Toolbar Hess isis 228 Description of Menu Heston ici esis 232 PHO CCL aooaa E sane an cessed sesmeusavgodanaszan coco wae aannieesest 232 INS A E E E ee tne ne Bade E O O 232 RE EE E E E T T A T E A A AA TAA T SST E T 232 DAN AETI EO E TE T E A PEE AA IEEE E EE ET T A A E E EEATT 232 SAV SUS ache dias somes A A ve dasetasetaaseuetauivas sdsascess e oncted em susser aes 252 A O O E A IE E E E E EN E E TE EASA 232 RePEc sra oda 232 EX DOIE TO CO ls ea iia 232 O 233 A o E eau senwua aan wioan ican oac aut idaalens ta tdanaiamnans dete atadals 234 A O E AT A ERT aad E EA 233 E A EEE SE Ris E esse E ll E E E 233 PA a aaa a a a 235 TIN SW Nnnea a E 235 PEN r acess cae gas oa coech geo natn staat nate staat obaroe cei oiecoae tect teas a eee eas a esgnaeaa ae eee ase tasnaesa est 235 Load HCA A alerts ekg ene assessed se sate a ac 235 o O SOI aad tas tosse ends oeusiiaseheeincnnantentercaas bet 236 A cn A 242 DEl ir Ete 242 PEO DERE S rota a
41. However the station co ordinates may be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in any projection system desired Importing Data using the DTS 191 Accepting or Rejecting Errors Warnings The records that fail to satisfy each of the above conditions will be indicated in the Errors and Warnings table By default all data marked as erroneous will not be imported However all warnings are ignored by default One or more of these error messages can be selected and the data affected by those errors can either be rejected or accepted Note that only data with a warning message may be accepted Erroneous records will not be accepted for importing unless the errors are fixed The values that cause the errors are highlighted in different colors Records shaded red indicate Errors that must be addressed before the Import can continue Records shaded yellow indicate a Warning or Caution with a corresponding message To accept the posted warning messages and import these records select the items and click the ae Accept button To reject the posted warning messages and ignore these records from the import select these items and click on the xl Reject button To view the error report click on the Display log file button Accepting or Rejecting Records Any of the records in the preview window may be accepted or rejected To accept the selected records click on the e Accept button To reject the selected records click on the xl Reject b
42. ISO English amp Greek 8859 8 ISO Hebrew 8859 9 ISO Latin 5 Western European amp Turkish 8859 13 ISO Latin 6 Lativan and Lithuanian ANSI Uses the system code page OEM Uses the OEM equivalent of the system code page ISO Uses the ISO equivalent of the system code page BIGS Uses the ANSI 950 code page also known as Big5 Chinese Taiwan HongKong SAR PRC SJIS Uses the ANSI 932 code page also known as Shift JIS Japanese EUC Uses the EUC ISO equivalent of the system code page Appendices 15 5 Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s This section is designed to provide answers to some common problems that may arise while you are using HydroGeo Analyst Please consult this section and the Help User manual as your first resource If you cannot find the answer please contact technical support at Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc and they will be happy to assist you You may contact WHI at Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc 460 Phillip Street Suite 101 Waterloo Ontario CANADA N2L 5J2 Phone 1 519 746 1798 Fax 1 519 885 5262 E mail sws supportOslb com Web www waterloohydrogeologic com 15 5 1 Installation Q Problems with installation after uninstalling a previous version A When uninstalling the HGA demo you must perform the following steps l Click on Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs 2 Remove the Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine WHI 3 Remove the HydroGeo Analyst Demo version
43. If you mapped the fields correctly then your DTS window should appear similar to the one shown below Chapter 2 Getting Started Data Transfer System Import OF Xx Step 4 Data Validation Errors Warnings Description Field Name of records Preview x Y Rowld station 7 0 6 5 Coar 7 6 5 26 Fine 7 26 52 Grav 7 52 69 Fine 7 69 100 Silty 8 0 4 3 Coar 8 43 17 Fine Note 8 17 48 Grav 8 49 66 Fine This step allows you to accept reject 8 66 94 Silty records with warnings by selecting the g 94 100 Silty warning message in the Errors W amings g 0 4 Coar grid Records with errors must be rejected to g 4 8l Fine activate the importing process 3 8 39 Grav You can also select one or more records in 3 39 39 5 Silty the preview table and exclude them from gt S ae me importing into your database ity 9 87 5 100 Silty 10 0 8 Coar gt E Error z O warming Y xX lt Back Import Cancel Help NOTE Step 3 is not needed for this data import since there are no station related settings For this example there should be no errors warnings present Import to import the data A confirmation message appears stating that the records will be inserted to the database OK Close to close the DTS The new lithology data should now appear in the project To confirm select one of the new Boreholes from the Station List load the Station Data and view the Geologic Descript
44. MS Access SQL servers or Oracle databases The DTS is designed to import data from such sources into the HGA database In addition data may be exchanged import and or export between the HG Analyst database and various other data sources during the lifetime of a project Such imports exports in most cases will involve the HG Analyst database and other sources such as spreadsheets delimited text files and other database formats such as MS Access The DTS is designed to 1 Import data into the HG Analyst database from such sources as e Spreadsheets e g Excel Quattro Pro Lotus 123 e Delimited Text files e g Comma separated text files e Other databases e g from one or more tables in a MS Access database 2 Export selected data to destinations such as e Spreadsheets e g Excel Quattro Pro Lotus 123 e Text files e Other databases e g to a table in an MS Access database 3 Export one or more HG Analyst tables to an external database MS Access SQL Server This chapter describes in detail the Data Transfer System DTS provided with HydroGeo Analyst Starting the DTS The DTS can be used for both importing and exporting data In HG Analyst the DTS may be launched as follows 177 Project Import Data from the main menu or click on the Data Import button i on the main toolbar Project Export Data from the main menu or click on the Data Export button 1 on the main toolbar The DTS Expor
45. Order by station id id station x x station y y station name name gt chem_test_sample0 date_ date_ chem_test_results0 chemical_name gt chemical_name v gt chem_test_results0 result_value gt Concentration gt chem_test_resultsO result_unit result_unit E 7 station elevation Elevation E 7 chem_test_samplel screen_from_ 7 Screen_from X 7 station elevation chem_test_sample0 screen_from_ E z The last display field in the screenshot above combines the sample elevation and the screen depth from fields the screen depth 1s subtracted from the station elevation or station TOC elevation if desired using the Expression below station elevation chem_test_sample0 screen_from_ and entering Z for the Alias Executing this query will produce the results shown below B l A a MEL mA a Ll JNE m CT WED Bug Dt a nati Jul TSS WEL Mis Co TEL map ail Tae MEL ou TH A IERI mad TI 1 A MEL ou CAE IES ELE ral EA MEL D y LA 1S JEET 1 1 CSTE MEL Ou LA Ib Ad IEE P al LAL a WEL og ras 15 JEE 1 TASS AE el Japi Lae 16 ERE rH 1 A WET I uy 1B 164 EA r Ta F aL WEL uyi Bre 14 54 EA E a LA UL MEL Ou or 14 54 a r q tt AL HEL ou pi TA a mm a i UE MEL D api Or 14 64 sr i rrd ASSE TEL D uyi 11759 ELES Eek r i 1 TEL MEL og Or LLI aTi fe ra FEE Hel ol La 1413 te Bey E al F A HET Tupi Load 141 1 La al FA MEL D 1 Lat 141 re ey EL re i UL MEL ou Godt 141 mE Ei I H 1er AL ME ou qa
46. Point Style dialog allowing you to choose a specific symbol and or color for each interval See Properties on page 234 Color may also be specified as a spectrum using the Ramp function Start Color 7 End Color ES Start Size 5 End Size 5 OF Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box This dialogue also allows you to specify the size of the symbols or if you wish the start and end size for a range Click OK to return to the renderer screen and click OK again to confirm the renderer settings Description of Menu Items 245 Make sure the renderer you ve created has a check mark in the Visible column and click OK to apply the renderer Value Renderer The Value renderer functions very similar to the Graduated renderer The Value Renderer dialog is shown below Value Renderer Name Field Mame W Default Symbol o Total 12 OF Cancel At the top of the dialog specify a Name for the renderer and select a Field Name for the renderer Use the Ramp function to specify the color scheme and size for the symbols and click OK first to return to the Value renderer dialog click OK again to accep
47. Point based Coll 400 SONIS arriba 401 Depth tnterval based COM aca iaa ias 402 SONE e EE a nes cuweiaedualeu buat yieiaalacdanloeas 403 Lito Oy COUN A NI 404 SO O O A A RC eee COE nC ema oe ne ee ee er 405 Well Construction ia 405 SENE O O A O ese e as 406 Dept Dependent PIOUS errado 406 SE e qn A O A 409 Designing a Borehole Log Plot siii iii 410 Addie TAthOlO ey COMM a a a 412 De leer 8 0 1086 61 q 0008 q PART PP UCOTO O O 412 Edit Columna Proper ieS ut dd io dato ada 413 Spec Data SOC a dia o A 415 Add Well Construction COMA ds 416 Ad OU MN AI dalt 416 A 417 Li a A E eerret 419 Savine the Borehole Log Plot ossein eseina R 419 Saving a borehole log plot design template sssrinin iesise aeaaeai 420 Exporting a borehole log plot design template oooooononnncnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 420 Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting ssscssssccccssssssssssssccccssseesesess 420 Gen ratine a Dorechol Tog repor tozsoran E alien as maraece nadie aacaneentestueaneee 420 ES Ouiality Control cuides Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis ccsssssssscccccccsssssssssscccccccccsssssssccscssssssess 424 Defining Quality Codes tor Dalai isn Bacon uGetevawnaea Gua a a 424 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc Data Requirements ii A To 425 Define A New Lab Quality Template sssccssccccssssssssssssscccccccccccssssssssscccscssssees 426 Check Dilpimicates Sets asa
48. The Plot column settings are shown in the following screenshots As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Plot node from the BHLP Settings window The settings for the Plot node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings Pla e Visible Header Color Column width 75 a tza The Plot frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the Header Color by clicking on the color box and change the Column Width The Settings for the Plot Area sub node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings x Vertica e Show Labels e Show Left Axis Log Scale e Show Labels FT Show Grid Lines Show Right Axis Grid Lines Color mi DS Grid Lines Color Ma Apply OF Cancel The Horizontal and Vertical axis properties can be adjusted and grid line colors can be changed by clicking on the line color box and selecting a color from the palette window that opens BHLP Columns 409 The specific settings for the Depth sub node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings E E BHLP Depth Sere EES Plot e Visible Be Plot Area it Plot Style tk E L epth Series E Interval Serie Line Style Solid Line Width Line Color E Symbol Rect E Symbol Size E ET Symbol
49. The following paragraphs show you how to create a dynamic report based on parameter queries The following is the format of the parameter query that you can create for use in the reporting component SELECT lt fields gt FROM lt table gt WHERE lt value gt lt Key Required Optional Caption Optional Default Value gt The following table summarizes the parameters that are typically included in a parameter query Chapter 11 The Report Editor Default Value Sets or returns a string expression containing the query parameter s default value Select a station Select DISTINCT Name as Name from station in the query shown below Key Sets or returns the query parameter s key name Station Name in the query shown below Caption Sets or returns the string expression to be used as a prompt for the query parameter Select a station in the query shown below Value Sets or Returns the string expression to be substituted in the query Name in the query shown below For example the bolded expression in the following parameter query forces the report component to display a dialog as shown below SELECT Station name as name chem_test_resultsO0 chemical_name chem_test_resultsO sample_date chem_test_results0 result_value chem_test_results0 result_unit chem_test_resultsO repORtINg_detection_limit FROM Station RIGHT JOIN PStation ON Station ID PStation SID LEFT JOIN chem_test_resultsO ON Station id c
50. Then right click and select Properties A dialog similar to the one shown below will appear Properties Provider Po DataSource ame Po UselD PC O O Password P ConnectionString Frovider SGLOLEDE 1 Integrated Security sspi Build Source SOL SELECT FROM lithology WHERE Station 27 ORDER BY Station Carcel Apo In the ADO properties under Source SQL you can see that the SQL string has been automatically created for you based on the table selected in HydroGeo Analyst In this example the SQL string basically states Select all fields from the Lithology table where the Station ID is 27 and order by Station If you are familiar with the format you may modify the SQL string here and update the report design After the report 1s saved a node will be created in the Project Browser under the Creating Reports 369 370 Reports node with the appropriate report file name Currently HydroGeo Analyst requires that all reports be saved under the Reports folder which in turn is created within the project folder Although the Report Manager allows you to open reports from any folder only those saved under the Reports folder of your project will be displayed in the project browser Creating Reports based on a Data Query Follow the directions below to create a report containing a Data Query e Select the desired Data Query from the Queries node in the project browser if no queries are availab
51. This includes data for Lithology and Well Construction drilling procedure filling materials screen and well casing materials Map Manager button loads the Map Manager by default the most recently used map project will be loaded View Cross Section button launches the Cross Section editor and displays the last edited cross section if any Data Import button launches the DTS for importing data into the project Data Export button launches the DTS for exporting data from the project 1 5 4 Project Browser 20 The project browser tree lists the following items Edil Station Groups ll Project Station Groups o b eel ES oreholes Station Data Data categories a Soil Borings gl 8G Stations Queries et clay thicker than 2 m Crosstab fill toe gt 110 mg kg H E Station Data Maps Ed Ep Queries H E Crosstab Cross Sections Mao Cross Sections Reports ogg Reports 3D Views HAE Diew 1 8 Borehole Logs Borehole Logs E Plots Plots Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst These items may be part of any project Each item is organized as a node in the tree view with one or more items under each node If there is no item under a given node there will be no branches available Station Groups The Station Groups node contains the Station Groups in your HydroGeo Analyst project By default all projects will contain a station group named Project that lists all stations in the database belonging to the proj
52. and the date will be added to the conditions NOTE To add the date to your query you can scroll through the calendar in increments of months If the date you desire is too far in the past it may be easier to type in the date manually in the format compliant with your regional settings Creating Queries 207 Advanced Data Query Options Data Queries may contain Advanced Grouping and Sorting options providing a more detailed search of the database To add grouping options press the Advanced button at the bottom of the Query Builder window and options will appear as shown below 101 x Xan amp A Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields VCExceeds20 X Expression i station id id soil_samples SE oa s Soil luna r PTRA mi sys_sample_code Sample_name sample_date z from FX V Map and BHLP Ready Y Use current projection system to chemical_name Conditions Expression result_value 4 result ink soil_chemistry chemical name Trichloroethane E co i soil_chemistry result_value gt 5110 AND PR soil_chemistry sample_date 2003 11 28 fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment rdl_ppm sample_matrix_code Xx sample_type_code M Group By List sampling_reason Field Having Ra Rack Corina 3 Function O
53. e Advanced Grouping Options Specify grouping and sorting options NOTE These options are available for Data Queries only Chapter 7 Queries 7 1 1 Description of Toolbar Items The toolbar provides access to most functions of the Query Builder Toolbar buttons are context sensitive if there are no options available the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance xl Ed New button creates a new query Delete button deletes the selected query Save Query button saves the query Save As button saves the query under a new name Generate SQL Statement button generates the SQL statement and tests the query Execute SQL Statement button executes the selected query string 7 2 Query Types 7 2 1 Data Queries Data Queries can provide a more detailed look at the data and can be used for quantifying and qualifying any field in the HGA database Query Types In addition many of the visualization and data analysis components require data sources as data inputs Using the Query Builder you can generate Data Queries that provide the data sources for Map Layers see Chapter 8 Load HGA Data for more details Cross section interpretation results see Chapter 9 Querying Cross Section Interpretations for more details Quality Control Analysis see Chapter 13 Applying a Lab Quality Template for more details BHLP columns see Chapter 12 Specify Data Source for more de
54. e Click OK to complete the procedure e The file will then be loaded into the appropriate module in HydroGeo Analyst 462 Appendices 15 3 Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings 15 3 1 Inverse Distance The Inverse Distance Squared method 1s a very fast and efficient weighted average interpolation method The weighting factor applied to the data depends on the distance of the point from the grid cell and is inversely proportional to the distance squared Consequently the greater the distance the data point is from the grid node the smaller the influence it has on the calculated value The Inverse Distance Squared method for interpolation may generate patterns similar to a bull s eye surrounding points of observations Selecting a larger number of nearest neighboring data points may smooth this effect but if the bull s eye pattern 1s undesirable then other methods of interpolation like Natural Neighbor and Kriging are recommended The Interpolator Options for the Inverse Distance Squared method is described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X_Nodes Number of grid nodes in the X direction Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data Restri
55. e Import Reports e Design and Preview Reports e Save Export and Print Reports In addition the Report Editor e Provides an easy to use Office like designer environment e Supports VBScript and JScript events and expressions e Provides Barcode control 133 e Allows report bookmarks and internet hyperlinks For more details please refer to Chapter 11 The Report Editor 9 BHLP Designer The Borehole Log Plot designer provides the tools for designing borehole logs plots for your station data The number of columns and their order of display is flexible and can be modified in an existing borehole log plot template or a brand new template can be created Borehole log plots can be created for one or more boreholes at once based on a desired borehole log plot design template Once the design is acceptable a borehole log report can be generated through the use of the Report Editor for one or multiple boreholes Information related to a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes e Lithology information for each formation e Description of the geologic formation e The depth and or elevation of each layer e Well construction details casing screens annular fill e Charts that display one or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc e and much more using Data Tables and Query Re
56. e In this dialog select the Excel version from the combo box e Press the Select Workbook button and the following dialog will appear Select Workbook Database Name Directories xs g Aodbctdata sources Cancel S CA E gt Program Files E gt Common Files Hp gt ODBC FR ead Onl E gt Data Sources 7 List Files of Type Drives Excel Files xls HBE c Network e From this dialog browse to the drive and directory that contains the source file Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 459 e Click OK to select this file e A confirmation dialog will appear listing the Excel format and filename as shown below ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup aix Vata soume Mame escrito B Ose Euren ect e Click OK to proceed Select Data Source Data Sources ooo MA DataSource ame passauen n e Select the DataSourceName that was created e Click OK to proceed 460 Appendices ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup Ei ES Mata Source Hame Mescrptiom Eenezl Database Help Version Excel 47 2000 Workbook DA Sample Stations xls Select Workbook Wee Curent Directory igo e Click OK again to proceed e The main Data Link Properties dialog will appear once more The connection string to the data source will now appear in the connection string field as shown below E Data Link Properties Ed Provider Connection Ad
57. folder button EN The next line is used to define the Client information this field is optional and is not required for this exercise Enter the Project Location Chapter 2 Getting Started type Waterloo Ontario Next specify the Soil Specification for the project The available soil settings include e USCS Unified Soil Classification System e USDA United States Department of Agriculture e DIN 4023 Deutsches Institut f r Normung e V e AH International Association of Hydrogeologists e Compton If these settings are not adequate a new Soil Specification can be easily created For more details on customizing the soil settings please refer to section 3 5 Material Specifications Editor in Chapter 3 DIN 4023 for this example There is an option to enter a Description of the project location at the bottom of this window not a required field Next define the Project Location Settings information such as the projection system and coordinate settings Under the Projection Type frame specify the coordinate system used for this project You may choose from the following list e Geographic e UTM e State Planar e Other For this sample project UTM Once the projection Type is selected choose the Projection from the combo box on the right side of the window The Units will be selected automatically based on the selected projection type e g UTM will use m State Planer will use feet etc NAD 1983 UT
58. from MS Access into HydroGeo Analyst and want to import existing reports as well The MS Access Importing wizard can be activated by clicking on the Import Access Report button on the Designer s toolbar The wizard guides you through a number of steps to import the desired report These steps are explained in the following sections The following figure depicts the first screen of the wizard that presents some introductory text This wizard assis t our Microsoft Access 2000 Reports t ists you in converting your o WHIReports 2 0 format The converted files can be loaded into WHIReports designer for further modifications Press the Next button to start Clicking on the Next button displays the second dialog requesting the MS Access database name that will be used as a source for the reports to be imported Provide the database name by clicking on the Open Database button to the right of the text box or Import Reports from MS Access 377 alternately type in the name including the full path B Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Datab E Source Database B Projects Demo_Project Report SampleReport mdb E p Open database Convert Finish Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish Click on the Next button to display the next dialog listing all reports that are available in the selected database Select the desired report and click on the Next button to proceed
59. or Model The process of drawing layers 1s described in the next section NOTE Each Cross Section has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 5 Profile Settings 9 4 Drawing Cross Section Interpretations Interpretation of the cross section is a considerably creative process however the cross section editor makes it easy for you Once the selected stations have been loaded into the cross section editor the appropriate layers must be manually drawn and interpreted Start the interpretation by selecting the layer type from the layer manager Choose from Geologic Hydrogeologic or Model Each of these is explained below Hydrogeologic interpretations can be copied from geologic interpretations As such it 1s a better practice to first perform geologic interpretations of the cross section 9 4 1 Geologic Layer Interpretations 296 This option allows for drawing interpretation layers that assist in defining the geology sand clay till bedrock etc at the site To draw Geologic interpretation layers the polygon draw tool must be used and the polygon must be digitized manually using the mouse Follow the directions below e Activate make it editable the Geology interpretation from the layer manager e Select the E MM Polygon button from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location of the first vertex of the intended
60. select from one of the following options Any Part of Field Find will attempt to locate any part of the search term in the existing records Whole Field Find will locate records which match the whole field only Start of Field Find will locate records that match the start of the field The More Less button can be used to create a simple or Advanced find The Advanced find provides additional Search options Beside Search select from Up Down or All The Match Case option will match the case records with the defined option To execute a Find e Enter a word or number in the Find What field e Select a grid column from the Look In combo box e Select a Match option e Specify a Search option default is Down e Click Find Next The first record matching this criteria will be selected and highlighted in the grid The ed Find button in the toolbar performs the same function The View menu provides options for changing the appearance of the HydroGeo Analyst window by showing hiding selected grid columns and showing hiding the interface components Project Browser Hides or displays the Project Browser Well Profile Displays the Well Profile Viewer The Well profile is a borehole log plot BHLP viewer integrated into the Station List grid Select any BHLP template that is created and select a station from the Station List The ff button in the toolbar performs the same function To hide the Well Profile Viewer re s
61. specify the project name project folder project location projection system units and specify the SCS soil settings for the project The project wizard works in a sequential fashion after defining the necessary inputs in each window press the Next gt button to proceed The Next gt button will only become active after the necessary fields have been defined Required fields are indicated by an asterisk The first window that appears is Step 1 Set Database Environment 2 1 1 Step 1 Set Database Environment 26 In the first step define the server and database settings for the new project HydroGeo Analyst uses Microsoft SQL Server 2000 or Microsoft Desktop Engine MSDE shipped with HydroGeo Analyst to host the project database Any MS SQL 2000 server that is currently installed on any computer on your network could be used as long as you have the appropriate access rights to it If you are working on a stand alone computer then the server would be the local computer using MSDE Once the server is selected select from an existing database on this server or create a new database In this example you will create the project on the local machine For details on building a connection string to a MS SQL Server on a network please refer to Chapter 4 Step 1 Set Database Environment on page 146 Select Server and Database Choose the Select Server and Database option Beside Server select your local machi
62. that contains a data series and select Edit General Settings The following dialog will appear General Series Settings xi Line Width fi gt Line Style Solid y I Label Visible JV Marker Visible Color Preview 10 8 6 4 2 Apply Close The following settings are available Line Width specify the line width Line Style select the line style Labels Visible show hide the data marker labels Markers Visible show hide the data markers Color specify the color for the line As you define the series options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series will appear using the selected settings 443 14 3 2 Style and Display Settings Settings such as Axis Line and Legend can be modified in the Settings tab as shown below settings Data Source Hame Flot 354 319 0 0 Ef Data Filter Active Yes Value 0 1 Title Background Color C Azure Legend Vertical Axis Horizontal Axis The following settings are available Common Name Enter the Plot name and optionally specify a Background color Size Specify the Height and Width for the plot Location Origin Specify the X Y origin for the plot The origin 0 0 is located in the upper left corner of the plot window Data Filter Set a data filter for the plot data this 1s useful when the plot contains a large number of data points and you want to filter out rep
63. vertical and horizontal you may define e Foreground Color e Background Color e Marker Width e Min Tic Pixels e Tic Numbers Description of Menu Items 287 288 Font Vertical Exaggeration Define the vertical exaggeration scaling factor for new cross sections There are two options Default value or User defined Specific If the default option is selected the map manager will automatically calculate and assign the most appropriate vertical exaggeration factor NOTE The vertical exaggeration can be defined only at the time when the cross section is created currently it is not possible to modify the vertical exaggeration later on once the cross section has been created Screen Water Levels Controls the appearance settings for how screens and water levels are displayed on the cross section These options are shown below Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen wLevel Intersecting Grid Screen Symba Water Level Symbo Gap between Wells a H pe H and Screen Pixel 1 eal Size 12 l Fill Color e Color o Fill Pattern ETA Has Outline Yes Outline Color a Outline Width f 5 Cancel H Help In this dialog there are options for the view settings color style etc for both the screen and the water levels The Gap between Well and Screen controls the distance between the station and where the screen is placed The larger this Gap value the further away the screen will be f
64. with only a few mouse clicks HydroGeo Analyst provides multiple methods of querying data out of your database through the Query Builder The Query Builder combines a set of tools for creating a range of simple to the most advanced queries for your projects All queries created can be saved for later use used to define Station Groups or used to filter data for reporting plotting charts and creating GIS maps 1 2 3 Data Visualization Interpretation of geologic and hydrogeologic data is made easy with the visualization modules that are provided in HydroGeo Analyst Using these tools raw data can be transformed into meaningful spatial data sets HydroGeo Analyst offers a collection of standard and custom modules for interpreting vast amounts of spatial data Some of these modules are briefly described in the following sections Map Manager The Map Manager built on ESRI s MapObjects technology provides a spatial view of any set of selected data Basemaps of the site can be quickly imported allowing for meaningful interpretation of borehole and well data The Map Manager is designed in such a way that most files required for a desired map view are generated automatically The Map Manager also provides a link to groundwater flow models such as Visual MODFLOW The true power of GIS is harnessed when it is used for spatial analysis of multiple data sets These spatial data sets can be combined to provide e Groundwater recharge flux ma
65. x Xe e Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields TOCE xceeds_320m y Expression E Description saton s T T 7 station name z name Station Name x Y TOC E qn ud F X J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system eS Conditions OTS Expression Expression depth to bedrock description_addins Geologic Description H Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampli En ocre x Source Condition Project bi Advanced Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 e Click once on the field and drag this field into the blank Conditions field under the Expression column The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the oP Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually OXRA Station Group Quern Data Query Design SQL View Preview Display Fields Select a Query TOC_Exceeds_320m y Expression station id id Description station x x Location station y y Y station name name Station Name ofp poe IV Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system station type total depth depth to bedrock description_addins
66. 1 and so forth If a criterion is specified based on a field with numeric data types it should be compared against values that have been converted to the destination field s unit This version of the DTS supports only one condition per field The condition should be provided through an operator lt gt or lt gt followed by the value for the condition For instance in the above example if importing data only for the station OW 1 is desired the condition should simply be stated as OW 1 Similarly if data for all stations except OW 1 are to be imported the criteria should be provided as lt gt OW 1 or OW 1 NOTE For the equals operator you must enter a double equal sign with no spaces ie The DTS understands the syntax described in the following table Bere A foe CO o Greater than or Equal to For numeric fields only Less than or equal to For numeric fields only Rules Spaces are allowed before and after the operators For example lt 10 Importing Data using the DTS 187 gt 10 10 note that the equal sign is two equal signs together with no spaces in between However spaces between operators is not allowed For example lt 10 is correct lt 10 1s not correct 40 is not correct there is a space between the two signs Those records not satisfying the import criterion will be highlighted in yellow under the preview window and a warning m
67. 1 description_addins gt Interpretation_Results layer_description Layer_Description X Interpretation Results Interpretation_Results layer y LayerName 3 Station ID Interpretation_Fesults top_elevation Top_elevation bd Station Name X Interpretation_Results thickness Thickness v x Interpretation_Fesults interpretation Interpretation X Y Layer Description Layer Name Xx Y Map and BHLP Ready IV Use current projection system Top elevation Thickness Conditions Interpretation Expression Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics y Source Condition Project y Advanced Close Help Table Display Name Interpretation Results Name in DB Interpretation _Results Rows 192 Time 0 0 0 47 The Interpretation Results table is read only and stores data from the cross section interpretations By default the following fields are included Station ID Station Name X using project coordinates Y using project coordinates Layer Name Layer Description Top Elevation Thickness Interpretation type Simply select the desired fields from the tree view and move these into the Display Fields or Conditions as required When you are finished Generate and Execute the query An example of the results is shown in the screenshot below 306 Chapter
68. 10 7 Printing the 3D Image To print the desired 3D view select File Print or click the Print button from the toolbar This will load the Report Manager where the 3D image may be placed into a Report template or printed as is For more details on modifying images in reports please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor Printing the 3D Image 345 346 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 11 The Report Editor The WHI Report Editor included with the HydroGeo Analyst package is used to create professional reports containing data and 2D and 3D views you have generated for your projects This chapter presents information on how to transfer stations grids query results maps cross sections borehole log plots and 3D views into a printable report format which can be printed or exported for convenient transfer to your colleagues and or clients The Report Editor provides the following features e Create and save Report Layout Templates e Create and Manage Reports e Import Reports e Design and Preview Reports e Save Export and Print Reports In addition the report editor e Provides an easy to use Office like designer environment e Supports VBScript and JScript events and expressions e Provides Barcode control e Allows report bookmarks and internet hyperlinks NOTE This chapter provides a brief overview of the features that the Report Editor offers For more details refer to the Active Reports on line help file T
69. 10 GB10 80 5616076993997 43 4751191676957 e mme Eoo R 12 GBI 80 561 4 43 481 1 i Aa r 13 GB13 80 557669897809 43 4781366586241 E AROR 14 GB14 80 5672792095427 43 4803200569183 Well History 15 GB15 80 5547642005825 43 4940015977549 43 4834671503069 43 4787262381 41 43 486065023726 43 4770928697195 43 4826569874823 43 4770928697195 Rows 65 Time 0 0 0 80 e Press the Save button to save the query e Press Close to return to the main HydroGeo Analyst window The new station group query will now appear as a new node under the Station Group node in the Project Browser The stations group query dynamic station group can be distinguished from a user defined station group static station group by a modified icon NOTE There are no options to modify the list of Display Fields for Station Group queries The default display fields are ID Name X Y Elevation and TOC In addition there are no advanced options for Station Group queries Ni Static BD Dynamic SOL Close Help Chapter 7 Queries 7 4 Managing Queries After queries have been created they may be easily modified saved or deleted within the Query Builder As mentioned previously once a query has been created it will appear in the appropriate node in the Project Browser 7 4 1 Editing To quickly load a Data Query into the Query Builder right click on an existing query in the Project Browser under the Quer
70. 129 Chance Sol ClassitiCatlons visits tn 129 UTI BN a o AA A tend sassncstaolsaseskcisaesseths 129 Major Components amaia nl ld 130 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc 4 Project Manacenen tas LOO User Access Level Management ii nia 135 PTO C PP ess asetea secaen ean nea senate oeaaio renee demesne ey 135 De OUTIL DOCUMEN Ornette neice E E 136 Manas me Users and Groups do A baactieece Uaaaa aac ties 136 LOU PHO PENES in 138 Application LevelODJECIS pierre seca heutactex A A S E EEEREN 140 Pro ece E ve rODJ EOIS ae E E E aero 140 User Properties 1 is E E N 142 SEE PASS WOLF S ccc sasissase tasty E tee atiue da ee teotueaudaseanuedaeose opesk nar euseaeacaunoan Uaodsae aaunouees 143 Exportuino PES D A a 144 Lsime the Project Manager AAN PP sosi dainka roaa aros rasada d orari iins 144 Eoadino the Project Wizard oian oA lies E EEO 145 Step Set Database Enviroment ii i n 146 Option Select Server and Database sunno toledo alicia masassemeaeaniraets 147 Ophion Build Conneccion A ias 148 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables cuss saline rent A 151 Selecting the Database Template for your project occccccnnnncncnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononononononnnannnnnnnnannno 152 Step 3 Set Project Properties and LOCO ia 153 Meoditymo Project Propere S ceceni E Made GMataWaisbuctiies 156 COMME CGV Yoe filo a lera tases cases pra ae eau vac o ieeoates 157 Miscellaneous ctas risene a T etica iodo io sa io 157 S Template VIAN AGED ser sssvws
71. 153 Select Template and Create Project Tables 151 Project Properties 105 Project Wizard Creating a New Project 145 Projection Type 156 Q Quality Control Data source 425 Example 430 Query Builder 197 About the Interface 197 Creating Queries 200 Duplicating Queries 213 Managing Queries 213 Query Types 199 R Recalling Queries 213 Record Sorting Options 111 Records Display on Map 111 Records Filtering and Selecting 110 Remove Stations from Cross Section 305 Reports Creating A Report Template 376 W Restore Database 118 Well Profile 108 Rotate Model X and Y 315 Rotate Screen X and Y 315 S Saving a Report 375 Setting a Report Template as Default Tem plate 377 Station Group Queries 200 Station Groups 90 Station Types 88 Stations Table 89 T Tabs 93 Station Data Tab 94 Station List Tab 93 Template Manager 7 159 About the Interface 160 Adding Tables 167 Background Information 159 Creating a copy of the current template 174 Deleting Tables 170 Importing Tables 169 Linked Fields 173 Managing Templates 174 Modifying Views and Settings 166 172 Saving a template as default 175 Table Property Settings 166 Toolbar Functionality 161 Three Dimensional Interpolation 114 U Uninstalling HydroGeo Analyst 12 User Access Managing Users and Groups 136 User Access Level Management 135 User Access Management Application Level Permissions 138 Project Level Objects 140 Set Passwords 143 V Volume Estimati
72. 1983 UTM Zone 17N meters y Ok Cancel H Help In this dialog there are options for editing the Projection System units and description e In the Name field a new name may be defined for the map project e In the Projection Type frame there will be a list of Projection Systems supported by Map Manager and stored in the Database For each Projection Type a Projection must be defined along with a corresponding Unit The default unit for each projection will be displayed e In the Description text box you may define a brief description of the project NOTE Projects in the Map Manager can use co ordinate systems that differ from those used for displaying stations in the main HGA window Chapter 8 Map Manager Print Loads the map view into the Report Editor where the report may be printed and or saved for later retrieval For more information please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor Exit Exit the Map Manager and return to HydroGeo Analyst 8 2 2 Layer A Map Layer is a set of points lines polygons or a raster image that have geographic coordinates attached to it A Map Layer may be imported into any Map Project New Provides options for creating a new map layer A new layer may be created as one of the following file types e ESRI Polygon Shape file shp e ESRI Line Shape file shp e ESRI Point Shape file shp e ESRI Text Shape file shp These are Annotation Layers meaning that they c
73. 2 1 Description of Toolbar Items The Template Manager provides two groups of toolbar items e The Template Toolbar Upper Toolbar consists of buttons that affect database templates as a whole e The Tables Fields Toolbar Lower Toolbar consists of buttons that affect the selected field table in the selected template Template Toolbar Global Template Options The buttons on the upper toolbar located at the top of the window immediately beside the list of Database templates contains buttons that allow copying an existing template saving changes made to the current template exporting the current template as a database structure template and deleting the current template The functions of the buttons are described below The Copy Template As button allows you to make a copy of the selected template Clicking on this button displays a dialog where a name for the new user template can be entered x The Delete Template button removes the current template from the collection of templates available for the project and loads the default template in its place Te The Save Template button saves all changes made to the current user template About the Interface 161 Profile Settings The Set Profile Settings button allows you to provide information that will be used for displaying well profiles BHLP in HydroGeo Analyst as well as the Map Manager and the Cross Section Editor Clicking on this button launches the window shown
74. 2 3 Check Blanks Settings A blank is a quality control sample used to detect and identify contaminants introduced to samples during the measurement process A laboratory blank is an analyte free matrix that is carried through all or part of the analytical process for identifying contamination introduced during analysis Types of laboratory blanks include method blanks carried through the entire preparation and analysis sequence calibration blanks matrix matched reagent water used for calibration and storage blanks placed in sample storage areas In the field an analyte free matrix is carried through a portion of the field process to identify contamination introduced during field or transportation operations Types of blanks associated with the field are trip blanks these accompany samples through the transportation process equipment rinsates collected after decontamination and field blanks collected on site during the sampling event Ideally analysis of the blank samples should return no detectable concentrations of any of the analytes i e concentrations are below the method detection limit MDL Define A New Lab Quality Template 429 Blank Settings Any concentration above the sample detection limit will be highlighted Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color e The detection limit for contaminants can be specified in HGA and must be added to your data query e Highlighting The options are
75. 450 Click OK when you are finished to display the new plot in the viewer window The next step 1s to map the fields 14 2 2 Field Mappings 440 Under the Data Source tab you can define the field mappings for the plot as shown in the screenshot below Settings Data Source Plot Grouping mi Series Grouping ur Time Value Units Label ND_factor Detection Limit Uncertainty Standards all Query select the data source for the plot from the combo box currently the data must come from data queries Chapter 14 Plotting Adding Plots Plot Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping plots Series Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping series at least one field must be selected for grouping the plot series Time Axis specify a field to be used for the Time X axis This should be the date field from your query Value Axis specify a field to be used for the Value Y axis This will be observed result value for the parameter s of interest Units loads the following dialog allowing you to make unit conversions Units x Unit category E Units sec y Unit conversion C None Constant Conversion Factor Factor Label From field YaxConversionFactor Ok Cancel Select the unit category then the units from this category If the units categories are not compatible for instance Time and Length then the buttons are disabled
76. 4812838 8 Append y BH14 535772 8 4814008 3 Append y BH15 534994 4 4814246 7 5 Append y BH16 536063 1 48139149 3 Append y BHI 536174 31 48134969 2 Append y BH18 535789 8 4814600 4 Append y BH19 536724 1 4814078 9 Append Y BH20 536746 69 48145075 CANE gt OK Cancel Help If the DTS finds one or more stations in destination with same name as in source they will be displayed and managed in this table All Stations in the Source table with conflicting names in destination will be listed in the left grid sorted alphabetically by station names The right grid displays all stations in the Destination in your project database whose names are the same as the station selected on the left Stations will be sorted by ID in ascending order In the right side of the table you can select only one station to match to the station selected on the left side The left grid will contains the column Operations that will display combo boxes for each row The combo boxes contain three options e Append Import the station as a new station in the destination table e Update Map the correct station ID in the destination table to a Station name in the source table e Reject Reject the station The DTS will not import rejected stations By default the operation will be set to Append i e duplicate stations will be imported as new Stations If Update is selected for a station on the left grid the right grid will d
77. 80 557 4207847193 activate the importing process 20 BH19 80 5459026870489 You can also select one or more records in 21 BH20 80 5455944457308 the preview table and exclude them from importing into your database lo 5 E Error i O Waming Y X lt Back Import Cancel B Help The data is checked against three conditions namely e Proper Station Locations in Lat Long format e Specified conditions for each field if any and e Data type compatibility The DTS converts station co ordinates into latitude longitude format and displays the converted values in the Preview frame Stations are converted and stored in the database in this format however the station co ordinates may be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in any projection system desired for this project stations will be displayed in NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17 N By default all data marked as erroneous will not be imported However all warnings are ignored by default One or more of these error messages can be selected and the data affected by those errors can either be rejected or accepted Erroneous records will not be accepted for importing unless the errors are fixed All values causing errors are highlighted in different colors Red represents rejected or erroneous records yellow represents a warning caution for the selected records Each of these problematic records can be selected and edited before it can be accepted for importing Once a record is ed
78. A Please ensure you have filled in the diameters for the drilling protocol table 476 Appendices INDEX A About the Interface 14 Adding Linked Fields 164 Advanced Data Query Options 208 B BackUp Database 118 BHLP Print to scale 398 Reorder Columns 419 Specify Data Source 415 Use Data Query 415 C Changing Soil Classifications 129 Charting 435 Connectivity 105 157 Create Contours 250 Gridded Data 251 Creating A Borehole Log Report 374 A Report Containing 3D Images 373 A Report Containing a Cross Section 373 A Report for Map Projects 372 Data Query 200 Material Specification 128 New Database Template 152 Reports based on a Data Query 370 Reports from a Data Grid 368 Station Group Query 210 Cross Section Adding Annotations 307 Cross Tab Queries 216 D Data Acquisition 6 Data Categories 91 Data Entry 93 Data Management 7 Data Queries 199 Data Transfer System DTS Exporting Data 193 Importing 179 Starting the DTS 177 Defining Table Relationships 170 Deleting a Report 374 Deleting a Report Template 377 Display Gridlines in Cross Section 290 Display Intersecting Cross Sections 289 DTS Import Order 185 DTS Import Build a Connection String 182 Data Transfer Package DTP 179 E Export 104 Export Grid 104 Export Model Layers 277 Export Quality Control Analysis Results 433 Exporting Data 193 F Fence diagrams 311 Field Database Settings 172 Field types 172 Files general 453 Find and
79. BH1 from the Station List then Station Data tab The Station Data tab provides the interface for viewing entering detailed data for an individual station There are several Data Categories available in HydroGeo Analyst Data Categories are provided to enable logical grouping of your tables A Data Category may be selected from the combo box at the top of the window or from the Station Data node in the project browser By default the Description data category will be displayed and the Location table will be activated for this station Selecting a new Data Category will display all the available tables and fields belonging to the selected category The following is a summary of the Data Categories included in HydroGeo Analyst along with some of the tables and fields Data Category Tables and Fields Description Station name world coordinates elevation TOC elevation Geologic Description Soil description e g from split spoon soil sampling and drilling Well Construction Well casing intervals packing depths drilling method etc Alteration Mineralization Structure Samples Down Hole Survey Down Hole Geophysics Geophysics Conditions Gamma Neutron 64 in E log 16 in E log Density Well History Well installation owner permit to take water decommissioning etc User Category User defined category which may contain any other data types not covered by the previous categories eg Surface Water Air Quality etc
80. Boreholes a a AirPhoto_Bw _gr bm 13 o A y 6 Hs a a Coarse 4 7 b PE Aa a ws xl BirPhoto_Color_gr b mp xl Water Courses xl Contour Lines xl Airports 1 xl Major Railroads xl Urban reas xl Trees xl 30 Grasslands Boulder xl Croplands xl Layer Informatio Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 44 535 162 4 813 762 1 10 359 From the top of the BHLP viewer select the template from the combo box These templates are defined in the main HG Analyst window under the Borehole Logs node For more information see Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter 8 2 6 Select This menu provides options for selecting or de selecting stations on the selected layer in the Map project Typically this involves stations from the HydroGeo Analyst project Once the station s data points are selected a red circle will appear on top of the station s symbol Stations may be selected on the map by e Clicking individually e Drawing a polygon box or circle all stations inside the object become selected e Drawing a line and defining a buffer distance all stations within the buffer distance become selected Multiple station selections may be accomplished with the use of the lt Ctrl gt key Simply press and hold down the Ctrl key after making the initial selection then use one of the tools to select or de select additional stations Desc
81. Color E Plot Line and Symbol options can be configured and the Depth Series can be shown hidden using the Visible checkbox The specific settings for the Interval sub node are shown in the following screenshot x E ES BHLP Interval Serie ES Lithology 7 Visible HE Well Construction i Scale Fill calor al ca Plat Trans eal parency 50 Fl Plot Area eal foie ES Interval Seri Apply OF Cancel The Interval Series can be shown hidden and the Fill color and Transparency can be set 12 3 Designing a Borehole Log Plot In HydroGeo Analyst only the borehole log plot templates are stored This 1s done so that the data for the plots will not be duplicated HydroGeo Analyst reads the necessary data for a borehole log plot from the database when displaying the plot To design a borehole log plot template select at least one borehole in the Station List grid Alternately activating a Station Group suffices for this purpose as all boreholes are assumed selected if there is no specific selection made in the grid 410 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Once a station group containing the desired boreholes is opened and at least one borehole is selected right click on the Borehole Logs node on the Project Browser Select the New pop up menu option as shown in the following screenshot to design a new template Due pes kan Ch Import Design Export Design Refresh e Refresh all In the New BHLP D
82. Column properties are divided into two groups The first group of properties is common to all columns and can be accessed by clicking on the main node for that column These properties include the Visible option and Header related settings The next group of properties can be accessed by clicking on the sub node of the column node This group of properties varies between column types and generally provides the controls through which data to be displayed on the column will be selected For our Lithology example select Lithology Entities from the tree as shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample an iol x Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 481 2036 33 347 00 348 00 ES Design ES Lithology Lithology O LithologyEntities Coarse Gravel Name DataT able Lithology TopEntit Medium en NW Sand Caption Top elevation Description DataField from BottomE ntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField to ImageEntity Caption Image Gravel Description Image DataField soil_type_image TextEntity Caption Text Description Text DataField soil_type Close Export Y Print Y Help In some cases the BHLP may not be able to identify the default data source for the selected column type and as a result there may not be a preview In this event you can Chapter 12 Boreho
83. Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Start or Select the report that you want to convert Database Employee Sales by Country Invoice Li st of available Products by Category s Reports Sales by Category reports 1n the Sales by Category Subreport Sales by Year selected database Sales by Year Subreport Sales Totals by Amount Summary of Sales by Quarter Summary of Sales by Year Options Convert Finish Cancel lt Back Next gt The dialog shown below will be displayed It allows you to specify some settings that will alter the converted report The default values are fine unless a change is desired 378 Chapter 11 The Report Editor E Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Start Database Fonts Charset Default ANSI Importing options Reports Comment Module Text JV Strip sourcecode typedecls handler prefixes Options Y Convert MSGraph Chart Controls Y Use ADO for Data Control instead of DAO Convert Finish Press the Next button to start converting selected reports Cancel lt Back Next gt Click on the Next button to start converting the report to the Report Editor s native format A dialog will appear displaying the progress of the report conversion Once conversion is completed the dialog displays the summary report as shown in the following figure E Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Acc
84. Current project O Existing group O New group lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 188 Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Projection Settings The DTS requires you to define the coordinate system the projection system and the units for the stations in the source file Following successful import the new stations will be converted to the projection system and units defined in the HydroGeo Analyst project A detailed description of the coordinate and projection systems available in HydroGeo Analyst is provided in Chapter 4 See Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location on page 153 NOTE It is important to know and select the correct project system during the import to prevent erroneous station co ordinates Coordinate Exclusion Filter The DTS also provides the option to indicate excluded coordinates Excluded coordinates could be coordinates used as place holders in the source file in cases where coordinates are unknown For example the value 9999 may be entered if the X or Y coordinate does not exist or is unknown If this is the case these coordinate values should be entered in the appropriate field In the screen shot shown above the value 9999 is entered for both X and Y coordinates In this case stations with these values will be excluded from the import These coordinates could also represent erroneous coordinates Add Stations to Group Another feature provided in the Settings tab of
85. Data Transter Pack ase DIP rai r 179 Select me Data SOUCO syran a AAEE 180 Data MappidS ends 183 Data Requirements sra IOalaS 184 TOP Order ii tae 185 Howto Map Files sardina id 185 A 187 impor Caterina a da 187 Station Related SOU GS mstaaiconlre id tii dni l 188 Pioc Uon Se O Sia 189 Coordinate Exclusi n PINETA aieo nea e en Eaa Eea Oan Sa GAE OENE EEE 189 Add SUAUIONS to ALOU P e a a A E 189 Data Validation Report and Finalizing the Import oooooonnnnnncnccnnonononocnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnos 191 Accepting or Rejecting Errors W AMNESIA 192 Accepting Or Rejecting Records cid Sos 192 Fimali zine the aporta in dio 192 ExXporting Data usine the DTS cervical 193 Specity Data S Outes and PACK Ace cosillas 194 Select Tablesto EXPO a o a 194 Unit COV CL SION a ecards E 194 Station Related SENS ar diia 195 JEQUETIOS nn 17 ADOUL the Interface isbn a aa E 197 Description OF ADA eses 199 Query Typs A O 199 Data illinois taadicaciidl 199 Station TOU QUES a oan ieteaenncgacnedscoaup gaan cane cone 200 Creatine Queries cerrara in ia 200 Data Query Example a a 200 Adding a field which contains a Linked List hae ch wren eas eas 206 Advanced Data Query Options ita 208 Station Group Querys EXample std dile 210 WEAN AGING COUECEIES aida 213 EXA is S T 213 AA o O In fdasaS cates tench fis tachliattissaaaislich dus 213 Recalling Queries in HydroGeo Analyst sssscccccccccsssssssscscccccccccccssssssssscccssssesess 213
86. EGO fines A a 454 SE UO ect ROO 454 TRS OOS E E E E E N rah aie ae eee eee ae 454 Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing ccsssseees 455 Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings ssscscssccsssssssssssscsscccsccssssesees 463 A etd eat esata tae somata taeinulta deme taco emesis 463 Natural INGTON DON alla 464 Io E aT E EEE EE 0 A 465 Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes ssccccssssssssssssscccccccccssssssssccccsccssssssseees 469 Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions FAQ S ccssccssssssssssssssscccccccesssssceees 471 AMA dia 471 Demo PO OC ae sca essa sates emesis ecasas E E A 471 A cesta a 471 Mapping and Cross Section Ed dio idi 472 A LO 473 ELE SN alt 473 Data Transter System CDS essas 474 SP o A II 475 INTIS A A O 475 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc Preface Waterloo Hydrogeologic has been developing groundwater software since 1989 and our software is recognized accepted and used by more than 10 000 groundwater professionals in over 90 different countries around the world This type of recognition is invaluable in establishing the credibility of your software to clients and regulatory agencies When you purchase HydroGeo Analyst or any Waterloo Hydrogeologic software product you not only get the best software in the industry you also gain the reputation of the company behind the product and professional technical support for the software from our
87. Explorer The following section describes how to interpolate 3D points data in order to create 3D plumes for details on viewing the plume see Chapter 10 Plumes Display Settings The 3D Plume generation starts with a data set the data set must be generated by building and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the 3D Interpolation The following are required fields for the 3D interpolation and as such must be fields that are present in your data query e X e Y e Z elevation of sampling point e Value concentration value for one or more contaminants e Sample Date if transient plume display is desired Once you have created a data query you may create a 3D Interpolated volume plume of the data To access the 3D Interpolation tools select Tools 3D Interpolation from the main menu and the following dialog will appear Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst 3D Interpolation E 10 x 30 Plume Project Hame tce_exceeds_1 0 mg_per_kg Grid Region A E of Nodes Min 535231 0 Max 535680 0 p 40 535231 D 535680 0 of Nodes Min 481 4385 0 Max 4874695 0 40 481 4385 0 481 4695 0 H of Nodes Min 302 00 Mas 324 00 lz 5 302 00 324 00 Interpolation method Inverse distance Advanced Settings interpolate log values Add Data Source Data Source Mame result
88. Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Conditions A ss pression ogogo MO hd either Ci imt Source Condition z Advanced Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 e Under the Conditions select an Operator for the field A combo box with several options will appear gt gt lt lt lt gt lt gt LIKE IS IS NOT amp For this example select gt e Enter a value in the second Expression field For this example type 320 202 Chapter 7 Queries Next add this field to the Display Fields To do so double click on the TOC field in the Project Tree and it will be added automatically as a new row in the Display Fields Or press the H Add button located below the Display Fields Then select the TOC field and drag this field into the blank field For each Display Field there are Aggregate sorting Functions Select from AVG COUNT MAX MIN STDEV STDDEVP SUM VAR VARP These functions are explained on page 209 Otherwise leave blank to apply no aggregate options For each Display Field Order options may be specified Select from ASC Ascending or DES Descending or none Once the fields have been added the Query Builder display should be similar to the one shown in the figure below 1
89. Help O7 xAklo gt Ge5 gt R45 x eqg0 e0n dep Jomajijamen A CrossSectionLine uopas s 013 contourmap Boreholes sample map gr bmp e o 4 ot oe Layer Information Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum DWGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 20 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N 535 583 4 813 217 h 23 184 Those Borehole stations that lie within the 400 m Buffer Distance will be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance is projected perpendicular to the cross section line 2 5 5 Creating the Cross Section Once the cross section line is defined the corresponding cross section can be created Tools gt Create Cross Section from the main menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button MH on the toolbar this button is located beside the Cross Section line button A confirmation dialog will appear Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to the cross section line will be used as the cross section name 76 Chapter 2 Getting Started The cross section editor opens the selected cross section and displays the stations and related information The cross section shows projections of the borehole s lithologic columns on the cross section plane By default the top of model layer 1 ground surface topography will be drawn in for you The Cross section window s
90. HydroGeo Analyst SampleProject D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects SampleProject NN Es oj x Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help a8 2 SR XBARORHS BOS AN i wf Station Groups af Station List EY Data Query Station Data 4 Project Data Category Station Data a EEE Select Station X m Y m Elevation m TOC m Queries J p BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 Maps poss Sections Lithology Hydrogeology Modeling features EE t Aiea Description Consister Structure i Borehole Logs 5 00 Coarse 4 coarse gravel X 5 00 10 00 Mediurr ss loamy sand X 10 00 30 00 Gravel 2 sandy gravel X is Station Groups ID 200621 name form_desc Description STRING Using the steps above enter lithology data for the remaining boreholes HINT First select the new station BH2 from the Select Station combo box above the grid or return to the Station List and select BH2 from the list then return to the Station Data tab BH2 DICTEN HINT Remember to save post the data before proceeding to the next station You will be prompted to save your data when switching between stations 1f the data has not already been posted Data Management 35 BH3 BH4 CON EM ESCENAS BHS HINT Remember to save post the data before proceeding to the next station
91. Load HGA Data for more details Querying the Database 59 e Cross section interpretation results see Chapter 9 Querying Cross Section Interpretations for more details e Quality Control Analysis see Chapter 13 Applying a Lab Quality Template for more details e BHLP columns see Chapter 12 Specify Data Source for more details e Crosstab reports see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries for more details e 3D plume projects see Chapter 3 3D Interpolation for more details e Charts see Chapter 14 Adding Plots for more details e Customized Reports see Chapter 11 Creating Reports based on a Data Query for more details 2 4 1 Example Querying the Database In this example you will create a data query that returns all stations that have soil chemistry exceedences for PCE Tetrachloroethylene Follow the directions below to build a simple query Tools gt Query Builder from the main menu or click on the de button from the toolbar The Query Builder window will load as shown below 7 Query Builder Y 5 x Xan e 3 Design i i C Station Group Query Data Query z SQL View Preview Select a Query m Display Fields Function Expression station id i Description station x at T station y y Geologic Description E station name El name Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event T Mining E xplorat
92. MAGS rta anaes sanatsstated eset warudausinansnaed a voce N 278 A 279 o a E TAA 279 id 279 PP setangaaconine E aaunsesecantesssiasnati beau extencemmaeancestnnarecetns 279 Delete FM estate cae oh eects a aetna ered ciaeO 279 Adde WC TLC A A II O care eases eased toa E 219 Delle Ve oa o area eran rere nape me aero 280 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc LUIS RARA A II A 280 REMOVE LINKS 2 A A AA AAA AAA Cara la aba 281 SOLES AUS lisis 281 Change Well VV 1G arica elote ias 283 CON o ds 283 A 283 FPOIEXtent anaimani ao 284 ZO O 284 Zoon A PR E a seas aden wang aaseaovadsasusasas macbeceosemeaecasterees 284 PREVIOUS EMO aaa laos 284 NE E o Se edueds tee tdce 284 O 284 TAO HO AO presto E E E E NETA AE 285 PEC VIC Wi A E sand eutdatal aga leeataonaceuaransnemenieadans 285 LOS geen tee eet renee ree mene ORT re Tene a a Se Te ee ern ere 286 OD ETON PR A tet 286 A A O 292 Model Laye iS 292 Update Crosso CCOR eaa a aes da in ds 294 Cross SECHON A A E ENE 294 Dep BHL E taco sda 294 Hdi 295 Contents nal i nci 295 Creating the Cross SECLUON suicidar daras iia 295 Drawing Cross Section Interpretations scccccccccsssssssssssccccccssssssssscsscccsssssssssceees 296 Geologic Layer Interpre tall ONS ido 296 GiGi IL ay Crs iii ds 298 Hydrogeologic Layer Interpretations srt ii 299 Translating Geologic Interpretations into Hydrogeologic Interpretations oooocooooooooccconnnnccccnnnnnnn 299 Moderar Terie aO doli 3
93. Navigation Panel The 3D Explorer interface consists of the following components e Display Window Displays the 3D image of the selected elements e Menu bar Provides menu commands for most of the functions e Toolbar Provides shortcut buttons for some functions e Display Tree A tree structured list of the available project elements e Display Settings Displays settings associated with each element e Navigation Panel Contains a set of navigation tools to control the position and orientation of the 3D image and adjust the light source location 10 2 Working with 3D Explorer 10 2 1 Positioning the Panels The Display Tree Panel and the Navigation Panel are both dockable panels which means they can be moved and or docked to another location on the interface or they 312 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer can be left as floating panels on your Windows desktop i e not docked to any location on the interface These panels can either be docked on the left side of the interface or on the bottom of the interface Moving a Panel To move a panel to another location position the cursor over the title bar Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the panel by moving the cursor to another location then release the mouse button to drop the panel at the new location Floating Panels Once a panel has been moved from the docked position to a floating position a Title Bar will appear at the top
94. Project title text The default is white e Text size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen 323 324 size By default this is 0 02 Text Frame e Visible shows hides the text frame e Line Color sets the color of the text frame e Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Time Label these settings are applicable when displaying time varying plumes Title field allows for modifying the time label Visible shows hides the time label Text color sets the color of the time label The default is white Text size sets the size of the time label text as a fraction of the total screen size By default this 1s 0 02 Text Frame e Visible shows hides the text frame e Line Color sets the color of the text frame e Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Visible shows hides the legend Title changes the legend title Text size changes the legend text size Text color changes the legend text color Frame allows to decide whether there is a frame around the legend Frame line color sets the legend frame line color Frame fill color sets the legend frame fill color Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 10 3 3 Axis Display Settings El Stay on top e The Axis display element controls the appearance of Default Settings FA YBx3D the lines and labels for the X Y and Z axes The axes E are primarily used to indicate the total dimensions a size of the 3D image and to orie
95. S a a E A 320 Display Stuns is A AA 321 DES o eo 321 Resets OUI ONS cl dac 323 LEO SOLIS TOS e oO 323 AXIS DISPLAY SENOS a a E E T ca 325 Sitemap Display SEMIN SS a A E A 325 Ss ttaces Display SENTS ii pia 326 mo A O T a Fumes Display Sena S st os 328 A N a A 329 OMOEA e r EE E E deaasadttasesnesces 331 Bonne Maps Aa E O A E land SA 333 The Color Pale ieena a a a a a A N 336 TTC E E Se EAN PEE EEE TA yaks dtu N RE sonic O E A E A al 338 Cross Section Data Display Setin S sa a 338 CTOSSS ECHOES r E A A 339 STAMOMS Display Sc CIN ci A E E E E 339 Layer Miter pretation S Clin gS anan a Sa 339 Creating Slices and Cross Sections ssssssssecceccccssssesccecocossssscecceccosssssceccecosssssseeeeessssss 340 Crearea Vera al o CO erno i E S 341 Cre ating a Horizontal SUCS aa a 342 Selectinmesa Cross Secuonal MS tai idos 342 Derino cid 343 Modiiyin a Sic sei vaaieee tanec erietube aed iat seta ce etekeee 343 Scene Configurations sasveciccesesesccssvissesccatanceenataensenevasceassdesuseseeansnenadsanscceveschaatsesnecssbannsens 343 Saving and Exporting Options ccccrrrrrsscecsccscsssecccsscscsssecsnssnsssescscccsessesssssssscssccnees 344 SAVE PrO CO aa A fer ares eee 345 Printino the 3D Mae id Raciaeseereicobesbuaavanistedescenens 345 11 The Report Editor 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000OIOIIOIOIIIAAAAA 347 ADOUC the Intertace cin 347 Report DESIGNER VV IMC OW iii 348 Report Designer Toolbar E
96. Section Editor Specifically this can be used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats Additionally base maps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for viewing geology and hydrogeology data The HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results using e 2D and 3D views of the grid e Bitmap overlays on surfaces Enhanced label positioning and controls e Light source position control e Transparent objects e Animation sequence pausing and looping e Auto rotate tools to continuously rotate the model image around the X Y Z axis e and much more For more details please refer to Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 8 Major Components Report Editor The Report Editor provides an interface to create reports and report templates containing a variety of data from a HydroGeo Analyst project The Report Editor included with the HydroGeo Analyst package 1s used to create professional reports containing data and or 2D and 3D views you have generated with your projects Reports can be printed or exported to conventional formats RTF PDF HTML etc The Report Editor provides the following features e Create and save Report Layout Templates e Create and Manage Reports
97. The Map node lists all map projects that are available created for the current HydroGeo Analyst project Double clicking on a map project under this node loads the Map Manager if not already loaded and opens the selected map project into the Map Manager About the Interface 21 Cross Sections The Cross Sections node lists all cross sectional views created using the Cross Section Editor Double clicking on a cross section launches the Cross Section Editor and loads the selected cross section Reports The Reporting component included with HydroGeo Analyst allows you to create as many reports as needed for your project and save the layouts for future report generation All the reports created for a selected project will be listed under the Reports node Double clicking on any of these report layouts will open a report template or a saved report By default the report will be displayed in print preview mode however it is a simple task to activate the report designer in order to modify the report layout See Chapter 11 for more details 3D Views The 3D Views node contains a list of available 3D views that have been created and saved for your project Double clicking on a 3D view loads the selected view into the HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Borehole Logs The Borehole Logs node contains a list of all Borehole Log Plot BHLP templates that have been created and saved for your project Double clicking on a Borehole Log loads the sele
98. These georeference points must be assigned as described below Adding Georeference Points To set the georeference point Click on the first map location where the world coordinates are known For this image the points for X1 Yl and X2 Y2 are marked with an on the map A Georeference point window will appear prompting for the X1 and Y1 world coordinates of the selected location Georeference point a Enter the following coordinates for this point X1 535122 e Y1 4812839 OK Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known This point 1s marked with an on the map as X2 Y2 in the upper right corner 68 Chapter 2 Getting Started Enter the following coordinates for this point X2 537252 Y2 4814712 OK The image 1s now georeferenced Next in order to use the full map window you must maximize the extents To do so Options gt Full Region in the Georeference Window the window should now appear similar to the figure shown below me DE 5 x File Options OK in the Select Region Window This will close the Georeference window OK in the File Attributes window OK in the Confirmation window stating the image was georeferenced successfully The Raster Image now appears as a new Map Layer in the Map Project However 1t will appear at the top of the Layer Control list and as a result
99. Ti 349 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc IVA Ti OO AAA A A A A 349 Display Sene S LOS a AA AA Ai 350 Eormattaino Tools asta esas 351 Genera Tools an 352 A eas ea ates ona emer a eau adaae cuted 354 Toolbox options Tor General TOOLS at dd diia 355 E e o E E E AE E S E S E ss eg E I E area T ssw aren T 355 A N E E E A A A EE 356 Check Mire AAA a a e a A sate sucoutaae 357 Eo e E EAE E E E E E TE EE A I E E N TT E S 357 Dolo isos 358 A A EA 358 iS E a teen ere ttcer Tenney Senet tert eee tv ene ter tre ete meee etre tee eee E terre cre 358 PG MINN in cca tec en an Sa onde cor cenedg E ecm ecg Gi bnatretiastdanan a guiaanasn Sal oui aiaa tana gtadaas 358 O A A E 358 Pate Break a asa 359 DEE A cia 359 Barcode encnseusossaaunncaratensaraboodes a Gada ulngas cecenteachieiun tales O 359 PRC UME IR CIOL ios 359 Lome the Report Deso NeT a A 360 a E R E Aa a a E N 360 Data Bields Explorer dada 361 Report Properties Toolbox aaa 361 Designer Advanced Controls and Settings cccccsssssssessssesseeseeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaess 362 Report Preview VV INGOW AAA AI 364 Report Viewer TOO DAES asa is 365 IN ANTE AMON OOl S eaa a uct aime a a a E 365 UA pO VEW aisn a E E T N 367 Savine REDONS as oi die tios 367 AS A o soadanaces betes ceuacanesaneicpsseceeaneuaseevensecnens 367 Creating Reports in HydroGeo Analyst Main Window cccccccccsssseseseeeeeececceeaeeeeseseeeees 368 Creatine Reports roma Data Grd
100. US E P A Region 5 Imperial These templates also include commonly used and customizable data queries and report templates Template Manager If your database needs cannot be satisfied through one of the database templates that are provided with HGA you may use the Template Manager to create and customize your own database structure The Template Manager is provided to handle such tasks as creating editing and importing database schemas for your project databases It provides a set of categories that allows organizing your database tables Existing database structures can also be imported using the Template Manager About HydroGeo Analyst 7 Customizable Lists and Standards HydroGeo Analyst comes with a List Editor tool that allows users to create and customize lists for any field allowing for rapid data entry Common examples of lists include e List of over 150 standard Soil Classifications with descriptions and patterns e List of common chemical names with their CAS numbers e Lab analysis test methods e Well drilling methods construction and casing materials e County and State Codes e Applicable standards for various purposes regions and agencies A List in HydroGeo Analyst is equivalent to either a physical or virtual look up table Data Querying and Filtering with the Query Builder Data querying is an important feature for any environmental database It provides the ability to easily locate desired information
101. You may also select a field to be used for the unit conversion or create constant conversion factor in this case enter the factor and an appropriate field The units conversion component implements full SI units including temperature electric current and luminous intensity Label select a field to be used for the symbol label The next two fields are used to control non detect results When the query returns null records for the result value the method detection limit if available and if selected can be displayed on the plot Optionally the method detection limit multiplied by the non detect factor ND_ Factor can be used instead of the method detection limit For example if an ND_Factor of 0 5 is provided and a column containing method detection limit values is provided then the plot will display the method Detection Limit DL value multiplied by 0 5 the ND_Factor If ND_Factor is left empty then the DL will be displayed ND_Factor specify a field that contains the factor for non detects Detection Limit select a field that contains the detection limit value 44 442 Uncertainty select a field that contains a value for the uncertainty for the plotted series This will plot uncertainty bars directly on the plot Multiplier select a field that contains a multiplier value use this to apply a multiplier factor to all result values on the plot Standard This option allows you to display water quality standards as a plo
102. a symbol can be selected and its properties set Point Style x Pattern A ld Font WHI_Symbol ka Symbol x Fil Boder EL o Sample x OF Cancel NOTE You will only be able to change the Font and Symbol of the point if the Pattern is set to True type The Label Properties dialog may be loaded by selecting the button the properties that are available are shown below Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Label Renderer Font Angle E Vertical Alignment Horizontal Aligment Left sia OF Cancel Change Well Width Provides options for increasing the display width of stations wells and boreholes plotted on the cross section Change Well Width a x DK Cancel H Help You can change well width as it appears on the screen by a factor displayed in the Current width drop down menu Using this factor you can make the wells thinner or thicker on the cross sectional display Copy Window Provides an option for copying the current cross section window to the Windows clipboard The window may then be pasted into a supporting application such as a document or image editor or slide presentation 9 2 3 View This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of the Cross Section Window Description of Menu Items 283 284 Full Extent This menu item will result in zooming out the cross section window to its original full extents
103. a button to save the crosstab report e Use the f button to print preview the report e Use the Ba button to export the report to an MS Excel file A dialog will appear where you can specify a directory and filename for the XLS file e Use the E button to export the report to an HTML file A dialog will appear where you can specify a directory and filename for the HTML file e Use the button to modify data markers for the data points See the section Field Display Settings on page 223 for more details The Crosstab results window provides flexible management of the columns and fields e Click on the button to expand the full results e Click on the button to collapse the view for an overview of the results e Using conventional drag and drop you can shift columns to the left or right or rows up or down or move fields from rows into columns or from columns into rows Crosstab Table Display Settings Additionally you may show hide data from the crosstab report using tools built into 222 Chapter 7 Queries the crosstab component Each data field that is displayed as a row or column includes this functionality Click on the J button beside the field and you will see options similar to those shown below chemical name E Trichloroethylene E Yinyl Chloride For each data field you will see the results returned In the example above the query returned two instances of chemical name but 1f the selected
104. above sea level or a benchmark Note When Queries are selected for the data source all Queries in your HGA project will be listed in the corresponding pull down menu DiataT able Queres Designing a Borehole Log Plot 415 Using a Query instead of a Data Table provides more flexibility in the type of information that can be added to a BHLP For more information on developing a Query to use in a BHLP please see Chapter 7 Queries Please be aware that not all queries will be appropriate for use in a BHLP and that in some cases e g Lithology a query cannot replace a data table As well queries cannot be used if images are to be added NOTE When a Query returns more than 1 record for a selected station e g time varying concentrations at a single borehole over various depths the BHLP will automatically use the first result value in the query If using another value is desired then the Data Query should be modified with the appropriate conditions 12 3 2 Add Well Construction Column Next add another column type to the BHLP by right clicking on the Design node and selecting Add Column In this example Well Construction has been added to produce the design shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample 3 E oj x Select Station X m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 3 Design 3 6 Lithology Lithology Well Construction ES LithologyEntities We ns
105. add a new renderer and the following dialog will appear with the available Renderer types Renderer Type i _ Typ Graduated Renderer f Value Renderer OF Cancel Label Renderer OK and the following dialog will appear Mapping the Data 71 Label Renderer Name Field Mame e Allow Duplicates Fant W Spline Text Sample Text e Flip OF Cancel type Label for the Name Name for the Field Name OK to close the Renderer type window OK again to close the Renderers window The stations will now be identified with the appropriate label 2 5 3 Creating a Contour Map Contour maps may be created to quickly visualize a measured result value soil or groundwater concentrations or elevations surface or water table data In this example you will create a contour map of the surface ground elevations Boreholes layer from the Layer Control list to ensure that the data layer is active If the layer is active it will appear with a baby blue background in the layer control ee Layer gt Create Contours from the Map Project main menu A Contours dialog will appear as shown in the following figure 72 Chapter 2 Getting Started Data to be Contoured Interpolator Settings Choose Field Interpolation Method Min Value 321 og Data Min 321 09 Natural Neighbours sd Advanced Settings Max Value faao 49 Data Max 340 49 Intervals Contour Line Sett
106. and the vertices will be linked e The Linked Vertex will turn orange to indicate that the vertex is linked and shared by two or more polygons or lines NOTE Link Vertices option is activated only if there are at least two objects on the layer Once two vertices are linked they behave as a single vertex 280 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Remove Links The Remove Links option allows for separating previously linked vertices To use this option e Select the interpretation layer containing at least two polygons or lines whose one or more vertices are linked e Make this layer editable e Click the Remove Links option from the Edit menu or click the E button from the toolbar e Click on one of the linked vertices in the selected polygon linked vertices are colored orange e Upon clicking on a linked vertex the vertex will change back to blue color to indicate that the link has been successfully removed e Click on the pointer button in the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor on this vertex which has been separated e Click once on this vertex and drag the mouse away from its position and place the polygon vertex in the new position if desired Set Features The Set Features option allows for modifying the display properties of most layers in your map project and other cross sections that intersect with the current cross section If this option is selected from the Edit menu a dialog similar to that shown below wil
107. appear gt gt lt lt lt gt gt lt LIKE IS IS NOT BETWEEN amp For this example gt greater than symbol from the combo box Next enter a value in the second Expression field For this example type 1 In addition add this field to the Display fields in the upper frame Click once on the result_value field and drag this field into the Display Fields frame Once the fields have been added the Query Builder display should be similar to the one shown in the figure below Chapter 2 Getting Started 7 Query Builder Xa e Station Group Query Data Query Design SQL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields PCE_exceedences Function Expression station id id Description station x x station y y station name name E Well Construction Geologic Description gt soil_chemistry chemical_name chemical_name Soil Testing gt soil_chemistry result_value gt result_value Y Soil Sampling soil_samples Soil Chemistry oP 4 Y Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system sys_sample_code Sample_name sample_date chemical_name Conditions Operator Expression soil_chemistry chemical_t Tetrachloroethylene soil_chemistry result_walu gt 1 result_unit conc_ppm fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_li
108. are shaded orange require a unit selection NOTE The units for station X Y co ordinates will be defined in Step 3 of the import routine Check the Use box beside the appropriate field to include this field for importing Repeat this for other fields until all necessary fields have been mapped to fields in the Destination table NOTE As a minimum one field in the source table must be mapped to the primary key field in the destination table The primary key field is shaded in green and is typically the first field in the destination table The primary key is the Station ID 1D Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS Some of the additional features and options available in the Data Mapping window are explained below Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Unit Conversion The DTS allows conversion of data from source units to the unit specified for each corresponding destination field If a destination field with a matching source field has a unit the DTS requires that a unit be selected for the source field before proceeding with the data import operation A unit can be selected from the list of units available for the specific unit category Importing Criteria The DTS allows specifying a simple criteria condition for each field that is selected to be imported The criteria will be used to filter the source data For example you can import data only for a specified station i e Elevation gt 300 or Name OW
109. as new data is entered for the stations The stations groups that are user defined are referred to as Static because they do not change unless the user makes the changes manually Follow the steps below to create a Station Group query e If the Query Builder is not yet loaded select the Query Builder option from the Tools menu e Select Station Group Query as the type e In the toolbar click on the New button 210 Chapter 7 Queries Creating Queries x Mame Description OF Cancel E Help In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the new query e g TOC Elevation Exceeds 325 m In the lower left corner of the Query window select the Source Conditions The options are Station Group Project and Database If Station Group is selected then the combo box below will become activated From here select the appropriate Station Group to query If Project is selected then all stations in the project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database Expand the tree on the left side of the window Locate the desired data category table and field For this example select the Description category then the Location table and locate the TOC field An example is shown below i o x xa A Station Group Query Data Query Dang SQL Views Preview Select a Query Display Fields TOCElevationexceeds325m Description H Location Funct
110. based on points data loaded from Station Groups or Data Queries created using the Query Builder You may define conditions for fields and highlight rows in the tables that violate the conditions To activate this feature first select a layer that contains points data i e a data query or a station group from the Layer Control When you select the Display Data option from the Layer menu the following dialog will appear Display Data X ei Samplel Table with YOC exceedencez dh x F i Data Settings Display Settinas Ok Cancel 53 Help 252 Chapter 8 Map Manager This dialog allows you to manage the various layouts for the map layer In the first column show hide the layout by setting the Visible status Define the Name in the second column In the third you may optionally enter a Description Click on the Add button to add a new table layout Click on the x Delete button to delete the selected layout Use the button to move the selected layout up Use the 1 button to move the selected layout down Next you must define the settings for the layout Click on the Data Settings button and the following dialog will appear Data Settings x Display Fielde Condition Layer Fields Display Fields resuilt_val sample_dat In the Data Settings dialog you select which Layer Fields from the layer should appear as Display Fields in the layout table as well as define the Display settings S
111. below that can be used to specify which tables and fields are to be used to obtain information related to geology and well construction details Define Well Profile Parameters Lithology Drilling Casing Screen Filling Hydrogeology Wi aber Level Pump Select table lithology r Soil Description Field zoil _type k Table description Field description o 7 pha Hote TEE Requires a depth interval dependent table with at least twa depth fields named from_ and to with type double one material specification field with type string i E This window contains several tabs e Lithology e Drilling e Casing e Screen e Filling e Hydrogeology e Water Levels e Pump For each category provide the table and the field that stores the patterns to be used in all the graphical displays For example in the Lithology tab select a table which contains the Lithology information for your project then select a field from this table which contains the Soil Description information The information provided in this window will be used when displaying profile diagrams in HydroGeo Analyst The 162 Chapter 5 Template Manager geological data and the corresponding patterns will also be displayed in the cross section editor and in the 3D Explorer Only tables with the following parameters can be displayed in this dialog Lithology Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from
112. component The following are required fields for the Lab Quality validation and as such must be fields that are present in your data query e Station ID located in the Station table e Sample ID also referred to as the Sys_sample_code this is typically found in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table e Batch Identifiers Samples that are prepared and or analyzed together with the same process and personnel using the same lot s of reagents within a specified time period should be assigned the same Batch ID Both the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch number which relates the samples to each other Detection Limit Method detection limit typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_Chemistry table e Parameter Name contains the parameter being analyzed typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_Chemistry table with the results Parameter Identification Information contains meta data about the parameter typically found in the same table as the parameter name e Parameter Values The measured or observed value for the selected chemical or parameter Typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_Chemistry Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis 425 table e Quality Code Identifiers Used to identify the sample type Typically found with the Sample ID in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table
113. current borehole log plot with a new name About the Interface 395 JP Add button adds a new group column or plot entities depending on the currently active node Columns may be a scale interval lithology plot well construction or other features x Delete button deletes the selected group column or plot series E Refresh button updates the design and displays the preview of the current borehole log plot for the selected borehole a Zoom in button allows you to select an interval to zoom in to and display a magnified portion of the BHLP Zoom out button returns to the original BHLP view 12 2 BHLP Columns 396 The borehole log plotter supports a number of column types that can be presented on a typical borehole log plot A borehole log plot in HydroGeo Analyst consists of a set of desired columns selected from the list of supported column types The plot does not save the data being displayed and as such avoids data duplication A borehole log plot is generated in real time using a BHLP template and data for the selected borehole s For each column displayed on the borehole log plot it is possible to e Specify the column type image text plot symbol scale as explained below e Select one or more fields of data to display in the column e Select the start and end depth for the data being displayed e Set the property of the column depending on the selected data type For example if a depth dependent graph is
114. default location for this file is C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server 80 Tools Binn sqlmangr exe A NWLink IPX SPX Protocol Disabled 1 Select Start Run 2 Type svrnetcn in the Run dialog box and OK 3 The NWLink IPX SPX protocol maybe disabled in the SQL Server Network Utility dialog box 4 If so highlight it and select Enable to enable this protocol then select OK 5 You will also have to stop and re start your SQL server for these changes to take effect A Windows Firewall for User Datagram Protocol UDP Port 1434 1 Click Start and then click Run 2 In the Run dialog box type Firewall cpl and then click OK 3 In the Windows Firewall dialog box click Add Port on the Exceptions tab 4 In the Port number box type 1434 and then click the UDP button 5 Type a name in the Name box for the port such as SQL Server UDP and then click OK 6 On the Exceptions tab you will see the new service To enable the port click to select the check box next to your new service and then click OK 15 5 4 Mapping and Cross Section Editor Q An error occurs when I try to create a new map project or cross section A Check the Profile Settings for your database structure Each Map and Cross Section requires a minimum set of fields with set field names Ensure that you have a field mapped to each of the required fields For more details see Profile Settings on page 162 472 Appendices Q I cannot create a
115. desired modifications The report editor allows you to either create a new report for the current cross section or add it to an existing one If you choose to add the current cross section to an existing report the report editor adds the new cross section to the report As such multiple cross sections can be sent to a report one by one In order to be able to add the current cross section to an existing report you must first open the existing report Each cross section is created with its associated legends and key map indicating the cross section location in plan view The cross section can be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime report designer As in the previous report types the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved 11 4 4 Creating a Report Containing 3D Images A report for your fence diagrams and 3D views can be created by following the directions below e Start the 3D Explorer and open a 3D project file 3XS or load a 3D project from the project browser in HG Analyst e Create the desired 3D view e Press the Print button je from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The Report Editor allows you to either create a new report for your current fence diagram or add
116. e The layer truly touches the well at only one location e g pinch out or e There is no contact with the well In either case the following options are available e Consider the actually intersecting point as the top elevation and insert NULL for both the thickness and bottom elevation e Extend the depth of the station fictitiously within the bounds of the cross section to determine the location of the other point These extensions are known as Soft Data Points If this point can not be found within the bound the layer will be considered to be a zero thickness layer with thickness of NULL Save All Contacts Some stations may be crossed by a layer but may not be involved in the interpretation Description of Menu Items 291 e g bad wells or data in those wells did not make sense etc and as such the following options are available e Consider all intersection points as valid contacts this is the option Save All Contacts e Only store contacts where there are vertices within the well e g user snapped to intervals or clicked within a well and created a vertex To do this disable the option Save All Contacts Limitations Although the cross section component currently allows creating complex overlapping Zig zagging interpretations these types of interpretations are not suitable for the purpose of saving and later querying in the database As such the following rules limitations are enforced to avoid saving such res
117. following figure Borehole Log Designer bhlp1 Select Station X m Y m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 ii 1O x Elevation m TOC m 347 00 348 00 Design Lithology Lithology Well Construction 65 Well Construction 6 Scale Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Gravel bO pO Close Export Y Print Y Help This BHLP template contains a pre defined structure with Lithology Well Construction and Scaling information The BHLP Report may be exported to an XML file printed directly or saved in several formats including HTM PDF XLS etc For more details please see Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter To proceed with this exercise Close button to close the BHLP window 2 4 Querying the Database Once the data has been successfully entered into the project the Query Builder may be used to run queries on the station data Queries provide the ability to search and find a specific set of data or stations quickly and easily Some examples of this application include e Finding stations located in a specific area of your site search by X Y location e Searching Monitoring event data for groundwater chemistry samples which exceed a guideline level e Finding all wells which exceed a specified depth In addition using the Query Builder you can create Data Queries that provide the data sources for e Map Layers see Chapter 8
118. have a meaningful view of your cross sections in the 3D Explorer you must avoid creating overlapping interpretation layers When defining Geologic interpretation layers there is an option to snap the vertices of one polygon to adjacent polygons For instance if after drawing polygons and the cross section still contains gaps the gaps may be filled in by linking the vertices of the polygons using the Link Vertex option To use this option please refer to the Link Vertex section on page 280 in the Edit menu Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor NOTE Moving a vertex of a selected polygon will also move the linked vertex of any polygons or lines that might have been linked through the Link Vertices operation 9 4 2 Hydrogeologic Layer Interpretations This option allows for drawing layers that define the hydrogeologic layers Aquiferl Aquitard1 Upper Unconfined Aquifer etc based on relevant data in the stations that are displayed in a cross section The hydrogelogic layers must be drawn using the polygon tool The procedure for drawing and editing these layers is identical to drawing geologic layers as explained above The position of the hydrogeologic interpretation layers may be defined based on the position of any Geological interpretations that may already be available This option is discussed below Translating Geologic Interpretations into Hydrogeologic Interpretations A hydrostratigraphic unit will general
119. highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning Press the Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the Query The results of this query are shown in the window below FS Query Builder He E 5 x XH Bw Station Group Quer Data Query Design SQL View Preview Select a Query SELECT t0 id tO name t0 x t0 y tO elevation t0 toc FROM Station 4S t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON t0 1D PStation SID WHERE tO toc gt 325 AND PStation ID 1 Toc Exceeds 325m y E Description Location Station Name x Y Elevation A ED yyy yy TOC 1 GB01 80 5575956823942 43 4749200273619 tag 2 GB02 80 5658716930292 43 4744943279344 total depth 3 GB03 80 5481372487996 43 4770413777749 type E description_addins Source Condition Project G 4 GBO4 5 GB05 6 GB06 16 GB16 17 GB17 18 GB18 19 GB19 20 GB20 21 GB21 80 5689553863083 80 5596308869504 80 5537873728565 80 5574207847192 80 5459026865231 80 5595532076244 80 5613609731897 80 559577967353 80 5613609731897 43 4777916718678 43 4753708962492 43 4816548678084 Geologic Description 7 GB07 80 5496881242797 43 4750729468892 Well Construction 8 GB08 80 5691957577891 43 4751443684377 H Soil Testing 9 GB09 80 5575320604261 43 4821142327003 Soil Sampling
120. ida 368 Creating Reports based on a Data Query a rai 370 Creating Parameter Query REDONS rated 370 Creatine a Report Contains a Map Project Asad E rine 372 Creating a Report Containing a Cross Section ococccccnccccnnonnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnonananinonos 373 Creating a Report Contamine 3D Images o 373 Creatine a Borehole Log RE DOr usa 374 Parameter Query REDONS enano a a eae ei ihe S 374 METE ase E E 374 Openins an Exastine Repo sramio se ae a a a a ae E 374 Pelens a REDON ri ia 374 A A A E S AAEE S 375 SAVING a R PO AS SEA a la biela 375 Exportineo Generated reports ies 315 Creating and Managing Report Templates sssccccsssssssssssssssccccccccsccssssssssccosees 376 Creatins A Report Template idad 376 Opentiie a Report Templates rest o cada iao cda ias 376 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc Deleted Report Templit ii 377 Setting a Report Template as Default Template occcccccnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnononananonos 377 Import Reports from MS ACCESS esssssseceecocccssssceecocccsssseccecoccsssssccsecoocosssssceceosssssssseee 377 Creating Reports with Charts iii EE EE Oa AE ERAEN ERES 379 EXAMPLE ara E a T EAOa 380 12 Borehole Log Plotter citada J99 About the Interfate sr ideada 394 Description of Designer Toolbar TEMS its 395 BEEP OMIM ria aio 396 Supporicd Column TYPES usas lisis 397 BALPDS aus US arta di cad 397 Vertical Cale olini ii lacas 398 SONES cedi 399 Depth
121. in each step of the procedure Specify a data transter package Package name Description I Save changes to this DTS package A new data transfer package can also be created in which case all information provided to the DTS during a specific data transfer operation will be saved to the package once the transfer operation is completed successfully Select the Data Source Once a data package is selected or created the data source can be defined The format of the source file must be Records as Rows which means each new record must be in a new row in addition 1f the file contains Header information the Header must be in the first row If the source format 1s a database then in most cases these requirements will be satisfied However 1f Excel or Text formats are used ensure that the necessary formatting is completed before using the DTS A few examples are shown below The following example demonstrates an Excel file containing station location data note the format records as rows and the header information in the first row Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System 1 GBO1 536012 4613630 333 5 3345 1 2 a 2 B02 535956 7 4613650 336 337 4 3 GB03 535679 7 4613670 336 337 5 4 GB04 535753 7 4013620 doe dad E 4 5605 535645 7 4613660 334 335 El E 5606 535543 7 401360 340 5 341 5 5 7 GEO 535452 7 4613630 345 344 g a Bobo 535295 7 4613640 339 5 340 5 10 4 5609 535166 7 4613660 339 5 340 5 11 10 6610 5350
122. in much the similar way Choose Bar Chart from the Layer Create Thematic Map menu and choose which fields you wish to map The following dialogue will allow you to choose colors for the bars representing different fields as well as the max height and width of the bars ELEVATION Height TOC Paints 30 width 2d Points Preview Back OF Cancel Modify Thematic Map Provides options for modifying the properties of an existing Pie or Bar chart Thematic Map Ed F W Bar Chart Delete Cancel Select the map you wish to edit by clicking on the check box beside the name you entered for that map and click Modify The same Bar Chart dialogue will appear allowing you to go through the procedure again and change various aspects of the chart Description of Menu Items 249 Create Contours Provides options for creating a contour line layer with data from a selected field Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear Data to be Contoured Interpolator Settings Choose Field ELEVATION Interpolation Method Min Value 321 09 Data Min 321 09 Natural Neighbours X Advanced Settings Max Value 340 49 Data Max 340 49 Intervals RETIRO Contour Line Settings Contour Interval Contour Line Style C Number of Intervals as E a Y Label Renderer Sample Text Additional Custom Intervals Decimal Places la P x Create Cancel EJ Help
123. information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 The Interpolator Options window for the Kriging method is shown in the following figure while each of the settings parameters is described below EE Interpolator Options AestictMaxValue leal Max gt Min binning imit 1 0829 hel ex tiimming limit fe 29 Block size along 2 in ponts for block kriging E Dt Use Log Interpolation 1 Aestict Min Value Value Min Value Max Ponts per Block aang Block size along Y hian points for block kriging 47 bas radit Mim adus 3 West radius 21 0 0 Angel 0 Angle Anglia Ordinary kriging hal 0 il Eslimate yvanabe SE Mean Vatiable Tiend estimate Nugget constar 02 A Use Vanograms AMi Least easting oe Start X End X X_Nodes Start Y End Y Y Nodes Use Log Interpolation Restrict Min Value Restrict Max Value Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid Number of grid nodes in the X direction Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Flag to interpolate the log values of the data Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interp
124. is visible the second check mark indicates the layer is editable in edit mode Map Project Sample_ File Edit View Tools Help SS TESSA SR ES Ya gt OXi Model Topography voysas sso01 Ae tology OM C HydroGeology o LO om o LO mo D lus D ur om Oo CN m o _ mo o TO Em al al EN uy 0 o rm N o LO o LO D Oo ae N B34 034 4 Afh zos 1000 1500 e 3500 4000 a a ia 1949 43 282 32 Choose the Polygon button from the toolbar Place the mouse cursor near the top left corner of the map near 340 m on the y axis 78 Chapter 2 Getting Started Click once on the left mouse button to add a vertex and start digitizing the polygon in the desired direction Add more vertices by clicking on the left mouse button at desired locations Move the mouse cursor to an interval on a desired station the mouse cursor will snap the vertex of the polygon to the nearest station interval A vertex can also be added anywhere on the cross section by clicking on the left mouse button HINT When drawing interpretation polygons use the soil patterns displayed in the boreholes as a guideline for the layer location however since it is a interpretation it does not need to exactly match up with the interval locations se Double click anywhere on the cross section using the left mouse b
125. it Lab Quality xj Lab Quality Templates Template Description E Y First Test Relative Percent Difference lt 20 e Check Duplicates Coefficient of Variation lt 10 CJ Check Spikes Ed O Check Blanks Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than 20 Coefficient of variation less than 10 Highlighting Font _ Background Color _ Background Color Border Color Color Add Remove Help Apply OF Cancel re The Template Description field is filled in by default with a verbal description of the Settings used for the template You can modify the Template Description with any text you would like to use by simply typing over the existing text Each Check type has its own Settings which can be adjusted by clicking on the Check type to highlight it The Settings will then appear to the right Settings for each Check type are described in the following sections 13 2 1 Check Duplicates Settings A field duplicate is a QC sample which is used to determine the precision associated with all or part of the sample collection and measurement process Field duplicates are two independent samples which are collected as nearly as possible from the same point in space and time The two field duplicate samples are collected from the same source using the same type of sampling equipment Ideally analyte concentrations in the duplicate sample should be identical or very close to the orig
126. it will be setup as the default database server This will allow your local computer to act as a server for new projects The MSDE 2000 is a data engine built and based on core MS SQL Server technology If you are working on a stand alone computer then the MS SQL server would be your computer and the server name would be the name of your computer as it appears in your General System Properties followed by the abbreviation WHP For example if your computer s name is John the MS SQL Server name would be John WHI Once the server is selected select from an existing database on this server or create a new database HydroGeo Analyst allows you to 1 Select from a list of known servers and create select a database OR 2 Build a Connection String to an existing database on a server NOTE The current version of HydroGeo Analyst supports MS SQL Server 2000 and later other SQL Servers such as Oracle DB2 Sybase Terradata etc are not supported The current supported language is T SQL SQL 92 standard other dialects such as SQL 99 PL SQL Watcom SQL are not supported Chapter 4 Project Manager Any existing database which satisfies a few basic requirements can be selected for your project These requirements mainly have to do with tables and or fields with reserved names For example selecting a database that has a table named Station will not be accepted by HydroGeo Analyst unless this table satisfies t
127. ito 242 EE S E A EO A A 243 Renderer vais ic aa TO 243 Create Themate Map tinto erosiones lona ao 247 Modify Thematic Mato dean 249 A PPP O abasapiaseaedeantesiauatinsoatanaaees 250 Create Gridded Data aan 251 A A A a nae ere Tenn er CO 232 Ei APA O on A A A es Rada eA 258 A A O a a aalbel aac Seana aa cldaciers secre E asa salstios con aera tsa ynes 258 PY i RE EE ea dnc E T ate cad beta oa cate peepee T E E E 258 PAS 6G atria uses ES A E I E E caver duane akon Gen sas A E ual AS N T A 259 BII R E E E E O E E E E A AE E E EN E E A 259 Dele AM a a a E O ocaeO 259 PN We O a e e Cae tetas Sac vow thas taassndaa tausaaaeaae ae tuame ea tameam toate 259 Delete Vente dos 259 Copy Map 0p DO aE cai dd 260 OOS ssetcs ast ceioaan ch oaig adn aileah ee seaseto as dassciante suas uaaheac da iben taasan Matias hisesdsaAeasachedstadsosttest 260 A O A A A tawetca den sanmaatanetees 260 A Sc aan aca reentrant la a were an Mec an E 260 A O E EA E E E E haat oleh A ETA A O A 260 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc NA I CIN ee NEY oR HES AOI MMR INC a OUTDO TSO WEEN CRE EN ET SR DC RETR ONC TORI RE IE A Tn oe ee 260 A A ote EA T OA 261 PFOA LIONS OT 261 ISAS ES area ASEE EEEE ae had Ti Stas A AE A IO 261 Define Cross SCHON Line eraser e a a ae ees ebecauls E Sie 262 Di Br S La O 262 e e e a eee a es a ht ee LAO 263 FONE A A IS A A A E ER ee 263 ENS A O IS A AA O 263 LO daa Re ied Nee a e ds neral e e eo OO 263 LOMO ACUSE LAYER ea coo cada ns 263
128. line Visible Shows hides the axis on the plot Log scale Plots the axis values using a logarithmic scale Max value Controls the maximum value for the axis By default this value will be calculated from the selected data set Min value Controls the minimum value for the axis By default this value will be calculated from the selected data set Auto max value Restores the default automatic maximum value which 1s calculated from the selected data set Auto min value Restores the default automatic minimum value which is calculated from the selected data set Grid Visible Shows hides gridlines on the plot Style Controls the grid line style select from Solid Dash Dot DashDot or DashDotDot 445 Title Text Sets the title for the axis Visible Shows hides the axis title Angle Controls the angle for the axis title for the Y axis it may be useful to have the angle set at 90 degrees Font Controls the font for the axis title Tick Label Format Controls the decimal format for the labeled tics enter 00 to display 2 decimal places to display no decimal places simply enter 0 Angle Controls the angle for the tick labels for date labels 1t may be useful to select an angle of 45 or 90 degrees for improved display Font Controls the font for the tick labels Horizontal X Axis The Settings for the X Axis are identical to the Y axis with the following exceptions e Log Scale is not available e Min and Max
129. list can be shortened by turning off all unnecessary groups of chemicals e Enter a Description for the list item if necessary e Repeat these steps to add additional list items until the desired list is created e Click the button to save the list e Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager on page 126 for more details Generating Lists List items may also be generated using existing data The data could be an existing value in the current database for the selected field or could be a list from an external source To extract all existing unique entries from the current database for the selected field e Using the procedure described above load the List Editor and select the appropriate table and field for the list e Click on the B Import from current database button at the bottom of the window The List Editor extracts all unique entries that have already been entered if any into the current database under the selected field Once this is completed a verification dialog will appear displaying the number of entries returned for this field e Click Yes to import these values to the list e Edit the list as desired by adding or removing items e Click the button to save the list e Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field Se
130. may be grouped together In HGA objects are sorted in two groups e Application Level e Project Level Simply place a check mark in the appropriate access levels for each object or use the Select All option to enable full privileges for all objects By default the Administrator User Group will have full access to all objects and the ALSD NOTE The level of access to an object are defined on a user group level and not for each individual user User Access Level Management 139 Application Level Objects The Administrator may control user access to the following application level objects e Databases e Projects e User Access Level Application Level Objects can only be modified when HGA is running and NO project is opened The Group Properties for Application Level Objects are shown below Group Properties Marne Test Description Enter description here Creation Date 2005 11 21 09 40 37 Privileges Database Project User Access Level OF Cancel Databases you may assign rights for Manage which allows deleting databases and projects Project you may assign rights for Creating Projects User Access Level you may assign rights for Managing user access levels Users with this privilege will be able to modify the Project Level objects when a project is opened Project Level Objects Settings for Project Level objects can only be defined when the project is opened The Group Properties for Projec
131. object is selected Add Vertex button allows a vertex to be added to the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature is active only when an applicable object type is selected 229 230 Delete Vertex button allows a vertex to be deleted from the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature is active only when an applicable object type is selected Zoom In button allows zooming in on the map window Draw a rectangle in any direction around the area you wish to zoom in to Zoom Out button allows zooming out from the map window Pan button allows panning the current map view left right up or down Full Extent button restores the map view to the full extent of the map s coordinates Previous Extent button allows restoring the map view to the previous zoom extent Next Extent button advances the map view to the next zoom extent Select Single button allows individual objects such as stations to be selected This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select In Rectangle button allows selecting all stations within a rectangle that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Chapter 8 Map Manager i y j k About the Interface Select In Polygon button allows selecting all stati
132. of the line and click once with the left mouse button e Click again at another location to add a vertex to the line You may add one or more vertices that define the cross section line e At the end point of the line double click the left mouse button to finish This will launch the dialog shown below CrossSection Line ES Name ae Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here DE Cancel e For each cross section line specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section stations which lie within the buffer distance will all be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance 1s projected out perpendicular to the cross section line Click OK to accept the Line attributes If necessary selected stations can be deselected by clicking on each of them while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key If necessary extra stations may be added to the selection by clicking on one or more stations while holding down lt Ctrl gt key NOTE Once a cross section line has been created stations can still be added to or deleted from the line by selecting the line then right clicking and choosing the Add Remove Stations option Stations can then be added removed by clicking on them The cross section can then be created as follows e Select Tools gt Create Cross
133. on contour maps or to place labels on stations or any other object Select the desired type and click OK For each Renderer type there is a corresponding settings dialog which is launched automatically when you create a new renderer this can also be loaded by selecting the Edit button after selecting the renderer you wish to change Graduated Renderer Graduated Renderer allows you to graphically display station data according to their specific interval of values You have the option of specifying the color scheme and or the symbol that represents the station To use the Graduated Renderer select Renderer from the Layer menu click the op Add button and choose Graduated renderer from the available list The following dialogue will allow you to compose a set of symbols for different value intervals Chapter 8 Map Manager Mame Enter renderer name herel Field Name ELEVATION Classify Min 332 0000 Max 346 0000 o 334 8 332 334 8 C 337 6 334 8 337 6 C 340 4 337 6 340 4 D 343 2 340 4 343 2 o 346 343 2 346 Fx vo Rame OF Cancel Enter the Name for the renderer and choose the Field based on the values from which you want to classify your data Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals Clicking on the symbol beside each interval will load the standard
134. on core SQL Server technology Once the installation is completed a shortcut icon will be placed on the desktop You will be prompted to re boot your computer for the system changes to take effect this is necessary only if the WHI instance of MSDE 1s installed 1 3 3 Uninstalling HydroGeo Analyst 12 There may be instances where you will need to uninstall remove HydroGeo Analyst from your system e g if the software is to be transferred to another computer or if you need to reinstall it on the current computer Before uninstalling the HydroGeo Analyst software package from your system we strongly recommend you to make backup copies of all your HydroGeo Analyst projects Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst and databases These include your entire HGA project folder and all its contents Simply copy the Project directory and its contents to another directory If you are also uninstalling the MSDE component make sure to also back up the SQL Server database s For more details see BackUp Database on page 118 To uninstall HydroGeo Analyst e Locate the Add Remove Programs option in your Windows Control Panel e Select HydroGeo Analyst as the program to be removed e Follow the on screen instructions e Once you are finished re boot your system to ensure all system files are updated 1 3 4 Starting HydroGeo Analyst To launch HydroGeo Analyst double click on the desktop icon as shown in the figure on t
135. or hides the labels Text color controls the color of the label Text size controls the size of the labels Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value Multiple Labels enables showing multiple labels on the line Distance sets the distance value between each label smaller distance values will result in more labels Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label The labels are plotted on the top and bottom surface of a flat 3D rectangular box The size of the box will be automatically adjusted to fit the text size but the Box color and Box depth can be customized The Color Palette The color Palette is used to customize the range of colors used to represent the values of selected model elements for each display object this includes the color maps isolines and isosurfaces The color Palette settings will govern the color scaling used on each display object The color Palette settings can be modified by selecting one of Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Display Settings the display elements and clicking the button in the Palette field of the Display Settings table The Palette window will appear as shown in the figure below 4 Palette iq xj 0 Value 399574 5 TN Heset Change color E a eo el a a OF Cancel The default color setting contains a gradation of seven colors ranging from a dark blue at the minimum value to a dark red at the maximum value This r
136. or moved to another location The explorer lists at least three nodes under the MainReport node namely e PageHeader refers to the page header for the current report e Detail refers to the section that hosts the details of the report e PageFooter refers to the page footer for the current report Any item placed on the page header and footer of your report will be displayed on all Chapter 11 The Report Editor pages of the report In addition to these sections one or more sections named Group Headers and a corresponding Group Footer sections can be added to the report In the figure depicted above the data on the report is grouped by stations That is the data for each station is displayed together Group Headers can have their own header and footer that will be displayed above and below each group s data respectively Data Fields Explorer For most report types the Report Editor takes data directly from the database based on the design and generates the desired report Access to the data in the database 1s provided through the connection string and SQL Statement These inputs result in a list of fields that are available for the current report These fields are listed in the Fields Explorer as shown below that can be displayed by clicking on the Fields icon on the toolbar Refresh the fields list List of available fields chemical_name sample_date result value result cri One or more fields in the fields explo
137. project should be open in order to update information from intersecting cross sections Cross Section Info Displays summary info for the selected cross section Information for DD a i X Cros Section Line Length 1513 1 m Butter 200 0 m Starting Point Coord 536467 48174824 Ending Point Coord 536598 4813316 Vertical Exaggeration 23 8 Well Numbers 2 E Help Display BHLP Use this feature to display a borehole log plot directly on the selected cross section when displaying elements such as geophysical plots and well screen intervals the borehole log plot can be a valuable asset when creating a cross section interpretation The BHLP layout settings 1s shown below 294 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor x BHLP Template BHLPT Please choose wells that pon want to show with BHLP M Visible Horizontal Offset 0 Image Width e0 OF Cancel In the BHLP Layout Settings dialog there are several display options available BHLP Template select the desired BHLP template from the list e Visible show hide the BHLP on the cross section e Horizontal Offset set the horizontal position of the BHLP a positive offset will shift the BHLP to the right of the selected well a negative offset will shift the BHLP to the left of the selected well e Image Width set the width of the BHLP image In the grid in the middle of the dialog select which stations should display the BHLP on the cross s
138. pull down menu For an Interval Plot column you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select the format you wish to use then select the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the TopEntity select the from field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the BottomEntity select the to field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the field containing the values you want to plot from the pull down menu Once you have entered all required information click the Refresh button to see the data on the plot column An example is shown in the following screenshot Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Borehole Log Designer sample E de loj xj Select Station m m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 53621269 4871 4030 00 323 50 324 50 E ES Design H E Lithology Lithology Well Construction H E Well Construction ES Plot Coarse 0 Gravel El AAN p A E A 0 Medium Sand 20 Gravel Pi Hame Value Je 100 E Close Expat Pint Y EH Help 12 3 4 Re order BHLP Columns If you have added several columns to your borehole log plot and you would like to change the order in which they appear you can simply click on one of the sub nodes under the Design node in the tree to highlight it then click and drag the folder to a new position i
139. see that the display fields show only the ID Name X and Y If desired additional fields may be added to the display fields using the steps listed above The query may now be accessed from the project tree under the Queries node If the user is familiar with SQL string structure the query string may be directly edited in the SQL View Preview tab Follow the steps listed above to execute the query Adding a field which contains a Linked List If a field is added to the Conditions which contains a Linked List then the Expression field for the Condition may be chosen from a linked list An example is illustrated below For example it may be necessary to do a chemical exceedance query such as Vinyl Chloride gt 10 ug l The chemical name Vinyl Chloride may be selected from the combo box since this chemical name is part of a linked list See the example shown below 206 Chapter 7 Queries xan es C Station Group Query Data Query sal View Preview Select a Query Display Field VCEnceeds20 y Foneten _ Expression A ion i i soil_samples 7 FE 3 E E Soil Chemistry m station name name sys_sample_code Sample_name sample_date from 3 Xx J Map and BHLP Ready JV Use current projection system chemical_name result_value renee result_unit Expression Expression Operator E cone_ppm soil_chemistry chemical_name fractioncode 7 soil_chemistry result_value cis 1 2
140. should be selected and an appropriate Data category chosen The Station Data tab provides access to all data related to a single station Once a Station is added to the project detailed information on the station can be inserted edited or deleted through the Station Data tab i HydroGeo Analyst Demo_YGW Aschalew HGA_Projects Demo_ GW Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help JAR OR t XHaABREBR S BIOS RMON Ml Station Groups J Station List EA Data Query E Station Data a Project Data Category Select Station coor m Y coor m Elevation m TOC m Description y GB 0 53 6212 68000001 4814029 99999 323 5 0 Queries Location description_addins Maps MI Cross Sections Value Description Puy Reports x 536212 680000002 E 3D Views 4814029 99999898 E ii Borehole Logs F test 323 5 TOC 0 GB 01 ID 24 i Data Transfer System DTS If the project database is going to store numerous stations it may be more efficient to import the data using the Data Transfer System DTS The DTS allows for importing data from the following source types e Text CSV TXT ASC TAB e Excel 97 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Any OLE DB compliant database such as MS Access Database MDB SQL Server etc The DTS can be loaded by selecting Import Data from Project menu the first DTS window is shown below 94 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analy
141. symbol identifying the layer on the map PDA The Layer Manager will contain numerous types of layers each represented by a different symbol type In the example shown here the layer types from top to bottom are as follows e PointLayer Point shape file represented by a point symbol These include station groups and data query layers imported into the map project e LineLayer A line symbol indicates a cross section line contour line layer or annotation line e PolygonLayer Polygon shape file represented by a polygon symbol About the Interface 227 TextLayer Text annotation layer represented by a T symbol Boreholes and Monitoring Wells A station group layer vc_exceeds_2ppb A data query CrossSectionLine2 Cross section line layer Test Site Map bmp Georeferenced map layer 8 1 1 Description of Toolbar Items 228 The toolbar in the Map Manager provides access to most of the same features available in the Main Menu Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no options for the selected layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance New button creates a new map project Open button opens an existing map project Save button saves the current map project Print button sends the current map view to the report editor Selection Pointer button allows objects in the active layer to b
142. team of qualified support specialists For product pricing information please contact your local distributor Use the address below to see a list of distributors http www waterloohydrogeologic com software software_international_dist htm Or contact Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc A Schlumberger Company 460 Phillip Street Suite 101 Waterloo Ontario Canada N2L 5J2 Phone 519 746 1798 Fax 519 885 5262 E mail sws sales slb com Web www waterloohydrogeologic com How to Contact Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc If after reading this manual and using HydroGeo Analyst you would like to contact Waterloo Hydrogeologic with comments or suggestions or if you need technical assistance you can reach us at Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc 460 Phillip Street Suite 101 Waterloo Ontario CANADA N2L 5J2 Phone 1 519 746 1798 Fax 1 519 885 5262 E mail sws support slb com Web www waterloohydrogeologic com Obtaining Technical Support To help us handle your technical support questions as quickly as possible please have the following information ready before you call or include it in a detailed technical support e mail e A complete description of the problem including a summary of key strokes and program event or a Screen capture showing the error message where applicable e Product name and version number e Product serial number e Computer make and model number e Operating system and version number e Total
143. than the station list you can use x Stop button to stop the data loading pressing this button will cancel the data loading and display only those records that have were read from the database up to that point 1 5 2 Main Menu Bar The menu bar provides access to most of the features available in HydroGeo Analyst see HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar on page 95 for more details 1 5 3 Toolbar 18 The toolbars that appear beneath the menu bar are dynamic changing as you move from one window tab to another Some toolbar buttons become available only when certain tabs are in view For example the Add and Delete toolbar buttons are only available when the focus is on a grid Some toolbar buttons are available only in a particular context for example the Paste button is only available after the Copy or Cut command has been used The following tool buttons appear at the top of the HydroGeo Analyst main window For a short description of an icon move the mouse pointer over the icon without clicking either mouse button New button loads the Project Manager to create a new project Open button opens an existing HydroGeo Analyst project zee Print button sends the data item that is currently active to the Report Manager This data item could be a list of stations data from any table ora query result This feature is available only if a grid is active Refresh button refreshes the current view by updating the project browse
144. the Data Link Properties for Importing on page 455 Once the connection string has been defined click OK to accept it e Click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step The next step is Data Mapping 6 1 2 Data Mapping The next step in the data transfer operation is to match a source table with a destination table The Data Mapping window is divided into two frames e The Source table and fields found on left side of the window and e The Destination tables and fields on the right side of the window The Data Mapping window is displayed below Importing Data using the DTS 183 184 Data Transfer System Import Al ES Step 2 Data Mapping Source Destination Table Category Destination table haa_stationst y Description y station y Map source fields to destination fields Use Name Type Unit Conditions M stationid LONG E T Y stationname STRING MV x_utmnad83 DOUBLE unknowr x DOUBLE degree MV y utmnad83 DOUBLE unknowr y DOUBLE degree a X os zone LONG ft mi m e tag STRING Mi elevation gt DOUBLE m 7 elevation DOUBLE m 32 Z toc DOUBLE m m depth DOUBLE L export DATESTAMP L region STRING Total of records 147 C Primary key CO Requires a unit to be selected lt Back Next gt Cancel Help The Source database table which contains the data to be imported can be selected from the list of tables ava
145. the Symbol combo box Choose a symbol size from the combo box in the upper right corner Finally the symbol Fill color may be chosen from a color palette If a border around the symbol is desired select the check box beside Border and provide a border color 242 Chapter 8 Map Manager Statistics Displays statistics for the selected data field of a selected layer These include Count Maximum Minimum Sum Mean and Standard Deviation as shown in the figure below Statistics Field ELEVATION E Count i a Masimum 346 0000 Minimum 232 0000 Sum 61 03 0000 Mean 239 0556 Std Deviation 3 9329 OF Renderer Provides options for a Map Renderer The Map Renderer allows assigning labels to objects on the map layers D A x AT L Background Symbo W Show Background E Cancel A new Renderer may be added by clicking on the Add button The following dialog will appear with the available Renderers from which you can select Description of Menu Items 243 244 Renderer Type C Value Renderer Label Renderer OF Cancel e The Graduated Renderer provides a way of classifying features into categories or classes by drawing different symbols for features based on numeric attribute values and their ranges e The Value Renderer provides a means of representing features of a map layer by drawing a symbol for each unique data value The Label Renderer can be used to display labels
146. the data in the selected grid e From a selected Data Query create a report using the results of a query Creating Reports from a Data Grid Follow the directions below to create a report containing a data grid e Select the desired grid in HydroGeo Analyst for example select the Stations List grid or select the desired table e Press the Print button ts from the main toolbar or select Project Report This item is enabled only if a grid is visible and active and has at least one row of data e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The fields in the selected grid will be added to the report designer and the ADO data control is automatically created An example is shown below for the Lithology table 368 Chapter 11 The Report Editor oe S GG 0 0885 x mS Om os If O A E O A APA ht Paws Deke jer ee aa ee flop EN O O A O O O O O O O O OELE The layout of the report can then be modified and unwanted fields can be removed from the design If the fields do not immediately show up in the Design window press the Refresh button in the Fields frame as circled above To see the ADO Data control for the report click on the button Ed ADO button in the Detail section of the Report body design also circled above
147. the same as described in Check Duplicates Settings on page 427 Once you have defined the settings for your analysis Template you can create another template by clicking the Add button delete an existing template by clicking the Remove button or accept reject your changes and return to the HGA main program window You are now ready to apply the lab quality template to your data 13 3 Applying a Lab Quality Template NOTE An example of a Lab Quality Data query is available in the HGA Demo project select the C_Lab_ Analysis query in the Queries node and feel free to follow along with the instructions below To apply a Lab Quality Template follow the instructions below e Select and highlight the appropriate Data Query from the Queries node in the HGA Browser e From the main menu click Tools gt Quality Control and select the Perform Lab QC Assessment option the following dialog will appear 430 Chapter 13 Quality Control Select and configure a template for lab quality validation oj x Template Description Lab Quality Templates Relative Percent Difference lt 20 a Coefficient of Variation lt 10 Percent Recovery gt 9 Blank lt O El Data Sources Data Entity Data Source Station ID id X Batch Identifiers BatchlD Sample ID SamplelD yl Sample Date SampleDate yl Parameter Names Parameter yl Parameter Values Value yl Parameter Identification Informatio
148. the sys_sample_code first in the Parent Tree of the database Soil_Sample table THEN import the chemistry data chemistry data into the Soil_Chemistry table child table A unique sys_sample_code should be assigned for each sample the same sample code may be used for multiple parameter analysis Import Sample Codes Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu Package Name and select New Package from the combo box type Soil sample codes in the box that appears OK E a button beside the Specify Import File name field 50 Chapter 2 Getting Started In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls Soil_sample_codes XLS file located in the Examples folder under the installation folder The default installation folder is D Program Files HGAnalyst Examples Open Next to proceed to the next window in the DTS In the Data Mapping window you must select a new Destination Data Category and Table from the right side of the window In this case the soil sample codes will be imported to the Soil Sampling category soil_samples table Select the appropriate items from the combo boxes as shown in the image below Data Transfer System Import y 0 x St ep 2 Data M appi ng Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list i In each source table stations must be identified at least by stat
149. the toolbar performs the same function NOTE Use caution when deleting stations from the Project station group as they will be permanently deleted from the database Duplicate Post Use the Duplicate option to create a duplicate of the selected record in the active grid the new duplicated record will be added to the last row of the grid This can be used to quickly copy existing records and make minor modifications After the new record has been added to the grid the changes should be saved using the EP Post Data button in the toolbar or the Post menu item in the Records menu The Records Post item saves all changes made in a grid to the database The Post item is activated only if the cursor 1s located within a grid and there has been a change made to the grid The Te button in the toolbar performs the same function Filter by Value The Filter By Value option will locate and display only those records which contain matching values for a selected cell in the selected column Those records which do not meet the criterion will be temporarily removed from the station list Only a value from a single cell may be selected at once The EF button in the toolbar performs the same function All filtered records can be restored using the Show All menu item By filtering records based on a defined criterion 1t will be easier to focus on a sub set of stations and create specific reports plots and cross sections The Filter menu ite
150. the view Boreholes layer from the Layer Control list to ensure that this layer is active HINT In order to activate the cross section options a layer that contains Station data must be selected 53 Cross Section Line button from the toolbar Place the mouse cursor near the top left corner of the map and click once with the left mouse button to start the line Drag the mouse across the map to the bottom right corner of the map passing in between some of the stations as you draw the line Double click with the mouse near the bottom right corner of the map to finish the line This will launch the dialog shown below CrossSection Line x Name Sample Buffer 400 meters Description Sample Ok Cancel H Help In this dialog specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description optional The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section type Sample for the line Name type 400m for the Buffer Distance type Sample for the Description OK to accept the Line attributes Mapping the Data 75 The Cross Section line will now appear in the Map Manager and will be labeled with the Cross Section Line name In addition a new layer will appear in the Layer Control list named CrossSectionLine This is a line shape layer containing the cross section lines for the project AEE Map Project Sample_ Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings
151. to define layer elevations in groundwater flow models such as Visual MODFLOW When this option is selected the following dialog will appear Export Model Layers E xj Select Model Layers Name Export as Topography Topography Top L2 Top L2 Top L3 Top L3 OOOO Top L4 Top L4 Top L5 Top L5 Bot L6 Bot L6 Select Cross Section gt Select All Cross Section E F F DD Cancel Help In this dialog select the model layers you wish to import Each model layer will be Description of Menu Items 2717 278 exported as a separate file for each file you may define the name under the Export As column Next select which cross sections should be considered in the export Click the Create button to generate the files The files will be generated in the Model sub folder of the Project folder for example D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Model Topography txt The Cross Section editor will generate the text files based on the vertex location of each model layer line in each cross section For example for model layer 1 Topography if cross section AA contains this model line with 5 vertices and cross section BB has the same model line with 10 vertices then the text file should contain 15 rows if both cross sections AA and BB are selected The X Y location for each vertex corresponds to the X Y location on the cross section line the Cross Section e
152. used to rotate the display window along the selected axis or shift the view within Display Window The X axis is oriented horizontally left and right across the Display Window Y axis is oriented vertically up and down the Display Window and the Z axis is oriented into and out of the Display Window 314 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer The image orientation and location can also be changed by right clicking anywhere in the 3D Display window and selecting one of the following options W Shift Rotate Screen and 7 Rotate Model and Y e The Shift option allows translation of the map region in the plane of the screen by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer in the desired direction e The Rotate Screen X and Y rotates the display around the fixed axes of the Display Window by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer along the X or Y direction e The Rotate Model X and Y rotates the display around the 3D image axes by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer in the desired rotation direction Animation Controls The tools located on the right hand side of the Navigation frame may be yg SOE used to continuously rotate the image around the X Y and Z axes and F ad animate plume objects i Browser W Time b Simply select the desired axis and click the Play button to start rotation You can record the rotation as an AVI file by pressing the Record button For more details see Recording Animation to AVI file o
153. well the time series chart 1s not useful in this case Scroll ahead a few pages to see a station which contains data Or select a station from the table of contents on the left side of the window to see the respective time series chart W 12 from the table of contents The report preview will jump ahead to this station and display its respective data and time series chart If the report pages are cut off return to the designer window to re size the chart area or add a page break The Report can be saved now to be recalled later on fa Save button from the toolbar The report will appear in the HGA Project browser under the Reports Queries node Feel free to modify additional properties of the chart by returning to the Report Designer right clicking on the chart control and selecting the Properties option from the menu In the Chart properties you may modify axis symbol and line properties in addition to numerous other features An example is shown below with some of the chart properties enhanced An example of the modified chart is displayed below Chapter 11 The Report Editor Report query report_0 a 4728 0 0 a M8 e MM II aa ee ee eee ae TVOC Concentrations at Monitoring Wells name w23 nse 500 w23 wense 240 w23 ss 20 4 TVOC ugl May 1996 Jul 1996 This concludes Chapter 11 Creating Reports with Charts 391 392 Chapter 11 The Report Edi
154. which includes the database template for the new project These options are shown in the figure below 2101 Step 2 Create project dependent tables Select a Project E This step allows you to create the Templates tables that will be used to store your data The tables will be Environmental metric created based on a selected Database Structure Preview nt prelados ma Tables Fields Please select create a template browse through the tables and fields that will be created and click on the Next button to proceed Location description_addins Geologic Description Lithology Hydrogeology Modeling features Well Construction Drilling Protocol Casing Screen y Description _ Copy All Stations to Project lt Back Next gt Cancel Help In this window select from one of the pre defined Database templates for the new project The template contains the necessary tables fields relationships linked lists and reports for storing and interpreting data in the HydroGeo Analyst database The following templates are available in both imperial and metric length units Creating a New Project 27 e Environmental e US EPA Region 2 US EPA Region 5 e MOE WWIS Ontario Ministry of Environment Water Well Information System Environmental metric template from the Templates combo box for this example Next button to create the project dependent tables for this databas
155. 0 x XH 2 D C Station Group Query Data Query E SQL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields TOC_Exceeds_320m y Function Expression z station id id station x x station y y station name gt name station toc E Description E Location Station Name X J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Conditions Expression Operator Expression Dperator i gt gt 32d depth to bedrock Ej description_addins 1 Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling M hd awitherina Ci nact d Source Condition Project y Advanced Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 NOTE The Map and BHLP Ready option ensures that the query will contain the required fields enabling it to be plotted on a Map Manager BHLP project The required fields are Station ID X and Y and Station Name If this option is checked the required fields must be added and cannot be modified NOTE The Query Builder allows you to create map ready queries in the project s projection system When the queries are executed X and Y coordinates are displayed in the lat long format however when the query is executed through the main HGA window or exported to CSV MS Access or XML the X and Y coordinates will be displayed in the current projection system Cre
156. 00 Detinins Model Layer ds 300 Drawing Model Interpretation Layers ccccccncnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnononnnnnccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnn non nn no nnnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnos 301 Snapping Vertices to Other Model Layer Lines ni a iii 303 Editing Model Layon oan a tte 304 Linking Vertices between Model Layers oooocoonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnss 305 Remove Stations from Cross SECOS idas 305 Querying Cross Section Interpretations ssssssssscececccosssscececcocsssssceceooossssscceeocssssssseee 305 Adding Annotations to the Cross Section ssseeescossssseeecoccsssssceceoocossssceceococssssssseeeoooo 307 AIE CU e E E 308 Add MES E A a E E nanos 308 AJA PON SONS A ata set 308 PS CUMIN gt e a E A E a E 308 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 311 About the Interface siii iciici ds 311 Workin Wilh SDD EXDIOFEP a acia 312 Positroniine the Pancita aia Rea 312 Moneo Pane r tte waste a a a E eE 313 Floating Panels sina a E A A see Soeeeaaee 313 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc BA E E E oumamioat reeds aceuecastet 313 Closine Pancita dit seu latcuiacatbea E e E E 313 VerticalNEXAO CELO a Riad 313 DA O 314 Rota mS th made str dt tl ta opi 314 AMIMMAtION Controls aia 315 A cedarean sanedanuanasued gateeuieadanonc bance N EE 316 PWM BOWS ET na 317 R cordine Animation to AVL le a calida 318 OpenGL SOUS curia tido cane 320 NGAI e Proe
157. 000 E AV EEN E CE ES ES ES RAE EA E ES Vetere ugt mo IO ES LR 8 S E LR EEN EEE IEA E ECT E 2000 E 000 LI ATA IE IO EC A a ALEA EIA SM Mae e e e LL 1 IEEE ELECO sm EI IU CI CI 1 E IEC ECOS ED LU LO E 00 EEE IEA EI E i AE EEC ECO CI E LO E 0 ALA OO CI A ICALE EI CIA 00 LA 0 Jr Jus a Js un Jus Ja Js pes ep FP i SH a SH a 5H 0 SH aj SH aj HA 0 SH a SH PI HA PD SH PI A PD A PD E i E iii E CNT too h This analysis compares the spiked measured SM sample to the spiked theoretical ST sample for each parameter with available spiked values and calculates the Percent Recovery Records that are less than the specified Percent Recovery will be highlighted with the color and font specified in the Template 432 Chapter 13 Quality Control The results for Duplicates analysis are displayed below LA 1 Oe We T 7 E o 1 pera This analysis compares all concentrations measured in the duplicate measured D sample to 1ts duplicate original O sample and calculates the Percent Difference and the CV Records that exceed the specified Percent Difference or exceed the specified Coefficient of Variation will be highlighted with the color and font specified in the Template 13 4 1 Export Quality Control Analysis Results To export the results of your Lab Quality Analysis to a MS Excel spreadsheet click the Export Res
158. 1 DAVE aa 93 SOn LRE Lo esate ars O cen alc o ER o e o PEO T 93 Saon Dala TaD a a seas a tashatynds tase aM dhemaaaGies asaeneean ss 94 Data Transter S ystenr DTS o ci 94 HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar sssccccccsssssssccccssssssccccccssscsscccccsscsccccccsssscccoes 95 lE A E EE A E AE E A SE PE E cas E E E ETE E eae pone 96 NEW aro os 96 Open ara aa a a Pan a a a 96 Oper Tron As ACK aride a a E e E E 97 CIOSG aie a E E E a a E ae iden 97 RE ODED noi dad dll Ruunetied sales mands 98 DNO aa A nae Saas A cect aac E A taer mem aee eae 98 EXPOEE a a daios 104 A a loan T E tes 105 IRS POL a o nite sa onal ata tania alata aaa 106 DE aU en crete EAEE E O E EE etry ova TEATE des 106 A 106 COP o a de 107 CU ae cet errs eects irene orto wre Mem ane eet wee eres MPa tr rey CRN ETE rene ere mer een nT mm haar tat 107 TAS UG P TEE A E A ulddaes 107 PING AEE EE S E TE A T E E Puamtbotautanms E E S E E T ines 107 NION A A eee 108 PEOJCCE TS TOW Sel a a col 108 A haaitiaedenau dan datees set 108 Fide Selected Colums loci da E tones tataasasaesaaeacaneaeuneas 108 SHOW lOO IMS a rica 109 Collapse All es E is 109 E panda rats erecta ca tet Do 109 Retreat tb it boa 109 A A A 109 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc DEEE aie cates AS ARA haces Gece co aah aia placate A EE A abantce 110 Dopod E E E A A E A E TTT T E E TEE 110 OSU E E A E E T A E E A AT AT A E E E EE eras 110 Filter By Valonen ais 110 Hides KReEaRONS aaa iras
159. 1 1 Description of Designer Toolbar Items The plot designer toolbar provides the controls for designing the plot page The following buttons are available iml H E E Save button saves the current plot design Save As button saves the current plot design as a new name Add button provides two options Add Plot will prompt you to select a template to be used Add Default Plot will create a new plot using the default plot template Delete button deletes the selected plot or line series Refresh button refreshes the design with new settings or data Zoom in button allows you to zoom into the selected plot page to zoom in on selected plot data within an individual plot refer to the section Zoom on page 438 below Zoom out button returns to the original zoom view Fit to Page button fits all plots to the current viewer window size At the bottom of the window you will find the following buttons The function of these buttons from left to right is Previous Page scroll to the previous page in the plot design Next Page scroll to the next page in the plot design About the Interface 437 Zoom To zoom in on plot data in an individual plot use the mouse cursor to draw box around the desired data a sample is shown in the screen shot below Time vs Water Level Data at Station i Hamr Indicates fs nma uned la dendha Eh plot To zoom out to the original extents right mouse click on the plot area and select Z
160. 111 Mive Selection sorro e a E e E E E A E e EE 111 SHOW Are O E E E 111 SEE aiii 111 A PP ina asanwsaledeaacisalewmy Saueuin A 111 A E E N E A E AEN 111 DS A a a E a ameeeeeebaczes awed 111 SENOS iaaa a a E 112 Template Mana er ei a a 112 A A E E E ee eee 112 Maternal SPeCitiCallOns modre a a A a A a s 112 Manase User ACCESS Level ts lacada 112 Change PassWord cual E N E e rola daros 113 COS da 113 A ge ee nc PRPS EES AR Lt eT Cn 113 Map INIA CCE ic aa ao a 113 AS A A kaaees 114 A A 114 CrOSStaDeEpOL rato a rai o iS 118 ula lity CONTO tii od 118 UN ESTUVO tia alo cd 118 Back Data Wace doi bio cie 118 Restore DAD eae AGA a iam tea amatneaeestaatcuera ss 118 Manage Databases it NA isc 119 Ho aaea ted 120 CELO 0 0 8 E E E A A E EA IE E EE E E AEE 120 A paceneaaues 120 Template VIAN A a E 121 PUDO n dad 121 Generale Seri POON sesasi a o o ost 121 LTISEKAMOE AAA AA A A 121 Cein 0 BE tae cet An a a 122 Addie Lists Manual idos 123 Generatii Lists a lead ata 124 ETO ONLI EISS a di ii cada 124 o LI eadiitiaiaataneaceauntinct 125 Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager occccccnccccnnnnnnocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnnnnnnnos 126 Material Specifications Editor isscssiesscscccscssestasusnsestansecsdssnsdcsscansestisuucndestancacedcuvecceacanaeces 127 Creatine a New Soil Classification SY Stem a as 128 Modifying and Deleting a Soil Classification System oooonccccnnnncccnnononocncnnnnnnnnnnonnnancnononanonnos
161. 12 1996 0 04 16 1996 0 08 09 1996 0 01 02 1996 0 01 08 1996 0 02 12 1996 0 04 16 1996 0 08 09 1996 0 01 02 1996 0 01 08 1996 0 02 12 1996 0 04 16 1996 0 08 09 1996 0 01 02 1996 0 i 01 08 1996 0 Source Condition 02 12 1996 0 Station Groups gt A 04 16 1996 0 08 09 1996 0 Monitoring Wells si 01 02 1996 640 Close Help Rows 115 Time 0 0 0 30 The query will return all records containing a sample date and result value in the Monitoring Wells station group In this example there are 115 records 5 samples collected from each of the 23 monitoring wells The Query Builder may now be closed Close Yes to save the query The next step 1s to execute the query in HGA and send this to the Report Editor Queries node in the project tree Right click on the chart tvoc query Execute from the menu that appears The query will be executed and will be displayed in the Data Query tab Creating Reports with Charts 383 HydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalyst ProjectsiDemo_Project Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help jJee82 Sh xkBRAaA RBRBSes BES Sas Sin a Station Groups a Station List GR Data Query E Station Data E Station Data Query List Station Group Data Category Maps ne lm O OM o Cross Sections Reno result_we 1 we 01 02 1996 Station Groups F 01 08 1996 Map y 02 12 199 04 16 199 y Cross S
162. 120 inclusive will have a different set of symbol and label properties so they can easily be distinguished on the plot The Labels provides options for the data series labels Text Select the Font Color and Alignment options for the text Custom There are several options available for defining custom label Use different label source allows you to select a field from the list for the labels from a list Include pre fix provides the option to attach a text string in front of each label Include post fix provides the option to attach a text string at the end of each label NOTE If the Label options are inactive you must set the Labels to Visible load the General Series Settings and enable the Labels Visible option As you define the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series labels will appear using the selected settings When you are finished with the Label options you can click on the Symbol tab to modify the symbol options as shown in the screenshot below Plot Settings 447 Min Value fo Minimum Height p width m Max Value 120 Maximum Height E Width fl J Marker Size Proportional Height ja Width a Preview Min 0 Max 120 E A A Apply Close The following settings are available Symbol marker select the symbol marker type from the combo box Marker Size Height specify the symbol he
163. 2 names in the destination However the station_name field must be manually mapped and the units must still be selected for the length field types m for the units for the from_ and to_ fields Use for both these fields Under the Source first row in the table Station_name from the combo box Next to continue Yes to continue in the warning message that appears The next window is Data Validation If you mapped the fields correctly then your DTS window should appear similar to the one shown below Data Transfer System Import E iol x Step 4 Data Yalidation Erors wWamings Description Field Name of records Preview X Y sys_sample_code AA 1 BH1_10 10 2002_6 4 i 1 BH1_10 10 2002_10 9 10 9 Note 1 BH1_10 10 2002_15 9 15 9 F eS aA lr n 2 BH2_10 10 2002_14 7 14 7 This step allows you to accept reject 2 BH2_10 10 2002_19 2 19 2 records with warnings by selecting the 2 BH2_10 10 2002_24 2 24 2 warning message in the Errors arnings 2 BH2_ 10 10 2002_27 7 27 7 grid Records with errors must be rejected to 2 BH2_10 10 2002_8 2 8 2 activate the importing process 3 BH3_10 10 2002_13 5 13 5 3 BH3_10 10 2002 19 19 Nou can also select one or more records in 3 BH3 10 10 2002 21 5 215 the preview table and exclude them from 3 BH3 10 10 2002 245 245 importing into your database 3 BH3_10 10 2002_28 28 3 BH3_10 10 2002_4 5 45 3 BH3_10 10 2002_9 5 9 5 4 BH4_10 10 2002_14 4
164. 2 0000000 4813306 99999847 BH8 536420 1550000 4813671 51099847 335 335 BH9 537173 5000000 4813964 29999643 342 342 BH10 535369 6000000 4814739 09999541 347 347 BH11 535141 1000000 4813116 49999489 342 5 342 5 BH12 536309 5000000 4814708 29999487 347 347 BH13 536267 7000000 4812838 79999592 347 347 BH14 535772 8010000 4814008 29999643 331 331 BH15 534994 4000000 4814246 69999694 342 342 BH16 536063 1000000 4813914 89999439 330 5 330 5 BH17 536174 3113000 4813496 89999592 330 3 330 3 BH18 535789 8000000 4814600 39999642 342 342 BH19 536724 1000000 4814078 89219898 339 239 BH20 536746 6900000 4814507 49999489 342 342 Station Groups OWT ID 6 Record gt Invert Selection This will highlight all the Boreholes and de select the observation well OW 1 Right click on any of the selected Boreholes and select Add Station Group as shown below Data Management 57 ioi xi HydroGeo Analyst Sample Project Chris D HGAnalyst3 Projects Sample_Project_Chris Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help 8 a 0 txal R GEE SE LL 48 Station Groups Station List Ei Data Query Station Data JA Project 1 8 Station Data StationN Elevation TOC B Queries bhi fF Crosstab bh 5 0 0 340 10 Maps bh3 600 338 10 D Cross Sections bh4 144 40 E 50 35 i E La Reports bh5 5 bb 30 At 3 UL 331 00 3DView Mo
165. 426 e Applying a Lab Quality Template on page 430 e Generate QC Results on page 431 423 13 1 Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis 424 Your QC Blank duplicate and spiked samples should be entered in the same table and fields as your original samples If a Duplicate sample was collected at an existing station then create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code D You must also define a common batch ID for duplicates to indicate that they belong together If you want to compare the duplicate to its original sample you must add the appropriate Original Sample Quality Code O to each original sample If a Blank sample was collected it can be added as a new station and sample or as a new sample to an existing station Create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code B For Spiked samples you must add two types of samples codes and results e The first will be a sample that contains the known spiked concentration for each parameter Create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code ST for Theoretical Spiked concentration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the amount of constituent that has been added for every spiked parameter e Next add the analyzed spiked sample as a new sample Create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code SM for Measured Spiked concent
166. 650 700 535 137 4 814 510 Distance m 535 872 4 814 505 29 91 226 30 Grid Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen wLevel Intersecting Grid Grid Line Color Line Style Width in Pixels f E e Visible for Vertical Lines e Wisible for Horizontal Lines Show on Load In the Grid Lines frame set the line style color and width and also set visibility settings for the horizontal and vertical grid lines The Show on Load option will result in the grid being displayed each time the cross section 1s loaded 290 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Interpretation Define the data storage options for cross section interpretations Options ee x Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen WLevel Intersecting Grid Interpretation W Store Soft Data Points e Save All Contacts The cross section editor now saves the cross section interpretations to the project database The interpretations are also linked to the stations that were selected for the cross section and these stations along with their interval data are also saved to the database The interpretations and the wells and corresponding interval data can be retrieved later using the Query Builder For more details please see Querying Cross Section Interpretations on page 305 Store Soft Data Points Whenever a layer intersects with a station at only one point 1t could be because of one of the following reasons
167. 7 65 060 1603 Aba E 241453 01 Pare T H 59 29 53550753 45071 80 TH 79 TA 65 30 5504 70 04554 40 3003 111 39 Data Loadin D mE 55H 4b 67 Baya CE3 AA 24814524 001 EE th Pa qu E pee 65 33 Eny A457 90 24043 301 49 Options Leading option 65 34 552000 01406150 371 05 12208 Bees En 461456530 uiis 10 E Losdal Eh MESES E 2 2814970 50 1 33 Ese 65 37 53590310 04773 80 EE 357 63 incremental oc 60 30 5007 19 AO da GO WA PAM ETE 5745 06 4814731 90 05 45 TAS Status E GA ll TANEK 21431 5 EE de E IH JI 106 ET AE ATEO 30 207 40 3291 40 Bar e The HydroGeo Analyst Graphical User Interface is composed of several controls Data Tabs Provides access to the various parts of the project including the Station List Data Query and Station Data Menu Bar Contains menu commands with access to most features that are available in the HydroGeo Analyst package Toolbar Contains several context sensitive short cut buttons for the most frequently used HydroGeo Analyst features Project Browser Hosts a tree view listing some of the most common components of your project These include nodes for Station Groups Queries Crosstab Maps Cross Sections Reports 3D Views Station Data Borehole Log Plots and Plots Well Profile Provides a borehole log plot BHLP view for the selected station Data Grids Contains the grids for data entry and visualization Data Loading Options Provides settings for managing loading of d
168. 9 Cross Section Editor Pe nry Ia bl r fein Geno A tel SELECT sitar AS ki or AS n Labor p rr AS p rr Biegel Res leper AS Laper_Harre Pipro Hecha 10 ava FROM Salah Ils FF Jy T onic Top aeration liepas Pemut hairan AS Thakre lnderpesbaton Pepti ripio 0 ipres Ena FIGHT AC H Sena DH 50 D a Eaton SO LEFT AOE rieprelitos ii DH Eater ls bigion results Eater WHEFE A in rar Top_olenat n Thekreia E A AAA E Tapp apa Ding E OOS Model A A AAA E Dota E Sed Mo A A AAA E Data 27 Sec GEA Model 20 Sees OFA Gon Doa NA AAA 2a A AAN E Becas Sori AN 1 arere OS Geckos 2a Cees NO Gin Gurl Sot seers j rreren SOO Geckos 2a ees NOT Gin Casos Gores Taina egy SOUT CEC Geode 28 Cees NOP Gin Era hard AA 17 HH Cenk Sa Cees NO Gin a jia SERRE OSEA Geckos 28 Cees NO Gin Upper aulas bre CSOT dE Mprogeologe A A AAA E kem aguis 27 rer 15 Heeg Hor AAN GIH lapag apt 75 PARRA 1 ATTE Mode oa rra AAN Git AA pal e 1G OT Model Me SCN GO Donat STL Model ee A Er Daisy So An TOCAN dE Model A A E Medan rd A VA A Geckos A A E Gurval ICE CONCA A Geckos Me A AE Goo Cosmos Gores OS PRRRPEC STI RFRPREML I liens Me A Er Era hard palo e Di Cenk Me A AE AO La Rei a DARA ienga Me Sen Goto and Soon COE Cenk Goa ress An en GIH pp aulas OS PARRA 1 VEPEEPEHUTA AT Hpdrogeologe Hor karn GIH kem aguis STL TACT Hpg De OAR ARA GiH GS CCC a Ge lapag apiha on errr aed OOS Mode Gs SCC ar GH Dota AA E LT Mo
169. 95 7 4613630 340 349 The following example demonstrates a CSV file containing lithology information for a few stations note the format and the header information in the first row example_file Notepad Of x File Edit Search Help ID Name from_ to_ form_desc soil type GBAF 8 6 5 Coarse Gravel Coarse Gravel 7 GBS 6 5 26 Fine to med sand Hedium Sand GBA 26 52 Gravel Gravel 7 6B087 52 69 Fine sand Fine Sand 7 GBS 69 1668 Silty clay Silt 8 6608 0 4 3 C0a4rse Gravel Coarse Gravel 8 6B08 4 3 17 Fine to med sand Hedium Sand 8 6608 17 48 Gravel Gravel 8 6B08 18 66 Fine sand Fine Sand 8 6B08 66 94 5i1ty clay Silt 8 6808 94 1068 S5i1ty to Fine Sand Sand NOTE It is recommended that you have a header in the first row of your source file to simplify data mapping in Step 2 The method of selecting a data source mainly depends on the type of the data source There are two options e Specify Import File Name quick and easy for text files spreadsheet and MS Access Database data sources on a local or network machine OR e Build a Connection String to a file using the standard Universal Data Link UDL properties dialog More appropriate for data sources on a server or network computer Specify Import File Name To specify a file directly select the radio button beside the Specify Import File Name option then click on the E Open file button to load the following dialog Importing Data u
170. Data Transfer System Import seats an DATESTAMP The source table containing the data to be imported can be selected from the list of tables on the left side of this window Under Source Table Sheeti if it is not already selected from the combo box 42 Chapter 2 Getting Started The DTS makes an effort to automatically match fields from the source table with those in the selected destination table If the field names are exactly the same the fields will be mapped automatically Unmapped fields will appear blank this indicates that the DTS was unable to match the source field to a field in the HydroGeo Analyst database Therefore a field must be manually selected from the available list and mapped to the appropriate source field In this example some of the fields have been detected and mapped automatically ID Name X Y and TOC but the Elevation field needs to be mapped manually NOTE As a minimum each source table must contain either the Station ID or Station name for each record These fields are required to match the source data to the appropriate stations in the database Under the Source table Click on the blank field directly above TOC this field corresponds to the Destination field Elevation A list of available fields will appear as seen below Data Transfer System Import of x Step 2 Data Mapp
171. Draw Mode Tiled Apply OF Cancel The Interval frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the Header Color by clicking on the color box and change the Column Width The Pattern Symbol frame allows you to show hide the pattern modify the Width and change the Image Draw Mode The Description frame allows you to show hide the description and modify the Text Font 12 2 4 Lithology Column 404 The Lithology column is specifically designed to display geologic formation details It allows the use of soil lithologic patterns together with an optional description for each formation To add a Lithology column click the P Add button and select Lithology from the combo box provided A new Lithology column will be added In the Designer tree expand the Lithology node and select LithologyEntities Using the combo boxes provided select the data table top bottom image and text entities Lithology column is a specialized version of the Interval column which is described on page 402 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Settings The Lithology column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Lithology node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Settings e Visib
172. Export Data and the following window will appear Data transfer system Export Step 1 Data source Package name P x Description We chandes to Mis DIS packade Select data destination O specit espot ile nane E cs Bud Connection sting Lo a Data destination details Nev Cancel Help Exporting Data using the DTS 193 6 2 1 Specify Data Source and Package Similar to data importing the first step in the data transfer operation is to provide the desired destination The Destination can be provided either as a file name wherever applicable or as a connection string First a data package must be selected or a new one created from the Package Name field in the first line Then select a folder a file format and enter a filename Once this has been defined Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS 6 2 2 Select Tables to Export 194 The second window as shown below requires you to select the tables to export In addition to selecting the source and destination tables this interface also allows selecting the desired destination fields to which data from the selected table will be exported Data transfer system Export Ioj x Step 2 Data mapping Source Destination Category Source table Destination table Description T station test_export csv Select the fields for data exporting ag elevation oc depth DOUBLE
173. Following standard procedures outlined by the U S EPA the RISC WorkBench calculates exposure assessment toxicity assessment and risk assessment RISC WorkBench also includes a completely customizable database for common environmental parameters used when conducting risk assessments Visual PEST combines the latest version of PEST2000 with the graphical processing and display features of WinPEST for model independent parameter estimation Visual Groundwater 18 the first software package to combine state of the art graphical technology for 3D visualization and animation capabilities with an easy to use graphical interface designed specifically for environmental project applications WHI UnSat Suite 18 a fully integrated software package for modeling 1D unsaturated zone flow and contaminant transport using the industry standard numerical modeling codes all run under one tightly integrated interface X1X Visual HELP 1s the most advanced hydrological modeling environment available for designing landfills predicting leachate mounding and evaluating potential leachate seepage to the groundwater table Remediation ToolKit provides an integrated data management visualization trend analysis and modeling platform for evaluating the effectiveness of Monitored Natural Attenuation The Remediation ToolKit combines 3 different software applications BioTrends SEQUENCE and BioTracker into one integrated solution for eval
174. Help 182 Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System The Data Link Properties dialog box is the standard Windows system interface for configuring connection strings to data sources This dialog box exposes all of the properties that the selected OLE DB provider supports The Data Link Properties dialog box contains four tabs Provider Connection Advanced and All The settings available on the latter three tabs depend upon the Provider selected The Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is used to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access Use the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box to specify where your data is located and how to connect to it using an OLE DB provider The connection information can be represented using a common string format This tab opens by default when you double click a data connection in Server Explorer Note that the fields displayed on this tab depend upon the OLE DB Provider selected For example if you select the OLE DB Provider for Oracle the Connection tab displays fields for the server name and login If you select the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server then the server name type of authentication and database must be furnished For more information about the Data Link API visit msdn microsoft com open the MSDN Library Online and then the Platform SDK to find the MDAC SDK which contains the Data Link API Reference or see Appendix B Using
175. Include Picture Description al geologic description lithology Fields colour Color comment matgsc ASTM Descriptor moisture odor Odor structure Structure to_ to a a TAATA AAT AAAA AATA TAAT F Total Items 46 Ok Cancel E Help The List Editor window contains the following parts The Tables combo box Allows you to select the table containing the field for which a list is to be created or modified Fields Allows you to select a field for which a list is to be created or modified List Items Displays the list for the selected field if available Each list item may have a Name Image and Description Adding Lists Manually To create the list for a particular field follow the steps below List Editor Select the Table and Field for which a List is to be created Click the Add button to add a list item In the first column enter a Name for the list item If necessary define a Picture for the list item Click in the Picture column and a dialog will appear with options to load the desired graphics for the list item Click in the Check box under the Include column in order to make this list item available to HydroGeo Analyst List items can be turned on off as desired 123 124 1n order to limit the amount of items displayed in HydroGeo Analyst For example a list of chemical names only certain groups of chemicals may be needed at times In those circumstances the
176. Installation_Date status Geologic Description liinda sl description_addins coun Operator Value Operator M Source Condition Project y Basic Close Help Field Name description_addins county Type STRING Rows 15 Time 0 0 0 15 Under the Having frame a condition may be applied to the Group By field For example if the query results are grouped by the field County it may be necessary to locate the MAX result in each county or the total COUNT in each County To do so right click in the Having frame and select Add Row Group By List Field station county Having Operator Value Operator COUNT y station county gt E1 Add Row Delete Row e Specify a Function select from Aggregate options listed below e AVG Returns the average value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e COUNT Returns the number of items in a collection e MAX Returns the maximum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e MIN Returns the minimum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e STDEV Returns the sample standard deviation of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e STDDEVP Returns the population standard deviation of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e SUM Returns the sum of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e VAR Returns the sample variance of a numeric e
177. LP designer and either printed or saved to an external file With the Borehole Log Designer window open click on the Print button at the bottom of the BHLP designer window and select from one of the print options as shown in the following screenshot Print current borehole Print all boreholes NOTE If you select Print all boreholes a report will be generated for each station in the current selection please be aware that this may take some time If you want to print a BHLP for just the selected station use the Print current borehole 420 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter option You will be prompted to Select a Template for generating your report as shown in the following screenshot You can either select from the existing templates or leave the selection blank and create a new report template yourself x Hame bhip_ landscape bhip_ portrait OF Cancel EH Help An example report loaded with the bhip portrait template is shown in the following figure Report sas lmel Ja Contents GB 01 x i 1 2 E Company Name i Address Contact Info Date January 1 2004 Lithology Coarse Gravel Medium 8 Sand 20 10 30 Gravel 40 50 4 a ES Well Construction 90000000 wm E J 100 J Be woolss regeng cc neg er A ME Borehole Log Report Project Waterloo Investigation Location Waterloo ON Borehol
178. Lec e A ci a Borehole Logs Find on EIT Charts Add Ctrl Ins 00 0 Delete Gopy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Gut Grrl Add Station Group Add to Station Group Sort Ascending Sort Descending Select All Hide Selected Invert Selection Show All Refresh Export r a Generate HTML o owl ID 6 Report Ctrl N Total 21 selected 20 I In the dialog that appears enter a name for the new station group type Boreholes OK The selected stations will be added to the new group Boreholes and this Station Group will appear as a new node branch in the Project Browser These stations will also remain in the Project Station Group Once the stations in a group are displayed a number of actions can be taken based on the selection For example loading a station group and then activating the mapping component will automatically create a GIS layer containing all stations from this group This option will be demonstrated later in this chapter 2 3 Viewing Borehole Log Plots In this section you will see how to create a Borehole Log Plot BHLP for one of the stations Boreholes station group BH1 station since this station contains data for well construction casing screens etc Next locate the Borehole Logs node in the Project browser beside Borehole Logs to expand this node 58 Chapter 2 Getting Started se Double click on WHI1 BHLP1 to load this Borehole Log Plot template The BHLP will appear similar to the
179. Level used to control high level features such as creating new projects and managing databases and e Project level used to control access to individual modules within a project e g User Access Level Management 135 Data access maps queries BHLP etc NOTE HGA enforces user access to HGA projects only The SQL Server database that stores the HGA data can be accessed by any user using Enterprise Manager provided they have the permissions SQL Server Enterprise Manager provides similar tools that allows for user access management and should be utilized as needed 4 1 2 Security Document The user access management settings are stored in a Security Document This is a document that contains user groups users system security policies access rights to application and project level objects This document is created using the User Access Level Management component and is managed by HGA In HGA there are two types of security documents e Application Level Security Document ALSD used to control access to high level features such as managing databases creating new projects and the user access management e Project Level Security Document PLSD used to control access to individual projects as well as the data and modules within this project The settings for the ALSD are encrypted and saved in the ALSD whi file which is copied to your HGA installation directory during the installation default is Program Files HGAnalyst
180. M Zone 17N Finish to complete the Project Wizard The first time the project loads the settings for User Access Management will be presented As the creator of the new project you will have Administrator rights where you can add remove users and assign access rights For more details on this feature please see Chapter 4 User Access Management X button in the upper right corner to close the User Access Management window The new project will then be created with the necessary tables fields and settings Once this is complete the main HydroGeo Analyst window will appear with the new project as shown below Creating a New Project 29 HydroGeo Analyst SampleProject D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects SampleProject i 3 P Oj x Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help Qe Z Sh tXRaA REBHS BOS amp Dae ivi mai Station Groups Station List E Data Query S Station Data Station Data Queries 3 Maps Cross Sections E Reports 3DView ai Borehole Logs o Project i SampleProject 1 If necessary the project settings can be modified at any time by selecting Properties from the Project menu In addition the database view and structure can be modified using the Template Manager For more details see Chapter 5 Template Manager Now that the new project has been created the station data may be entered For instructions on this procedure please continue to the
181. PLEENIOUS E e eras ca lona no desen OE 263 A A A A E A A E AA 263 O A A 263 TOON ALANT sacks ets Sci ae ant asts Shoe tara cae as cagd Goad sa aaid weteecsaaukechdesaetmas a cwatacnadenatectades 264 Luro AMAS A da 264 E lO E A A aeoses 264 A ba ees sae E A A NN E hie eas 265 NS A A AC 266 A O O a nnd tunnel Sek suena aust seat tace r lass boca vee ta A A 266 A A wens ree teret on weer st ert rctreren ne etic rer fetter ern ener ter er erntnretn eer ner tet tren er tiea Mea een eee Tease Vee 266 o ogee E SeenON OER TE Seer ee ER ter SENG ene e nea 12 eM Tr Me ee eae Ce ee 266 A er REE ERNE E A A Viner eT PONE II A AN 266 r NN WR Cr TAIN NN A E NN RON 267 A N acdsee ea neon ae eat ee aca seat nah ate eeitac tame ib ase ects 267 AO O Stato GROUP Attra bsh nai Saeen ice 267 Delete fonr SAW On Group icc id ia bo odas 267 A O es addi le ner onin 268 CLOS SCC EOIN genes e as area Seta a eam ea em e cana ae O 268 Code Pan Car eee rent ne eee A ere Sere rer reer er Teme ty erry ear eee ee ence emir rer ern er rer rere eter 270 o ataca 270 A cena nastennes bnaal EE EEEE OEE EE AOE E E OAE EEE 270 Defining a Cross Section LINE airada is ici 270 9 Cross Section Editor iii 210 About he Interface iman tos 273 Deserptuon or Toolbar Ems a E noia ass 275 Description of Vieni Mems sisone ones aE A aa a 277 A a a E T Renee ere ee ee 271 DN Ai SIAT PI A EEE AEN TEAT EA T T A LE IEE TTT 277 A bee Sea se calender A ee 217 EXport Model Layer nas dd Zid EXPO
182. POS cssiiceccasiiceossnsnstccesieecenaccgesscasbessovacatvesssusspesdeastocsesusegescceuheatess 58 Qu eryino the Database cess cscesesessececacbececeveuiacddavesscccvontes a EE 59 Example Querying the Database SS 60 Recalling and EXecutime Queries tata 64 Mapping the Data nia deseeiacoeawassedesseends ar ENNEN 65 Che autre a Map TOJE CE moesson E E E marten ea toaetoendaasos acs 65 Importing and Georeferencing a Site Map ssssssssoneeeesssssssssocreresesssssssscrerrrerssssssssseereereessssssss 67 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc Addins CZEOREFETENCE Ponts li idas 68 AUS DADES A A AA AS 71 Creating a Contour Map SSA A A AS 72 Detiias Cross SECON ANES al deus 74 Credins me Cross SCCUIOM ota daa 76 Interpreting and Viewing Cross Secti0NS scccccccccccsssssssssssscccccccsssssscsscccsccssssesess 78 Drawing Geologic Cross Sectional Layers oooccccccccnonnoononnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 78 a Misualizaci n Fence Diagrams lili 81 Preparino REDOFIS O o nn E IEEE EE ESE 84 Creatine Data Reports TON TOS aroase E N 84 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst seesseeccsecccsecccscccccsceccscccccceccseccessecesseees O HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts ccccccccssssssssssssscccccsccssssssssccccssssesssees 88 IMtrOdUCTION 2 cri 88 Station TYPE S ia dd eee 88 STAG OMS ADCs icici 2s ce ca A a cn dicds 89 SU OM Co A A A N 90 Tata C Ale SOM S salar O suse E anna N E ase ian cou E E TE 9
183. Replace 107 Frequently Asked Questions 471 Fundamental Concepts 88 G Georeferencing 236 Georeferencing Raster Images 236 H Hardware Requirements 11 HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 95 Record Options 109 Sample Applications I Import Reports from MS Access 377 Importing Data 179 Choose a Data Source 179 How to Map and Match Fields 185 Station Related Settings 188 Validation and Report 191 Installation 11 L Lab Quality Example 430 LAS Import 98 List Editor 121 Creating a List 122 Editing a List 125 M Map Manager Display Data Tables 232 Material Specification Editor Changing Soil Classifications 129 Creating a New SCS 128 Modifying and Deleting 129 Material Specifications Editor 127 Modifying and Deleting a Material Specifica tion 129 N New Features in v 2 0 4 in v 3 0 2 New Projects Build Connection String 148 Create Project Dependent Tables 151 Select Server and Database 147 Selecting the Database template for your project 152 Set Database Environment 146 Set Project Properties and Location 153 O OnLine Help 13 Open database from Backup 97 Opening a Report Template 376 P Parameter Query Reports 370 Plot Settings 443 Plots Adding Lines 448 Data source 439 How to add Plots 439 Saving and Exporting 450 Saving plot template 450 Plume Browser 317 Plume Display Settings 328 Plume generation Data source 114 Post Data 110 Project Database Environment 146 Define Project Information
184. S select the desired SCS then use the x button on the lower left corner of the window NOTE Only user defined Soil Specifications can be modified or deleted The Default Specifications USDA USCS DIN 2043 Compton s IAH may not be modified or deleted from the project 3 5 3 Changing Soil Classifications Once a project has been created it is recommended that the SCS not be changed the reason for this 1s that existing cross sections with defined geology will be impacted by changing the soil names and patterns However if it is necessary to change the SCS this may be done in the Miscellaneous Settings dialog available under the Project Properties menu 3 6 Unit Converter Unit Converter The Unit Converter may be used to convert commonly used units from one form to another Select Tools Unit Converter from the menu and the following dialog will appear 57 29578 degree 57 29578 degree paseu at ower a e GF Angle degree 1 fa i a EE La E la a La E la E La E la iz la m a gd Conversion OF 129 To use the Unit Converter e Select a unit category from the left side panel e Select a unit for this category e Then select a unit category from the right side panel e Select a unit for this category The conversion factor will appear in the fields at the top of the dialog 3 7 Major Components The major components
185. Scale in the Designer tree and select ScaleEntities El ES Design H E Lithology EE ell Construction DataTable Lithology E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataF eld from E E BottormEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField ho 7 Using the combo boxes select the table and the fields from which to draw data In the example shown above the Scale column will display a depth scale that goes from the smallest from depth to the largest to depth in the Lithology table Settings The Scale column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Scale node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Columns 399 BHLP Settings 3 xj 5 cal e Visible Header Color Column width 75 sl Visibilit Tic Marks e Visible Major Tic Mark Interval 10 Display Unit m alii Color Ml Label Position Lett Minor Tic Mark Interval 5 E Color E Apply OF Cancel The Scale frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the Header Color by clicking on the color box and change the Column Width The Visibility frame allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox modify the Display Unit and cha
186. Section from the Main Menu or click on the Cross Section button H on the toolbar e Click Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to the cross section line will be used for the cross section name This will load the cross section editor For more details on creating cross sections you Defining a Cross Section Line 271 may refer to Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor 272 Chapter 8 Map Manager Cross Section Editor The Cross Section editor included with HydroGeo Analyst provides the tools to perform interpretations of geologic and or related data by allowing you to create cross sections based on the data extracted from your database The Cross section editor allows for three types of data interpretations e Geologic layers that represent the geologic formations at the site e Hydrogeologic layers that represent the hydrogeologic properties at the site e Model layers that represent unique model layers at the site Model layers may be used to define numerical groundwater flow models 9 1 About the Interface The Cross Section Editor may be launched from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select a cross section from the Cross Sections node then click Tools gt View Cross Section from the HydroGeo Analyst main menu e Select a cross section from the Cross Sections node then click on the Show Create Cross Section button Al on the toolbar e Inthe Project Browser double click on an existing cross section from t
187. Stations Display Settings Under the Stations node there will be a list of the HydroGeo Analyst stations which are involved in the selected cross section Individual stations may be selected and set to Visible or hidden Station label properties can be modified in the Station Label Properties options under the Project node Layer Interpretation Settings 1 Stay on top e E Surfaces Na Cross Sections Data At aa Gf Stations i H E Interpretations H E BR Bf CC See Setting a Name Visible Ell abel Properties Visible Text Color Text Size Box Visible BoxDepth 2 BoxColor O Sets the lahel attribute E Stay on top M i H E Interpretations H E BR H E CE ef DD ES Setting ee Nee RSS Under the Interpretations folder there will be three separate sub folders one for each of the interpretation types e Model e Geology e Hydrogeology Display Settings 339 Under each individual Interpretation Layer there is a list of the Stay on top e soil types belonging to this layer Each soil type has its own Cross Sections Data E BR Ad settings as shown here 5 81 Stations e l Fl Interpretations The soil Name may not be modified this name will appear in E Model Layers a ye Ee Geology Layers the Legend contents Each individual soil type may be set to o ccc Gravel Visible or hidden from view Eres ae A Fine Sand E Silt EY Hydrogeology L
188. StatonData Tai a IN ale asii 16 Main AAA A alee N 18 POOD pare reer are er rer rer O 18 PEO ECE DIOS EE riada 20 Sta HOTELS a iaa 21 Station Data Data Cate cores errar casilla criaron dr 21 CUE ES diesel 21 COSS A A O A 2l MAPS a o e a eteesedaa 21 A O A O EA 22 PP E E E E ROTO OTOA 22 ON AS WS ics aha ca sre cto a E O 22 Boeno LOSS o aio nie centre cn tse 22 POU aea A ARERR es 22 Des Geton Started conan Terms and NOCAU ON in al ad 24 Creatina NeW POC A OE aaa 24 Step le SetiDatabase EmVironmene dios 26 Select Server ANG Database o ao ici 26 Step Create Project Dependent Tables suicide 27 Step 3 Set Project Properties and LOC amon 525 2 ots ci tiveci tds a E 28 Data MADAME caused esdetacedeaseeensasevecsuosseccauaveneces 30 Enterme Data Mandala is 31 Example Creag a New STaLlOM rodilla AGA 31 Example Ent erine Lithology Data iia site ieectuleen theta eth oes eee atest eee 34 Example Enteros Well Construction Data suscita ii dice 36 Example Enterins Montorins Event Data caia aida 38 Importing Data using the Data Transfer System DTS 0oocccnnncnnnincnonononocnnnnnnnnnnnnonononanonncnncnnos 40 Example Importing Stations from an ExcelFile aida 40 Example Importing Lithology Data ia 47 Example Importing Soil Chemistry Data ccccccssssssssssssessessseeessssseeesseeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 50 Creatine SAGON A A A A 56 Examples Creatine a Station rOn D aabt aint d aci ic 57 Viewme Borehole Los
189. Template Manager may be loaded from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select Settings Template Manager from the Main Menu e Click on the A Template Manager button from the toolbar The Template Manager window is shown in the figure below Template Toolbar Template Editor Demo ee iol x Database j environmental june30o z Xx T y Tm 7 Use as project default Templates TDatabase structure Category Settings Descriptions A Description Pi ade our H Geologic Description LoS ADE 4 Well Construction Table name Description 4 Soil Testing H V Soil Sampling W Monitoring Event 4 Mining Exploration H V Geophysics s H Well History Tree View F User Category Oo Settings Oo Window View settings gt aes En Name Description Tables Fields _ gt x43 E gt Toolbar Last Change 06 30 2004 1 31 40 PM Close Help Chapter 5 Template Manager The Template Manager window contains the following items e The Template Toolbar Contains toolbar buttons that affect templates as a whole e The Database Templates Contains a list of the available database templates e The Tree View Contains a view of all data categories tables and fields for the selected template e The Settings Window Contains the interface for editing tables and fields e The Tables Fields Toolbar Contains toolbar buttons that affect the selected field or table 5
190. To delete an existing condition simply select the appropriate row in the table and click on the x Delete button When you are finished click on the OK button The values should then be colored accordingly in the crosstab report Click OK when you are finished with the Crosstab report the new crosstab report will be saved under the Crosstab node in the HGA project browser Chapter 7 Queries Map Manager The Map Manager is a GIS tool that visualizes and manages geographic data in HydroGeo Analyst and provides the following features and options Import vector maps into a map project Import BaseMap Layers to the Map Project DXF Raster and Shape file formats Georeference and import raster image maps Display Station Groups or Data Queries from the HydroGeo Analyst project as a Map Layer in the Map Project Edit map layers labels order style visibility Draw and edit a point line polygon or text on a map with Annotation tools Create contour maps of a desired data set Create Thematic Maps Bar and Pie Charts of selected fields Select stations using a rectangle polygon circle line or a single point Create new station groups with stations selected in the map project Send a Map view to the Report Editor Export Map view as Raster images Create a legend for the Map Project Turn layers on off and set their properties using Layer Manager Define locations for cross section lines View Statistics for selected data
191. USDA United States Department of Agriculture e DIN 4023 Deutsches Institut fiir Normung e V e AH International Association of Hydrogeologists e Compton Simply choose the desired soil settings from the combo box To customize or create a soil classification press the BH button to load the Material Specification Editor For more details on customizing the soil settings please refer to Chapter 3 Material Specifications Editor You may also enter a Description of the project in the field below the Soil Specifications optional Finally under the Projection Type frame you must specify the coordinate system used for this project You may choose from the following list e Geographic e UTM e State Planar e Others Once the projection Type is selected choose the Projection from the combo box on the right side of the window The Units will be selected automatically based on the selected projection type e g UTM will use m State Planer will use feet etc Once you have specified the required settings you will see that the Finish button at the bottom of the window will become active This indicates that you have entered the necessary input fields for a new project and you can finish the Project Wizard and create your new project Finish to create the project and close the Project Wizard A new project will be created with the necessary tables fields and settings Please be patient during this process The new projec
192. Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The Report Editor allows you to either create a new report for the current map project or add it to an existing one If you choose to add to an existing report the report editor adds the new map to the report As such multiple views of your map project s can be sent to a report one by one Each view of your map project is created with its associated scale bar The map project can be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime Report Designer Note that resizing a map project on the runtime Report Designer adjusts the scale that is associated with that specific view of your map project Chapter 11 The Report Editor As in the previous type of report the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved 11 4 3 Creating a Report Containing a Cross Section Follow the directions below to create a report containing one cross section created in the Cross Section Editor e Start the Cross Section Editor and open a Cross Section e Show hide the desired interpretation layers in the cross section all visible layers will appear in the report e Press the Print button je from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any
193. X section for a X section line A There must be stations in the buffer highlighted red for a X section to be created A Ensure that a layer containing stations 1s selected in the Layer Control Q Value and or Graduated renderer does not change the look of the stations A Make sure that the renderer is set to visible and or the start and end size of symbols in the renderers is greater than 0 preferably 4 or 5 Q When opening map project an error occurs saying a map or a shape file cannot be found A This can sometimes occur if the map file is being accessed or saved on a network computer When adding new shape files to a map project it is recommended that the files be saved to the project s Map folder 15 5 5 3 D Explorer Q My polygons do not show up in 3D Explorer A Ensure that the polygon does not overlap or is not overlapped or by other adjacent polygons Be sure to use the Link Vertex option to avoid overlapping layers A Ensure that the polygon does not have vertices that intersect or overlap within itself 15 5 6 Project Q In the template manager importing tables from Text or MSExcel file is unsuccessful A Try using MSAccess to bring the excel spreadsheet into a blank empty database and in the template manager import the table from this new database file MDB Q Cannot open database requested in login Login fails A Check connection string Select Project Propert
194. _ to_ and one field with type STRING soil_type Drilling Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING method Casing and Screen Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING ex material Filling Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING ex material Hydrogeology Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING ex formation name Water Level Tables must have one fields with type DOUBLE depth_ and one field with type STRING ex comments Pump Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ two time fields named start_ and end_ with type DATE TIME stamp one description field with type STRING ex comments NOTE The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths and not elevations As such the BHLP and Cross Section editor require that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark cry rs The Save as DB Template button allows you to save all changes made to a new user template A separate dialog will be displayed where the name for the template will be provided Use as Project Default The Use as Project Default option allows you to set this template as the default when the project is opened Tables and Fields Toolbar A seco
195. _samples y chemical_n result_value Soil Chemistry 7 1272497425 1472406905 BHG Tetrachloro sys_sample_code 8 1789967438 758741551 BH Tetrachloro 21 1944457306 1842632884 BH20 Tetrachloro Sample_name sample_date 21 1944457306 1842632884 BH20 Tetrachloro eee P 21 1944457306 842632884 BH20 Tetrachloro Haa 21 944457306 842632884 BH20 Tetrachloro result_value result_unit conc_ppm fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment rdl_ppm sample_matrix_code sample_type_code i M Source Condition Project kA Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry result_value Type DOUBLE Rows 6 Time 0 0 0 32 fa Save Query button to save the query Close to return to the main HydroGeo Analyst window This query will now appear as a new node under the Queries branch of the Project Browser A warning message may appear stating Do you want to save changes made to the Station List Yes to save and proceed 2 4 2 Recalling and Executing Queries 64 Once a query has been created it will remain available from the main HydroGeo Analyst interface A Station Group Query will appear as a branch under the Station Group node in the project browser The stations which satisfy the query will be automatically added to this new Station Group A Data Query will appear as a new branch under the Queries node in the project browser To see the re
196. _value ES result_value Date Field Date Granularity none static distribution Day Static Plume F x pelan pata sete Date Field result value result value i none static distributior Help OR Cancel A In the 3D Interpolation window specify the various settings related to the grid size extents and data mappings 3D Plume Project Name Define the plume project name One plume project can contain multiple plumes e g for one or more contaminants Grid Region Define the various properties relating to the grid size e X Value select a field to be used for the X axis e of nodes define the number of grid nodes in the X direction e X min X max define the minimum and maximum X values for the interpolated grid by default these will be read from the data source however you may modify these values 1f necessary Similar parameters exist in the Y and Z directions The Z value should be a field that represents the depth or elevation at which the data value sample was observed If you want to display the plume on the same elevation scale as your cross sections where data is displayed as above mean sea level you may need to convert your sample depths to sample elevations This can be done in the query builder by adding a calculated display field as shown below HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 115 116 Design SQL View Preview Display Fields Function Expression Alias
197. a report template loaded for demonstration purposes Property Toolbox ie WHI Henni PAREADO A si Toolbar gt formate a aL ms ae PA INTA IE Ree er ERA AAA AO SI pore Eii EHH EE i ee oe en oe en ae a eiae r eth e 7 Ni a Hantepet HA Plager A Paget 5 ghStation Expl a l gS labor xplorer s en a Ape ote Project Manager The Manager wr EEN SEH eee EE Layout Designer hy a seer ERE zesse Window A Pela I IEEE EE cu E OREA HH EEE HAN EEE EEH HH te EE ENE Fogar soter Remo Verne Fields 3 gt da re e e eee mae a a Mee ae SH R 348 Chapter 11 The Report Editor The designer window contains the following items e Property Toolbox provides the tools that can be used to edit properties of the report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain e Toolbar provides multiple buttons for functions in the designer e Explorer allows you to browse through the controls that are placed on the currently opened report It facilitates selecting a control for further editing e Layout window provides the interface for designing the report e Fields allows you to select one or more data fields for displaying data Simply drag and drop the selected field into the desired section of the report 11 2 1 Report Designer Toolbars The figure below shows a closer view of the toolbars used in the Report Designer w
198. able If selected a separate dialog as shown below will be displayed where one or more fields can be selected to form the primary key for the table x Set Primary Key as 0 AU o i ree fe from a U to_ ma Dl form_dezc ER E soll type H E pattern H E consistency H E structure H E matgec H E calour H E odor H E formation_hame m formation unit moisture C cammernt hd F Delete duplicate records OF Cancel H Help Te The Apply Changes button allows you to save all changes made to the current user template AL The Move Down button moves any selected table or field one level down in the Database Browser tree view Tables and fields will be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in the order they are shown in the database browser T The Move Up button moves any selected table or field one level up in the Database Browser tree view Tables and fields will be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in the order they are shown in the Database Browser About the Interface 165 5 3 Working With the Template Manager 5 3 1 Modifying Tables and View Settings 166 The Template Manager displays all user tables under their logical categories Information on categories as well as tables and fields can be displayed by clicking on the desired item A description of the interface that is provided to view or edit these items is provided in the following sections Data Categories As mentioned earlier in this document a fixed
199. actors must use the same units For more information see Generating a borehole log report on page 420 Individual column settings are described in the following sections of the manual 12 2 1 Vertical Scale Column Vertical Scale column displays the vertical scale on the borehole log plot Although a table and respective fields for the starting and ending depth could be provided for this column the BHLP automatically adjusts the scale column so that the scale represents the largest column placed on the borehole log plot One or more vertical scale columns can be placed on a given borehole log plot 398 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter This feature may be useful in such cases where displaying the vertical scale in more than one unit e g metres and feet and or a combination of Depth from a certain reference e g top of casing and Elevation from a selected datum is desired To create a Scale column click on the op Add icon on the toolbar From the combo box select Scale A new Scale column will be added to the designer window In the Settings frame in the lower left corner of the window you can set some of the visual details of the column El ES Design H E Lithology H E Well Construction ES SealeEntities WH EX BAN Visible True 7 El Header Text Scale Horizontal Alig Center E Vertical Align Center 7 Font Font Angle 0 Font Escape 4 0 To specify the display information for this column expand
200. added to an existing station group Delete from Station Group Remove the selected stations from a HydroGeo Analyst station group The stations will be removed from the station group map layer currently selected and active in the layer manager Description of Menu Items 267 8 2 7 Settings 268 Cross Section This dialog allows modifying the display properties of features that intersect with cross section lines when viewing a cross section in the Cross Section Editor Selecting this option launches a dialog similar to that shown in the following figure The dialog makes a list of all line type layers available for selection Intersections With Cross Section Lines M Rivers ID Sample Fa M Highway ID Sample w 0 D Contour Mas TCE Mas CONC Sample o 0 M CrossSectionLine name Sample m 50 OF Cancel A cross section line may intersect with one or more cross sections or any line type features such as rivers and highways in this dialog it is possible to specify the features to be displayed on the cross section plots The dialog also allows you to set display properties of these features The following options are available e Name Name of the intersecting layer read only e Field Select a field to represent the layer typically Name ID Text e Font Select a font for the label e Symbol Define symbol properties for the selected layer e Angle Define label angle The Field column contains a list of
201. age 270 for more details Create Cross Section Loads the cross section editor for the selected cross section line This menu item 1s activated only when a cross section line is selected highlighted There are two ways to highlight a cross section line e Choose the cross section line on the cross section line layer e Draw a new cross section line on a station layer For more details on creating cross sections please see Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Chapter 8 Map Manager 8 2 5 View This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of the Map Window and the layers within the map project Full Extent This menu item will zoom the map window to its original full extents Zoom In Provides options for zooming into a section of the map that is defined by drawing a rectangle Place the cursor on the map and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for zooming out on the map Click this menu item and the map window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is already in full extent mode Zoom to Active Layer Zooms the map window dimensions to the extent of the selected map layer Previous Extent Zooms the map window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms t
202. al file Select Kriging with an external drift when only the trend component needs to be estimated and not the residual component where the variable is assumed to be the sum of the trend and the residual component This option is also referred to as Universal Kriging For most situations Ordinary Kriging is recommended and is the default option The SK Mean defines the global mean of the data if Stationary simple Kriging is performed The Drift term defines the drift components if Kriging with external drift is performed Nine drift components are possible e X linear drift in x e Y linear drift in y e Z linear drift in z e Xq quadratic drift in x e Yq quadratic drift in y e Zq quadratic drift in z e XY cross quadratic drift in xy e XZ cross quadratic drift in xz e YZ cross quadratic drift in yz The Variable Trend Estimate allows the user to choose between estimating the variable or the trend The default is Estimate variable The Nugget constant quantifies the sampling and assaying errors in the data In a Variogram plot the nugget constant is the y intercept value The Use variograms option allows the user to select the type of variogram to be used The Variogram models available include e Spherical e Exponential e Gaussian e Power e Hole Effect If the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the P
203. alog will appear with settings for the image file as shown in the following figure Scale Factor Quality ui 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I cia 0 100 Export Depth Palette 256 Colors f Default f Half Tone O Web Safe O 24Bit Color C Graps with System Colors Scale Symbolo i No Symbology Scaled Line Symbology Not Scaled Source Depth C All Symbology Scaled Description of Menu Items 233 234 There are several options for modifying the image Scale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option is available only if the JPEG export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size is also directly proportional to this value Scale Symbology Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Color Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Meta File EMP Properties The Map Project Properties dialog contains general settings for the map project This dialog is shown below Description FC Geographic f UTM O State Planar Non Earth Projection Unit Others NAD
204. already created in your HGA project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find an appropriate match in the current HGA project If one is found you may proceed Otherwise you must include the well section or terminate the import routine and return to HGA and create the appropriate station using the same station name as found in the LAS source If duplicate station names are found in the HGA database there will be a prompt to select the appropriate station The Data Mapping window is divided into two frames e The Source well section found on left side of the window and e The Destination HGA tables and fields on the right side of the window The Source frame which contains the data to be imported can be expanded on the left side of the window If the field names in the source are identical to those in the destination then the fields will be matched automatically For all others you must map the fields using the procedure below The Destination frame contains the HGA database schema all tables and fields under their appropriate data categories From this frame select a Category then a Table from Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst this category and a list of fields will be displayed in the grid on the right side of the window Mapping Mapping fields from the LAS file to the HGA database is described below Select one field from the source file in the left frame Select the appropriate matching fi
205. amples blank control samples and spiked samples are added to sample sets these samples are sent to a laboratory along with the original field samples to be analyzed in a controlled environment using constant techniques instruments and personnel The objective is to identify any sources of contamination that may originate from the lab analysis and provide some assurance to the client that the data is valid and representative of your site conditions HydroGeo Analyst has integrated a Lab Quality Analysis component that allows users to e Define one or more lab quality assessment templates e Analyze Duplicate Spiked and Blank samples e Compare Relative Percent Difference and Coefficient of Variation for Duplicate samples for more details see Check Duplicates Settings on page 427 e Analyze Percent Recovery for Spiked samples for more details see Check Spiked Settings on page 428 e Compare Blank samples to method detection limits for more details see see Check Blanks Settings on page 429 e Execute a Quality analysis on a selected dataset e Display and retrieve assessment results records not meeting assessment criteria will be highlighted e Save assessment results to a MS Excel spreadsheet This chapter is divided into the following sections to help you prepare your data and execute a QC Analysis e Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis on page 424 e Define A New Lab Quality Template on page
206. an be deleted from the project browser 1f you choose not to store it in the database 11 5 4 Exporting generated reports Once a report has been generated it can be exported to various formats as well as being saved in the Report Editor s native format The native format stores reports with an RTF file extension To export a report click on the Da Export Report icon on the toolbar A dialog similar to that shown in the figure below will be displayed Report Export Select the export file Format options Export Format Export Options Filename Acrobat Version fi Acrobat 3 JPG Quality 75 ka No Embedding Fonts Select the desired export format provide a file name and path specify settings relevant to the format as desired and click on the OK button Reports that are saved or exported from the report viewer are not directly managed by Managing Reports 375 HydroGeo Analyst and as such will not be listed in the project browser 11 6 Creating and Managing Report Templates The Report Editor contains pre defined templates which allow users to quickly and easily create professional reports Report templates can be edited saved and managed in the Report Editor and new templates may be created and saved for future use This feature allows users to have different report layout options for headers and footers and to share them between two or more reports This allows users to have as many report d
207. an be used to draw various shapes or labels text on your map project The new map layer will use the projection system of the current map project After entering a filename for the layer the new map layer will be created then placed in the Layer Manager and added to the current Map Window HINT For easy maintenance it is suggested that the Shape files be kept in the same folder as the current map project By default Map projects are created in the Map sub folder of the current Project folder Open Provides options for opening a map layer The Map Manager is able to open any Shape file that has a projection system already assigned to it These Shape files include all types of ESRI Shape files polygons lines points and text Once a map layer is opened it will appear in the Layer Manager and 1s added to the current Map Window Load HGA Data This menu item provides options for loading HydroGeo Analyst data as a new map Description of Menu Items 235 236 layer The data source may be a list of stations from a HydroGeo Analyst Station Group or those resulting from a Data Query Upon clicking on this menu item the following dialog will appear Load HGA Data f Station Group ata Auen OK Cancel H Help In this dialog select the data source type and choose from the appropriate combo box the desired Station Group or Data Query The data will be used to create a new Map Layer and the layer will be displ
208. and Medium Sand Fine Sand Silt Clay FXAaAr E ox ey ss The left side of the window displays the soil types belonging to the selected Soil Classification System SCS which may be chosen from the combo box in the upper left corner The right side of the window provides the interface for editing an existing Material Specifications Editor 127 custom material specification or creating a new one In the lower left corner of the window there are four buttons e Use the button to modify the selected SCS e Use the button to delete the SCS e Use the p button to set the selected SCS as the project default e Use the Wh button to export the SCS In the lower right corner there are several buttons that control the soils belonging to a SCS Use the button to create a New SCS Use the button to save the SCS Use the 45 button to add a new soil Use the El button to delete the selected soil Use the button to move the selected soil type up Use the button to move the selected soil type down 3 5 1 Creating a New Soil Classification System 128 To create a new Soil Classification system SCS follow the steps below e Click the New button e Enter a name for the SCS e You may now proceed to create or add soil types to this SCS Soil types may be added manually or copied from an existing SCS To add new soil types manually e Press the op Add button in the lower right corner
209. and Cross Sections on page 340 below To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A contour map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Contour map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Isoline Map Display Settings Once the Isoline map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below Color fill will fill the space between contour lines with a solid color where the color between lines is scaled according to the lower contour line value Line properties Setting Value e Contour map 3 Visible e Color fill Ll Semitransparent Man value Min value Slice ElLine properties Color from palette Ll Color El Width Style F 1339 7052 3 T on olid m a T El uto intervals Custom Values Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer e Color from palette indicates each contour line will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type e Color indicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected The browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB color e Width is the contour line width e Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals Mame Contour map
210. and notations will be used in this exercise type Type in the given word or value e Click the left mouse button where indicated er Double click the left mouse button where indicated lt Tab gt Press the Tab key on your keyboard lt Enter gt Press the Enter key on your keyboard The bold faced type indicates menu or window items to click The Main Menu items are the items available at the top of the HydroGeo Analyst Parent window 2 1 Creating a New Project To start HydroGeo Analyst Start and choose Programs gt WHI Software gt HydroGeo Analyst 3 0 or double click on the desktop icon When HydroGeo Analyst is loaded there will be no project file loaded by default In order to enter your station data you either have to open an existing project or create a new one using the Project Wizard To create a new project follow through the steps of the Project Wizard as outlined below Project gt New from the main menu or click the E New button from the toolbar A prompt will appear for the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below 24 Chapter 2 Getting Started User Credentials q x User Name Password OF Cancel HGA includes a default user Admin with no password You must enter a valid user name and password for a user that has privileges for creating new projects HGA will then check these credentials in the security document to confirm that this user has th
211. ange of colors and the values associated with each will be reflected in the Color Legend for the selected display element Changing Color Values The parameter values associated with each color can be changed by typing in a new value or by clicking on one of the color boxes beneath the color bar and dragging the arrow to a new location on the color bar Changing Colors The color for each color box can be modified by selecting the color box and then clicking the Change color button or by clicking the button for the color you would like to change Each color can be selected from an RGB 16 million color palette Adding Color Intervals In order to display more than seven color increments additional colors can be added to the color scale by clicking on one of the colors in the color value table and then clicking the Add button A new color entry will be added with a value midway between the previous and next value Deleting a color To remove a color increment simply select the color from the Color Value table and click on the Delete button Resetting the Color Palette The color settings can be reset to the initial default values by clicking the Reset button 337 The Color Legend The Color Legend is a scale of the element values associated with each color The values and colors shown in the Color Legend are defined by the Color Palette settings for the selected data type element see previous section
212. ase see Chapter 7 Queries Station Data Tab This tab allows the user to enter and view the data for a single station This tab can be activated in two ways e Select a data category in the Station Data node in the Project Browser this will activate the selected data category and the related tables will be loaded for viewing and or editing e Click directly on the Station Data tab and the most recently used category will load or the Description category will be loaded as a default Each table in the selected category will be displayed in a separate tab under this tab Each of these tabs displays data from corresponding tables filtered for the Station selected at the top of the window To change the active station simply select a new station from the combo box above the grid Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Category Station selection selection i HydroGeo Analyst Demo F Program l iles HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project DAA eT ES Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help aeZ ORhtxBRalRBOR B 8S Se SD ae iD Egi Station Groups d Station List LER Data Query Station aa Project Data Categor M Monitoring Wells Geologic Description y Select Statio x m Y m Elevation m TOC m M4 Boreholes gt e GB 06 z 535743 69 481407000 330 50 331 5 a Soil Borings pr 7 stations Lithology Hydrogeology Modelling feat res t t el coin Daa Misco sol
213. ata this is especially useful when managing a large number of stations and you want to navigate through HGA without loading the entire set of stations in the station group See Data Loading Options on page 17 for more details Status Bar Displays the program status The following sections describe each of these components in greater detail About the Interface 15 1 5 1 Data Tabs 16 To facilitate data management the main interface is separated into three tabs that are described below Stations List Tab This tab hosts a grid displaying a list of stations for the selected station group Only a few selected columns are displayed in this tab including Station Name X and Y coordinate Elevation and TOC Top of Casing elevation The purpose of this list is to provide an overview of multiple stations and to perform general operations based on one or more selected stations For a more detailed view of an individual station the Station Data tab should be selected Data Query Tab This tab displays results from an execution of any selected data query It can be activated by double clicking on any query under the Queries node on the Project Browser or by directly clicking on the tab itself In addition through this interface you may delete all records from a selected table Note Use this feature with caution as records will be permanently deleted from your database For more details on creating and editing queries ple
214. atch the 3D grid rotate as you do this Stop when you have reached a satisfactory side profile of the fence diagram Chapter 2 Getting Started Finally Z Slider bar and slowly drag this to the right After rotating the grid your 3D image should be similar to the one shown below File Edit view Settings Help GA A om M98 E BC VetticalExaggeration fio xj Stay on top V Default Settings Geology 2 6 HGA3D Sand O Axis H A Site maps Boulder Clay Surfaces H Cross Sections Data Clay Coarse Gravel Fine Sand Gravel Medium Sand Sand EAT Setting b Background E Vertical Exaggera 10 0 Silt _ Interpretation type Geology Stations Label Pri ETitle I 4 Rotate Shift Light Position x Lol m 1 EE ze E IV Live Update Apply Rotate model around the screen axes X up down Y left right Z rock side to side The full capabilities of 3D Explorer are not discussed in this chapter For details on how to use 3D Explorer please refer to Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer File gt Save from the main menu to save the 3D project Once the desired view has been loaded the 3D image may be loaded into the Report Editor To do so s File gt Print from the main menu or click the Print button from the toolbar This will load the Report Manager where the 3D view may be customized or printed as is In the next sect
215. ated to the Borehole log plot Moreover the borehole log plotter is an invaluable tool in the process of making geologic and hydrogeologic interpretations of your data under the Cross Section Editor 393 12 1 About the Interface 394 The BHLP may be launched from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Existing BHLPs can be opened from the Borehole Logs node in the Project Browser by either double clicking on the desired borehole log plot in the available list or by right clicking and selecting the Open pop up menu option e To create anew BHLP template right click on the Borehole Logs node on the Project Browser and select the New pop up menu option NOTE A station group containing at least one borehole needs to be selected in order to launch the BHLP from the HydroGeo Analyst main interface The BHLP can also be launched from the Map Manager and Cross section editors by e Clicking on the E View BHLP button in the toolbar or View gt BHLP from the menu and clicking on a station to select it You may also view a BHLP in the HGA main window by selecting View gt Well Profile from the menu and clicking on the desired station in the station list The BHLP will load and display a borehole log plot of the selected station using one of the available BHLP templates The template being used can be changed using the pull down menu at the top of the BHLP window A typical BHLP window is shown in the following figure Please note t
216. ates are known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y1 world coordinates of the selected location 1000 1 1000 x Cancel Help Enter the X1 and Y1 coordinates for this point Click OK Click the Georeference button again Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point Description of Menu Items 241 e Click OK The coordinates will be entered into the corresponding Georeference fields on the right hand side of the window Once this is complete click OK to continue and the CAD file will be loaded as a new layer into the map project Save Saves the selected layer Delete Deletes the selected layer A layer cannot be deleted while it is in Edit mode Properties Provides options for modifying the symbol for the shapes point line polygon on the current active layer in the Layer Manager The options dialog is shown below Point Style xl Pattern eee ld Font WHI_Symbol ka Symbol x Fil Border T Sample x OF Cancel The dialog shown here is for point shapes There are similar dialogs for line and polygon shapes The available symbol Patterns include circle square triangle cross or any symbol from all true type fonts that may be available on your system If the latter is selected you will have to select the desired font from the Font combo box and the desired symbol from
217. ating Queries e Press the F Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the f Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to 203 204 execute the query string e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the window below 1 Query Builder xaue C Station Group Query Data Query Select a Query Toc Exceeds 320m y Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History FSource Condition Project Design SOL View Preview SELECT t0 id AS id t0 x as x t0 y as y t0 name as name tO toc as toc FROM Station as t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON t0 1D PStation SID WHERE tO toc gt 320 AND PStation ID 1 10 00 4 MO mn 80 5575956823942 80 5658716930292 80 5481372487996 80 5689553863083 80 5596308869504 80 5537873728565 80 5496881 242797 80 5691857577891 80 5575320604261 80 5616076993997 80 550964509041 80 5613306964768 80 557669897809 80 5672792095427 80 554 7642005826 80 5574207847192 80 5459026865231 80 5595532076244 80 5613609731897
218. ation stored in this database Chapter 4 Project Manager A project can also be created in a completely new database in this case HydroGeo Analyst provides a step by step Project Wizard that assists with the project creation process Loading the Project Wizard The Project Wizard can be launched in two ways e Select Project New from the HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu OR e Click on the New button on the HydroGeo Analyst toolbar A prompt will appear for the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below User Credentials x User Name Fassword OF Cancel HGA includes a default user Admin with no password If you have modified this user or added additional users with permissions to create projects then login now with the appropriate credentials The Project Wizard will then appear The Project Wizard contains three steps each step appearing in a new window with the various settings for a new project These include Step 1 Set Database Environment In this window specify the server and database to be used for the HG Analyst project and the connection string 1f necessary e Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables Select a database structure from a list of available templates or create a new database template e Step 3 Set Project Properties Location and Soil Settings In this window specify the project name project folder project location projection system uni
219. available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view The Symbol column contains the symbol options for the selected layer Double click on the field in this column to load the options shown below Chapter 8 Map Manager Point Style Paien oe Font WHI_Symbol ka Symbol x Fil PF Border Sample x OF Cancel The following image shows the intersections between the cross sections y Map Project Site map File Edit View Tools Help walr ZGN X A jx amp E ty YF as gt OCtE de Topography LODaS S8013 E BottLayer2 EM C Geology Medium Sand Gravel Coarse Gravel Fine Sand Silt 80 U HydroGeology Elevation m 280 upper aquifer lower aquifer 00 400 500 600 800 900 Distance m 536 211 4 813 946 0 100 2 536 195 4 814 914 NOTE In order to see intersecting cross sections in the cross section editor the corresponding Map Manager project must be open For more details on managing intersecting layers in the cross section editor please see Intersecting Layers on page 289 Description of Menu Items 269 Code Page Use these settings to convert accented characters into a shape file format that can be recognized by the Map Manager The following options are available Choose Code Page X Please choose the 150 code page for the shape files Memo r Central Europe Latin 2 OF Cancel From
220. ayed in the Layer Manager as well as in the map window This option is available only if a map project is open Import This menu item provides options for importing basemap layers to the current Map Project Basemap images may be Raster Images bil tif grc bmp jpg tga AutoCAD files dwg dxf or MicroStation files dgn Each format is explained below Raster Image A critical element of any Map Project is registering the image map with the correct real world coordinates This procedure is called Georeferencing Since raster images do not contain information on the site s projection system or length units these details must be manually added using Georeferencing Georeferencing assigns points with known coordinates to the image the image is then scaled and the map extents are calculated NOTE The Map Manager does not provide an error trap for invalid georeferencing points Georeferencing Raster Images If a Raster image is selected from the Layer Import menu a message will appear stating that the image must be georeferenced Click Yes to continue and you will be prompted to save the georeferenced image as a new file Chapter 8 Map Manager Save ini 3 Map E WaLne new bmp Ef temp bmp Y test3 bmp PF Test Site Map bmp save as type HEAR ud Cancel Enter a name for the new image The file will be converted and saved as a bitmap BMP This new name will be used as the map la
221. ayers E 4 d TT Setting Visible LayerName Coarse Graw yl Coarse Grav 10 4 Creating Slices and Cross Sections A slice is defined as a 3D planar surface extending horizontally or vertically through the project There are three types of slice objects available e Vertical slices along the XZ or YZ plane extending through the entire depth of the domain e Horizontal slices along the XY plane of the project domain e Cross section slices along a straight line or an irregular polyline through the entire depth of the domain these are based on cross sections available in the 3D project These slice objects define the locations where color maps and contour maps can be plotted for concentration visualization To define the slice locations select Objects Surfaces from the top menu bar A Select create slices window will appear as shown in the following figure The Select create slices window displays a list of the available slices which have been previously defined The Select create slices window also has options to create additional slices or to modify delete existing slices 340 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer f E ey Select create slices slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice na 1 Horizontal slice no 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Edi Delete Modify Select Cancel E 10 4 1 Creating a Vertical Slice To create a vertical slice thro
222. be applied Period enter a period value When the Formula line type is selected the following settings will be available x Name Line type Formula C BestFit Formula Type Constant y Source Series ta y Constant Value fo OK Cancel Formula type select from Constant Exponential Logarithmic or Inverse Source Series select the data source series to which the line should be applied Constant Value When a Constant Formula Type is selected enter a constant value for the location of the line This will result in a straight line drawn on the plot Click OK when you are finished to draw the new line on the plot The line series will appear in the tree under the selected plot The line settings can be modified as described below Line Settings When a line is selected for a plot the Settings tab will display the appropriate Line Settings as shown below Adding Lines to a Plot 449 Settings Mapping Name est Eline Visible True Width 1 Color MA Red Style Solid E Marker Visible False Font Microsoft Sans Serif Spt Font col Wl Black Symbol Triangle Color Gi Blue Si 4 4 Name set the line name Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Show hide markers on the line using the Visible option Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify th
223. below Template Manager Demo Environmental z Database structure H V Description E H V Geologic Description Database Settings Well Construction TALE mama screen Table type H Drilling Protocol E i Global H Casing SS Global Time H Screen from_ to Param 3 Param 4 Param 5 Parar Depth Interval Y screen_id 1 A from 140 105 105 0 OLX x e y Use as project default Table Settings Descriptions Examination Event Monitoring Point 7 to Depth Point Monitoring Point escription Examination Event V diameter V screen_type V slot_number z 4 Annular Fill Table relationships H A Monitoring Points Table is parent to E 4 Soil Testing Primary key _ Table Foreign key H Soil Sampling screen_id P qu_level Screen_ID H Monitoring Event Mining Exploration 4 Geophysics W Well History Table is child to User Category Table Primary key Foreign key View settings Name Screen XxX amp Ob6 24 Last Change 07 27 2004 2 04 42 PM Close Help The number of fields that need to be selected as a foreign key depends on the number of fields making up the primary key in the current table In tables where the primary key consists of only one field the cell where foreign keys are to be entered displays a combo box with the list of all fields
224. bservations are taken at specific locations in the map coordinate and elevation In HydroGeo Analyst these sampling sites are known as Stations Station Types In HydroGeo Analyst all data is saved and referenced to a Station A Station is a unique real world location at which data collection activities are performed Depending on the scope a project may contain single or multiple station types each with its own attributes Typical examples of stations are explained below Boreholes A borehole is a hole drilled at a site for exploration of subsurface geologic structure soil and rock parameters and groundwater characteristics Station attributes for a borehole include Station ID Site ID coordinates elevation depth date of drilling driller name method of drilling number of layers soil and rock classification used types of sampling split spoon soil samples static GW level etc Pumping Wells A pumping well is installed in a borehole and may be used for water supply or aquifer test analysis Station attributes for a pumping well include Well ID site ID coordinates elevation depth date of drilling driller name method of drilling number of casing intervals maximum casing diameter and type minimum casing diameter and type number of screened intervals screen diameter and type type of pump average productivity pumping rate etc Observation Monitoring Wells An observation well may be used to monitor groundwater
225. cified machine Note If you cannot see your local WHI instance of MSDE when creating a new project or opening an existing project please refer to 15 5 Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s for some troubleshooting suggestions Next select a Database on this Server Database combo box To create a new database select Create New Database from this list Enter a name for the database in the window shown below then click OK Using the Project Manager 147 Database name f x Name OF Cancel E Help Next button in the lower right corner of the Project Wizard window to proceed HydroGeo Analyst will then test the connection to the server and scan the database to see 1f the required tables exist in this file For new databases HG Analyst will create the required tables Please be patient during this process NOTE When using MSDE the database will be created in the default directory Program Files Microsoft SQL ServeiMSSQLSWHIDatal with the file extension mdf Be cautious when un installing MSDE as this may result in the loss of your data If the server connection and database are valid the next window in the Project Wizard will be displayed Otherwise there will be a warning notification regarding the server or database If this is the case please select another server or database for your project or verify whether the connection exists Option 2 Build Connection String I
226. cise For an example of how to create charts please see Chapter 14 Adding Plots In the next section you will create a map project and display some of the boreholes on the map 2 5 Mapping the Data Once the data has been entered into a HydroGeo Analyst project quite often it is helpful to relate this data to features on a base map and create contour maps or thematic maps Pie or Bar charts for interpreting the data This can be done using the Map Manager The first step 1s to create a new map project 2 5 1 Creating a Map Project In this section the Borehole stations will be loaded onto a new map project To create a new map project Mapping the Data 65 Tools gt Map Manager or right click on the Map node and select New A prompt will appear to enter a name for the new map project as shown below HE New Map Project Name Sample OF Cancel FJ Help type Sample OK A new Map window will appear To load the stations from HydroGeo Analyst on to the map project Layer gt Load HGA Data from the menu in the Map Project window The following window will appear e Station Group C Data Query OK Cancel FJ Help Use this option to load Station Groups or Map Ready Data Queries into your map project Ensure the Boreholes Station Group is selected OK The Borehole Stations will then be plotted on the Map in the Map Project window as shown below 66 Chapter 2 G
227. ck in the outer fields surrounding the query condition and parentheses will be added to the query condition An example is shown below Chapter 7 Queries 7 Query Builder y ii 101 x Xe E Design i i Station Group Query Data Query an SQL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields Bedrock30 y Expression Alias station id id Description at Ss Geologic Description nro E pil lithology soil_type soil_type rom to soil_type RI oP yx V Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Consistency Structure ASTM Descriptor Color Conditions Expression Expression lithology from_ 30 Odor lithology soil_type formation_name lithology from_ formation_unit E lithology soil_type moisture comment x M Source Condition Project y Advanced Close Help Field Name lithology soil_type Type STRING Rows 21 Time 0 0 0 15 Enclosing the two or more conditions in parentheses allows you to further refine the query criteria Use AND or OR operators inside and outside the groupings to combine the conditions so as to obtain the best results For the example above the query will return all stations in which at least one lithology interval begins below 30 meters AND contains clay OR 1f the stations have at least one lithology interval that begins below 50 m AND contains Silt e Press the EF Generate SQL Sta
228. click add a vertex at desired and appropriate locations both within and outside station intervals e Continue to move the mouse cursor across the cross section using the left mouse button at each station to add a vertex at the desired location for the model layer e At the right cross section boundary click once more with the left mouse button to add a vertex and complete the line when the mouse cursor becomes close enough to the boundary line the line will snap to the boundary The selected model line will be drawn at the specified location NOTE The model line is drawn using the attributes that were defined for it at the time it was created Most attributes of a model interpretation layer can be modified by right clicking on the desired model interpretation layer and choosing Properties from the pop up menu e A dialog similar to that shown below will appear Model Line x Mame Description Pattern Colo ME see f2 Sample OF Cancel e Provide a Description Line Style Line Color Fill Pattern for the model interpretation layer the Name for the layer cannot be modified as the name is defined in the Model Layer Options dialog e Click OK to close the dialog e Once this is finished repeat the same sequence of operations for other model layers within the cross section domain Restrictions on Model Layers The following restrictions apply when drawing model interpretation layers 302 Chapt
229. contourmap O o pr n e D gt o E Borehol oreholes o sample map gr bmp Layer Information Shape File Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum DWGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 14 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N 533 874 4 812 410 1 23 184 2 5 4 Defining Cross Section Lines The Map Manager also provides an interface for drawing and defining the locations of cross sectional lines Since the Map Manager provides a plan view of station data it is a simple task to draw lines in the location s of the desired cross section s Cross Section lines are defined using the CrossSection Line option A line is drawn through the desired stations then a buffer distance is provided to specify which stations to include A large buffer distance will result in selecting stations further away from the line a small buffer distance means that only stations close to the line will be selected Only the stations within this buffer distance become highlighted and selected for the cross section interpretation The cross section may then be created using these selected stations 74 Chapter 2 Getting Started An example is provided below on how to define a cross section line in the Map Manager Before proceeding hide the ContourMap as it will no longer be needed ContourMap layer from the Layer Control list ee Remove the check mark for the Visible status for this layer This layer will now be hidden from
230. copy of the manual which requires the Adobe Reader to view If you do not have the Adobe Reader a link has been created in the interface to download the appropriate software for free The Installation button will initiate the installation of the software on your computer HydroGeo Analyst must be installed on your hard disk in order to run Please read the section on hardware requirements at the beginning of this section to ensure that your system meets the requirements before you start installing the software Ensure that you have administrative rights for the installation and software registration NOTE f the installation interface fails to load automatically you can e Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the CD ROM drive e Open the Installation folder e Double click on the installation file to initiate the installation Please follow the installation instructions and read the on screen directions carefully Although the HydroGeo Analyst Software needs to be installed on a local hard drive the location of the database will depend on e the expected size of the data e the number of anticipated users and e data and system security The SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine commonly known as the Microsoft SQL Server Database Engine MSDE can be installed on your hard drive as part of the installation process If the WHI MSDE is installed it will be setup as the default database server The MSDE 2000 is a database engine built and based
231. cross sections place a check mark beside the Select All check box at the top of the dialog Select any Surfaces you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the same manner Gridded surfaces can be created in the Map Manager see Chapter 8 Create Gridded Data for more details Select any Plumes you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the same manner Plumes can be created in the HGA main window see Chapter 3 3D Interpolation for more details When you are finished OK This will load the 3D Explorer window For more details on how to use 3D Explorer please refer to Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Information Provides a window containing information on the selected station After selecting this option you may place the mouse cursor on a particular lithologic column within a selected station A small text box appears displaying specific information about the layer layer type top and bottom elevations and thickness If the station in question has screens the Information feature can also highlight their pertinent features Preview BHLP Allows you to view the borehole log plot BHLP of any station in the cross section To view the BHLP select this option and click on any station in the cross section Description of Menu Items 285 9 2 4 Tools Options Allows setting line snapping options for lines drawn on the cross section If this feature is selected the dialog shown below will appear
232. ct Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Num_Neighbors Number of nearest data points to use when calculating inter polated value for each grid node Z Only Allows the user to select between outputting the original X and Y values plus the interpolated value x y f x y or the interpolated value only f x y Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings 463 15 3 2 Natural Neighbor 464 The Natural Neighbor method Watson 1994 is based on the Thiessen polygon method used for interpolating rainfall data The grid node for interpolation is considered a new point or target for the existing data set With the addition of this point the Thiessen polygons based on the existing points are modified to include the new point The polygons reduce in area to include the new points and the area that is taken out from the existing polygons is called the borrowed area The interpolation algorithm calculates the interpolated value as the weighted average of the neighbo
233. cted template into the BHLP viewer Plots The Plots node contains a list of all plots that have been created and saved for your project Double clicking on a plot will load the Plotting component 22 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Getting Started This chapter is a tutorial which provides instructions on how to Get Started quickly using your own data sets There is information on how to create a new HydroGeo Analyst project then enter manipulate and visualize the data The user is encouraged to refer to respective chapters in this manual for more details on each module The chapter is organized into the following sections 2 1 Creating a New Project e Database Environment e Template Settings e Project Settings 2 2 Data Management e Entering Data Manually e Importing Data Using the Data Transfer System DTS e Grouping Stations 2 3 Viewing Borehole Log Plots e Selecting a Template e Saving and Printing 2 4 Querying the Database e Creating a data query e Recalling and executing queries 2 5 Mapping the Data e Creating a Map Project e Importing and GeoReferencing Site Maps e Creating Contour maps e Defining Cross Section Lines 23 2 6 Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections e Creating Geological Cross Sections e 3D Visualization of Cross Sections 2 7 Preparing Reports e Creating Reports with Data from Project e Creating Charts Terms and Notation The following terms
234. d x 2 fa es In this window define the client applicable to the project A list of clients may be defined in this window for use in future projects Follow the steps below Ss Add button in the lower left corner to add a new client For each Client name enter the Company name address and contact info A logo may also be defined for each client Once this is complete al Save button to save changes to a client OK to load the selected client into the project manager for this project Other functions in the Client window are summarized below e Use the x button to remove the selected client from the list e Use the button to edit the selected client e Use the button to undo the edits for the selected client Under the Logo frame e Use the Qu button to load a new graphics for the logo e Use the L button to paste a file from the clipboard for the logo e Use the button to remove the selected logo file Once back in the Project Wizard the next step 1s to define the project location and projection system In the next line enter your Project Location and specify the Soil Classification Settings SCS The soil classifications will be used to represent soil materials in the cross sections and borehole plots in the program One of the existing SCS s may be selected or a new SCS may be easily created The available soil settings include Using the Project Manager 155 e USCS Unified Soil Classification System e
235. d by highlighting the target slice in the list and clicking the Modify button This will open the Slice Properties window where the desired changes can be made 10 5 Scene Configurations When using 3D Explorer to display and animate data it is important to be able to save the various display settings for fast and easy recall during a presentation or for comparing different views 3D Explorer is able to save the display settings by selecting File Save Scene configuration from the top menu bar or by clicking the lt 5 Save Scene configuration button in the toolbar This will load the Save Scene Configuration dialog Scene Configurations 343 lt B ey sawe scene configuration for Configuration Hame Ad Cancel Type the desired name of the scene in the Configuration Name field and click OK This scene configuration including attributes rotations and shifts can be loaded during a later session by selecting File Load scene configuration from the main menu bar or by clicking the e Load scene configuration button in the toolbar 10 6 Saving and Exporting Options The displayed image can be saved by selecting File Export Diagram from the top menu bar or by clicking the EH Export Image button in the toolbar The following Save picture as graphics file window will appear e Save picture as graphics file E i aj xj picO gi Browse Image Size Width Height In the Image Size field openin
236. d password 3 Select the database on the server If it is preferred to create a new database then leave this field blank 4 Press the Test Connection button in the lower corner of this dialog to ensure that a valid connection to this Server exists The additional tabs in the Data Link Properties window include Advanced includes default network settings All view and edit all OLE DB initialization properties available for the OLE DB provider Properties can vary depending on the selected OLE DB provider For more details press the Help button in the Data Link Properties dialog to view an on line help for this component S ee Click OK once the Data Link settings have been defined to return to the Project Wizard The Connection String will now appear in the Database Environment window An example is shown below Project Wizard Al E Step 1 Set Database Environment C Select Server and Database The Project Manager allows you to create a database for your es Seay ee ae project on a SOL Server of your ma Windows Nl Tntesrated Buthoreation choice through a four step process User Name sa ELA In this first step select a SQL Ses Server on which your project s database will be created and Database E select create the database on that server Server plsserenssvsvenssvensensnsnsnnssensensnsnssessenssesseny Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security SSPI Persist Security Info Fa
237. dation This step provides a preview of the mapped fields and ar indication of any emoneous records Records with errors wil not be imported fou may f lutn lo previous steps lo make any corechons bo the mapping Al The top of the window each tab represents a differen abase lable containing one of more mapped fields The last step in the import involves previewing the data to be imported and taking appropriate actions with regards to erroneous data The Data Validation window as shown below displays all data ready to be imported Errors or warnings if any will be listed along with the data Records with errors will not be imported You may return to previous steps to make any corrections to the mapping The data is checked against the following conditions e Proper Station Locations e Data type compatibility NOTE All coordinates in the database are stored in latitude longitude format WGS 1984 for internal use regardless of the projection system in the source file and project The Preview in this window displays the converted station co ordinates However the station co ordinates may be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst in any projection system desired At the top of the window each tab represents a different database table containing one or more mapped fields Accepting or Rejecting Records Any of the records in the preview window may be accepted or rejected To accept the selected records click on the e Acce
238. de Gs CC a GH Donat SERRANA di SFRRRRPHOGPFE Model Gs CC a Ge Doa 1 CIA VI FEEFEACIA Mode LANE Coo a Ge Casos Gores on eer ae Pi Colca LEA CC a Ge Era hard ma OL TE OO BES Cenk Ros CCC a Ge a Rede an SRO OO Geckos eos CC a Cda Cay AA E Genk I fo Bus For more details on using the Query Builder please see Chapter 7 Queries 9 6 Adding Annotations to the Cross Section Text labels lines and shapes can be added to any layer in the cross section To add annotations you must select the layer but NOT make it active i e do not check the active edit check box Once the layer has been selected right click and select Annotations from the list of options The Edit options shown in the following screenshot can be used to add edit and delete text lines and polygons 1 Save Delete View SD Gopy From Geo Layers Properties w Geology Label Update trosssection Show Intersecting Info P _ Annotations Edit Text Edit Line Edit Polygon Settings To add an annotation select the appropriate option from the list to enter Edit mode then click the corresponding button from the toolbar You can then user your mouse to select the location to add your annotation After adding an annotation you will need to click on the corresponding button again to add another annotation of the same type NOTE If you are adding editing deleting one annotation type you must right click on the selected layer and either sw
239. dichloroethylene interpreted_qualifiers Tetrachloroethylene reporting_detection_limit Trichloroethane result_comment Trichloroethylene TWOC Vinyl Chloride Source Condition Project pa Advanced Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry result_value Type DOUBLE Rows que Time 0 0 0 15 Likewise if a date is necessary for one of the Expression fields simply double click on the date field or press the button and a mini calendar will appear as shown below Query Builder A 10 x 0xAA 2 a Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query station id station name name EH Chemistry_Sample AT E Chemistry_Results AO i 7 Name station toc oo lt sample_date chemical_name EE May 2004 June 2004 EX result_value result_unit Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Sun_Mon Tue weed Tu a gt conc_ppm reporting_detection_li 23 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 tdl_ppm 9 10 11 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 __ Operator ciones d 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 x E 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 27 28 29 30 interpreted_qualifiers 30 31 start_depth A mid depth ZD Today 7 1 2004 end_depth E Cancel Help result_comment sample_matrix_code sample_type_code sampling_reason y Source Condition Project z Advanced Close Help ial Rama cham Fima AN NAN NAN Select the appropriate date then click OK
240. dinate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Appendices Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Mag X X co ordinate magnification factor Mag_Y Y co ordinate magnification factor Mag Z Z co ordinate magnification factor No_ Value Value assigned to nodes located outside the convex hull of the data points where interpolation is not performed Allow_Extrapolation Is a flag to use extrapolation for nodes outside the convex hull of the polygon formed by the data points In this case linear regression is used to fit a plane through the data set and calculate the interpolated value This should be used with caution since extrapolation is less reliable than interpolation Sdip Calculate the aspect and slope at each grid node This can be used to augment the elevation information T
241. ditor also provides the option to save the well contacts using the station s X Y co ordinates and retrieve this info from the database For more details on this feature please see Interpretation on page 291 and see Querying Cross Section Interpretations on page 305 Export Image Provides options for exporting the current cross section to a Raster Image file Supported file types include bitmaps BMP Joint Photographic Experts Group jpg and enhanced Meta Files EMF Enter a filename and choose the desired export format and click OK An Export dialog will appear with settings for the image file Scale Factor Quality Scale Symbolo 256 Colors Default f Half Tone O Web Safe 24Bit Color Graps With System Colors f No Symbology Scaled Line Symbology Not Scaled Source Depth All Symbology Scaled DK Cancel H Help There are several options for the modifying the image provided in this dialog Scale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option is available only if the JPEGs export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size is also directly proportional to this value Scale Symbolog
242. dow select the Source Conditions The options are Project Station Group and Database Station Groups Monitoring Wells Next add the fields for the query For charting purposes it is not necessary to define conditions for the fields simply add the fields to the Display fields Also the coordinates are not necessary so the Map Ready option can be disabled Check the box beside Map Ready to turn OFF this feature The fields for the query can be selected from the tree structure on the left side of the window beside Monitoring Wells Chemistry Results Sample_Date Click once on the field and drag this field into the Display Fields at the top of the window Repeat this for Result_value field Result_Value Click once on the field and drag this field into the Display Fields at the top of the window If your data is contained in different fields and or tables select these fields now Once you are finished the Query Builder window should be similar to the one shown below Creating Reports with Charts 381 7 Query Builder OXEA Station Group Quern Data Query Select a Query chart tvoc_ 7 Design SOL View Preview Display Fields Expression 4 station name name ES chem_test_resultsO sample_date gt sample_date a chem_test_resultsO result_value gt result_value a 4 Description Geologic Description Well Construction S
243. droGeo Analyst 5 table of contents TOC e Core logs images can now be added to borehole log plots from any image type field in the database General e Itis now possible to delete unwanted HGA SQL Server databases e A wide list of map projection systems have been added e A number of defects were addressed since v 1 0 1 2 About HydroGeo Analyst HydroGeo Analyst is implemented through a number of modules each performing a specific task This approach allows HydroGeo Analyst to be memory efficient flexible and expandable In addition with most of its data and settings implemented in the Extensible Markup Language XML there are unparalleled and unlimited possibilities to develop third party components to work with the software Some of the modules that come with HydroGeo Analyst include e Data Transfer System e Template Database Schema Manager e Query Builder e GIS Map Manager e Cross Section Editor e Borehole Log Plotter e Report Designer e 3D Visualization A brief description of each module is provided in the following sections while a more detailed discussion is presented in later chapters 1 2 1 Data Acquisition Data Entry Most environmental data is inherently spatial as observations are taken at specific map coordinates over time In HydroGeo Analyst these sampling locations are referred to as Stations HydroGeo Analyst comes with standard easy to use data entry grids equipped with drop down combo boxe
244. dules e g Data access maps queries BHLP Template Manager etc e Create and manage user groups i e create edit delete user groups and add remove edit users in to existing user groups Project administrator can assign access rights to User Groups for each object Data Management Maps Cross Sections etc Set user ID for Users names description and access passwords e Enforcement of access levels to each user group as per the specified security document e Store Users and User Groups in database templates for re use in future projects GIS Map Manager e Add or remove stations from existing cross sections e Display summary results on map in a tabular format e modify display properties of table color style fields e define conditions and highlight values that violate a specified value or a value from another field e g useful for highlighting contaminant exceedences What s New in HydroGeo Analyst 3 Cross Section Editor e Remove wells from cross sections e Create new annotation layers text line polygon this allows adding text labels shapes or lines that can that can represent faults e Improved data management for cross section interpretations e Interpretations are saved to the database e Interpretation results are now linked to the stations that were selected for the cross section these stations along with their interval data are saved to the database e Interpretation results and the wells and correspondi
245. e 2 1 3 Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location 28 The third step in the Project wizard contains general project information as seen in the figure below LT ioi x Step 3 Provide Project Location Settings Project Name SampleProject This step allows you to set project E properties and assign project Project Folder D Program FilestHGAnalystiProjectsiS ampleProject E personnel Client Define a project name and select a project folder all folders and Project Location files that will store project related information will be created under Soil Specification Ro i the provided Project Folder Descrinti Select or create a client for the escription project Select a Sail Specification Projection Type for the project The Soi r Projection Specification contains soil names C Geographic and patterns which will be used z to visualize your lithology data in C UTM borehole log plots and cross State Planar Units sections C Others Required Field Cancel Help In this window specify a project name folder and client s In the first line type SampleProject for the Project Name In the next line the Project Folder is defined By default the project name will be used for the folder name and the project will be created in the HGAnalyst Projects folder as shown above If desired the project directory can be changed now by clicking the
246. e must be taken as any improper setting may corrupted your project Server sty Y Windows NT Integrated Authorization Password ES Database demore ssi OCS User Name Modify these settings only if the database is moved to another server is renamed or user access tights are changed Build Connection String Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security sspi Persist Security Info F alse Initial Catalog demo_vgw Data Source srv Use Procedure for Prepare 1 Auto Translate T rue Packet Size 4096Workstation ID aschalew Use Encryption for Data False T ag with column collation when possible False j Help Miscellaneous Settings This dialog provides access to project coordinates and soil classification system Project Location m Projection Typ C Geographic esenensncnos State Planar Others Projection NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N y Units meters Y Project Location waterloo Ontario Soil Specification DIN 4023 bd a Description Demo Database based on the data from a Visual Groundwater Specify the project location and coordinate related settings The Soil Specification contains soil names and patterns which will be used to visualize your lithology data in borehole log plots and cross sections x Required Field Using the Project Manager Cancel Help 157 If the projection system is changed existing station coordinat
247. e 24 Description GB 01 Scale If you have set a Print Scale factor please see BHLP Default Settings on page 397 for more information by default the scale will appear in the lower left corner of the BHLP report Alternately you can use the Report Designer please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor to add a label named Scale in your header footer information The default label will automatically be removed if a label named Scale is added Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting 421 422 The BHLP Report may be printed directly by clicking on the Print button saved to a report archive file by clicking on the J Save button or exported to one of several file formats including RTF PDF HTML XLS and TIF by clicking the ay Export button If you would like to modify an existing report template or if you did not select an existing template and are creating your own report you can modify the report design to suit your needs For more details on designing and modifying a report please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter 13 Quality Control When collecting analyzing and interpreting environmental data Quality Control QC can come in many forms and fashions HydroGeo Analyst supports a Lab Quality Control component that allows users to verify the accuracy of the analysis results reported by a laboratory As part of a data collection process duplicate s
248. e Open menu item is used to open existing HydroGeo Analyst projects Only projects with the extension VBH may be opened in HydroGeo Analyst The VBH file contains basic information for the project including a connection string to the HydroGeo Analyst database The 41 Open button in the toolbar performs the same function When opening a project there will be a prompt to enter the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst User Credentials xj User Name Password OF Cancel The default User Name is Admin with no password Enter the desired password then click OK to continue NOTE Only one user may access and modify a HydroGeo analyst project at a time Open from Backup Use this option to open a back up copy of the HydroGeo analyst project and database This is useful if a remote client or colleague needs to open your HydroGeo Analyst project and SQL Server database A back up of the SQL Server database can be made using the BackUp Database option available in the Tools menu explained later in this chapter A copy of the HGA project can be made by simply copying the project folder and its contents using Windows explorer Restore Database As ey x Server WAYNEWWHI y This dialog allows opening a project and restoring related database to the s selected local server Project D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Pro
249. e a name and description and close 15 5 8 Reports Q The time axis in the chart does not display the correct time format A In order to modify the time X Axis go to the Chart Properties select Axes Annotation For the Method select Time Labels and in the Time Scale options select Months and enter the Time Format b Y 15 5 9 Miscellaneous Q Changes not saved in the Template Manager A Please make sure you click on the Apply Changes button below the Database Structure tree before saving and closing This is a known issue that will be updated in a future version of HGA Q lam trying to display the results of a query which ran successfully but I am getting an Incorrect Syntax near error message A This issue is caused by having a hyphen in your computer name The issue will be resolved shortly in the meantime you can simply change your computer name to remove the hyphen or install HG Analyst on another computer Q Can I export my soil specification or lists so I can use it with different database and projects A If you create a database template based on a project where you have designed your own specification or where you have entered your specific choices for your lists any future project based on that database template will have the soil specification lists that you have created Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s 475 Q My filling is not showing up in my borehole log plots
250. e available For Depth Point based graphs the plot column supports the following plot types e Points e Connected vertices line graphs with or without points e Bar charts For depth interval plots the area under the plot may be filled in To create a Plot column click the Add icon and select Plot from the combo box provided A new Plot column will be created in the BHLP Designer window To create specific plots within this column select the newly added Plot sub node from the Designer tree and click the op Add button again The Add a Plot Series window shown in the following screenshot will open Add a Plot Series x Plot Series Type f Depth Interval Plot Properties Label Description Category Time Unit Pumping Rate Conductivity Concentration Recharge Equivalent Concentration baf From this window you can define the Plot Series Type and select a plot Category and Unit to use The categories are based on the unit categories available in the current database template Enter a Label for the plot and click OK Depending on whether you selected Depth or Interval for your plot the Entities displayed in the Settings window will be slightly different 407 408 Depth Interval ES IntervalE ntities E ES Plot ES DepthPlolEntities E Es Plot ES DiepthEntities E ES Interval ES IntervalEntitiez EES Plot DataTable 7 DataTable E TopEntity E Depthe ntity Capti
251. e color Size Set the size of the markers along the line 14 5 Saving and Exporting There are several options available for saving exporting and printing your plot page design 14 5 1 Saving Plot Page Design Once you are satisfied with the current plot page design click on the Save button on the toolbar The new plot will appear under the Plots node in the HUA tree 14 5 2 Saving Plot as Template Once you have designed the current plot to your style and data needs you can save the design as a template for re use in future plots To do so 450 Chapter 14 Plotting Right mouse click on Plots and select Save as a plot template from the menu Enter a name for the plot template and OK The template will be available next time you create a new plot in the Add Plot dialog under the Templates combo box Deleting Plot Templates Plot templates can be deleted from the main HGA window Right mouse click on Plots in the HGA project browser tree and select Plot Templates The following dialog will appear Plot Templates i Select the template you want to remove then click on the x Delete button at the top of the window 14 5 3 Export Plot Page to Graphics File To export the current plot page design right mouse click on the plot page design node in the tree and select Export Plot Page to Image from the pop up menu The image can be saved to the following graphics file formats BMP JPG TIF EMF
252. e freely moved from one computer location to another so long as there is NO POSSIBILITY of it being used at one location while it is being used at another Just like a book can t be read by two different people in two different places at the same time Specifically you may not distribute rent sub license or lease the software or documentation alter modify or adapt the software or documentation including but not limited to translating decompiling disassembling or creating derivative works without the prior written consent of Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc The provided software and documentation contain trade secrets and it is agreed by the licensee that these trade secrets will not be disclosed to non licensed persons without written consent of Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc II Warranty Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc warrants that under normal use the material on the CD ROM and the documentation will be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 30 days from the date of purchase In the event of notification of defects in material or workmanship Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc will replace the CD ROM or documentation The remedy for breach of this warranty shall be limited to replacement and shall not encompass any other damages including but not limited to loss of profit and special incidental consequential or other similar claims III Disclaimer Except as specifically provided above neither the developer s of this softwar
253. e loaded by pressing the Load Scene Configuration button and selecting it from the presented list Background color sets the image background color By default the Background color of the display window is black Title e Text color sets the color of the Project title text e Text size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen size Axis e Text color sets the color of the Title text e Text size sets the size of the Axes labels as a fraction of the total screen size e Line color sets the color of the axes lines E Setting Background color E Test color El lz Text color ElLegendz Text color E E E EEN E LA E i Live Update Apply NOTE For printing it may be helpful to change the background color to white and the axis color to black Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Legends e Text color sets the color of the Legend text Resetting Options The currently viewed scene position can be reset to the Default Setting by selecting Edit Reset scene position from the top menu bar or by clicking on the ME Reset Scene Configuration button in the toolbar NOTE The Reset options remove all display objects except the axes the axes labels and the project title 10 3 2 Project Display Settings Display Settings The HG Analyst Project element consists of general project settings as shown in the figure below
254. e mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list In each source table stations must be identified at least by station names Step 2 Data Mapping Source Destination Table sheet v Map source fields to destination fields Conditions DOUBLE station LONG om DOUBLE m y from_ DOUBLE m vV to DOUBLE m y to_ DOUBLE m V soil_type STRING soll_type STRING v form_desc STRING form_desc STRING X consistency STRING E X structure STRING X matgsc STRING X colour STRING X odor STRING E X formation_name STRING E X formation_unit STRING E X moisture STRING E X comment STRING C Requires a unit to be selected CO Required field E Foreignkey Linked Fields Total of records 78 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Under Destination Geologic Description for the new Destination Data Category Lithology for the new Destination table Under Source Table Sheet1 if it is not already selected from the combo box Next map the fields and select appropriate units In this example most fields are automatically mapped since the field names in the source are identical to the field names in the destination However the ID field must be manually mapped and the units must still be selected for the length field types m for the units for the From_ and To_ fields Use for both these fields Next to continue The next window is Data Validation
255. e mouse button All stations within the circle will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Allows to select stations near a drawn line To draw a line place the cursor at one end of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and digitize a line through the area of interest To add a vertex to the line click with the left mouse at the vertex location To finish the line double click the left mouse button at the final vertex location This will open the buffer distance window Chapter 8 Map Manager Buffer x Butter meters OF Cancel Enter a buffer distance from the drawn line and click OK All stations within the buffer distance of the line will become selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol The Buffer distance extends out perpendicular to the line location All All stations on the current Map Layer will be selected None All stations that are selected on the current Map Layer will be deselected NOTE Once selected you cannot deselect individual stations Add to Station Group Provides an option to add the selected stations to a HydroGeo Analyst station group Using one of the Selection tools mentioned above select one or more stations then choose this menu item from the Select menu and the following dialog will appear li Select Station Group Jol x Please select Station Group OF Cancel Stations can only be
256. e nor any person or organization acting on behalf of him them makes any warranty express or implied with respect to this software In no event will Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc assume any liabilities with respect to the use or misuse of this software or the interpretation or misinterpretation of any results obtained from this software or for direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages resulting from the use of this software Specifically Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc is not responsible for any costs including but not limited to those incurred as a result of lost profits or revenue loss of use of the computer program loss of data the costs of recovering such programs or data the cost of any substitute program claims by third parties or for other similar costs In no case shall Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc s liability exceed the amount of the license fee IV Infringement Protection Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc A Schlumberger Company is the sole owner of this software Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc warrants that neither the software and documentation nor any component including elements provided by others and incorporated into the software and documentation infringes upon or violates any patent trademark copyright trade secret or other proprietary right Royalties or other charges for any patent trademark copyright trade secret or other proprietary information to be used in the software and documentation shall be con
257. e plot component may be launched from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e To create a new Plot Page Design right click on the Plots node on the Project Browser and select New from the pop up menu e Existing plots can be opened from the Plots node in the Project Browser by either double clicking on the desired plot in the available list or by right clicking and selecting the Open pop up menu option NOTE A data query containing the required fields see below must be selected in order to launch the plots mode from the HydroGeo Analyst main interface A typical plot window is shown in the following figure Viewer Plot Page Window Design Designer z ceria bs DEA el ROO SampliNg Date Toolbar p 50027 127s Ge ADN 12s Settings Data Source SampllNg Date Humber of Columna 2 Chloride Time Series Plot Sulfate Time Series Plot Spacing Heaght ZERES Plot Settings amp Data Source 120 100 BEES TAS TR 128000 1240001 SampliNa_Di be lavan The plot window contains the following items e Plot Page Design Tree A list of all available plot page designs plots and series such as Lines and Standards e Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the plot design e Plot Settings and Data Source Contains the settings for the selected entity and data mappings e Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the plot page design 436 Chapter 14 Plotting 14
258. e plotted starting from the Lower limit value The Labels setting is used customize the appearance of the contour labels Visible shows or hides the labels Text color controls the color of the label Text size controls the size of the labels Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value Multiple Labels enables showing multiple labels on the line Distance sets the distance value between each label smaller distance values will result in more labels Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label 10 3 6 Plumes Display Settings 328 HGA 3D Explorer is capable of displaying and animating 3D Isosurfaces volumetric plumes of soil or groundwater chemistry data The 3D Plume must be generated from a data query in the main HGA window before displaying it in 3D Explorer For details on how to generate the plume please see Chapter 3 3D Interpolation The plume can be added to the 3D Project when working in the cross section editor for more details see Chapter 9 View 3D You may also import a plume into an existing 3D project to do so select File Import Plume from the main menu The plume may be visualized with one of the display formats shown below when you right mouse click on any data plume in the model tree Region MI Add Isosurface i SE E add Colormap e A Add Isolines Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer e Add isosurface see Isosurfaces on page 329 for more details e Add color map s
259. e selected Draw Polygon button allows a polygon to be drawn in the active layer This feature is active only when a polygon shape file layer is selected and set to be editable Draw Rectangle button allows a rectangle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shape file layer is visible and set to be editable Chapter 8 Map Manager A About the Interface Draw Circle button allows a circle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shape file layer is selected and set to be editable Draw Line button allows a line to be drawn in the selected layer This feature 1s active only when a line shape file layer 1s selected and set to be editable Draw a Point button allows a point to be inserted in the selected layer This feature is active only when a point shape file layer is selected and set to be editable Insert Text button allows for text to be inserted on the selected layer This feature 1s active only when a text file layer is selected and set to be editable Information button allows the information for the selected station or any other object such as contour lines to be viewed Measure button allows the distance between two points on the map to be measured Delete Selected Object button allows the selected object polygon rectangle circle line point or text to be deleted from the active layer This feature 1s active only when an
260. e selected object To delete a vertex e Activate the desired cross section interpretation e Select an object that is a polygon or line e Click on the Be button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu e Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be deleted the mouse cursor will change to an X e Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object e Repeat the last two steps to delete more vertices from the selected object Link Vertex The Link Vertex option allows for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines It is intended to assist in filling in gaps between adjacent polygons or lines thus creating continuous interpretations The end result is that polygons or lines will be able to share a common linked vertex or vertices To Link Vertices on polygons or lines Select the desired interpretation layer and make it editable Select the polygon or line whose vertex will be linked with another vertex e Click the Link Vertex option from the Edit menu or click the button from the toolbar Click on the desired vertex source vertex that will be linked with another one the color of the vertex changes to green to indicate it has been selected e Move the mouse cursor to the desired destination vertex to which the previously selected vertex will be linked The mouse cursor will change to a red square outline when a vertex is identified Click on this red square
261. e the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager on page 126 for more details Importing Lists The list items may also be imported from an external data source To do so e Using the procedure described above load the List Editor and select the appropriate table and field for which a list is to be imported e Click on the 4 Import from external database button at the bottom of the window The following dialog will appear Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Import List from External DB x Data Source Connection String fimport ud 2i a Table Field Description Total Items Click the Data source button i in the upper right corner of the dialog e The Data Link Properties dialog will appear Select the desired data source For help using the Data Link Properties please refer to Appendix B Click OK on the Data Link Properties dialog to close Click on the Refresh button to refresh the dialog with information from the selected data source A list of tables 1f any are available will appear in the Tables combo box Select the Table that contains the list to be imported Select the Field column in this table which contains the Values for the list Select the Field column that contains the Description if necessary e The list items for this field will appear in the preview frame in the lower half of the window e Once satisfied with the c
262. e the value in the provided text box OR e Compare to a Field select another field from the data query to compare against The possibilities are limitless but here are some examples e concentration gt 5000 ug l a government guideline or MCL as shown in the screenshot above e depth to bedrock gt 40 feet e overburden thickness lt 50 feet e concentration of a chemical exceeds the criteria limit where the criteria limit 1s available in another field in the selected data query In the Choose Data tab you can specify which stations should display the data table This 1s useful 1f you have a station group with numerous stations and are interested in displaying the data summary table only for a few stations Chapter 8 Map Manager Data Settings E x Display Fields Condition Choose Data Select one or more stations for which data will be displayed EJ e e e e e e Get Selection from Map Cancel H Help Simply place a check box beside the stations that should display the data summary table If you click on the Get Selection Map button then the Map Manager will get only those stations that are selected on the map layer on the map project and use only those for the Display Data This button is enabled only if you have at least one station selected in the map layer Once you are finished click OK to return to the layout window From the Layout Setting dialog click on the Display Settin
263. e user specifies Max points per octant to be greater than 0 an Octant Search is employed to find the neighborhood of points for interpolation The Max radius and Min radius defines the search distances in user specified units in the maximum horizontal direction and the minimum horizontal direction for determining the neighborhood of points for interpolation For isotropic data the two radii are the same Enter the Vertical Radius value if 3D Kriging is to be performed If the total number of points in the data 1s large gt 200 computation time for Kriging may be reduced by specifying a smaller radius for the search The Angle1 Angle2 and Angle3 parameters define the search ellipsoid for situations in which anisotropy is present in the data The Kriging type options are e Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean e Ordinary Kriging e Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file e Kriging with external drift The following guidelines are recommended for selecting the type of Kriging Choose Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean if the mean value is known and is constant throughout the area Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings 467 468 Select Ordinary Kriging if the mean is not constant everywhere and needs to be recalculated dependent on the location of the neighborhood Choose Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file if the mean is not constant and has to be read from an extern
264. e window e Click OK to begin the import The Template Manager creates the new table by importing all fields and their settings into HydroGeo Analyst The created table will have the General structure The Template manager does not attempt to capture primary key settings so this must be defined after the table and its fields are imported In addition as with any table the user has the option to modify the properties of the table All newly imported tables Working With the Template Manager 169 170 automatically become child tables to the Stations table Deleting Tables A table can be deleted by selecting it from the project browser and then either by clicking on the x Delete button at the bottom of the window or by right clicking and selecting the Delete table pop up menu item NOTE The stations table is required in all projects and may not be deleted However it is possible to modify some of the fields in this table with the exception of the station ID name and X Y co ordinates Defining Table Relationships Once the primary key is set for the selected table a relationship between the current table and other tables in the database can be established To create relationships in the Table is PARENT to grid select one or more tables to which the current table would be a parent table Then for each table select one or more fields that will serve as a Foreign key in each table An example is shown
265. eal numbers used for storing measured values such as measurements or concentrations e Bit Field contains a tick box e Image Field can be used to store a raster image e DataStamp Field contains date value e TimeStamp Field contains a time value e DateTimeStamp Field contains a date and time value 172 Chapter 5 Template Manager The View Settings section of the interface allows all users to define e A name for the selected field e A Default value e Data display format e Unit for data entry whenever applicable e Validation Depth rules e A list of values to be used for the field The name for the field provided in the View Settings is the one that will be displayed in HydroGeo Analyst Whenever the field s data type allows a unit for data entry can be set to something different from that which is in the database For instance if a well depth is set to use the British Imperial system of units e g feet in the database and the new data to be entered is in the metric unit system e g meters the unit in the View Settings section can be set to be in the metric system All data entered in this system will be converted to the appropriate unit system used in the database The Template Manager also allows providing validation rules for the selected field If provided these rules will be used to protect the user from entering erroneous data into the database In HydroGeo Analyst all data that does not comply wit
266. ect All station groups that are created for a project are listed under the Station Groups node below the Project node Clicking on a Station Group node will load the Station List tab and display a limited number of columns of data for the stations belonging to that group Additional fields and tables for each Station are available through the Station Data tab discussed later in this section Station Data Data Categories The Station Data node displays the visible data categories under which project tables are organized Clicking on any of the data categories activates the Station Data tab if it is not already active and displays a tab for each of the tables classified under the selected data category The Station Data tab displays information pertaining to the station currently selected in the Station List tab As mentioned earlier in this manual data categories are provided to enable logical groupings of your tables Queries The Queries node lists all the queries that are created and available for the current project Double clicking on any of the queries under this node executes the query activates the Data Query tab and displays the returned results Crosstab The Crosstab node lists all the crosstab query reports that are created and available for the current project Double clicking on any of the crosstab reports under this node will load the crosstab query component where you can modify print or export the report Maps
267. ection selecting too many stations may result in a crowded display 9 2 5 Help Contents Launches HGA Help placing the focus on the Cross Section Editor section 9 3 Creating the Cross Section As mentioned earlier cross section locations must be drawn using the Define Cross Section Line option or the CrossSection Line button 3 in the Map Manager See Chapter 8 Defining a Cross Section Line for details on this procedure Once the cross section line is defined the corresponding cross section can be created from the Map Manager as follows e In the Map Manager select Tools gt Create Cross Section from the main menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button MH on the toolbar e Click Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to the cross section Creating the Cross Section 295 line will be used as the cross section name e The cross section editor opens the selected cross section and displays the stations and related information The cross section shows projections of the borehole lithologic columns on the cross section plane By default the top of model layer 1 ground surface will be drawn in for you The starting point of the cross section line will appear on the left side of the cross section window the end point of the line will appear on the right side of the window Locations for layers must be interpreted and drawn manually using lines or polygons layer types may be Geologic Hydrogeologic
268. ections 08 09 1996 B w 02 01 02 1993 Borehole Logs ol a z 3DView Borehole Logs Pan AES 4 08 09 1 99E 01 02 1996 ogogo w OD ooo o i 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 y Rows 230 Time 0 0 0 40 00000000000 C00 ann 5 yao Borehole Logs Project Report from the HGA main menu bar A prompt will appear to select a Report template this is optional OK The report preview window will be displayed In order to add the chart you must return to the report designer Return to Designer button from the toolbar The designer window should appear as shown in the figure below 384 Chapter 11 The Report Editor New Report SARA lO CORA E poo les I zl EN T EA X n abl a OB Bone MALAH jua amp S oe SEA A A TE a re pai E B MainReport H PageHeader Detail H S PageFooter E ESA AE Name rs e aa BackColor EIA EEI EEEIEE BackStvle 0 dUeKTrar mE CanGrow True CanShrink False ColumnCo 1 ye i colunnbr 0 Downaer ColumnSp 0 height 223 KeepToge False NewColurr 0 None NewPage 0 None Visible True For display purposes 1t will be advantageous to add a group header to gro
269. ee Color Maps on page 331 for more details e Add isolines see Isoline Maps on page 333 for more details Refer to the respective sections for instructions on how to create these display elements and for details on the display settings associated with each one The display settings shown below controls the global settings for all Plume display elements Setting Value al Mame result value Palette ElColor legend Visible ie 0 015 x Frame fil eolor Eo a o A The Name option controls the display name for the plume in the tree view The Palette option controls the color scale used on all Plume display elements A description of the Palette options is available below see The Color Palette on page 336 The Color legend settings are used to modify the appearance of the color legend as it applies to all color map display elements A description of the Color legend options is available below see The Color Legend on page 338 Isosurfaces An isosurface is a 3D planar surface defined by a constant parameter value in 3D space Isosurfaces are typically used for demonstrating the spatial distribution of a selected parameter For groundwater modeling purposes isosurfaces are generally used for representing the spatial distribution of concentrations HGA 3D Explorer allows you to create and simultaneously display multiple isosurfaces for the one or more plumes in your project Creati
270. eld from destination in the right by expanding the appropriate data category and table amp Click on the Map button Mapped fields will then be added to the Preview grid at the bottom of the window Repeat these steps for additional fields To remove the mapping for a selected field Select the appropriate row in the Preview grid amp Click on the Delete Mapping button Units Due to the flexible nature of the LAS file there may exist one or more parameters with units that are not supported in HGA as such unit conversion will not be possible during the import Where the unit categories and units exist HGA will attempt to do unit conversion and import the data If the destination field does not support the selected source units there will be no conversion and the data will not be imported For this reason 1t may be necessary to modify the field settings for your database schema before proceeding with the import For more details see Chapter 5 Modifying Fields and View Settings When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 101 102 Import LAS File Step gt Select coordinate system for the source lt lt CE ee This step allows you to specify Projection Type Projection the coordinate system used for S the station in the data source UTM State planar MAD 1983 UTM Zone 17H 5 elect the appropriate Geographic C Othe
271. elect the desired fields from the left panel under Layer Fields then move fields to the Display Fields under the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the gt gt button To remove fields from the Display Fields click on the lt or lt lt buttons respectively Use the 1 button to move the selected field up Use the JL button to move the selected field down Click on the Condition tab and you will see options for defining validation rules for one of the selected fields along with display settings for the table Description of Menu Items 253 254 Data Settings X Display Fielde Condition Font Header Row Color zz Grid Line Color NM Violation Aow Color 3 Violation Fiel Field Condition Compare To result_val gt ie Value 5000 i Field Cancel 53 Help The Header Row Color controls the color of the first row in the layout table The Violation Row Color allows you to assign a color to values in the table that exceed the violation conditions explained below This is useful for quickly identifying exceedences on the map The Grid Line Color controls the color of the gridlines in the table Under the Violation Field frame you may specify a condition for one of the display fields Select a Field from the combo box then a Condition lt gt etc and define the Compare To settings There are two options available e Compare to a Value simply typ
272. elect this menu item again Hide Selected Columns When this menu item is selected any columns that are selected in a grid will be hidden from the current view This can be useful for focusing on a selected criteria for a Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst selected group of stations This item is only available if one or more columns have been selected in an active grid Show All Columns Use the Show All Columns menu item to display all columns in the active grid this will restore any hidden columns to the current view This item 1s activated only if a grid is active and one or more columns are hidden Collapse All Use the Collapse All command to collapse all nodes of the project browser The selected active node will remain active after collapsing Expand All Use the Expand All command to expand all nodes of the project browser The selected active node will remain active after expanding The same function is available by right mouse clicking on the project browser Refresh All Use the View Refresh item to refresh all nodes of the project browser as well as the active grid with data from the database It is useful to Refresh the view after making changes to the database template or modifying stations or station groups You can perform the same function by clicking the 2 Refresh button in the toolbar or by right clicking in the browser window and selecting Refresh All 3 2 4 Record The Record menu provides several
273. ell casing Chapter 5 Template Manager etc will be listed in the Example tables Select a sample table to view the structure including the required fields colored in blue Selecting any one of the sample tables and clicking on the Save button at the bottom creates the table with all the required fields After a table is added as many fields as desired can be added to the table In addition all settings such as defining or refining the primary key and relationship to other tables can be undertaken Importing Tables A new table can also be created based on a table structure read from any OLE DB supported database To import a table source structure right click on a data category select the Import table structure option from the pop up menu and the following window will appear 5 Copying Table Structure to Database Source Connection String Table gt Station ID Data Exampl y y Total Records Click on the 7 button to build a connection string to an existing database or file The Data Link properties dialog will be displayed For assistance on using the Data Link Properties please see Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing e Once the data source is selected click on the Refresh button e Select the Table from this database and the field which should be used as the StationID from the respective picklists A preview will appear in the lower half of th
274. ely touch adjacent polygons this can be easily fixed by selecting a vertex on a polygon and using the pointer tool to re position the vertex Alternately gaps between polygons can be filled by using the Link Vertex option These options are explained below Once a layer is created in one cross section it will be available for selection in all other cross sections that you might have for your project Altering the properties of a given layer will be reflected in all cross sections Editing Layers Once the interpretation layers are drawn it may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more vertices or fill in the gaps between any two adjacent layers to create a continuous layered structure To move a vertex e Select the amp pointer tool from the toolbar e Click on one of the vertices of the polygon e Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex e Select the amp pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once anywhere on the polygon to activate the object e Select the 4 Add Vertex tool from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Geologic interpretation layers can have a free form and do not have to conform to a conceptual model e g a sand layer may appear more than once in an individual cross section Layers may not have to continue from first to last borehole However to
275. em Station Data This option allows for importing data from an LAS Log ASCII Standard file a standard format introduced by the Canadian Well Logging Society in 1989 The LAS file contains two types of sections e Well Information Section data related to the station location driller etc e Parameter Curve Information Sections descriptive and or measured data for one or more downhole parameters When importing the LAS file in HGA the following options are available e Import the Well Sections and Parameter Curve sections use this option if you want to import a new station and one or more measured parameters for this station A new station will be added to the HGA database using station details name co ordinates etc in the LAS file If the station already exists in HGA you will be prompted to overwrite the details using those in the LAS source In addition data from one or more parameters Parameter Sections may be imported to one or more tables in your database e Import only Parameter sections use this option if this station already exists in your HGA project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find an appropriate match in the current HGA project When you select this option the following dialog will appear Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Import LAS file Step 1 Select LAS file select data souce The first step requires selecting LAS File the import package and data SOUICE
276. ematic Pie Chart for HG Analyst station data A HydroGeo Analyst Data layer from the Layer Manager to ensure that Description of Menu Items 247 this layer is active e g a Station Group or Data Query layer such as Boreholes Monitoring Wells etc Select the menu option Map Create Thematic Map Pie Chart from the Map Manager main menu A Thematic map window will appear as shown below Create Thematic Map Fields in Table Fields for the Theme ELEVATION TOC ELE rs Hent Cancel H Help Enter a name for the map in the Name field This name will appear in the thematic map list should you choose to edit it later From the left panel select the fields for map Move fields to the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the gt gt button Next to proceed to the next window ELEVATION Max Size 40 Points TOC Min Size 20 Points Preview In this dialog specify the field color by clicking on the colored rectangles to the right of 248 Chapter 8 Map Manager each field and specify the chart size in the Max size and Min size fields A preview window in the lower right corner displays a preview of the true size and color of the thematic map as it will appear in the Map Manager OK to create the map The thematic map is an entity of the selected layer when this layer is hidden the corresponding thematic map will also be hidden The Bar Chart is created
277. ements i Live Update Apply e Name Sets the name of the display element as it appears in the Model tree e Visible Shows hides the selected display element On Off The following is a brief description of the various display elements and the display settings for each display element listed in the Display Tree 10 3 1 Default Settings The Default Settings are used to define how selected objects are initially displayed when a project is first opened If Default Settings of the selected objects are modified the new settings may be saved and applied to all HG Analyst 3D Explorer projects The Default Settings include e Background Color e Title Color and Size e Axis Text Color and Size and Line Color Display Settings 321 322 e Legends Text Color The modified Default Settings can be saved by selecting either File Save scene configuration from the main menu bar or clicking the Save Scene Configuration button in the toolbar The following Save scene configuration dialog will appear ra Save scene configuration for HGA3SD Configuration Mame 10 x Using this window the most recently viewed scene configuration can be saved by entering a name for it When you close 3D Explorer the scene configuration you have at that moment will be automatically saved as Default When HG Analyst 3D Explorer re opens this project it is opened with the Default scene configuration Any other user defined configuration can b
278. en only few of them are needed may be a time consuming process especially for large databases containing hundreds or thousands of stations The solution is to create Station Groups Grouping stations into their logical groups allows efficient management and quick retrieval of data stored in the database For instance all stations which contain groundwater chemistry sampling data can be grouped together under a group named as GW Sample Locations Whenever these stations need to be updated with a new groundwater sampling round selecting the GW Sample Locations group displays only those stations that belong to this group Station groups can be created based on any criteria Common examples include e Locations of the stations e g locations sorted by City Project Sites etc e Station type e g Monitoring Locations Boreholes etc or Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e Purpose of Study e g remediation site monitoring There are two ways of creating Station Groups in HydroGeo Analyst e Directly Select two or more stations directly in the Station List tab right mouse Click and select the Add to Station Group option from the pop up menu e Indirectly Using the query builder define a more advanced search criteria and build a station group with those stations that satisfy the query criteria All station groups created for a project are listed in the Project Browser under the Station Groups node Clicking on any of the sub nodes c
279. entered in this frame By default the record s Background Color will be changed to yellow However the user has the option to modify the Font the Background Color and the Border Color of the record by clicking on the appropriate button s 13 2 2 Check Spiked Settings 428 A matrix spike is an aliquot of sample that is spiked with a known concentration of target analyte s prior to sample preparation Ideally there should be 100 recovery of the spiked concentration or very close to this The following settings are available Chapter 13 Quality Control Spike Settings Minimal percent recovery 95 Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color e Minimal Percent Recovery The percentage of the substance added to a spiked sample that is detected It is the difference between the concentration detected in the spiked sample and that detected in the un spiked sample divided by the concentration of the substance added to the spiked sample Minimal Percent Recovery measures accuracy the higher the percent recovery the greater the accuracy must be to be considered acceptable NOTE The analysis assumes that the sample that is being spiked is a blank and does not contain any detectable concentrations of any of the contaminants You may not use a field original sample for a spiked sample analysis e Highlighting The options are the same as described in Check Duplicates Settings on page 427 13
280. enu command Project Export Grid and the following dialog will appear Save As Ei EI Save in E Borehole E ex File name eholes_G eologic_ Description Hydrogeology Save az hype Tex Ecay Cancel Select the appropriate file format and enter a file name then press Save 7 7 Printing Query Results Using the WHI Report Editor you may insert Query results into a report template for fast and easy printing To send the query results to the report editor e Select Project Report from the main menu or e Click on the print button yey on the toolbar In the Reporting component the query may be saved or printed For more information please refer to Chapter 11 The Report Editor Exporting Query Results 215 7 8 Crosstab Queries 7 8 1 Introduction Crosstab queries are special types of queries that allow you to store your data in a normalized manner in your database but generate and display pivoted denormalized outputs from that data In other words crosstab queries let you format existing data queries by rotating rows to columns to see different summaries of the source data for easier analysis and reporting Suppose you want to display a pivoted view of your chemistry results whereby each row represents a different sample at each station and each column represents results for each analyte Another common example within the environmental industry is to show analyte names reporting units a
281. er cross sections that you create for your project Altering the properties of a given layer will be reflected in all cross sections Once the desired view has been obtained the cross section may saved To do so File gt Save from the main menu or click the Save button from the toolbar Then remove the editable status for the Geology interpretation To do this Edit check box beside Geology in the layer control For information on drawing model layers or hydrogeological interpretations please see Chapter 9 In the next section you will view the cross section in 3D Explorer 2 6 2 3D Visualization Fence Diagrams The HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer allows for visualizing multiple cross sections in three dimensions and combining cross sections for creating fence diagrams In addition you may visualize transient contaminant plumes for one or more chemicals in your project To load a cross section into 3D Explorer View gt View 3D from the main menu or click on the E View 3D button from the toolbar In this dialog you may select which cross sections surfaces or 3D plumes should be added to the 3D project OK to accept the default settings This will load the 3D Explorer window as seen in the following figure Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections 81 82 File Edit View Settings Help AAA EPR ES verica Exaggeration hi x Stay on top Iv Default Settings coe E
282. er 9 Cross Section Editor e The model layer line must start at the left boundary and end at the right boundary e The line must be drawn from left to right and may not go backwards i e no vertices can be drawn left of a previously drawn vertex e Model layer lines cannot intersect each other e Model layers need to be drawn in the order they are created For instance the bottom of model layer 3 can not be drawn between model layers one and two Snapping Vertices to Other Model Layer Lines While drawing a model layer interpretation line it is possible to snap to part of or all of the vertices of an already drawn model layer line This can be helpful for defining geologic layers that pinch out 1 e have zero thickness in some parts of the site Snapping between two selected vertices Whenever a model layer line is drawn and the vertex of the line is within the buffer for a vertex of an adjacent model layer line a blue box will appear outlining the vertex on the adjacent line If the mouse is clicked on this vertex the vertex will snap to the existing vertex The line vertex will change to an orange color to indicate the vertex is linked shared between the two model layer lines You can link to as many vertices as desired by repeating the above step However if snapping to a series of consecutive vertices is desired you may click on the first and the last desired vertices The cross section editor will create the necessary numb
283. er of vertices on the model layer line being drawn and link them to their respective vertices For instance if there are five vertices on the existing model line layer between the selected first and last vertices six vertices will be created on the current model layer line Linked vertices will move together and can be separated if needed The following figure depicts an example of a model layer pinching out around the middle of the cross section Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 303 EEE f k ES Project demo project map 1 iol ee File Edit View Tools A 2 aE Panes Os Topography osoon Overburden quife Aquitard Main Aquifer 330 Geology Clay Sand Gravel Bedrock 320 310 HydroGeology adsfsadf Snapping between two vertices 300 Elevation m Snapping to end of cross section 290 Mike test33 260 270 280 250 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 Distance m 1373 17 328 91 Snapping to the end of the cross section line If the model layer pinches out from any given point on the cross section to the end of the cross section line the cross section editor can draw the model line from that given point on for you To do this double click on the first vertex The model line will automatically be created for you See the bottom mo
284. es will be converted into the new projection system If the Soil Classifications System is changed existing cross sections with defined geology will be impacted It may be necessary to reassign geological soil types with the new soil classification system and recreate the cross sections 158 Chapter 4 Project Manager Template Manager The Template Manager is one of the most powerful tools provided with HydroGeo Analyst It allows you to edit the structure of your database as well as set an unlimited number of user level views of the database The Template Manager provides the tools to e Add delete tables e Add delete fields e Alter the properties of each table field e Group tables under logical data categories e Edit table designs define primary keys relationships between tables etc e Save user templates e Export user templates to a stand alone XML file e Create and edit linked fields e Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users e Set visibility of tables and or fields e Setting user level table and or field names display units where applicable and data formats where applicable 5 1 Understanding the Template Manager HydroGeo Analyst comes with a number of standard environmental database structure templates that are currently in use around the world When creating a new database for your project you have the option of either using one of these database templates or creating you
285. ese files are listed below where projectname is the name assigned to the project A description of the content of each file is given below 15 1 1 HydroGeo Analyst Main Module projectname HGA projectname UDL projectname WHI History XML 15 1 2 Map Manager projectname VMP projectname ALS projectname BPW mapname DXF mapname BMP JPG etc projectname WDL projectname MAP projectname LYR projectname DBF projectname PRJ projectname SHP projectname SHX projectname XML Appendix A HydroGeo Analyst File Types 453 15 1 3 Cross Section Editor projectname V CP projectname DBF projectname SHP projectname SHX projectname XML 15 1 4 3D Explorer projectname 3XS projectname BPW projectname BMP 15 1 5 Reports 454 projectname W RP projectname WTP projectname RDF projectname RPX projectname TPX projectname XML Appendices 15 2 Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing The Microsoft Data Link Properties dialog appears throughout HydroGeo Analyst whenever an option to import data or entities or Build a connection string exists A few examples are e Importing lists in the List Editor e Importing tables in the Template Manager The following section describes briefly an example of how to Build a connection string and import an Excel file using the Data Link Properties For more details please refer to the context sensitive Help buttons in this module The example below applies to impo
286. ese privileges For more details on assigning user access controls please see Chapter 4 Application Level Objects If you have modified the default Admin user or added additional users with permissions to create projects then login now with the appropriate credentials Click OK The Project Wizard window will load as shown below Project Wizard A f 101 x Step 1 Set Database Environment Select Server and Database The Project Manager allows you to create 4 database for your E A project on a SOL Server of your IV Windows NT Integrated Authorization choice through a four step User Name sa een CM A In this first step select a SOL Password Server on which your project s YAA T database will be created and Database CACA AI ee su select create the database on that server Server SAW q Next Cancel EJ Help tio Cover Bob The Project Wizard contains three steps each step appearing in a new window with the various settings for a new project These include e Step 1 Set Database Environment In this window specify the server and database to be used for the HG Analyst project and the connection string 1f necessary e Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables Select a database structure from a list of available templates or create a new database template Creating a New Project 25 Step 3 Set Project Properties Location and Soil Settings In this window
287. esign window that appears enter a name for the new borehole log design 1 New BHLP design Pe x Name Sample OK Cancel Help Note that the background color of the text box turns red if you type the name of an existing borehole log design indicating that you cannot have two BHLP s with the same name Modify your new template name slightly and the OK button will be re enabled In the Borehole Log Designer window that opens the borehole s you have selected previously will be made available in the Select Station combo box at the top left of the borehole log designer You can now add the desired elements to the empty BHLP template as shown in the following screenshot Designing a Borehole Log Plot 411 E Select Station 1 m Elevation m TOC mi BH1 TEN 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 0 ES Design Close Export Y Print Y Help 12 3 1 Adding Lithology Column To add a column to the BHLP right click on the Design node in the tree view and select the Add column menu option or click the h Add button in the toolbar Borehole Log Designer Sample oo ioj xj Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 Save Save As Add Group Add Plot Series Delete Show Settings Close Export Y Print Y Help Select Column Type Select the desired column type from the pop up menu and pre
288. esigns as desired For example one or more report templates can be prepared for each client with the specific header and footer Another advantage of having a report template is that if the header information using a certain template changes the change will automatically be applied to all reports that use the template without the need to reopen the report For example if the client company s telephone number changes the user needs to change only the template instead of changing each report Each time a new report is created previewed or printed it will use the active report s layout unless a template is specified 11 6 1 Creating A Report Template The Report Editor allows you to save the active report s design as a report template for future use Once you are satisfied with the design of the currently opened report s layout click H Save As button to save it as a report template In the dialog that is displayed provide the name for the template check the box beside Save as template and click on Save The template saves the header the footer as well as the background for the detail section of the current report The detail section may have background watermarks such as DRAFT CONFIDENTIAL etc at desired angles and locations The header and footer may contain relevant information for your company and or client including logo name Address Telephone Fax e mail and web site address The user can also config
289. ess to WHI Reports 2 0 Start KE Starting conversion Conversion complete Database The Following report were converted From database Summary report Josimar visual Pocos Sistemas Visual Pocos Project xSectionSample mdb to WHI Report gt Relationships For CrosSection Convert Finish i Wext gt Finish Click the Finish button and the converted report will be displayed in the runtime designer Once all desired modifications are done to the report it can be saved using the procedure discussed earlier The final report can be visualized by clicking on the Report Preview on the toolbar 11 8 Creating Reports with Charts Various types of charts can be added to your report using the chart control To add a chart to a report click on the Chart icon on the toolbar and place it at the desired location following the procedure outlined earlier in this chapter Once the chart control is placed on the runtime report designer its properties can be set Creating Reports with Charts 379 by activating the control and clicking on the filha Charts Manager icon on the toolbar The dialog shown in the figure below will be displayed Charts Manager Chart D1 1 Primary Asis Winyl Chloride sample_date result value 2 Primary Asie TCE 3 Primary Asie PCE Mame 4 Primary Axis 1 1 BCE chemical_name sample_date result value resulto unit More Options gt gt Add Remove Ok Cancel Ap
290. essage will be shown at the top In order to filter these records select the corresponding warning and click on the Reject button just below the control that lists warnings and errors See section 6 1 4 on page 191 for details 6 1 3 Station Related Settings If the data to be imported contains information for new stations some additional information may be required in order to allow proper data transfer The Station Related Settings window as shown below will only be displayed 1f data is imported to the Stations table Data Transfer System Import N A oj xj Step 3 Station Related Settings Coordinate system in source Projection type Projection UTM State planar NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N y Geographic Others PA Coordinate exclusion filter x 99999 0 Y 99999 0 Note X IRA This step allows you to specify the Add all new stations to coordinate system used in the data source All coordinates will be converted to WGS 1984 for internal use You can also provide missing coordinate indicators if any All new stations will be included in the PROJECT station group These stations could also be added to one or more of the existing station groups You can also use the last row to add a new station group and include these stations in it OIEA CACA Boreholes_with_plot_data Please check the boxes next to the station group you would like to group these stations in J
291. etitive or unnecessary data or values where this is no significant change Active Use this option to enable disable the filter Value Set the filter value Any consecutive plotted data points with a value less than this specified filter value will be hidden from the plots when the filter 1s active Title Enter a Title for the plot Legend The following Legend settings are available Visible Show hide the legend Alignment Set the Legend position choose from the following options e Top e Bottom e Left e Right 444 Chapter 14 Plotting Style Controls what data elements or series appear in the Legend choose from the following options e Automatic e Series Names e Series Values e Last Values e Palette Vertical space Controls the amount of vertical space between each data element in the legend higher values will result in more space between each item in the legend Inverted Legend Use this property to reverse the order of items in the legend For example items in the order A B C will be inverted to the order C B A when this property is selected Check boxes visible Use this property to display a check box beside each item in the legend when active you can then use the Legend check boxes to show hide which data series are visible on the plot Font series color visible Controls the font color for the text in the legend Vertical Y Axis Plot Settings Pen width Controls the thickness of the axis
292. etting Started Map Project Sample_ Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help 3 7 Boreholes O o G a T 2 2 3 M Layer Information Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 nit Degree Feature Counts 20 533 867 4 811 769 1 30 913 In the Map Project you may create a new map layer that contains a map image from any of the following sources e Raster Images BIL TIF GRC BMP JPG TGA e AutoCAD files DWG DXF or e MicroStation files DGN This feature is demonstrated in the next section 2 5 2 Importing and Georeferencing a Site Map An example of how to import a map is provided below Layer gt Import gt Raster from the Map Project main menu Sample_Map bmp file located in the folder D Program Files HGAnalyst Examples A warning message will appear verifying that the image must be georeferenced Yes to continue A prompt will appear to define a name for the new site map Enter the name Sample_Map_GR bmp where GR indicates that the image will be georeferenced Save to continue The Georeference window will appear as shown below Mapping the Data 67 i Description Se 0 x File Options Georeference Point x1 v1 x2 Y In order to map the pixels of the image to a coordinate system the image must have two georeference points with known coordinates
293. ew Preview Select a Query Display Fields Query OC_Exceeds_320m Function Expression i station id id List Chemistry_S ample aoe x E Chemistry_Results e a X pema y sys_sample_code station toc TOC a Name Available oe chemic Fields X Y Map and BHLP Ready Y Use current projection system er conc_ppm O Conditions C on diti ons reporting_detection_limit En Expression j station toc gt 320 X fractioncode chem_test_resultsO result gt 1000 X interpreted_qualifiers start_depth mid_depth PX end_depth Group By List result_comment Field eos sample_matrix_code y s m a Function Field Operator Value Operator Source Condition Project y Basic Close Help Source Field Name chem_test_resultsO result_value Rows 114 Time 0 0 0 47 Oo Oo Conditions Oo Advanced Grouping Oo Options NOTE The Query Builder window is context sensitive The window will contain different settings depending on the selected Query type The Query Builder window contains the following items e Display Fields Select the display fields for the query e Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to most of the functions in the Query Builder e Query Type Choose from a Station Group Query or a Data Query e Query List Select an existing query from the list e Available Fields Select fields for the query from the tables in the database e Conditions Displays the Query conditions e Source Conditions Select the source options for the query
294. exported for use as modeling layers in groundwater modeling software packages including Waterloo Hydrogeologic s Visual MODFLOW The Cross Section editor is seamlessly integrated with the HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer a tool that combines and displays one or more cross sections in a 3D fence diagram view 3D Subsurface Visualization with 3D Explorer Once cross sectional views of the data are created and preliminary interpretations made 3D Explorer can be used to create fence diagrams containing one or more of those cross sections The 3D Explorer provides a unique perspective of the entire site through its ability to display multiple cross sections simultaneously this perspective is not possible when viewing individual 2D cross sections About HydroGeo Analyst 9 The 3D Explorer in addition to displaying fence diagrams can also be used to display surfaces for each layer involved in the interpretation For example a surface depicting static groundwater elevations over the site can be created and displayed in the 3D Explorer Use the 3D Explorer to import basemaps or shape files containing any type of data and relate this to the cross section interpretations For example a contour map or DXF site map may be draped or overlain on top of multiple fence diagrams Finally use the AVI recording tools to record the auto rotation of the 3D fence diagrams for presentation purposes 1 2 4 Reporting and Printing 10 Report Designer Hydr
295. f the Build Connection String radio button is selected in the Database Environment window there will be an option to locate an MS SQL Server and build a connection to a database on a network server Build Connection String radio button from the Database Environment window Fi Build connection string button located in the lower right corner and the following Data Link Properties dialog will appear 148 Chapter 4 Project Manager E Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to SQL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name Refresh 2 Enter information to log on to the server Use Windows NT Integrated security Use a specific user name and password Meer name Basswood Bank password Allow saving password 3 Select the database on the server Attach a database file as a database name AH o Osma the flenanre Test Connection The Data Link Properties dialog box is the standard Windows system interface for configuring connection strings to data sources This dialog box provides all of the properties that the selected OLE DB provider supports You also can open this dialog box by double clicking a universal data link udl file in Windows Explorer The Data Link Properties dialog box contains four tabs Provider Connection Advanced and All The settings available on the latter three tabs depend upon the Provider selec
296. field names in the source are identical to the field names in the destination However the station_name field must be manually mapped Under the Source first row in the table Station_name from the combo box Click on the result_unit field Use if not already selected Next to continue Read the warning message that appears Yes to continue A second warning message will appear as shown below I x e Destination table soil chemistry does not have a primary key Jj The imported data will be appended to this table not updated OK to continue The next window is Data Validation If you mapped the fields correctly then your DTS window should appear similar to the one shown below 54 Chapter 2 Getting Started Data Transfer System Import AN 10 x Step 4 Data Yalidation Erors wWamings Description Field Name of records Preview x Y Rowld station sys_sample_code chemical_name 1 BH1_10 10 2002_6 4 cis 1 2 dichloroethylene 1 BH1_10 10 2002_10 9 Trichloroethane Note 1 BH1_10 10 2002_15 9 TYOC F 1 BH1_10 10 2002_24 4 Tetrachloroethylene a oa la 1 BH1_10 10 2002_26 9 Vinyl Chloride 2 BH2_10 10 2002_14 7 Vinyl Chloride This step allows you to accept reject 2 BH2_10 10 2002_19 2 Tetrachloroethylene records with warnings by selecting the 2 BH2_10 10 2002_24 2 Tetrachloroethylene warning message in the Errors Warnings 2 BH2_10 10 2002_27 7 Tetrachloroethylene
297. field was station name then you would see all the station names that are included in the data query results You may hide any instance of the field 1 e chemical name simply by removing the X from the box beside the name The remaining options are described below e Click on the button to select all items in the list e Click on the button to deselect all items in the list e Click on the button to invert selection e Click on the v button to apply the changes e Click on the X button to cancel the changes and hide the tools Field Display Settings e Use the s button to load the following dialog where you can highlight data in the crosstab report Data Markers 3 Ls 151 x Data Field Initial Value End Value Back Color Fore Color Ei Field Name Initial Value EndYalue Back Color Fore 255 128 128 0 0 255 128 128 Blact Sum of calciu 0 255 255 128 Blact Crosstab Queries 223 224 In the Data Markers window there are several options available for setting the display properties of data fields and defining colors for conditions e Data Field select a data field from the list e Initial Value define a value for the lower limit e End Value define a value for the upper limit e Background Color select a color for the cell background e Foreground Color select a color for the cell foreground When you have defined the settings press the dP Add button to add the color condition o
298. free RAM e Number of free bytes on your hard disk e Software Installation directory e Directory location for your current project files You may send us your questions via e mail fax or call one of our technical support specialists Please allow up to two business days for a response Technical support is available 9 00 am to 5 00 pm EST Monday to Friday excluding Canadian holidays Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc Training and Consulting Waterloo Hydrogeologic strives to offer the most useful practical high quality training in hydrogeologic modeling in the industry Training courses are designed to provide a rapid introduction to essential knowledge and skills and create a basis for further professional development and real world practice Open enrollment courses are offered worldwide each year For the current schedule of courses visit www waterloohydrogeologic com or e mail us at sws training slb com Waterloo Hydrogeologic also offers expert consulting and reviewing services for all numerical modeling projects concerning groundwater flow and solute transport For further information please contact us Other Products by Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc We also develop and distribute a number of other useful software products for the groundwater professionals all designed to increase your efficiency and enhance your technical capability including e Visual MODFLOW Pro e Visual MODFLOW 3D Explorer e WinPEST e RISC WorkBench Vi
299. functionality of the project browser tree view and all of the tabs Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help The following menu items are available in HydroGeo Analyst e Project e Edit e View e Record e Settings HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 95 e Tools e Help The following sections describe the items which appear in the main menu 3 2 1 Project 96 New Open Selecting the New menu item will launch the Project Manager with the option to create a new project The Project Manager allows the user to select a server for the database select or create a database for the new project provide project related information name location soil classification settings etc and select a database structure if a new database 1s to be created The New button in the toolbar performs the same function When creating a new project there will be a prompt to enter the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below User Credentials X User Name Fassword OF Cancel You must enter a valid user name and password for a user that has privileges for creating new projects HGA will then check these credentials in the security document to confirm that this user has these privileges For more details on assigning user access controls please see Chapter 4 Application Level Objects The process of creating a new project is further explained in Chapter 4 Using the Project Manager Th
300. g information Once the control is placed on the report 1ts properties could be altered by activating the Properties Explorer window and modifying the desired property The position of the controls can be changed by selecting and moving the selection to the desired location Controls can be moved this way only within a given section Cut and paste can be used to move controls to another section Some controls have special properties that require the user s attention these controls are described below Altering Borders of Controls Border properties of one or more controls can be modified by selecting the controls first and either clicking on the Borders button on the toolbar or selecting the option from the pop up menu Modifying Data Source information of the ADO data control The ADO data control mainly uses the connection string and SQL statement as its input to provide access to the data stored in your project s database Currently HydroGeo Analyst provides basic inputs for this control However advanced users may want to modify these inputs in order to produce advanced reports that are supported by the Report Editor One interesting feature provided by the Report Editor is that of generating a report based on specific values For example a report that displays chemical data for all stations can be modified to only generate reports for a given station and or chemical Report Designer Window 363 The SQL statement is usual
301. g the combo box shows a list of several different sizes for the image size to be saved The desired size of the image may be selected or customized by entering new Width and Height values The image can be saved to three graphics formats e GIF e Bitmaps bmp e JPEG Image File jpg 344 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer Any of these graphics formats can be imported into most word processing software packages Alternately the image may be copied to the Windows clipboard by selecting Edit Copy from the menu This image can be pasted into most word processing and graphics editing programs NOTE The resolution of the graphics file image will depend on your screen resolution and on the size of the Display Window In order to maximize the image quality you should maximize the Display Window to full screen 10 6 1 Saving Project The 3D project can be saved to file by selecting File Save As from the Main Menu or click the H Save As icon from the toolbar The following Save to file dialog will appear ai AB 3xs as VEX3D 3xs sa All Sections 3x5 la BE 3x5 a CC 3x5 lan cube 3xs Save as type Visual Borehole Cross Sections file 3x2 Cancel Z The 3D image is saved with the extension 3XS and will be saved in the HGAnalyst Projects Project_Name V3D folder by default Save an existing project by selecting File Save from the Main Menu or by clicking Save icon from the toolbar
302. ge to windows clipboard Show Single Page Displays report one page at a time gg Show Multiple Pages Displays multiple pages of the report at once Zoom in Zooms in to a selected area of the report 100 Zoom in percent Sets the zoom level to that selected in here Pu Zoom out Zooms out the report El First Page Moves to the first page of the report a Previous Page Moves to the previous page in the report 273 Page Moves to the page specified in this text box E Next Page Moves to the next page in the report El Last Page Moves to the last page in the document m Back Moves back to the previous page in a list of recently accessed pages 366 Chapter 11 The Report Editor H Forward Moves forward to the next page in a list of recently accessed pages 11 3 2 Using the Report Viewer Once a report is generated and displayed on the Viewer it can either be saved in the Report Editor s native binary format printed or exported to various formats that are supported by the Report Editor Using the button on the toolbar reports can be exported to e Portable Document Format PDF e Microsoft Excel e TIFF e Hyper Text Markup Language HTML and e Rich Text Format RTF Please see Exporting generated reports on page 375 for more details Saving Reports Saving the report design as opposed to the final report is preferable as the design requires a smaller storage space for most reports and the reports that are
303. generated from a saved report design are dynamic they are up to date with the data stored in your database However reports that are saved from the Viewer are static and they may not reflect the exact content of the current data To save the report press the fa Save button from the Viewer window s toolbar The Report will be saved as a RDF file archive file HydroGeo Analyst stores and manages all report designs in your project database All reports that are created for your project will be retrieved from the database and are listed in the Project Browser when your project is loaded into HydroGeo Analyst 11 4 Creating Reports Reports for your project can be created from the various modules within HydroGeo Analyst including e Data Grids e Borehole Log Plotter BHLP e Data Query e Map Manager e Cross Section Editor e 3D Explorer HydroGeo Analyst comes with several prepared report templates for most database Creating Reports 367 schemas The first two report types listed above can be created through HydroGeo Analyst s main interface while the remaining types are created only while using the respective modules of HydroGeo Analyst The following few sections present detailed descriptions on creating each report type 11 4 1 Creating Reports in HydroGeo Analyst Main Window The main interface of HydroGeo Analyst allows you to create reports in one of the following two ways e From a Grid create a report with
304. geology layer e Click once on the left mouse button to add a vertex and start digitizing the polygon in the desired direction e Add more vertices by clicking on the left mouse button at desired locations Move the mouse cursor to an interval on a desired station the mouse cursor will snap the vertex of the polygon to the nearest station interval A vertex can also Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor be added anywhere on the cross section by clicking on the left mouse button e Double click anywhere on the cross section using the left mouse button to close the polygon the following dialog will appear Geology Layer Pattern oC X Hame Description S ard Pattern Ok Cancel H Help e In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the layer a brief Description and select a soil Pattern If the geologic layer you have just digitized in the current cross section has already been created you may select it from the list instead of typing a new name Click on the blank area beside Pattern to load the pattern options as shown below Fill Patterns Please choose a pattern ma Dolomite OF Cancel e Select a pattern then click OK Repeat the same sequence of operations for other layers within the active cross section Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 297 298 The result will be a layered structure of the geological domain The cross section may contain some gaps where polygons do not complet
305. grid Records with errors must be rejected to 2 BH2_10 10 2002_8 2 Tetrachloroethylene activate the importing process 3 BH3_10 10 2002_13 5 Trichloroethylene 3 BH3 10 10 2002 19 TWDC ou can also select one or more records in 3 BH3_10 10 2002_21 5 Trichloroethane the preview table and exclude them from 3 BH3_10 10 2002_24 5 Trichloroethane importing into your database 3 BH3_10 10 2002_28 Tetrachloroethylene 3 BH3_10 10 2002_4 5 cis 1 2 dichloroethylene 3 BH3_10 10 2002_9 5 Trichloroethane 4 BH4_10 10 2002_14 4 Trichloroethane E E Error y XK O waning lt Back Import Cancel Help NOTE Step 3 is not needed for this data import since there are no station related settings For this example there should be no errors warnings present Import to import the data A confirmation message appears stating that the records will be inserted to the database OK Close to close the DTS The chemistry analysis results should now appear in the project To confirm select one of the new Boreholes from the Station List load the Station Data and view the Soil Sampling data category Soil Chemistry table An example for BH10 is shown below Data Management 55 HydroGeo Analyst oct26_test D Program Files HGAnalyst Projectsoct26_test nee Ae a x Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help eae F HSRt XBaABORRS BOS aa 4 Statio
306. groundwater chemistry Mining Exploration e g Alteration Mineralization Structure Samples Down Hole Survey Down Hole Geophysics Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e Geophysics e g Conditions Gamma Neutron 64 in E log 16 in E log Density e Well History e g Pumping Rate Pump Screens Top of Casing status e User Defined Category All of the above data categories may be renamed and used differently if desired For example the category named Geology could be renamed to Surface Water and tables such as Catchments Surface Water Monitoring Locations Rivers etc could be organized under it Placing tables under any one of these categories does not have any effect on how the tables are stored in the database 3 1 2 Data Entry There are two locations in HydroGeo Analyst where data can be manually entered and or edited the Station List and the Station Data tabs If the source data is available in a text file spreadsheet XLS or database the data may be imported using the Data Transfer System DTS Station List Tab The Station List tab provides an overview of the available stations in the selected Station Group As such only a few basic Station attributes name X coordinate Y coordinate Elevation are displayed in this tab These fields may be modified for a selected station or a new station may be created here and the values for these fields may be defined The Station List tab may be used to quickly enter n
307. gs button in the Callout Box column and the following dialog will appear Callout Box Settings l x Setting Fill Color Outline Color Transparent Bos Shape Round Rectan Tip Stile Triangle Padding Shadow Shadow Color Offset Offset OK Cancel Help In the Callout Box Settings dialog you can modify several display properties for the callout box The callout box is the box oval or bubble that contains the data for the Description of Menu Items 255 256 selected station A preview is shown on the right side of the window in the image above The following display settings are available Fill Color set the fill color for the callout box Outline Color set the color for the outline of the callout box Transparent set the transparency select from True or False Box shape select the box shape choose from Rectangle Round Rectangle or Oval Tip style set the tip style choose from Triangle or Line Padding set the padding thickness The higher the padding value the larger the box shape will be around the tabular values in the layout Shadow display a shadow around the callout box select from True or False Shadow Color select the shadow color only used if Shadow has been set to True Offset X set the X Offset this parameter controls how far the callout box will be placed horizontally from selected station e A positive offset will result in the callout box displayed to the right
308. gs can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Well Construction node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Settings E xj Well Constructio e Visible Header Color Column width 114 El Set visibilit e Drilling details TF Flush Mount FF Lithology e Fillings details Iv Casings details Screen details Iv Water Levels e Pumps Scale Apply OF Cancel The Well Construction frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the Header Color by clicking on the color box and change the Column Width The Set Visibility frame allows you to show hide the various components of the Well Construction column NOTE When displaying the water levels the most recent water level measurement will be used 12 2 6 Depth Dependent Plots The Plot column is designed to display various types of depth dependent graphs It supports both the Depth Interval as well as the Depth Point based data types The following are some example data that may be displayed using this column type e Geophysical investigation results e Analytical results chemical concentration e Analytical results for soil physics moisture content bulk density etc 406 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter BHLP Columns e Soil testing results pocket Penetrometer SPT Various plot settings ar
309. h station If you have a large data set in a source file s feel free to skip ahead to the section Importing Data using the DTS Example Creating a New Station beside the Station Groups node in the project browser Project under the Station Groups node in the project browser Record gt Add from the main menu or press the Add button in the toolbar A new row will be added to the grid in the Station List tab Enter the following information for this station In the Name column type BH1 lt Tab gt or lt Enter gt key on the keyboard to shift the focus to the next cell In the X column type 537381 50 In the Y column type 48 12036 33 In the Elevation column type 347 In the TOC column type 348 To post save the data for this record Record gt Post from the main menu or press the 4 Post button in the toolbar Data Management 31 32 Using the same procedure enter the following information for these new stations Name X Y Elev TOC BH2 535780 7 4813800 1 339 1 340 1 BH3 535111 6 4813600 3 338 1 339 1 BH4 538544 4 4814890 8 350 5 351 5 BH5 533866 3 4811787 2 350 0 351 0 OW 535915 6 4813215 3 340 5 341 5 As long as you remain in the same window you do not need to press the Post button after every entry Do so to finalize the changes you have made before moving to the next window Note the color of the fields you have modified is different yellow once you press the Post bu
310. h these rules 1s highlighted with a yellow background In some cases it may be convenient to pre define a list of values for some fields For example instead of typing chemical names for each record you may want to pick from a pre defined list In order to link to a field s data source to a list e Select the General list option from the Get values from list combo box e Click on the Edit List button This will display the List Editor The List Editor provides the tools for populating a list of potential values for the selected field For more details please see Chapter 3 List Editor e Select the Allow values only from list option to strictly limit the values for the selected field to those in the list If this option 1s not selected then 1t will be possible to either pick a value from a list or manually enter a new one for this field NOTE Recall that if a field is defined as a foreign key a pick list will automatically be created for 1t based on values in the primary key in the parent table As such any list created following the steps outlined in this section will be overridden Linked Fields The Properties of linked fields can be modified through an interface provided in the Template Manager Clicking any of the fields in the Linked Fields set activates an interface similar to the one shown in the following figure Working With the Template Manager 173 Template Editor sample SA E 10 x
311. han 2000 e Select wells with discharge over 500 gpm e Select boreholes deeper than 150 feet e Select boreholes where the overburden thickness exceeds 20 feet e Locate groundwater concentration exceedances for BTEX In the Query Builder window the query fields and conditions can be quickly defined Once the queries have been created they may be easily accessed from the Project Browser where each new query will appear as a new node Using the Query Builder it is possible to create two types of queries e Station Group Queries and e Data Queries Each query type is discussed later in this chapter Additionally once a query is created it is possible to generate a CrossTab Query using the query data Crosstab Queries are discussed in section 7 8 on page 216 7 1 About the Interface The Query Builder may be loaded from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select Tools gt Query Builder from the main menu e In the toolbar click on the El Query Builder OR e In the Query branch of the Project Browser right click on an existing query and select New or Edit The Query Builder window is shown below This display shows the options for a Data Query About the Interface 197 198 Display Toolbar Fields Query Builder Query TEE l0 x yP Station Group Query Data Query bic SQL Vi
312. hanged in two locations e In the Display tree under the Project Name folder OR e In the toolbar top toolbar of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer window as shown Working with 3D Explorer 313 below Exaggeration factor i 0 Simply enter a new value in the field and press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard 10 2 3 3D Navigation Tools The Navigation Panel should appear on your screen as shown in the figure below Slider Buttons l Rotate Shift Light Position ayr ajo Z af e Bl GX nn Options Rotate model around the screen axes X up down Y left right Z rock side to side If the Navigation Panel does not appear on the screen click View Navigation tools from the top menu bar Alternately the Navigation Panel can be loaded by clicking the Hide Navigation Tools button located on the top toolbar The Navigation tools panel contains several tabs e The Rotate tab controls the rotation of the 3D image around the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e The Shift tab controls the location of the 3D image along the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e The Light Position tab controls the location of the light source for the 3D image e The Time tab allows you to adjust the animation time when viewing Plumes The Plume Browser tab is used when displaying Plumes and provides a summary view of plume data using planar slices or isosurfaces Rotating the Image The Slider Buttons are
313. hat a BHLP opened through the Map Manager Cross Section editor will not have as many options Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Viewer Available Stations Window Borehole Log Designer bhip1 Select Station x m Y m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 4812036 33 3400 348 00 E ES Design ES Ma Lithology Well Construction Designer Tree ES LithologyEntities ES Well Construction Scale 6 Drilling E Scal Coarse cac Gravel Medium Sand ES ScaleEntities Designer Toolbar led H e X a A E E Name Value Settings Visible True E Header Text Lithology Gravel Horizontal Aligi Center Vertical Align Center Font Font nale 0 Font Escape 4 0 Output Options The BHLP dialog contains the following items e A list of all Available Stations Select the station for the BHLP e Designer Tree Contains the columns and related entities for the BHLP design e Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the BHLP design e Settings Contains the settings for the selected entity e Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the BHLP e Output Options Allow you to export or print one or all BHLPs 12 1 1 Description of Designer Toolbar Items The BHLP designer toolbar provides the controls and commands for the BHLP design The following buttons are available Lu Save button saves the current borehole log plot H Save As button saves the
314. he Table of Contents in the form of an expandable collapsible tree Closed book icons represent Table of Contents headings that have sub headings Index The Index tab displays the list of Help topics You can scroll to find the index entry you want or you can type in the first few letters of the keyword in the text box and the index will scroll automatically as you type Double click an index entry to display the corresponding Help topic Alternately you may select an index entry and then click the Display button to open the Help topic Search The Search tab is used to search the On Line Help documents for a word or phrase of interest Simply type the search word s or phrase s then press lt Enter gt or click the Display button Favorites You can add frequently accessed Help topics to a personal list of favorites which is displayed in the Favorites tab Once you have added a topic to your list of favorites you can access the topic by double clicking it Click Add to add the currently displayed topic to your favorites list Select a favorite and then click Remove to delete a topic from your favorites list 1 5 About the Interface When HydroGeo Analyst is first loaded a blank window will appear indicating no project is loaded To create a new project select Project gt New to open an existing project select Project gt Open Once a project is loaded the main window will appear the HydroGeo Analyst demo project is dis
315. he Cross Sections node The Cross Section Editor may also be launched from the Map Manager in one of the following ways e Activate the Cross section lines layer from the layer manager and select a Cross section line by clicking on the desired cross section e To create a new cross section select the Create Cross Section menu option from the Tools menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button ay e the toolbar This option will create a new cross About the Interface 273 section based on the selected cross section line e To open an existing cross section based on an existing cross section line click on the Show Create Cross Section button ay on the toolbar This opens the cross section editor with the corresponding cross section e Click on the Cross Section tab in the upper right corner of the window see figure below to activate an existing cross section from a list of cross sections that are available for your project The Cross Section Editor window is shown in the figure below with a cross section loaded for demonstration purposes Active Menu Window Bar o o ie Map Project firstmap N y Bi Eie x ile Edit View Tools Help Toolbar i ele MN AK AKA ES ar ONE s a a 5 SecondLine Y Model 360 Topography uolgas sso15 3 WM 4 Geology 340 Gravel Sandy Gravel 320 Cross Sections amp Interpretations Laye
316. he aspect is measured in degrees or radians clockwise from north and the slope is measured positively below the horizontal plane in degrees or radians Tautness_1 Controls the influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Tautness_2 Controls the influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Use_Gradient Blends the gradient calculation and the linear interpolation calculation to produce a smoother surface 15 3 3 Kriging Kriging is a geostatistical method that produces visually appealing maps from irregularly spaced data Anisotropy and underlying trends suggested in raw data can be incorporated in an efficient manner through Kriging The program used called kt3d is available in the public domain from the Geostatistical Software Library GSLIB distributed by Stanford University and is well documented by Deustch and Journel 1998 The program kt3d from GSLIB performs simple Kriging ordinary Kriging or Kriging with a polynomial trend and uses the standard parameter file used by GSLIB If the semi variogram components have already been modeled by the user they can be Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings 465 466 incorporated into the program by choosing the appropriate set of parameters in the parameter file The semi variograms available include Spherical Exponential Gaussian Power and the Hole effect models If the variogram
317. he entire project is to be backed up simply make a copy of the HGA project folder however 1f you have map projects in another directory then copy these additional folders as well NOTE Backup and restore works only if you are running HGA on the system that also hosts the server the server can be MSDE or SQL Server NOTE SQL Server does not permit saving the back up copy of the database to a mapped network drive it can be saved only to a local drive Restore Database Use this option to restore the SQL Server database in case of accidental data deletion or loss due to mechanical failure Before selecting this option ensure that the appropriate HydroGeo Analyst project is open Then select the Restore Database option and locate the BAK file which was created using the Tools Backup database option Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Manage Databases Use this option to remove unwanted databases from the local or network instances of WHI MSDE This option is available when HGA is first loaded and no projects have been opened The following dialog shows the options that are available Database Management E x Iv Windows NT Integrated Authentication User Name sa Password Database whi r Refresh Projects on database whi x 3 Close El Help In this dialog select the Server and the Database that you would like to delete Once the database 1s selected a list of projects using the selected da
318. he left or by accessing WHI Software gt HydroGeo Analyst from your Start gt Programs Windows menu 1 4 Learning to use HydroGeo Analyst There are several ways of getting acquainted with HydroGeo Analyst including using the Demo Guide located on your installation CD ROM the Getting Started tutorial in Chapter 2 and the On Line Help User s Manual Please contact Waterloo Hydrogeologic if you require further training on HydroGeo Analyst for yourself or your company or on other software that is developed and distributed by Waterloo Hydrogeologic 1 4 1 HydroGeo Analyst On Line Help This manual is supplied to you in two forms as a printed book and as an On line Help file To view the On Line help version of this manual select Help gt Contents Some HydroGeo Analyst windows and dialogs contain Help buttons which load the appropriate help section for the current active component The HydroGeo Analyst Help window is divided into three main areas e A Navigation Frame on the left displays the Contents Index Search and Favorites tabs e A Toolbar across the top displays a set of buttons to help navigate through the HydroGeo Analyst Help system e A Topic Frame on the right displays the actual Help topics included in the On Line Help Learning to use HydroGeo Analyst 13 The tabs in the Navigation Frame provide the core navigational features as described below Contents The Contents tab displays the headings in t
319. he list on the right side of the window Select a Destination Table from the list on the right side of the window Select the Source Database Table from the list on the left side of the window Under the Source Table Click once in the Name column of a blank field across from the destination field where you wish to import the data A list of available fields will appear as seen in the example below Importing Data using the DTS 185 186 Data Transfer System Import Oy Xx Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list Step 2 Data M apping In each source table stations must be identified by an ID Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheetl z Description F station Map source fields to destination fields Use Type Conditions M id DOUBLE E 5 Vv name STRING M x DOUBLE unknowr Vv DOUBLE unknowr E T m 1 a DOUBLE CO Requires a unit to be selected CO Required field 1 Foreignkey O Linked Fields Total of records 15 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Select the appropriate source field from the list In the example shown above the appropriate field 1s Elev since 1t should be mapped to the field Elevation in the Station destination table Select the appropriate Unit for the field if applicable Fields that
320. he map window to the next window dimensions Activated only after Previous Extent has been used Custom Extent Allows you to manually set the zoom extents and the center of the Map Window When this menu item is selected the following dialog will appear Description of Menu Items 263 Change View xl Window Width 2733 m Map Scale Jli 17935 Center x 535903 85 m Y 4813909 23 m OF Cancel Provide the desired viewable width map scale and X Y coordinates of the map that will be repositioned at the center of the map window As the Zoom window width changes the Map Scale changes and vice versa The Zoom window width has equal proportions left and right of center TIP When you save the map project the view extent is saved together with the map project The next time the map project is opened the view extent will be restored Turn on All Layers Makes all layers visible Turn off All Layers Hides all layers View BHLP Allows the you to view the borehole log plot BHLP for any station To view a BHLP make sure that you are in the HGA data layer select this option and click on any station An example taken from the Demo project is provided below 264 Chapter 8 Map Manager l x Map Project Demo Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help Demas meN AOS XA KY WO O AAN AG TE BHLP 67 GB 44 All Stations BHLP Template i CrossSectionLine5 dep lt uopas s s019
321. he parameter of interest e g water level chemical concentrations temperature pH conductivity etc The following fields are not required but are recommended for plot and series grouping and to take advantage of additional plot options e Station ID e Station Name e Chemical Parameter name Measured parameter units Non detect ND factor e Method detection limit MDL Uncertainly factor e Water quality standard 14 2 1 Add Plot To add a new plot to the design click the Add button in the toolbar or right click on the Plot Page Design node in the tree view and select the Add plot menu option The following Add plot dialog will appear Adding Plots 439 Plot Details xj Mare Plot Type Time Series E Template Hone T M Setas Default Template Ok Cancel In the Name field enter the name of the plot The Type combo box contains the supported plot type currently only Time Series scatter plots are supported however future versions of HGA will support numerous types of Geochemistry and Statistical plots In the Template combo box select the desired plot template that should be applied to the new plot The plot template contains numerous pre defined settings for axis data series style settings etc If you want to re use the same template again in the future select the Set as the default template check box For details on creating plot templates see Saving Plot as Template on page
322. he requirements of HydroGeo Analyst s Station table The Station table must contain the following required fields each with a specific data type e ID e Name e X Coordinate e Y Coordinate and e Elevation ground surface If this table structure exists in the database and satisfies these requirements then 1t may be used to store the Station information Option 1 Select Server and Database If the Select Server and Database radio button is selected you will be prompted for a Server name and a Database name You must specify a server in order for a database to be created As mentioned earlier this may be any computer located on your network LAN which has a MS SQL Server 2000 installation or WHI MSDE If you do not have a network connection only your computer name will appear in the list of servers e g Computer_Name WHI Choose a server from the Server list at the top of the dialog After the Server is selected HG Analyst will automatically scan the Server for valid SQL databases These databases will then appear in the combo box beside Database If there is an integrated login for the server check the box beside Windows NT Integrated Authorization If a unique password and ID are required de select this option and enter the Windows User Name and Password for the Server computer This will allow HG Analyst to automatically log on to the Server each time you modify the database residing on the spe
323. he source data HydroGeo Analyst generates an unlimited number of pages with one or more charts with a single click of the mouse Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst The charting module allows charts to include regulatory limits As such it allows users to define a range of values referred to as the Alarm Zone that may be used to indicate a range of values in exceedance of selected regulatory limits or intervals 1 2 5 Interface to Visual MODFLOW and other WHI Software ESRI GIS SHP files and databases have become two of the main sources of data for groundwater models and HydroGeo Analyst makes it easier to incorporate these data formats directly into your model HydroGeo Analyst allows you to export pumping well and observation well data directly to your model by mapping the required data to the fields stored in the GIS shape files or the database In addition HydroGeo Analyst through the use of the cross section editor enables you to create and export layers created from 3D Model interpretations of your geological data in the database The Data Transfer System DTS can also be used to export station data and chemical analyses which can be imported into AquaChem for water quality analysis geochemical plotting and modeling with PHREEQC 1 3 Installing HydroGeo Analyst 1 3 1 System Requirements Please refer to the HGA_Dongle_Install_Guide pdf for details on the system requirements for HydroGeo Analyst If you ha
324. hem_test_resultsO Station WHERE Name lt station namelSelect a station ISelect DISTINCT Name as Name from station gt and chem_test_resultsO chemical_name Benzene and PStation ID 1 An example of a Parameter Query Report is available in the Demo project the report name is Conditional Report When you launch this report the dialog mentioned above will appear prompting you to select a station an Report Parameters Y X Enter the values of parameters Select a station Select one of the stations that satisfies this query in this case it is one of the Creating Reports 371 Monitoring Wells W 05 for example and click OK The report window will then appear as shown in the screenshot below li I Ea mA Ja Barre AMA AE Contents JO ee ee ee ee ee EEM 14 BG w SterTeam d E 2 Morosoft 4 Total Comma B Parameter q BF Adobe Fram ie reparatos EJ desc Paint h E CA E 11 4 2 Creating a Report Containing a Map Project 372 Follow the directions below to create a report containing one or more map layers from the Map Manager e Start the Map Manager and open a Map Project e Show hide the desired layers in the map project all visible layers will appear in the report e Press the Print button y from the toolbar or select Project Print from the main menu e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer
325. hemical parameter s e result value concentration e units e method detection limit Chapter 7 Queries Once you have created a data query you are ready to create a Crosstab query This can be done in several ways e Select the desired Data Query from the Queries node in the HGA project browser then select Tools Crosstab Report from the main menu or e Right mouse click on the Data Query and select Crosstab Report from the pop up menu A dialog will appear prompting you for a name for the Crosstab report enter a name then click OK The Crosstab Properties window will then open as shown in the following screenshot Properties i x General Time Series Layout Fields Preferences Printer Fonts Color Connection Type ADO y Connect Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security 5SPI Persist Security Info Options jo Build QueryTimeDut jo Record Source SOL Query SELECT station id S id station x AS x station y AS y station name 45 name soil_chemlStry chemical_name 45 chemical_name soil_chemistry result_value 45 result_value soil_chemlStry result_unit AS result_unit FROM Station RIGHT JOIN PStation ON Station ID PStation SID LEFT JOIN soil_chemlStry ON Station id soil_chemistry Station WHERE soil_chemlStry chemical_name TrichlORoethylene AND soil_chemistry result_value gt 10 AND soil_ chemlStry result_unit ma Kg AND PStation ID 1
326. hin a combo box this eliminates the task of continually re typing the same values 2 In the Geologic Description category Lithology table it may be convenient to define a Linked List for the Soil Color field The list may contain generic soil colors ex light brown dark brown black grey etc When the time comes to enter data for this field the color may be selected from this linked list contained within a combo box instead of re entering the same values If the selected field contains a linked list then a combo box arrow will appear on the right side of the field Click on this arrow to view the available list items for the field 3 4 1 Creating a List 122 Lists lookup tables can be created using the List Editor which can be launched by selecting the List Editor menu option from the Settings menu or simply by clicking on the List Editor button on the toolbar The List Editor can also be loaded from the Template Manager as described under the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager on page 126 below In the Template Manager select the field for which a list 1s desired then click the Edit Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst List button to load the List Editor This will allow for creating editing a list for the selected field The following figure depicts an instance of the List Editor List Editor Demo Es A E 10 x Select a Fiel List Items so1l_type eee Mame
327. his file is named AR2Std CHM and is found in the report folder of the HG Analyst installation folder The default is Program Files Common Files Data Dynamics Active Reports A R2Std chm Simply double click on the CHM file to load the help file 11 1 About the Interface The Report Editor may be launched from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select Project Report or click on the sl Report button in most HydroGeo Analyst modular windows Map Editor Cross Section editor 3D Explorer or the main window When this option 1s selected 1f there are report templates About the Interface 347 available for this module there will be a prompt to Select a Report Template before proceeding e The Report Editor may be loaded from the Project Browser in the main window simply double click on an existing Report or Report template under the Reports node The report editor consists of two main windows e The Runtime Designer Designer and e The Viewer Each component of the Report Editor comes with 1ts own set of toolbars and icons that perform specific tasks related to the window The following few sections present a detailed description of the toolbar icons for each component 11 2 Report Designer Window The Report Designer allows you to design the contents as well as looks of your reports All report designs can be saved and opened for editing and or generating the final report A sample of the designer view 1s shown below with
328. hould be similar to the one shown below NOTE Yours may be slightly different depending on the location of the cross section line and the stations which were selected along the line Mm E x Map Project Sample_ File Edit View Tools Help Bele NIXA gt ly emool OE o uoysas ssoiy ABI Topography S Geology _ HydroGeology 320 310 280 lego ho Banas zos 1000 100 O OOO Eg AP 1949 43 282 32 In the Cross Section editor locations for layers must be interpreted and drawn manually using lines or polygons layer types may be Geological Hydrogeological or Model The process of drawing layers is described in the next section For more details on some of the other features of the Map Manager please see Chapter 8 Mapping the Data 71 2 6 Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections 2 6 1 Drawing Geologic Cross Sectional Layers Once the desired stations have been loaded into the Cross Section Editor the layer locations must be interpreted To draw Geologic layers the polygon draw tool must be used and the polygon must be digitized manually using the mouse To draw a geological cross section layer follow the directions below Click once in the box beside Geology from the Layer Control list to activate this layer and make it editable You should have two check marks beside Geology as shown in the image below the first check mark indicates the layer
329. ibutes must first be defined To do so e Select Tools gt Model Layers from the main menu This will load the Model Layers dialog as shown below Top of Layer Topography Topography Layer ao Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquifer A Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer 4 Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquifer E x Save Cancel 53 Help O In this dialog you can specify the total number of model layers and set properties for each layer In addition the layers can be numbered in a particular order Layers will be numbered starting with 1 for the top most layer and increase with depth The top most layer represents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer 1 e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer Once the layers have been defined additional layers may be inserted at 300 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor any location at any time Please refer to the section Model Layers section on page 292 for more details Drawing Model Interpretation Layers Before starting to draw model interpretation layers please ensure that you have defined the model layer settings explained in the previous section You will see that the top of layer 1 ground surface is drawn in automatically for each new cross section This layer can be modified by moving it through its existing vertices adding new vertices at desired loca
330. ies Connectivity The following dialogue will appear Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s 473 Set Connectivity i k x Select Server and Database Build Connection String This dialog displays the server and database hosting pour data Although the dialog allows all power users to modify the connectivity settings great care must be taken as any improper setting may corrupted your project Server pattick whi Iv Windows NT Integrated Authorization ee eae ke Password Database sample Modify these settings only if the database i moved to another server ls renamed of User access rights are changed Provider SQLOLEDE 1 Integrated Secunty sspPersist Secunty Info F alse nitial Catalog sample D ata Source patick whi Ose Procedure for Prepare 1 Auta Translate T rue Facket Size 4096orkstation D patick Use Encryption for Data False T ag with column collation when possible F alse You have a choice of selecting the server on which the database is located and then selecting the database from the list of the ones present on that server or building a connection string to the database In either scenario once you have completed the address click Next and then OK to set up the connectivity settings 15 5 7 Data Transfer System DTS Q Data from my source file is not imported 474 A A A When importing be sure to import data f
331. ies node or Station Group node and select Edit or Edit Dynamic Once in the Query Builder make the necessary changes to the query generate a new SQL statement execute it and Save 7 4 2 Saving As One method of quickly creating multiple queries with similar conditions is to use the Save As option press the H Save as button in the toolbar To do so define all the necessary inputs for a query Then Save As the query under a new name Then simply make the required changes to the new query and execute and Save This is convenient for many cases For example if the only difference between the queries is in the Value field Query 1 find all stations where Vinyl Chloride gt 10 ppm Query 2 find all stations where Vinyl Chloride gt 500 ppm By duplicating the first query using the Save As option the second query can quickly be created by making a small change to only the Value field 7 5 Recalling Queries in HydroGeo Analyst Once queries have been created they will be available from the main HydroGeo Analyst interface A Station Group query will appear as a new branch under the Station Group node in the project browser The stations which satisfy the query will be automatically added to this new Station Group A Data query will appear as a new branch under the Queries node in the project browser To see the results of the selected query right click on the query and select Execute Query option The query results w
332. ight Width specify the symbol width Proportional use this option to create proportionally sized symbols dependent upon the result value Min value specify the min value for the smallest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value Max value specify the max value for the largest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value As you define the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series symbols will appear using the selected settings 14 4 Adding Lines to a Plot Best fit lines or lines calculated with user defined formulas can be displayed on any plot to do so right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Add Line from the pop up menu The following Add Line dialog will appear Chapter 14 Plotting FormaAddPlotLine x Name Line type C Formula BestFit BestFit Type Std Deviation y Source Series E a X Period 2 Enter a line Name at the top of the dialog this name will appear on the plot The following Line Types are available e Formula e Best Fit Best Fit is the default line type when selected the following settings are available Best Fit type select from Std Deviation Moving Average or Exponential Moving Average Source Series select the data source series to which the line should
333. il Sampling M Monitoring Event fal M F H E E Mining E xploration Geophysics Well History E E Working With the Template Manager 167 168 Based on the nature of environmental data and the purpose for which the data is collected there are generally eight table types as shown in the following table ts Time Monitoring Date a Time Events Depth Interval Sample Start Depth End Depth collection Depth Point Sample Depth collection Depth Interval Time Monitoring Monitoring Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time Depth Interval Time Exploration Examination Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time events Start Depth End Depth Date Time Depth Point Time Exploration Examination Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time g Depth Point Time Monitoring Monitoring Point ID NOTE The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths and not elevations As such the BHLP and Cross Section editor require that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark The Table Types are listed on the right side of the Table Settings window When the desired Table type is selected from this frame HydroGeo Analyst lists some of the most commonly used tables wherever applicable as Example tables For example 1f a depth interval data type is selected tables such as Lithology well drilling w
334. ilable are specifically designed for viewing geology and hydrogeology data The HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results using a complete selection of graphical formats and features These include 2D and 3D views of the grid Station representation showing lithology Imported Surfer Grid surfaces Display contaminant plumes in the form of isosurfaces or color maps DXF and Bitmap overlays on surfaces Light source position control Semi transparent objects Auto rotate tools continuously rotate the image around the X Y Z axis Record grid rotation to an AVI file This chapter provides a detailed description of the features and functionality of the various options for preparing and customizing a three dimensional presentation of your HG Analyst data 10 1 About the Interface 3D Explorer may be loaded from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways About the Interface In the Project Tree select a project from the 3D View node Through the Cross Section Editor select a cross section and choose the View 3D option from the View menu 311 When the 3D Explorer window is loaded it should appear similar to the figure shown below Menu Display Window Bar Sy Hydireiora Annaya 20 Explorer gt FS Progam Files Hiinast Projects Demo_Seafect VID Han De di Yen Dating Hee Toolbar pee Pr SE vuos FN Display Tree Display Settings
335. ilable on the left side of the window Note that if the data source is a text file or a spreadsheet only one table will be available for importing The DTS makes an effort to automatically map fields from this table with those in the selected destination table If the field names are identical then the fields will be matched automatically Unmapped fields will appear blank this indicates that the DTS was unable to match the source field to a field in the HydroGeo Analyst database template Therefore a field must be manually selected from the available list and mapped to the appropriate source field The Destination frame contains the data categories and tables in the current database structure From this frame select a Category then a Table from this category and a list of fields will be displayed in the grid on the right side of the window Data Requirements In the previous version of HGA the DTS required all source tables to contain a numeric Station ID in order to map data to the correct stations in the stations table The benefit of this design is that the database could support duplicate station names the disadvantage was that in many situations numeric station ID was not available and had to be manually added to the source tables either by hand or through the use of queries Although numeric Station IDs are still the ideal unique identifiers for stations this is no longer a requirement You may now use Station names as a uniq
336. ill then be displayed in the Data Query tab as described below Managing Queries 213 7 5 1 Data Query Tab The Data Query tab in the HydroGeo Analyst main window provides an interface for executing the queries and searches Project Edi Wee Record Seting Toots Hep aA DC xRA RDl gt 60 Baa a Hir a Staten List YQ Data Quer 7 gestora Gunn e E POOF VLA A 1201 00 F 11102006 12 00 00 Pe A NED MAA 1 1 00 PA E E TOO PAIDOS 12 00 00 PH K EMO 10S 1202 00 PA z A A DH a 120600 P 11402006 12 06 00 Ph A TPO OP AAA 1 A 5 i 120000 P 11102005 1 00 00 PH 33 I TCO FOS T PA 5 IFA MAA TA TD PMA 121100 11102006 12 11 00 Pi MAZA VAS 121200 PMA 12100 P 11102005 121 200 PH 1204 00 PF TANA 121400 PM IIA TLAC ANS 1 1500 FM 121600 P 11102006 12 15 00 Pi 1 OP VAS 121 A TOO P TAOS 12 11 00 PH ALO TANA E TADO PMA EMO VAS 1 AO PM 1221 00 FP 1102006 12 21 00 Ph O MANSO gt DGO O DOr 0 lij a TOO FP TOS 12 23 00 PH EMP MINA 1200 PM 122 00 F PASS E 0 Pe 12200 PAGS 12 26 00 Ph Ta OP VO 127 P Too FP TLS 1 20 00 PH ERP TAVAS 12 200 PM 1200 MAA 1 O PMA 1239 00P 1102006 12 19 00 Pi MHZ MAA 12 32 00 PMA IEW P aS 12 32 00 PH IFA MINAS 12 PM T DO DO O DOO DO DO ODDO DO E EA A A ee ee ee 4 O AE In the Data Query window the following options are available To execute an existing query e Select the desired query from the Queries node in the tree e Right mouse click on this query and select Exec
337. in the selected table that have similar properties to the primary key in the current table Only one field from the list can be selected as a foreign key In cases where the primary key is composed of two or more fields a button is shown in Chapter 5 Template Manager the cell where the foreign key is to be entered and clicking on this button launches a separate dialog similar to the one given below Set Foreign Key In the above dialog a matching field must be provided for each field in the primary key of the current table The selected matching fields will form a foreign key in the child table When entering data into child tables HydroGeo Analyst limits the values for the fields in the foreign key to only those that are present in the primary key of the parent table This 1s done by using the distinct list of values in the primary key as a pick list All parent tables to the current table 1f any are listed along with the primary and corresponding foreign keys in the read only grid Table is CHILD to located towards the bottom of the main window An example is shown below Template Manager Demo OF x Environmental y x T ag m TF Use as project default Database structure Table Settings Descriptions Description K f ea mDatabase Settings Geologic Description Table type Y Well Construction Table name oevel A l Soil Testing obal
338. inal sample to which it is being compared The following settings are available Define A New Lab Quality Template 427 Duplicate Settings Coefficient of variation less than Relative percent difference less than z0 EEE Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color e Relative percent difference less than This criteria is used to compare how close the result from a duplicate sample D 1s to the true original field sample O It is expressed as either a positive difference the sample result is higher than the true value or negative difference the sample result is lower than the true value When used with duplicate samples the Relative Percent Difference measures precision the lower the value the more precise the results must be to be considered acceptable It can also measure accuracy when one of your results is the true value such as the quality control lab results for a split sample or the actual concentration of a known or unknown sample Coefficient of Variation CV less than The standard deviation as a percentage of the average The CV is a unitless quantity indicating the variability around the mean in relation to the size of the mean When used with duplicate samples the CV measures precision the lower the value the more precise the results Highlighting If a record is identified as not meeting the Template criteria specified above it will be highlighted according to the settings
339. indow Tas S HH O M gt KEBKIS O O o k a ab m z Beoseasunm Aamhas di ie sas B ti i i i N y El m al 33 The following sections describe the toolbar buttons of the designer window Main Toolbar LLET nnn py New Report Allows you to create a new report Report Wizard Allows you to create a new report using the report wizard Gi Import MS Access Reports Allows you to import reports that are created in MS Access Ey Open Report Allows you to open an existing report Report Designer Window 349 z Save Report Allows you to save the active report H Save Report As Allows you to save the active report with another name and or format i e as a report template if desired ER Page Setup Allows you to edit the page setup properties E Printer Setup Allows you to configure printer settings E Print Report Allows you to generate the report and send it to a printer Preview Report Previews the report before printing w Undo Cancels the last operation an Cut Cut selected text or object from the report designer Copy Copies selection to clipboard B Paste Pastes contents of the clipboard to the report designer Delete Deletes current selection x oit Reorder Groups Displays the groups order dialog Display Settings Tools ES Report Explorer Displays hides the control that displays all report elements placed on each section of the report 350 Chapter 11 The Repor
340. indow To use this utility Description of Menu Items 261 262 Select Measure from the Tools menu or click on the ff Measure button in toolbar Place the mouse cursor at the start point for the line The mouse cursor will change to a cross hair Click once with the left mouse button to start the line Drag the mouse cursor to the end point of the line To add a vertex to the line click once with the left mouse button then continue drawing to the new location As the line is drawn the distance from the start point to the end point 1 e the current mouse cursor location is displayed in a status bar at the bottom of the Map Manager window This is indicated in the sample image below Layer Information Station Layer Coord GCS WES 1984 Datum DES 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 30 f 5e9 54 22m Line 520 06m 535 966 4 813 623 1 5 564 e There will be two values displayed here The Seg value is the distance from the current cross hair to the previous vertex location i e the distance of the line segment The Line value is the total line distance from the start point including all segments e To finish the line and end the line measurement double click the left mouse button Define Cross Section Line Allows you to create a cross section line Make sure you are in one of the HGA data layers before drawing a cross section line Please see the section Defining a Cross Section Line on p
341. ing Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheetl x Description z station be Map source fields to destination fields Unit Conditions type LONG V name STRING name STRING Vx DOUBLE unknowr x DOUBLE degree M y DOUBLE unknowr DOUBLE degree L X zone LONG ft DOUBLE m DOUBLE m AA a A Total of records 15 O Primary key O Requires a unit to be selected lt Back Next gt Cancel EJ Help Elev from this list this field contains the Elevations for the stations NOTE The remaining unmapped fields are not necessary for this project Next define units for a few of the length type fields highlighted in the Source table Elev and TOC To do so locate the Unit column under the Source table and select a unit for the Elev field Data Management 43 amp m from this list Repeat this for the TOC field as shown below 12 Data Transfer System Import seats fusion DOUBLE m i STRING DOUBLE unknow degree DOUBLE E unknowr degree DOUBLE Next select these fields for importing Under the Use column Use for Elev and Use for TOC and a check mark will appear beside this field NOTE The units for station X Y co ordinates will be defined in Step 3 of the import routine Next
342. ings Contour Interval Contour Line Style C Number of Intervals M Label Renderer Sample Text Additional Custom Intervals lia gt Decimal Places fa I db Create Cancel Help Elevation from the Choose Field combo box at the top of the dialog type 2 0 for the Contour Interval Create A dialog will appear prompting for a name for the shape file containing the contour map Browse to the project s Map folder in this example this folder should be D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects SampleProject Map type ContourMap in the dialog that appears Save OK in the confirmation dialog The contour map will now show up as a new map layer in the map project The contour map properties may be modified including the line thickness and color To do so ContourMap layer in the Layer Control list to make this active Layer gt Properties from the menu The following dialog will appear Line Style Paten Jr line d Sample Mapping the Data 73 Feel free to experiment with the line properties It may be helpful to change the color and line thickness Once you are finished OK to apply the new properties The map project with the contour map should now be similar to the one shown in the figure below AEE Map Project Sample_ Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help Cemal zmen A OF XA AAA 5 del ASNO al E
343. ining the image corners The image region can be modified as explained below To delete a georeference point e Click the Delete Point button in the toolbar e Select one of the georeference points to delete it NOTE When a georeference point is deleted a new georeference point must be added since two georeference points are required to create a coordinate system Chapter 8 Map Manager Once the Georeference points have been defined the map region may be modified In the Select Map Region window the map region is represented by an outline of a box with circular nodes at each corner and with arrows pointing along the X and Y axes The map region box can be shifted or expanded to any alignment on the site map using the toolbar options described below These options may also be accessed from the Options menu on the Main Menu bar Resize Region Click and drag a corner of the map region box to stretch or shrink the size of the map region The new map coordinates will be updated to display the new map region el Rotate Region Rotate the map region E Align Rectangle Align the map region with the x axis El Maximize Enlarge the map region to the full extents of the basemap HINT If it is desirable to use the entire image for the map use the Maximize option to expand the map region to the full extents Once the georeferencing 1s completed click OK in the Georeference window A confirmation dialog will appear as shown below
344. ion Expression station id station name name station x station y y station toc toc station elevation elevation Station Name Y Elevation en db Xx 7 Map and BHLP Ready JW Use current projection system station type Conditions total depth Expression Expression depth to bedrock description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction y Source Condition Project y Close EJ Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows MiS Time 0 0 0 15 e Click once on the field and drag this field into the blank conditions field under the Expression column The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually e Under the Conditions select an Operator for the field A combo box with 211 212 several options will appear gt gt lt lt LIKE IS IS NOT etc For this example select gt Enter a value in the second Expression field For this example type 325 Repeat this step for additional conditions Link multiple conditions by specifying an additional Operator choose from AND OR Press the EF Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to generate the SQL string If the Query string is invalid the violating rows will be
345. ion Lithology table An example for BH10 1s shown below Data Management 49 i HydroGeo Analyst SampleJuly21 D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects S ample S ample Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help ea F Sh tXBAaAlRGBH S Boi SO Ow lip Ml Station Groups 4 Project 9B Station Data Queries Maps MI Cross Sections 1 4 Reports 3D Views Borehole Logs 9 Queries J Station List MA Data Query Station Data Data Category x coor coor m z ae Select Station Geologic Description y BH10 Im 535369 60000001 4814739 099995 347 34 Elevation m TOC m 7 Lithology Hydrogeology Modelling features to Description soil type __ Consistency ASTM Descriptor Coarse Gravel 8 26 Silty clay Clay H 45 Fine sand Fine Sand CE ES Sl E y Y 6 Coarse Gravel 73 5 Silty clay Silt 100 Silty to Fine Sand Sand Since the data was imported directly to the SQL Server database it is not necessary to Post Save the changes In the next section you will import soil chemistry data for the boreholes Example Importing Soil Chemistry Data In this section you will import soil chemistry data from a file In most of the data models provided with HGA chemistry samples must have a sample code the field name is sys_sample_code in many database schemas When importing the chemistry data you need to import
346. ion you will create a few sample reports Before proceeding close the 3D Explorer s File gt Exit from the main menu Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections 83 2 7 Preparing Reports The Reporting component included with the HydroGeo Analyst package allows for creating reports containing any data from the database in addition to charts maps cross sections and 3D views 2 7 1 Creating Data Reports from Grids Select any grid then press the print button on the toolbar If a template is available there will be a prompt to select a template For example if you want to print the station list E Station List tab a Print button from the toolbar A print template may be selected 1f esired OK This will load the Report Viewer An example is shown below New Report Company Name Station List Address Project Waterloo Investigation Contact Info Location Waterloo ON Date January 1 2004 elevation eS E 5 3 15 g co N No MIM 0 4 ro amp vo Ala a 5 43 4 co 342 s S Print button once again to print the contents as is or view the eport Designer to change the report format 84 Chapter 2 Getting Started Please see Chapter 11 The Report Editor for more details on printing and modifying reports This concludes Chapter 2 Getting Started Feel free to experiment with many of the features that HydroGeo Analyst has to offer which have not bee
347. ion FX Y Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Geophysics E well History Tarta Expression Operator Expression FSource Condition Project y Advanced Close Help Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 Data Query as the type in the upper left section of the window E New Query button in the toolbar 60 Chapter 2 Getting Started Mame o O O Description In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the new query For this example type PCE_exceedences OK The Project Tree on the left side of the window contains the database structure with the data categories tables and fields For this example expand the Soil Sampling category then the Soil Chemistry table and locate the chemical_name field beside Soil Sampling beside Soil Chemistry An example is shown below 7 Query Builder xMmAa Z Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL ViewPreview Select a Query m Display Field ps e e A 1 Description E E Geologic Description ES z e a Z well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling soil_samples Soil Chemistry sys_sample_code Sample_name sample_date 1 db K J Map and BHLP Ready Use current projection system Conditions Operator Expression result_value result_u
348. ion names Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheet y Soi Sampling y soil_samples Map source fields to destination fields Use Name Type Unit Conditions Name Type M station_name STRING station LONG MV sys_sample_code STRING sys_sample_code STRING po sample_name STRING V start_depth DOUBLE mo y start_depth DOUBLE m V end_depth DOUBLE m y end_depth DOUBLE m VO sample_date DATESTAN sample_date DATESTAMP po collection_quarter STRING po comment STRING L chain_cust STRING L X company STRING E composite STRING E composite_desc STRING L delivery STRING E z parent STRING L sent_date DATESTAMP E rec_date DATESTAMP L y samp_matrix STRING M E samp_reason STRING E E samp_technique STRING m sz sample_class STRING L sample_type STRING po E sampler STRING m source STRING x CO Requires a unit to be selected CO Required field 1 Foreignkey Linked Fields Total of records 125 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Under Destination Soil sampling for the new Destination Data Category soil_ samples for the new Destination table Under Source Table Sheet1 if it is not already selected from the combo box Next map the fields and select appropriate units In this example most fields are automatically mapped since the field names in the source are identical to the field Data Management al 9
349. ions Chapter 8 Map Manager Export Map Project E T r x Map Layers Surface M Select All Export as Sample Map GA brmnp Raster Sample Map GA brnp W alme bmp Raster alme bmp m intro dwf CAD intro dwf m contour Line contour m All Stations Point All Stations m CrossSectonLined Line CrossSechonLine5 m Boreholes Point Boreholes W AmPhoto_Color_gr bmp Raster AmPhoto_Eolor_gr bmp e Water Courses Line Water Courses W Airports 1 Point Airports 1 e Major Railroad Line Major Railroads al Urban Areas Polwgor Urban Areas W Trees Polwgor Trees e Grasslands Polwgor Grasslands al Croplands Poligon Croplands z Destination Folder D stemp Ej e Export using current map project s coordinate system Export Cancel 53 Help In this dialog select the layers you with to export and define names for the layers the same can be done for Surfaces if any are available Finally specify the Destination Folder for the copy of the map files On exporting a map project selected shape files will be exported in the current projection system if selected by the user Raster images will use the projection system at the time the image was georeferenced Export Map Provides options for exporting the current map view to a Raster Image file Supported file types include Bitmaps BMP JPEGs jpg and Enhanced Meta Files EMF Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save An Export di
350. is TPattem Consister_ Structure ASTMDe Color Queries BEN cache E Maps Fine Sa E E Cross Sections Clay He al i sit E o 2DView Alty to Fine Sand Sand M al A Borehole Logs 4 gt a j ia Queries RINA CoO SSL HOE STONES EC OPN Y Tables Data Loading Options When working with environmental data it is common that you can be dealing with hundreds or thousands of stations Likewise for an individual station there may be hundreds or thousands of records common examples are geophysical logs downhole data or water levels recorded in a data logger Reading this data from the database can be a time consuming task In the lower left corner of the HGA main window below the Project Browser you will see the following settings Loading option Load All amp Incremental 1000 3 low 2 ID 2 With the Data Loading Options it is possible to load station groups and data in individual tables in smaller increments The following options are available e If the Load All option is selected then all stations will be loaded in the station group About the Interface 17 e Ifthe Incremental option is selected and a value is defined default 100 then only the first 100 stations in the station group will be loaded Click on the Refresh puso to load the subsequent increment of stations load an additional 100 stations etc Currently this feature is implemented only for the station list For tables other
351. is feature is active only after a cross section line has been selected or drawn in the map window BHLP button loads a Borehole Log Plot BHLP for the selected station 231 8 2 Description of Menu Items 8 2 1 Project 232 New The New item provides options for creating a new map project file Map projects are saved with the extension VMP The new map project will use the same projection system and extents as defined in the current HydroGeo Analyst project NOTE Each Map Project has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 5 Profile Settings Open Provides options for opening an existing Map Project only files with the VMP extension can be opened using the Map Manager Save Provides an option to save the current map project file All current Map Layers that are displayed will be saved to the current Map Project file Save As Provides the option to save a copy of the current Map Project with a different name Close This will close the current Map Project If there are unsaved edits there will be a prompt to save changes before closing Reopen A list of recently accessed map projects will be displayed beside the Reopen item This 1s an alternate method of opening map project files instead of using the Open command Export Project Creates a copy of all layers in the current map project for use in other applicat
352. is first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations Cancel i In the Choose a Data Source window create a data package and select the source file Package Name and select New Package from the combo box type Stations in the box that appears OK The data package will save the DTS import settings and configuration for quick and easy recall later on s Ey button beside the Specify Import File name field In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls Sample_Stations XLS file located in the Examples folder located in the HG Analyst program folder The default folder is D Program Files HGAnalyst Examples Data Management 41 Import File ate A a Sample_Lithology sneme empe Siors A Open Next to proceed to Step 2 of DTS Once the data source is provided the next step is to match a Source table with a Destination table The DTS provides an interface that can be used to select the destination HydroGeo Analyst table by first selecting the data category that contains the table and the desired destination table Once the destination table is selected all fields in the table will be listed for field mapping
353. isplay the first potentially duplicate station Using the right grid you may select the appropriate destination station to be updated If the destination contains more than station with the same name you must choose the appropriate one by selecting the appropriate radio button Above the left grid you will see the All Stations combo box with four items Append Update Reject and blank This combo box will control the group operations and allow you to apply the same operation to all stations listed on the left grid The default selection in this combo box will be the Append option Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Above the right grid the Filter controls can manipulate what stations will be displayed in the destination right grid By default all stations with the same name will be displayed However you may select any field an operation e g gt Like Is Not and a criteria that will be used to retrieve stations from the destination This feature allows you to locate Stations that may be already in the database but with names that were misspelled or entered incorrectly e g MW 1 MW_1 MW1 etc 6 1 4 Data Validation Report and Finalizing the Import The last step in the DTS involves previewing the data to be imported and taking appropriate actions with regards to erroneous data The Data Validation window as shown below displays all data ready to be imported Errors or warnings if any will be listed along with
354. isting project If a NEW database was created in Step 1 the projects picklist will be inactive Next to create the project tables and proceed to the next step in the wizard The database settings may be modified AFTER the project has been created using the Template Manager For more details please see Chapter 5 Template Manager The next step is to define the Project Properties and Location settings 4 2 3 Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location The Set Project Properties and Location window as shown below contains general project information such as project name folder location and soil settings Using the Project Manager 153 154 Project Wizard E zoli Step 3 Provide Project Location Settings A E WEE Project Name SampleProject This step allows you to set project y x properties and assign project Project Folder o AProgram FilestHGAnalystiProjectsiS ampleProjects Ez personnel Client 24 Define a project name and select 4 project folder all folders and Project Location files that will store project related information will be created under Soil Specification Po i the provided Project Folder oe Select or create a client for the Description project Ao Select a Soil Specification M Projection Type for the project The Soil Projection Specification contains soil names Geographic and pattems which will be used be to visualize your lithology data in UTM borehole
355. it to an existing report If you choose to add to an existing report the report editor adds the new map to the report As such multiple views of your Fence Creating Reports 373 Diagram project s can be sent to a report one by one In order to be able to add the current fence diagram to an existing report you must first open the existing report Each view of your Fence Diagram is created with its associated legends As with the previous report types the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved 11 4 5 Creating a Borehole Log Report A report for your borehole log plots can be created by following the directions below e Select one or more stations from the Station List e Select then open a BHLP template from the Borehole Logs node of the Project Browser e From the BHLP designer press the Print button e Select the desired report template e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications e Print the report as is or save to one of the supported formats 11 4 6 Parameter Query Reports For details on this option please see Creating Parameter Query Reports on page 370 11 5 Managing Reports 11 5 1 Opening an Existing Report All reports saved in your project are listed under the Reports node in the Project Browser To open a report
356. itch between annotation types or de select the current annotation type otherwise you will remain in Edit mode for Adding Annotations to the Cross Section 307 the selected annotation type Upon deselecting switching annotation types you will be prompted to save your changes Add Text To add text e Select the Edit Text option from the pop up menu e Click on the A Text button on the toolbar e Click on the desired text location in the cross section window e Enter the text in the Input text window that appears Once a text box has been created it can be moved by clicking and dragging or edited by double clicking on the existing text Text can be deleted by right clicking on a text box and selecting the Delete option All text added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Lines To add Lines e Select the Edit Lines option from the pop up menu e Click on the Draw Line button on the toolbar e Click once on the desired line location in the cross section window and simply drag and click to create a line with several vertices A vertex can be added to an existing line by right clicking on a line and selecting the Add vertex option A line can be deleted by right clicking on a line and selecting the Delete option All lines added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Polygons To add polygons or rectangles e Select the Edit Polygo
357. ited it can be accepted using the Accept feature for records For this example there should be no errors warnings present Import to import the data Read the confirmation message Chapter 2 Getting Started Information El gi Urecords were updated and 1 15 records were inserted OK Close to close the DTS Example Importing Lithology Data In this section you will import Lithology data from a file This data will be later visualized in 2D cross sections and with the 3D Explorer Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu Package Name and select New Package from the combo box type LithologyData in the box that appears OK Sr ry button beside the Specify Import File name field In the Import File dialog Change the Files of type gt Excel xls Sample_Lithology XLS file located in the Examples folder under the installation folder The default installation folder is D Program Files HGAnalyst Examples Open Next to proceed to the next window in the DTS In the Data Mapping window you must select a new Destination Data Category and Table from the right side of the window In this case the Lithology data will be imported to the Geologic Description category Lithology table Select the appropriate items from the combo boxes as shown in the image below Data Management 47 Data Transfer System Import A Fields with identical names will b
358. ject pr Ey Please select the desired server provide the project file and the Backup File D TestBackup BackupD atabase bak amp pierre a E to the server OK Cancel Help In the Backup database dialog specify the Server The Server can be the WHI MSDE instance or SQL Server provided it is on the local machine Specify the Project to open VBH file and specify the Database BackUp File BAK file NOTE The user must have permissions to the Manage Databases and Create Projects objects in the ALSD in order to use this option Close the project which is currently open HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 97 Re Open This menu item provides a list of projects that have been recently opened The most recent project will appear at the top Simply select the desired project and it will be loaded into HydroGeo Analyst Import Use the Import option to import data or reports into the project database data may be imported from source files using the Data Transfer System package Data Using DTS This option allows data to be imported into the HydroGeo Analyst project database using the Data Transfer System DTS Data may be imported from the following sources e Text CSV TXT ASC TAB e MS Excel 97 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Any OLE DB compliant database such as a MS Access Database MDB For more details on how to import data using the DTS please refer to Chapter 6 The Data Transfer Syst
359. kbox You can also set the Header Color by clicking on the color box and change the Column Width The Image frame allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox Select from the available Draw Modes and change the Width and Height of the images The Description frame allows you to show hide the text label change its Font and change the position of the label 12 2 3 Depth Interval based Column 402 The Depth Interval based column is designed to display data that has been collected at various intervals As in the case of the Depth Point based column the data can be displayed using graphics text or both Examples of data that could be displayed using a Depth Interval based column include screen locations interval based samples and their descriptions etc To create a Depth Interval based column click on the Add button to add a new column and select Interval from the combo box that appears A new Interval column will be added to the designer window Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Expand the Interval node and select IntervalEntities 9 6 Depth ES DepthEntities B E Interval gt Se es DataTable E E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataF eld E BottomE nit Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField Select the data table or query and the fields for the top and bottom entity In this column the data table or query is any data source that contains fro
360. keep the project administrator password in a safe place or to create multiple project administrators for multiple users for both the projects and on an application level as a backup 4 1 6 Exporting PLSD Once you have defined a security document for a project users user groups access rights these are saved to the project database These settings can be re used in future projects by exporting the current database template Upon exporting the PLSD will be saved and will be included in new projects created with this specific database template For more details on exporting database templates see Chapter 5 Exporting the current template as a Database template 4 2 Using the Project Manager 144 This chapter presents information on how to create new projects and modify the properties of existing projects HydroGeo Analyst is designed to manage databases storing data for multiple projects A project in HydroGeo Analyst refers to a set of data with common elements Some of these common elements may be location nature of the data or the purpose for which the data is collected and stored A project can be created in an existing HydroGeo Analyst database in which case it will be able to share some of the available existing data For instance if the new project is created in an existing database containing all groundwater monitoring locations in a Province State where the project is located the project may share all or part of the inform
361. king and Embedding object such as a picture to the report Bar Code Insert a bar code into the report ADO Control Click on it to add a ADO ActiveX Data Object datasource control on the report Chart Object Drag it to the designer to add a chart to the report Charts Manager Set the properties of the selected chart Report Designer Window 353 354 A Well Profile Add a borehole log plot to the report a afe i tds q ActiveX Controls Add any ActiveX control that is registered on the current computer to your report For more information on the available options see Toolbox options for General Tools on page 355 Alignment Tools a a Bring To Front Move the selected item to the front of the overlay view Send to Back Move the selected item to the back of the overlay Align Left Aligns selected controls to the same left coordinate of the last selected control Center Align Aligns selected controls to the same center coordinate of the last selected control Right Align Aligns selected controls to the same right coordinate of the last selected control Align Top Aligns selected controls to the same top coordinate of the last selected control Align Middle Aligns selected controls to the same middle coordinate of the last selected control Align Bottom Aligns selected controls to the bottom coordinate of the last selected control Chapter 11 The Rep
362. l Ei Solid E 1I Ax Isolines For surfaces you may also display isolines These settings are displayed below Surfaces Ef Surface lsolines Cross Sections Data SESS SSS Name ESSER Visible Iv Max value 340 9045 Min value SS 321 0938 ElLine properties S Color from palette M _ Value Color width SES 1 Style Solid gt El uto intervals ACES ___ Visible Iv Textcolor SJ O Text size 117 31625 Decimals 3 Box labels Box depth 3 46325 Box color You may modify the isoline properties intervals and label settings Line properties e Color from palette indicates each contour line will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type e Color indicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected The browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB color Display Settings 321 Width is the contour line width Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals Labels View shows hides the automatic lines Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will b
363. l be displayed Set Features oo X CPT Highway MW NAME 7 de Well h ID m OF Cancel A cross section line may intersect with one or more features that are displayed in one or more layers in your map project For instance one or more rivers from the Rivers Description of Menu Items 281 282 layer may intersect with a given cross section at one or more points Other features of importance may include roads railway lines lakes etc Features from selected map layers that intersect with a cross section may be displayed as a symbol and or label on the cross section line NOTE The intersecting items display options can be defined only at the time when the cross section is created currently it is not possible to add set these features later on once the cross section has been created In the Set Features dialog there are several options e Name Name of the intersecting layer read only e Visible Defines if the element is visible or not e Field Allows you to select a field to use as a label for the intersecting feature e Symbol Allows you to select a symbol to represent the intersecting feature e Label Allows you to set properties of the label representing the intersecting feature The Field column contains a list of available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view Double click on the desired cell in the Symbol column to load the dialog where
364. layed each second in the AVI file This setting has no effect on the recording speed After specifying the settings click OK and the recording will begin To stop the recording click the Stop button NOTE Recording AVI files will require significant system resources both RAM and Hard disk space It is recommended to close all non essential programs while recording the AVI file and ensure the destination folder has adequate free space Working with 3D Explorer 319 10 2 4 OpenGL Settings By default the 3D Explorer will attempt to use the vendor provided driver included with graphics acceleration hardware If problems are encountered with the vendor provided drivers display performance inadequate then 3D Explorer provides the option to use the e ae Microsoft Driver for Open GL loj x OpenGL drivers Use hardware accelerator The OpenGL settings can be modified by SS selecting Settings Options from the main menu bar then select the OpenGL tab The 3D Explorer must be closed and re opened before the new Open GL driver will be used 10 2 5 Loading Projects 320 To load a 3D project select File Open from the main menu and navigate to a directory where the desired Cross Section is located or click the 4 Open button from the toolbar Supported files are HG Analyst Cross Section converted files with the extension 3XS Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 10 3 Display Settings
365. le create a Query using the Query Manager e Execute the Query in order to see the results e Press the Print button t from the main toolbar or select Project Report This item is enabled only if a grid is visible and active and has at least one row of data e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications As in the previous type of report the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved Creating Parameter Query Reports A parameter query forces the report component to display a dialog box that prompts you for criteria You can design a query to prompt you for one piece of information for example a station name or for more than one piece of information for example two dates starting date and end date The report component will then retrieve all the records that contain that station name or all the records that fall between those two dates You can use criteria in a query to restrict the set of records that the query returns You can then send the query results to the report component for generating a report If querying the data for different records each time you generate a report is desired you may want the report component to prompt you for criteria to enter for example Station name A query that prompts you for criteria is called a parameter query
366. le Header Color Column width 90 Pattern Symbol Description e Visible W Visible Width Percentage 40 jer Test Font Text Font Show Hint fw Apply OF Cancel The Lithology settings are the same as those described for the Interval column on page 403 12 2 5 Well Construction Column The Well Construction column is the most comprehensive data column in the Borehole Log Plot It displays data from various sources in your database including e Drilling details Annular filling e Casing and screens e Centralizers e Cap e Pump locations e Water Level Information for the above items and in some cases the images for patterns are taken directly from the database To add a Well Construction column click the Add icon and select Well Construction from the combo box provided Some of the entities have been selected for you When the new Well Construction column appears in the BHLP Designer it will display Lithology Drilling Casing BHLP Columns 405 Screen Annular Filling and Scale data for the selected station if it has been entered into your database Other entities such as pump locations have to be entered manually To specify the desired entity expand the Well Construction node and locate the specific sub node Use the combo boxes provided to set the data table and fields Settings The Well Construction column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settin
367. le Log Plotter manually select the data source or query results for the column using the Data Table Queries property In the case of Lithology select the Lithology Entities node as shown in the previous screenshot Specify Data Source First select if you want to use a Data table or a Query as the Data Source Then choose the respective table or data query from the list provided in the combo box next to this property as indicated in the following screenshot All fields from the selected table or query will be available for mapping to the required data fields in the column Update each Data Field as necessary The Data Fields required for a Lithology column are circled in the following figure Borehole Log Designer Sample E a Of xj Y m Elevation m TOC m 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 Select Station x m BH1 E 6 Design A E Lithology Lithology O LithologyEntities Coarse Gravel a fame a DataT able Lithology f Medium sal Bin Sand Caption Top elevation lt DataField from Caption Bottom elevation DataField to Caption Image Description Image DataField soil_type_image E TextEntity Caption Text DataField soil_type Close Export Y Print Y Help Gravel Note The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths not elevations Therefore the BHLP requires that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation
368. levels and groundwater chemistry An observation well is installed in a borehole by casing the borehole and developing the well Station attributes for an observation well include Well ID site ID Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst coordinates elevation well depth screen locations casing diameter and type number of screened intervals screen diameter and type water level measurements and groundwater chemistry analysis results Surface Water Observation Point This station type may be a point on a river or a stream equipped to take water samples and measure river discharge and water level Station attributes include Station ID site ID river ID coordinates elevation type of observations type of equipment water chemistry flow rates etc Weather Station This station may be an observation point equipped to measure weather characteristics Station attributes include Station ID site ID coordinates elevation construction date type of measurements observations start observations end temperatures precipitation solar radiation air quality etc Stations Table The Stations Table stores all the station location information for all projects residing in the database All additional tables you create in your database are directly or indirectly linked to the Stations Table The Station Table may contain an unlimited number of fields Though as a minimum the Station Table must contain the following fields e Station ID
369. liance e Geologic cross sections e Public access to information Environmental site assessment Monitored natural attenuation Regional aquifer characterization and management Cross boundary data sharing Aquifer vulnerability mapping 1 1 What s New in HydroGeo Analyst The main interface for HydroGeo Analyst has much of the same user friendly look and feel as the previous version but with some significant improvements to features Some of the more significant upgrade features in the latest versions of HydroGeo Analyst are described below 1 1 1 New Features in v 3 0 The following new features are available in v 3 0 Data Management Crosstab Queries Generate advanced crosstab queries from data queries Format columns rows sorting options display color font settings Send crosstab query to a report or export to HTML and EXCEL Display results with statistical functions Sum Count Average Max Min Standard Deviation Standard Deviation Population Variance Variance Population Quality Control Lab Quality Assessment Define one or more lab quality assessment templates Analyze Duplicate Spiked and Blank samples Compare Relative Percent Difference and Coefficient of Variation for Duplicate samples Analyze Percent Recovery for Spiked samples Compare Blank samples to method detection limits Execute a Quality analysis on a selected dataset Display and retrieve assessment results records not meeting assessment c
370. log plots and cross State Planar Units SEMIS C Others x Required Field Finish Cancel Help In the first line enter a project name This may be any combination of numbers and letters but should not contain spaces use _ or to substitute for spaces The project name will be used to define the HG Analyst project folder As the name is entered an identical folder name will be created and will appear in the Project Folder field You may modify the project directory by clicking the folder button E and the following dialog will appear Select Directory I E x Directory Hame D Program Files HG Analyst Directories Files gt DA ACI whi CustLine w Level dll E dial a EA Custo dl pia CustPoly_Shift alll Ey bhip CustRend dll data DBFOLL dll ra ads dbwhi al zl Eg Projects Drives E d new volume Cancel Help Select a new directory then click OK to continue The next step is to define the Client for the project Client information is not a required field for new projects The Client information is selected from a list saved in the current database to select a client from the list press the Edit button to load the Client List dialog Chapter 4 Project Manager General Business Address Contact Notes Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc Mame pease Hydrogeologic Inc Phone Fax E 9 746 1798 E 9 885 5162 Logo
371. ls Driver do Microsoft Paradox db Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft 4ccess T reiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf hieren JA ara WEP Cirtscr 1 ARFI Advanced a 4 4 Back Cancel e Select the ODBC driver format In this example select Microsoft Excel Driver as shown below Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 457 Create New Data Source Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft 4ccess T reiber mdbj Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase YFP Driver dbf Microsoft dB ase Treiber dbf Microsoft Excel Treiber xls Microsoft FoxPro Driver DataSourceName e In this dialog enter a name for the new Data Source in the Name field e Click Next to proceed 458 Appendices Create New Data Source x When pou click Finish you will create the data source which you have just configured The diver may prompt you for more information File Data Source Filename DataSource ame Driver Microsoft Excel Driver xls al i Cancel e This dialog displays a summary of the data source information e Click Finish to close the dialog and the following ODBC Setup dialog will appear ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup AES Wate Source Hame Po Description Po Panes Database l Help Version AE Workbook Select Workbook Use Curent Directory Options gt
372. ls When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a cross section boundary line either the left or right 286 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor then the boundary line will become highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this boundary line the drawn line will be automatically snapped to this boundary line Vertex Snapping Buffer The default Vertex Snapping Buffer is 5 pixels When a vertex on a polygon is selected and the Link Vertex option is used and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a vertex on an adjacent polygon then the vertex will become highlighted with a red box outline upon clicking the left mouse button on this vertex the vertex on the selected polygon will be automatically snapped to this newly selected vertex Polygon Vertex Snapping makes it easy to place polygons adjacent to one another for continuous cross section views Labels Provides options for modifying the label fonts for the interpretation layers Geology Hydrogeology and Model Simply click on the sample box beside the appropriate label and a Font options dialog will appear as shown below fiz Cancel F BankGothic Md BT Effects Sample T Strikeout M Underline AaB bYyZz Color L Black Script wester Define the desired font settings then click OK to return to the Options dialog Rulers Tab Controls the appearance settings for the axis of the cross section plot For each ruler
373. lse Initial Catalog T est Data Source SRY T Next gt Cancel Help Next to proceed Chapter 4 Project Manager HG Analyst will then test the connection to the server If a database was selected in the Data Link Properties then HG Analyst will scan and validate the database to see if the required tables exist If no database was selected then there will be a prompt to define a name for the new database as shown below Database name E xi Name OF Cancel E Help type Name of the new database OK For new databases HG Analyst will create the required tables Please be patient during this process If the server connection and database are valid the next window in the Project Wizard will be displayed Otherwise there will be a warning notification regarding the server or database If this 1s the case please select another server or database for your project or verify the connection to the selected server The next step 1s to select or create the Database Template for the project 4 2 2 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables The next window in the Project wizard contains the Database Structure settings This includes tables fields and relationships In this window choose from one of the existing database templates or create a new one as shown in the figure below Using the Project Manager 151 10 x Step 2 Create project dependent tables Select a Project
374. ly composed of the following four parts SELECT Field1 Field2 Field3 FROM Table Name WHERE Condition AND OR Condition2 ORDER BY Field Field2 Field3 where the highlighted words are internal to the SQL language and the terms in the brackets are optional To modify the data source information of the ADO control in your report e select the ADO control by clicking on the appropriate icon on the toolbar e Display the Properties explorer window if it is not already visible e Select the Custom properties option by clicking on the button next to this item e A dialog will appear Provide or modify the desired options 11 3 Report Preview Window The Viewer allows you to visualize the final report as 1t would be printed It can be considered a print preview of your reports Once your report arrives at the viewer it is ready to be printed saved in the native binary format of the Report Editor or exported to the various formats A report preview can be generated by clicking on the E Preview button from the Designer window s toolbar A sample of the Report viewer window 1s shown below with a report template loaded for demonstration purposes i WHI Aena Report _ 0 WON ar o Navigation HER x O E A A e 3 Toolbar E Table of Contents NiE Tea ees Pr 11 Main Body of Report LLIT mbia rakari LT sakia oka at 1 a at a a qi ai ml a qt al a om a at
375. ly include one or several geologic layers and the boundaries of a hydrostratigraphic unit will usually conform with the boundaries of the geologic layers As such you can copy one or more of your geologic interpretation layers and use them as a startup for hydrogeologic interpretation layers To do so e Select the Hydrogeology option from the Layer Manager to make this layer visible e Right mouse click on this interpretation layer and select Copy from Geologic Layers and the following dialog will appear Select the Layers to Copy sas xi source Geological Unit Destination Hydrogeological Unit Hydro Pattern TF Bedrock z Ok Cancel EJ Help Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 299 e In this dialog select one or more geologic interpretation layers to copy e For each layer to be copied provide the name pattern and description of the corresponding hydrogeologic interpretation layer Aquifer or Aquitard Once this is complete the cross section editor draws the selected hydrogeologic interpretation layers 9 4 3 Model Layer Interpretations This option allows for defining the unique model layers Model Layer 1 Model Layer 2 etc for the displayed stations Model layers can be used for numerical groundwater flow models or for general purposes The layer positions for model layers must be drawn in manually with the mouse using the Line tool Defining Model Layers Before drawing model layers the layer attr
376. lyst Fields that contain a linked list will contain an arrow with a combo box on the right side of the field Simply click on this arrow to see the list items available for the field NOTE If you want to re use these lists in a new HGA project you must save the current database template Then create a new project with this database template and the lists will be included For details on saving database templates see Chapter 5 Exporting the current template as a Database template 3 5 Material Specifications Editor The Material Specifications Editor provides options for editing material specifications specifically creating editing soil classifications for your project This Editor displays a list of standard soil specifications shipped with HydroGeo Analyst and allows the display of the soil type names and patterns for each classification The Material Specifications Editor may be launched from two locations e Select the Material Specifications option from the Settings menu or click on the lt j button in the toolbar e Inthe Project Wizard click the button provided in Step 4 Provide Project Settings The Material Specifications Editor will appear as shown in the following screenshot Material Specifications Editor Demo_Project E Oj xi Existing Material Specifications Active Material Specification DIN 4023 y Name Name Picture Gravel Coarse Gravel Medium Gravel Fine Gravel Sand Coarse S
377. m test 5 GB 01 536212 68000001 4814029 99999 323 5 0 ME Station Data ESAN SRC RASA LEAVE A RRO TN METAR TANT ATOR ey SUN v Location description_addins aps H I Cross Sections SUES A ees PS Reports mx 536212 680000002 m HN 3D Views ay 4814029 99999899 m on Borehole Logs a 0 test Elevation 323 5 m ETOC 0 m depth region ltest GB O1 ID 24 Existing station data from other databases or files can also be imported through the use of the Data Transfer System DTS The DTS supports importing from text files spreadsheets XLS and databases e g MS Access Database One or more stations can be selected from the Stations list and grouped into logical groupings called Station Groups This feature is explained in the following section Station Groups Most operations in HydroGeo Analyst require the selection of one or more stations in the Station List tab An example of such an operation is data entry One or more stations for which you would like to add view and or modify data need to be selected so that the Station Data tab is accessible activated The complete list of stations that comprise a project can be viewed in the Station List tab by selecting the Project item under the Station Group node in the project tree However for some of the tasks commonly performed in HydroGeo Analyst retrieving the complete list of stations in the project may not be necessary Moreover retrieving all the stations wh
378. m to interval data and the top and bottom entities are mapped to these from and to fields As in the Depth column once the intervals have been established the value field has to be defined To do so right click anywhere in the Settings frame and select Add Entity Lap I Op Hewa Description DataField from Elcano paid Caption Bottom el Description DataField to Select Text Entity or Image Entity from the combo box depending on the type of data you wish to display A new entity will be added to the Settings frame Using the combo box provided select the field that contains the value or image you wish to display DataT able E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description D ataField From E BottormEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField extE nitity Caption Text Description Text DataField Value Settings The Depth Interval based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP Columns 403 BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Interval node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Settings E ES BHLP Interna Jv Visible Header Color Column width 75 Pattern Symbol Description e Visible e Visible Width Percentage 41 Test Font Text Font Show Hint fw Image
379. map A dialog will appear with a prompt for a filename for the Contour Line file Enter a name for the Contour map Shape file and press Save For more details see Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings on page 463 Create Gridded Data This feature allows you to interpolate data for the current layer and create a grid file GRD for use in HGA 3D Explorer or other applications For example if you have a station layer selected you can create a grid file based on station elevations or TOC top of casing elevations Select this menu item and the following dialog will appear Description of Menu Items 251 Create Gridded Data a a x Name ElevationGrid Calculating Fiel Choose Field Elevation Min 111 Max 111 Interpolato Chooze Interpolator Natural Neighbours ka Advanced Settings Create Cancel EJ Help Enter a name for the grid file and select a field containing the source data Click the Create button to create the file The grid file will be created in the HGA project s folder in the Surface sub folder for example D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Surface test grd NOTE As with contours you can select an interpolation method and customize interpolation settings by clicking on the Advanced Settings button Display Data This feature allows you to display data in a tabular format on the map for the current points map layer Fields are
380. mit result_comment rdl_ppm sample_matrix_code sample_type_code hdl M Source Condition Project y Advanced Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry result_value Type DOUBLE Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 E Generate SQL Statement button from the toolbar at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the Query string 1s invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning E Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string If not already active SQL View gt Preview tab to see the results of the Query The results should be similar to that shown in the figure below Querying the Database 63 2151 xn Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL View Preview SELECT station id AS id station x AS x station y AS y station name AS name soil_chemlStry chemical_name 45 chemical_name soil_chemistry result_value AS result_value FROM Station RIGHT JOIN PStation ON Station ID PStation SID LEFT JOIN soil_chemlStry ON Station id Select a Query PCE_exceedences Description Geologic Description Well Construction soil_chemiStry Station WHERE soil_chemistry chemical_name TetrachlORoethylene AND soll_chemiStry result_value gt 1 AND PStation ID 1 Soil Testing El Soil Sampling soil
381. ms are only available 1f the cursor is located within a grid Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Hide Selected Rows Use the Hide Rows option to hide all records which are selected in a grid all non selected records will remain in the display All hidden records can be restored using the Show All menu item The button in the toolbar performs the same function Invert Selection Use this command to select all records that are not selected and de select all records that are currently selected The EA button in the toolbar performs the same function Show All Use the Show All menu command to show all records in the database this will restore all hidden records Select All Use this menu item to select all records in the grid This item is activated only if a grid is active Sort Ascending Use the Sort Ascending option to sort records in the selected column from lowest to highest characters are sorted from A to Z while numbers are sorted from to 9 The 4 button in the toolbar performs the same function Sort Descending If chosen this option will sort records in the selected column from highest to lowest characters are sorted from Z to A while numbers are sorted from 9 to 1 The 4 button in the toolbar performs the same function m Display on Map This menu item allows you to create a GIS map layer for the data that is being displayed in a grid This data could be a list of stations in the Station List grid or
382. must be adequate space allocated 386 Chapter 11 The Report Editor BSS AE lea ais J SA See BEEE BEE DAZE ME Oas ilaa w Me ST ee ED E B MainReport H PageHeader H GroupHeader1 oi Name GroupHeader1 BackColor EJ PageFooter I sample date l g name sample date BackStyle 0 ddBKTrar E GroupHeader1 CanGrow True CanShrink False ColumnLa True DataField GrpKeepT 0 None height 360 KeepToge False NewColur 0 None NewPage 0 None Repeat 0 None Underlayh False Visible True Adobe FrameMaker 2 Manuals Version 1 English vBoreHole_chi 1 E The chart should be added to the GroupFooter1 section of the report design fil Chart Object button from the toolbar Using your mouse draw a rectangle in the GroupFooterl area of the report design that nearly fills the allotted space A sample plot image will appear as shown below Creating Reports with Charts 387 New Report E B MainReport H PageHeader H GroupHeaderl H Detail H GroupFooter1 aS PageFooter Custom Name Chart2D1 Height 2409 Left 213 Tag Top 142 Visible True Width 6874 E PageFooter To modify the chart settings r Thal Charts Manager button from the toolbar The dialog shown in the figure below will be displayed Charts Manager Chart D1 El Plot Series On Series Label gt Axis Field Y Axis Field 1 Primary Asis Serie 2 Primary Asie Sere
383. n ParameterlNfo gt Units Units gt Unit Conversion Factors Quality Code Identifiers QualityCode Detection Limit z Required for Lab Quality validation Help Cancel dh From the Select and configure a template window select from the list of Lab Quality Templates Once a template has been selected the Template Description field will be completed with the description entered when the template was created The next step 1s to map the fields in your data query to the fields required by the QC component 13 3 1 Mapping Fields In the Data Source frame the Data Entity must be matched to the Data Source for all required fields required fields are marked with a and are also listed in previous section In most cases HGA will be able to automatically detect and map the fields however 1f you have created custom fields or renamed existing fields in your database structure you may need to browse through the list and select the appropriate Data Source in your project using the pull down menus that corresponds with a Data Entity NOTE A field in your query must be mapped to each of the required fields as listed above see the section Data Requirements on page 425 for more details 13 4 Generate QC Results Once all required fields have been matched in the template the OK button will become active Clicking OK will run the Lab Quality Analysis and once completed the Lab Quality Validation wind
384. n TOC i sy M Monitoring Wells OA AA W 23 535588 4 4814667 299995 331 1 0 LES Station Data Es Description E Geologic Description S Well Construction Description E Soil Testing Soil Sampling S Monitoring Event 30 ES Mining Exploration Elevation E Geophysics TOC Well History depth region Queries Maps ai Cross Sections E Reports O Geologic Description 3D Views lll Borehole Logs After a Data Category has been selected the appropriate tables and fields belonging to this category will be displayed in the Station Data tab The following is a complete list of the data categories provided in HydroGeo Analyst along with some of the data entities that may be linked to each category Description e g station name location coordinates elevation site etc Geologic Description e g lithology soil properties hydrogeologic properties etc Well Construction e g drilling protocol annular filling monitoring points casing materials well dimensions etc Soil Testing e g SPT pocket penetrometer vane shear test dynamic cone Soil Sampling e g Rock Coring Soil Chemistry results Soil Vapor Moisture Content Particle Size Distribution Atterberg Standard Proctor Unconfined Compression Direct Shear Odometer Consolidation Monitoring Events e g weather conditions bailing field properties water quality groundwater levels
385. n title for the Footer Click OK to update the crosstab report Chapter 7 Queries An example below shows two group footers e maximum concentration at each station for each analyzed chemical and e maximum concentration observed for each sample date for each analyzed chemical for all stations i Crosstab TCE_and_BTEX_for_Year2000 Al Pall eee ed chemical_name date e z i IBTEX 1072 2000 140 l I 38000 00 2 10 2000 40000 00 211522000 6000 00 22142000 14000 00 252000 i i 25000 00 2972000 i i 33000 00 50 00 33000 00 40000 00 74100 00 2875 00 3200 00 400 00 933 33 25 2000 1666 67 29 2000 2200 00 Maximum Conc for this Station 2200 00 3200 00 i 5466 67 0 2 2000 2 10 2000 Maximum Conc for this Station 7 8 3 Generating the Report Once all settings have been configured click the OK button in the Properties dialog to generate the report A table will be generated with the query results as shown in the following screenshot Crosstab Queries 221 Oia O19 O19 t 01 01 110 110 1 10 O11 2 1 110 110 1 10 Gk At the top of the Crosstab results table window there is a toolbar with several buttons that control options for editing printing exporting and modifying the display properties of the query e Use the button to Modify the Query this will return you to the Layout tab in the Properties window previous step e Use the
386. n Groups M Station List BP Data Query Station Data a Project mData Category 6 Station Data ETIE Select Station X m Y m Elevation m TOC m E Queries bell tds BH10 535169 60 4314739 10 347 00 348 00 F Crosstab 2 Maps soil_samples Soil Chemistry Rock Coring Soil Vapor Moisture Content Particle Size Distrib Atterberg Unconfined Compression Direct Shear Odometer Cor 4 gt on Gs oi sys_sample_code Sample___ sample_date chemical_name result_value result_unit 2DView BH10_10 30 2002_13 7 TVOC 15 ma Kg oe e BH10_10 30 2002_16 7 TYOC 120 mg Kg A Borehole Logs BH10_10 30 2002_2 7 TYOC 3200 mg Kg Charts BH10_10 30 2002_22 2 TVOC 540 mg Kg BH10_10 30 2002_26 2 TYOC 0 53 mg Kg BH10_10 30 2002_28 2 TYOC 0 37 ma Kg __ BH10_10 30 2002_8 2 Vinyl Chloride 0 ma Kg Cross Sections Since the data was imported directly to the SQL Server database it is not necessary to Post Save the changes Using the HGA Lab Quality Control tools you may now perform a quality control assessment on your data analyzing blanks duplicates and spike samples This feature is outside the scope of this exercise For more details please see Chapter 13 Quality Control 2 2 3 Creating Station Groups 56 Once the data has been successfully entered into the project it may be convenient to sort the stations into logical groups Grouping stations allows for efficient management and
387. n Properties Time window as shown below Animation Properties i x Rotate Time Pume Browser Time steps 50 Start Time x 172000 5 1 2000 Finish Time fiz 142000 124142000 Animate in selected interval Cancel 316 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer The Number of time steps for animation value may be increased to smooth the transition from one time to the next or 1t may be decreased to make the animation proceed faster HGA 3D Explorer uses interpolation in time for the case where the time step falls on a date where there is no data The Start time value indicates the simulation time when the animation will begin The Finish time value indicates the simulation time when the animation will end The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the specified start and finish time Plume Browser The Plume Browser tab is the location where you can select from pre defined color maps or isosurfaces for a preliminary assessment of the plume As such there are basic options for color maps and isosurfaces Once you have a better understanding of where the contaminants lie and at what time steps you can use the more advanced options in the Plumes node in the tree including e advanced isoline maps with color fill and line settings e color maps with clip at cut off options e display color maps on cross section lines e isosurface options including color from palette sho
388. n allows you to choose from such sources as Text Excel or Access e Click on the Connection tab once more to display the original dialog E Data Link Properties xl Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Excel Files r Retest Use connection string Connection string 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password l Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use Test Connection OF Cancel Help e Under the Specify the source of data select the option Use Connection 456 Appendices String e Click on the Build button and the following dialog will appear Select Data Source H ES File Data Source Machine Data Source Look in Data Sources ii DSN Name Hew Select the file data source that describes the driver that you wish to connect to You can Use any file data source that refers to an ODBC driver which ts installed on your machine e In this dialog select from a list of data sources Since none are available click on the New button to create a new one The following dialog will then appear Create New Data Source x Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Driver do Microsoft Access mdb Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf Driver do Microsoft Excell
389. n covered in this chapter To exit the program return to the HydroGeo Analyst window and Project gt Exit Preparing Reports 85 86 Chapter 2 Getting Started Using HydroGeo Analyst The following topics will be discussed in this chapter HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts e Introduction e Station Types e Stations Table e Station Groups e Data Categories e Data Entry HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar e Project e Edit e View e Record e Settings e Tools e Help Finally a description of the major components which make up the HydroGeo Analyst package 1s provided These components simplify the task of managing analyzing and visualizing the data stored in the database and include e Template Manager e List Editor e Material Specifications Editor e Project Manager e Data Transfer System DTS e Query Builder e Map Manager e Cross Section Editor e 3D Explorer e Report Editor e Borehole Log Plot BHLP Designer 87 e Unit Converter 3 1 HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts 3 1 1 Introduction 88 HydroGeo Analyst is designed to manage databases with any structure and any level of referential integrity constraints As such a project database is not limited in the number of tables it may contain nor in the relationship between the tables A HydroGeo Analyst database is designed to store any type of environmental data Most environmental data is inherently spatial as samples and o
390. n for the selected property 1s provided at the bottom of this window Designer Advanced Controls and Settings Types of Controls The runtime Report Designer allows you to add several types of controls to your reports These controls range from those that are currently shown on the toolbar to all controls that are present on your computer The types of controls that are provided on the toolbar can be grouped as follows Data Access Controls ADO data control Provides access to the database using information provided to 1t Only one ADO control can be added to a given report This control can be added to the report by clicking on the Insert ADO Data control icon a on the toolbar Chapter 11 The Report Editor Data Display Controls Controls that can be used to display information that is either coming from the data source database or provided on the Report Designer The controls that fall into this category include e Label e Check box e RTF Text e Graphics Image Line Forms OLE objects Barcodes etc e Page break e Sub reports Adding Controls Except for ADO data control all controls can be added to the report in the desired section To add a control to a report e select the desired control by clicking on the icon on the toolbar e position the cursor at the desired location and click and drag to define the size of the control Depending on the selected control specific dialog boxes may be displayed requestin
391. n page 318 below z The rotation can be stopped by clicking the Stop button The Browser check box when selected will activate the player controls for static animation of the selected color map or Isosurface For color maps the map position will span in a loop along the specified plane through the project extents Isosurface values will be animated similarly in a loop however as the scroll bar moves the isosurface value will change The Time check box when selected will activate the player controls for time animation Both color maps and isosurfaces may be animated in time Clicking on the Options button displays the Animation Properties window as shown in the following figure Working with 3D Explorer 315 Animation Properties xX Rotate Time Flume Browser utoRotate Are O Screen Aves SutoRotate speed gt f Model Axes alow fast Cancel Automatic rotation can be performed around the Screen Axes or the Model Axes The AutoRotate speed may be adjusted by pressing and holding the left mouse button on the Slider Button and setting it to the desired level Time Animation The Time tab is available when displaying a transient plume When the Time tab is selected the following window appears al Rotate Shift Light Position Time Plume Browser F lalo Y E El Options 5 1 72000 12 1 2000 Browser Time Time Animation Options Clicking the Options button will load the Animatio
392. n the folder list The BHLP will be re organized to reflect the order of the sub nodes under the Design node 12 4 Saving the Borehole Log Plot Once the desired BHLP design is obtained there are several saving and exporting options available e The BHLP template can be saved to be recalled later on e The BHLP image itself may be exported to a Report or an external file e The BHLP image may be printed Saving the Borehole Log Plot 419 12 4 1 Saving a borehole log plot design template To save a BHLP template e Click on the Save button on the BHLP designer toolbar To save a copy of a BHLP template with a new name e Click on the a Save As button on the BHLP designer toolbar 12 4 2 Exporting a borehole log plot design template It is possible to export the design and data composing a borehole log plot This is helpful if the user wants to create an XML file from the database To do so click on the Export button at the bottom of the Designer window and select from one of the export options as shown below Export current borehole Export all boreholes You can either Export the Current Borehole or Export all boreholes in your project using the current BHLP template The exported file will be saved in XML format Note To export a BHLP report to a file please see below 12 5 Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting 12 5 1 Generating a borehole log report A BHLP report may be generated from within the BH
393. n the tree view e Click on the P Add button to add a new User or e Click on the Edit button to edit the properties for the selected User The following User Properties dialog will appear Chapter 4 Project Manager User Mame First Hame Last Name Description E mail Phone Password Confirm Password Belonging to Groups L Restricted Users lv Administrators Define the User personal and contact information including User name First Name Last Name Description EMail Phone Password and Confirm Password Belonging to Groups Select the User groups to which the User should belong When you are finished click OK to save the settings for the user and close the dialog HINT Be sure to keep your password in a safe place as it will be needed each time the project is accessed Set Passwords The administrator may also set passwords for various users in the project To load this setting e From the main UALM window select one user under the Users node in the tree view e Click on the Set Password button The following dialog will appear User Access Level Management 143 New pazzword Confirm password OF Cancel Enter the New Password in the first line Confirm the new password in the second line Click OK when you are finished to apply the new password and close the dialog NOTE If an administrator password is lost it cannot be retrieved You are recommended to
394. nd regulatory limits along the left column while sample names date and or depth ranges are shown along the top row and result values and qualifiers shown in the intersecting cells Storing your data in such a way in a table would break the first normal form which disallows repeating groups Crosstab queries provide a solution to this problem HydroGeo Analyst uses a state of the art crosstab component that is easy to use to produce dynamic crosstab queries and reports The data in your crosstab reports can be highlighted with the format you specify allowing you to flag values that are outside user defined range values for example above guideline levels Once you are satisfied with the crosstab query you created you may save the query for later use send it to a printer or export it to either an Excel spreadsheet or an HTML format All formatting details will also be printed and or exported 7 8 2 Creating a Crosstab Query 216 The crosstab query starts with a data query which can be designed using the Query Builder See Data Query Example on page 200 for more details The data query should contain the desired data set along with the desired fields you want to display in crosstab format For example if you want to generate a crosstab report of groundwater chemistry results over time at several stations you may want to include the following fields e station name e sample name or code e screen location e sample date e c
395. nd toolbar is provided below the Database Browser Tree View The items on this toolbar allow manipulating the database through the Database Browser A description of each of the items on this toolbar is given below About the Interface 163 164 The Add button allows adding tables and fields to the database depending on which node in the Database Browser is currently selected For example if a data category is active at the time this button is selected a table will be added in that data category Similarly if a table is active when the Add button is selected then another table will be added to the same category A field will be added if this button is pressed while any field in the desired table is active Both tables and fields are added at the end of the list By default the Template Manager names the new table field as type_ tld_ where HH stands for a number generated for the added item When a new table is created press the Add button again while the table is receiving the focus to add the first field to the table The Delete button allows deleting the selected node This button is activated when either a table or a field is currently selected Data categories as well as some required tables e g the Station table and fields e g required fields ID X Y Elevation etc may not be deleted The Add Linked Fields button is activated whenever a field is selected in the Databa
396. ne as the Server this will appear as Computer_Name WHI in the combo box If a separate login password is not required for the selected Server computer be sure to check the box beside Windows NT Integrated Authorization Otherwise de select this option and specify a User Name and Password This will allow HydroGeo Analyst to automatically log on to the Server each time the project is opened Note If you cannot see your local WHI instance of MSDE when creating a new project or opening an existing project please refer to 15 5 Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s for some troubleshooting suggestions After the Server is selected HydroGeo Analyst will automatically scan the Server for valid SQL databases These databases will then appear in the combo box beside Database You have the options of using an existing HydroGeo Analyst database to host your project or creating a new database on the specified server In this example a NEW database will be created on the local machine Chapter 2 Getting Started Beside Database select Create New Database from the combo box The following dialog will appear Database name f x Name OF Cancel E Help type SampleDatabase Click OK ee Next gt to create the new database and proceed to the Step 2 in the Project Wizard 2 1 2 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables The second step in the Project wizard contains the Database Structure settings
397. ned to import data from these sources into the HG Analyst Project database In addition data may be exchanged import and or export between the project database and various other data sources during the lifetime of the project Such imports exports in most cases will involve the project database and other sources such as spreadsheets delimited text files and even other databases such as MS Access The current version of the DTS is designed to e Import data into the HG Analyst database from such sources as e Spreadsheets e g Excel Quattro Pro Lotus 123 e Delimited Text files e g Comma Tab delimited text files e Other databases e g from one or more tables in a MS Access database e Export selected data to destinations such as e Spreadsheets e g Excel Quattro Pro Lotus 123 e Text files e Other databases e g to a table in a MS Access database e Export one or more HydroGeo Analyst tables to an external database MS Access SQL Server For more details please refer to Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System 4 Query Builder The Query Builder provides the tools for creating and managing station groups and simple or advanced data queries Within a HydroGeo Analyst project it may be necessary to perform different types of queries for data filtering management and creating customized charts maps cross sections and reports The Query Builder provides the tools for such tasks A few examples of queries are provided belo
398. next section 2 2 Data Management There are two options for entering data into the new project e Manually in the grids OR e Importing from other sources using the Data Transfer System DTS To facilitate data entry there are two tabs available in the HydroGeo Analyst window located directly below the main toolbar Station List and Station Data tab e Station List Tab This tab hosts a grid displaying a list of stations for the selected station group Here you can enter the basic location information for the stations Name X and Y coordinate Elevation and TOC Top of Casing elevation e Station Data Tab This tab allows entering and viewing data for an individual station This tab can be activated either by clicking on a data category node in 30 Chapter 2 Getting Started the Project Browser or by clicking on the tab itself provided at least one station 1s already selected Each table in the selected Data Category will be displayed in a separate tab under the Station Data tab The data is displayed for the Station selected at the top of the window To change the active station simply select a new station from the list above the grid Now that you are familiar with the data entry options a few brief examples are provided below 2 2 1 Entering Data Manually If there are only a few stations to be entered into the project or if you have data as a hard copy then the quickest method may be to manually enter the data for eac
399. ng Isosurfaces To create an isosurface click on the desired plume data set in the Model tree to highlight it then right click on the element and select Add Isosurface from the pop up menu Alternately isosurfaces may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create isosurface icon located above the Model tree This will open the Isosurface properties window as shown in the following figure Display Settings 329 330 m Isosurface properties l ioj xj Isosurface name Plume _4 Miniatura value 0 Masinunn value 32721 lsosurface value fi 7092 lsosurface color FF Show borders Color from palette This window is used to set the display settings of the isosurface as described below Isosurface name defines the name of the isosurface as it will appear in the Model Tree under the selected element Minimum value is the calculated minimum value from the interpolated data set Maximum value is the calculated maximum value from the interpolated data set Isosurface value is the element value for which the isosurface will be created Isosurface color is the user specified color of the isosurface double click the color box to customize the color Show borders will display a color map of the element values on the borders sides of the model domain when the isosurface intersects the edge of the model domain Color from palette will use the element color palette to automatically color the isosurface according t
400. ng interval data can be retrieved later using Query Builder e Display borehole log plots BHLP directly on cross sections e g display Geophysical plots on the cross section to assist in the interpretation Borehole Log Plotter e Print borehole log plots to a user defined scale when a report is generated e Use queries as data sources for depth interval or plot columns provides for flexible data sources e Reorder columns by dragging and dropping in the designer view e Allow zooming into any specified interval of a BHLP e Added BHLP designs templates that are widely used around the world e US Army Corps of Engineers e Standard Environmental Monitoring Well e Geophysical Water Supply e Geotechnical Drilling Log e Ontario MOT Record of Borehole HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer e 3D Interpolation of a data source e Specify grid dimensions and extents e Select interpolation method Kriging or Inverse Distance e Generate static or transient plumes for one or more contaminants e 3D Plume display e Display Plumes Static and Transient using Isosurface Color map or and or Isoline Map e Display 3D volume estimation based on the isosurface value e Save Plume animation to AVI file 1 1 2 New Features in v 2 0 The following features were added in Version 2 0 4 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Data models e New database templates All database templates are now provided in both metric or imperial length units e Da
401. nge the Label Position The Tic Marks frame allows you to set the Interval and Color of the column gradations Clicking on a Color box opens a palette to select from 12 2 2 Depth Point based Column The Depth Point based column is designed to display data that has been collected at various depths The data can be displayed using graphics text or both Water Level is an example of data that could be displayed using a Depth Point based column Water level information can be displayed through a combination of a symbol showing the level accompanied by a text label e g showing the date at which the displayed water level was recorded To create a Depth Point based column click the Add icon Select Depth from the combo box that appears A new Depth column will be added to the designer window Expand the Depth node in the Designer tree and select DepthEntities H E Well Construction EME Scale E ScaleEntities DataTable E Depth ntity Caption Depth Description Depth DataField E 400 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Select the data table or query and the depth entity for the column using the combo boxes provided Selecting the field for the depth entity will create markers at the depths for which data is entered in the specified table or query At this point you can select what is displayed beside or in these markers Right click in the settings field and select Add Entity DataT able Dep
402. nit conc_ppm fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment rdl_ppm sample_matrix_code sample_type_code y Source Condition Project w z Advanced Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry chemical_name Type STRING Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 Click once on the field and drag this field into the Conditions frame Querying the Database 61 The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the h Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually Under the Conditions frame select an Operator for the field A combo box with several options will appear gt gt lt lt lt gt gt lt LIKE IS IS NOT BETWEEN amp For this example equals symbol from the combo box Next enter a value in the second Expression field For this example Tetrachloroethylene from the combo box In addition add the chemical_name field to the Display fields in the upper frame Click once on this field and drag this field into the Display Fields frame Next you must enter the result value field From the project tree on the left side of the window locate the result_value field Click once on the result_value field and drag this field into the Conditions frame Under the Conditions frame select an Operator for the field A combo box with several options will
403. ns for the selected layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance For example the option to add a vertex is active only when a polygon or a line is selected About the Interface Save button saves the current cross section project Print button sends the current cross section view to the report editor Selection Pointer feature is used for selecting objects in the active interpretation Draw Polygon feature is used for drawing a polygon or a rectangle in the active layer Draw Line feature is used for drawing a model layer line in the selected layer Add Text features is used for adding annotation to the selected layer Delete Selected Object feature deletes the selected object shape from the currently activate layer Add Vertex feature is used for adding a vertex to the selected object polygon or line This button is activated only 1f an object is selected 275 f ey D 4 276 Delete Vertex feature 1s used for deleting a vertex from the selected object polygon or line This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected Link Vertex feature is used for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines This feature is only available if an interpretation having at least two polygons or lines is activated and at least one of them is selected Remove Links feature is
404. ns option from the pop up menu e Click onthe Mi Draw Polygon or Rectangle buttons on the toolbar e Insert the mouse cursor at the desired location e Click and drag the mouse to create the desired shape double click in the case of a polygon to finalize the shape Settings The Settings dialog for Annotations is displayed below 308 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Annotation Settings X Please set annotations for Model layer For each Annotation type you may show hide using the Visible check box or edit the display properties by clicking on the preview in the Symbol column You can modify the standard properties for Text Line and Polygons as described earlier in Chapter 8 To save the annotation changes you have made you can either deselect switch annotation types or click the Save button from the button bar Adding Annotations to the Cross Section 309 310 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer The HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer is an advanced three dimensional visualization and animation component for displaying and presenting cross sections created with the mapping component included with HydroGeo Analyst Specifically this can be used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats In addition basemaps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats ava
405. nt the image when it of Surfaces O Cross Sections Data has been rotated Eee AA H E Stations Na Interpretations E Model Layers fy Geology Layers The default axes labels indicate the axes direction and as the units but this can be customized to display alphanumeric text A new name may be defined for each of the axes tg ve along with label size and color settings Name Ais Visible Z o M LI m El Sets the label attributes i Live Update Apply 10 3 4 Sitemap Display Settings The 3D Explorer supports AutoCAD DXF files and BMP files for site maps The Sitemaps category contains a list of the sitemaps used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings for each individual Sitemap Display Settings 325 To load a site map into the project select File Import Basemap from the main menu In cases where the sitemap is not appearing clearly because of the colors used in the DXF file you can specify a fixed color to apply to all lines and attributes of the DXF file The following settings are available for Site map elements Name sets the image name Visible shows hides the site map image Semitransparent sets the site map image as semi transparent Z Level for bitmap defines an elevation for the site map Bind to surface drapes the map over a surface If there are no surfaces available the only option will be None First load a surface as explained in the following section then selec
406. number of data categories are provided in HydroGeo Analyst in order to help group similar information There are nine pre defined categories and one user defined category The categories are created based on those groups that are common in environmental data management systems These categories include e Description information related to site and stations e Geologic Description information related to subsurface geology e Well Construction information related to drilling methods casing filling etc e Soil Testing information related to geological investigations such as penetrometer tests e Soil Sampling information related to soil investigations such as soil vapor coring etc e Monitoring Events sampling for chemical information as well as water levels and any other data resulting from monitoring events e Geophysics resistivity and gamma readings e Well History historical information on wells e Mining Exploration results from any mining and exploration activities e User Category Any of these categories can be renamed as desired and used to store any information Selecting a category in the Template Manager displays an interface where the name of the category can be renamed both in the database as well as in the template view settings Table Property Settings Information related to all user tables can be edited through the Template Manager The Template Manager allows all users to set the visibility status
407. o Soil Specification DIN 4023 Description Demo Database based on the data from a Visual Groundwater roject x Required Field Gt Cancel Help If necessary the project projection system or the Soil Classification may be changed in this dialog Report The Print option in the Project menu loads the selected grid into the Report Designer the Print option is activated only if a grid is visible and selected The ee Print button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details on printing from the Report Designer please refer to Chapter 11 The Report Editor Exit This menu item will close HydroGeo Analyst and all related windows if any are open 3 2 2 Edit 106 The Edit menu resembles the standard Windows design including options for Cut Copy Paste and Find Depending on the window or dialog selected one or more items under this menu may be grayed out The functionality of all Edit menu items are limited to grids In a grid only individual cells may be selected and copied cut and or pasted not the entire record Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Copy The Copy command adds the selected item to the Clipboard Use copy to move objects to another grid or to copy the selected grid value to another application Data may be copied from a grid cell or from a text box the entire record may not be copied with a single operation The contents of the clipboard can be inserted into a documen
408. o edit the position of the callout box e Right mouse click on the map window and select Edit Layout from the pop up menu e Click once on any callout box to select it the box will become highlighted in a color outline indicating 1t has been selected e Left click on the callout box and using your mouse drag the box to the new location When you have done this the result could be similar to the example shown below Description of Menu Items 257 8 2 3 Edit Cut Copy 258 Emp Propet Layer Edit Took view Select Settings Hep IEG AO Rak 4 fF SEPT b OAS Ae E Tor fo 1500 A 4 535 54 4814 AL i 2 055 When you are finished with the position edits you must right mouse click on the map window and turn off the Edit Layout option to disable this feature To edit the remaining layout settings including fields violation conditions and display properties simply select Layer Display Summary from the main menu then modify the settings as explained above The Edit menu contains standard windows functions such as Cut Copy and Paste objects as well as other options for editing Shape files NOTE Before editing a layer make sure that the Editable check box is selected After editing deselect the Editable check box on the Layer Manager Cuts the selected object to clipboard only available if an object polygon rectangle circle line or text is selected Copies the selected object only available if an objec
409. o the specified isosurface value Once the isosurface is created the display settings can be accessed from the tree view These are shown below Seting Wawe Names I ssturface_1 Wisible Iw Color o L P Semitransparent Iw lsosurface value 35000 O Minvalue O0 Mar value 38034625 Color from palette 4 Show borders Iw Volume estimatation 99153 Visible check box shows hides the isosurface Semitransparent check box sets the isosurface image as semi transparent The Volume Estimation value represents the calculated volume that the isosurface encompasses for lower isosurface values will result in higher Volume Estimations higher isosurface values will result in lower Volumes The volume estimation works in Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer the following manner When you ran the 3D Interpolation to create the plume data set you specify the grid size grid cells in the X Y and Z direction The volume estimation uses the number of grid cells and the X Y and Z extents to calculate the size of each grid cell The interpolated concentration value is calculated for each node of the grid cell A grid cell in the plume grid has eight nodes with associated values v1 v2 v3 There are three possibilities 1 all values at the nodes are less than the isosurface value a In this case the cell volume is not added to plume volume estimation 2 all values at the node
410. oGeo Analyst features a state of the art report generation tool that is equipped with a robust and easy to use runtime designer A Report Wizard provides steps to simplify the report creation process the results are high quality and professional reports containing company headers footers and company logos Reports can contain images and data from any module Map views cross section views 3D views data grids query results charts etc The final reports can be printed or saved in a number of formats including PDF HTML RTF XLS TIF or TXT as well as in a binary format Report Templates The Report Designer includes several pre defined Report Templates which can be used to quickly generate a professional report Borehole Log Plotting Borehole log reports can be prepared using the Report Designer A report for multiple boreholes can be generated at once by selecting one or more boreholes in the database and opening the borehole log report generator Borehole log reports may display information such as depth lithology water level screen locations sample results both as values and in charts geophysical data and more Chart Generator HydroGeo Analyst comes with a powerful and easy to use charting interface that is closely linked to the reporting component Unlimited numbers of charts can be placed on the reporting component s runtime designer The charting control can then be linked to specific parts of the database to retrieve t
411. oad the BHLP Settings e Right mouse click anywhere in the BHLP Viewer window and select Properties or e Right click on Design in the Designer tree and select Show Settings The BHLP Settings window will appear similar to the following figure BHLP Columns 397 BHLP Settings i x a E Default BHLP Settings E Well Construction Default column width 75 E Group header background color Set Color Column header background color Set Color Print scale factor 1 0 fit to page Apply OF Cancel The default BHLP settings include e Default column width The default setting used if nothing is specified for an individual column e Group header background color This feature is not implemented in this version of HGA e Column header background color The default color used if nothing is specified for an individual column e Print scale factor The default setting of O will fit the BHLP onto your page However using a whole number for the scale factor no decimal or negative numbers will scale the BHLP in the following manner A Print scale factor of 1 100 would mean that 100 units on the BHLP would correspond to 1 unit on the printout I E If your BHLP units are in Feet then 100 Feet measured on the BHLP would correspond to 1 Foot in the actual printed results so on an 8 1 2 by 11 page 100 feet measured on the BHLP would take up just over 1 page when printed in portrait mode The scale f
412. of HG Analyst have separate chapters devoted to an in depth discussion of the features and capabilities of each component The following components are discussed at length in subsequent chapters 1 Project Manager The Project Manager provides a wizard for creating a new HydroGeo Analyst project and an interface for modifying the properties and settings of existing projects For existing projects the Project Manager can be called to see the project properties When a new project is created the Project Manager is called in the form of a Wizard To load the Project Wizard for new projects select Project New from the main menu The wizard displays several windows in an easy to use interface as described below e Database Environment In this window specify the database which will be used for the HG Analyst project and the necessary connection string e Database Template Properties Select a database structure from a list of available templates or create a new database template e Project Information In this window specify the project name project folder and clients e Project Settings Specify the project location projection system units and specify the SCS soil settings for the project For more details please refer to Chapter 4 2 Template Manager The Template Manager provides tools to modify the HydroGeo Analyst database structure and define user level views The Template Manager captures the schema of the database and dis
413. of any selected table To make a table visible or hidden check or un check the tick boxes that are provided in front of the table name in the Project Browser Chapter 5 Template Manager Adding Tables A table can be added by selecting a data category in which the table is to be created and then either by clicking on the Add button at the bottom of the window or by right mouse clicking and selecting the Add table pop up menu item Template Editor Demo ervoer rese AX Geologic JY Description Y soil_type Y Pattern Y Consistency Structure ASTM Descriptor Color MA Odor 4 formation_name JA formation_unit HA moisture H Z Hydrogeology E W Modelling H V features Well Construction El Fl M Soil Testing M Soil Sampling Al fl E E Monitoring Event Mining Exploration H V Geophysics H Well History E E Geologic Description A table can be created based on any one of the provided data table types depending on the nature of the data to be stored in the table Template Editor Demo aw Description EM Geologic Description Global Global Time Description H Depth Interval V soil_type Examination Event Pattern Monitoring Point Depth Point Monitoring Point Y ASTM Descriptor i Examination Event E Color HM Odor 7 formation_name V formation_unit I moisture Y Well Construction Soil Testing 4 So
414. of the station e A value of 0 will center the call out box over the station e A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed to the left of the station Offset Y set the Y Offset this parameter controls how far the callout box will be placed vertically from selected station e A positive offset will result in the callout box displayed below the station e A value of 0 will center the call out box over the station e A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed above the station When you are finished with the Display Settings click OK to return to the layout window Click OK once more to create the layout on the map as seen in the example below Chapter 8 Map Manager ra Laver DE Tonk Yew hilt Sstimgs Heb Goma cms ALO XA AIA FS SESS 334x106 40 E ry a ra Bd moc am for Wena moc o fo EC fo E mit Twit 1 11 TOC E ag upi TWDIC A ugl ul Borstaler jia mor ms fo Faria Crake _ oe be TOC 00H uel mp dispar 1 4 535 503 4 814 418 11 2 055 You can see that sample values that exceed the specified conditions TVOC concentration result value greater than 5000 ug l are shaded red for easy detection When stations are clustered it may be necessary to modify the display location of the callout boxes You have the option to manually move individual callout boxes to a new location to improve presentation This is explained below Edit Layout Setting T
415. of the panel and it will behave like a separate Window The Display Tree Panel has an option Stay on top When this is active the panel window will float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer interface as long as it is the active window When this is active this panel will always float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer window Docking Panels Floating panels can be docked again by clicking the mouse pointer on the panel Title Bar and dragging it to the left or bottom edge of the 3D Explorer window A grey outline will appear when the mouse pointer is in the proper location and the panel is dockable Release the mouse button to dock the panel at the desired docking area Closing Panels The panels may be removed from the 3D Explorer interface by clicking the Close icon X The panels can be re opened using the View options from the top menu bar The panels can be toggled on off by clicking the E2 Hide project browser button and ig Hide Navigation tools button on the toolbar 10 2 2 Vertical Exaggeration In HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer the vertical exaggeration factor can be changed at any time to obtain a more desirable vertical exaggeration of the project domain The vertical exaggeration factor is available to provide an improved 3 dimensional view when the scale of the X and Y axis far exceeds that of the Z axis When opening 3D Explorer the default value of exaggeration factor 1s set to 1 The Exaggeration factor can be c
416. oil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics oP x Le Well History 4 H H 4 Conditions Expression Operator FSource Condition Advanced Close Help Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning gf Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the window below 382 Chapter 11 The Report Editor 7 Query Builder ON l0 x XEHE K Station Group Query Data Query Ratan SUE E anay Select a Query SELECT t0 name AS name t1 sample_date as sample_date t1 result_value as result_value FROM Station AS t0 RIGHT JOIN SStation ON t0 1D SStation SID LEFT JOIN chem_test_results0 45 t1 ON t0 1d char tvoc_ y tl Station WHERE SStation ID 1 Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event sample_date result_value Mining Exploration 01 02 1996 0 Geophysics 01 08 1996 0 Well History 02
417. olated data Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Appendices Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Min Trimming Limit Minimum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Min Value option is not selected by the user Max Trimming Limit Maximum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Max Value option is not selected by the user The Points per block along X Points per block along Y and Points per block along Z values allow the user to choose Block Kriging used for interpolation as compared to Point Kriging Block Kriging is based on the premise that since Kriging is a linear algorithm direct estimation of the block average 1s possible for user defined blocks The default values for these parameters are 1 and in this case the default method is Point Kriging If Block Kriging is being used the user needs to enter the Min points for block Kriging and Max points for block Kriging The Octant Search option is an exhaustive search option available to make sure that data are taken on all sides of the point being estimated and is especially recommended for 3D data If th
418. ollowed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations The figure shown above depicts the interface that is provided to specify the data source for importing 6 1 1 Choose a Data Source The first step in the DTS Import process is to select a data package and the data source file Data Transfer Package DTP A Data Transfer Package DTP is designed to store all settings of desired import export operations that may be repeated from time to time For example importing lab analysis results to the database which follow a consistent format The DTP contains Importing Data using the DTS 179 180 information about the data source the selected destination table matching between source and destination tables and fields and a number of other settings All Data Transfer Packages if any are listed for selection at the beginning of all data transfer operations If an existing package is selected the DTS loads all information stored in the package The information can then be reviewed and updated as desired before as you move through the data transfer operation Data Transfer System Import JA E 1 5 x Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name New Package Description stations Select data source f Specify import fi At the beginning of the import export operation you can select the option which saves the changes you made to the package
419. ols menu hosts a number of menu items which provide links to the tools and components of HydroGeo Analyst These menu items are linked to the Project Browser and are accessible by selecting the appropriate node in the project browser The following sections briefly describe each item in the Tools menu Query Builder This menu item loads the Query Builder which provides options for tasks related to queries In the Query Builder there are options for creating new queries or loading previous queries The E button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 7 Queries Map Manager This menu item loads the Map Manager The Map Manager can be used for creating and viewing site maps creating thematic and contour maps and defining cross section lines The gg button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 8 HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 113 114 View Cross Section This menu item loads the Cross Section Editor This component can be used for defining and displaying geological hydrogeological and model layer cross sections The th button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor 3D Interpolation HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer is now able to display and animate 3D volumetric plumes of one or more soil or groundwater contaminants The plume is generated using the 3D Interpolator tool then displayed with the 3D
420. om the left edge of the report the object is located You can either enter the pixel value manually or select the object and drag it to the desired location Multiline Allows you to set whether you want the text to move to the next line when it reaches the right border of the object Multiline True or if you want to force the text into a single line Multiline False Top Determines how far in pixels from the top edge of the report the object is located You can either enter the pixel value manually or select the object and drag it to the desired location Vertical Alignment Allows you to set how the text is aligned in the object vertically Top will start the text at the top of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text is stationary Bottom will start the text at the bottom of the object and the cursor will remain on the same line with every new line while the text moves upwards Middle will start at the vertical midpoint of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text will expand equally upwards and downwards Custom Allows you to change the object output format to General Number Currency Date Time Percentage and Custom It also allows you to specify the line border style CanGrow Allows you to set whether you want the text field to become larger if the entered text does not fit within the allotted frame CanShrink
421. on 3D Plumes 330
422. on Top elevation Caption Depth Description Description Depth DataField DataField E BottormEntity E ValueEntity Caption Bottom elevation Caption concentratior Description Description DataField D ataField El ValueE ntity Caption pressure Description DataField In the first row of the table under the Name column select the data source for the plot There are two options available Data Table or Queries If Data Table is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data tables from your database schema for which you may select one table If Queries is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data Queries available in your HGA project for which you may select one table The advantage of using Data Queries is that the fields may originate from one or several tables in your database DataT able Queres The Caption corresponds to the text you entered in the Label text box of the Add a Plot Series window You can add several plot series depth and interval to one plot column All lines and shapes will be drawn in the default color and will be semi transparent so that when they overlay each other every plot 1s visible Be careful however with displaying plots with vastly different scales on the same plot column The plots will be shown on the same scale relative to each other so 1t may appear that one of the plots is hidden from view Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Settings
423. ons within a polygon that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select In Ellipse button allows for selecting all stations within an ellipse that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select Along Line button allows for selecting all stations within a buffer distance of a line that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select All button selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select None button de selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager and at least one station has been selected Cross Section Line button allows the location and buffer distance for cross section lines to be defined This feature is active only when a layer containing HydroGeo Analyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Show Create Cross Section button allows a cross section corresponding to a selected cross section line on the map to be created or viewed Th
424. ontent of the list click on the OK button to start importing the list e In the List Editor window press the Save button to save the list items e Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager on page 126 for more details 3 4 2 Editing a List The following editing options are available in the List Editor e Delete a list item by selecting it and pressing the x Delete button e Move the list item by selecting it and dragging it up or down to a new position in the list List Editor 125 e Edit the list item by selecting it and making necessary changes e Once the editing is complete click the Save button to save changes 3 4 3 Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager 126 The List Editor can also be launched from the Template Manager The Template Manager allows you to link a selected field to a list of distinct values that may be used as values for the field To link a list to a selected field e Select Settings Template Manager or click the Ex button from the toolbar The Template Manager window will load e From the tree view on the left side select the appropriate Data Category and select the appropriate table and the desired field e Locate the View Settings options in the lower half of the window as indicated in the figure below Template Editor Demo_VGW
425. ontrol tr Line style Sets the line style of the selected control H Border Sets the border style of the selected control General Tools To insert any of the items listed below into your report select the item from the toolbar and in the designer window draw a box in the position where you wish that object to appear ls Select Selects a control object on the Designer Art Label Allows you to put headings and labels in your report ab Field Insert it and link to a data field to display specific data from the project Field also allows you to put text in your report Chapter 11 The Report Editor ey fh Check box Add a check boxes to a report can be used to create check lists in your report Image Add logos maps and other images to your report You can link it to a data field in your project or to an image file outside of the project Line Add simple lines in your report Shape Add shapes rectangle square circle to the report Rich Text Control Add a text box with a RTF text to your report Frame Add a frame in and or around the report Similar to the square Shape tool however the emphasis is on the border not fill Subreports Add any number of subreports to the report The subreport will be limited by the width of the control but the height will grow to accommodate the length of the subreport Page Break Add a page break in the report at a desired location OLE Object Add an OLE Object Lin
426. oom Out from the menu 14 1 2 Viewer Window Settings Under the Settings tab you can define the settings for the plot page design Settings Data Source Name waterquality_multipleplots Number of Columns 2 Number of Rows 2 Spacing Width 10 Spacing Height 10 Name controls the name of the selected plot series this is read only and cannot be modified The plotting component supports display and manipulation of multiple plot windows in the viewer window Number of columns controls how many columns will be displayed in the viewing window for displaying plots Number of rows controls how many rows will be displayed in the viewing window for displaying plots 438 Chapter 14 Plotting For example 2 columns X 2 rows means that 4 plots may be displayed simultaneously in the viewer window Spacing width controls the amount of space between each plot in the horizontal direction Spacing height controls the amount of space between each plot in the vertical direction 14 2 Adding Plots The data source for the plots must originate from a Data Query before you create a plot you must build and execute a data query using the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields for a time series plot The following are required fields for the Time Series plots and as such must be present in your data query e Sample Date or Time e Value for t
427. options for performing activities which affect the records rows within a grid This includes stations in the Station List and rows in the Data Categories These menu items are context sensitive which means that the menu items will perform different functions depending on which grid is active NOTE The Record menu items are only available when a grid is active and the cursor is located within the grid A detailed description of each menu item is provided below Add The Add option adds a record to the last row of the active grid Records may be added to the grids in the various Data Categories in the Station Data tab or added as stations in the Station List tab You can perform the same function by pressing the of Add button in the toolbar or right clicking on the grid and choosing Add HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 109 110 If the record being added 1s a new station the new station will always be added to the Project Station Group and will also be added to any station group that is active and selected at the time After a record has been added to the grid the changes should be saved using either the Te Post Data button in the toolbar or the Post menu item in the Records menu Delete Use the Delete option to delete the selected record s from a grid A station record may be deleted from the Stations List or a data record row may be deleted from the selected grid in any of the data categories The x Delete button in
428. or more fields Linked lists are especially convenient if the number of values for a field is fixed and limited Linked Lists may be created manually generated from existing data in the project or may be imported from an external source text spreadsheet or another database In HydroGeo Analyst there are several examples of linked lists One example can be found in the Soil Sampling category in the Soil Chemistry table A combo box populated with a list of chemicals is provided for each cell under the Chemical Name field column Simply click on the combo box in any cell under this column and a list of chemical names is displayed for the selection This field is linked to a list of chemicals This eliminates the step of having to re enter chemical names in this field for each sample and minimizes any error that may occur as a result Below are some examples of using linked lists that you may create for the demonstration project 1 In the Stations table located under the Description category it may be useful to create a field named County or Municipality in order to organize stations wells Often stations for the project lie within a specific county or municipality It is easier to create this list that may be expanded as desired and link it to the County or Municipality field Then when it is necessary to enter data for the stations the County may be selected from a list contained wit
429. or station group layers Min Max Sum Standard Deviation Mean Label and symbol renderer allows for creating color ramps gradients shading etc based on specified station data Line measurement tool allows for measuring the distance between two points on the map project 3 1 About the Interface Map projects are created and modified within the Map Manager application linked to HydroGeo Analyst The Map Manager can view and modify one map project at a time In addition the map projects should be modified by only one user at a time About the Interface 225 226 A map project may have an unlimited number of map layers The Map Manager may be loaded from HydroGeo Analyst in several ways e Select Tools Map Manager from the Main Menu of HydroGeo Analyst e Select Record Display on Map and the selected HydroGeo Analyst records will be loaded onto a Map project e In the HydroGeo Analyst toolbar click on the gg Map button e From the HydroGeo Analyst Project Browser select a map project branch from the Map node Once the Map Manager window is loaded the display should be similar to the one shown below Active Window Menu Bar Hap Pnnpert Sihr imag Toolbar Bom ames A Oxia Pelee S GS45k RE ier a PI Ai the i Layer Manager Map Window Layer Information a Projection System Coordinates Scale The Map Manager window contains the following elements
430. or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table see Defining Quality Codes for Data on page 424 for more details The following fields are not required but are helpful for easily identifying samples in the results page e Station Name located in the Station table e Sample Name this is typically found in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table e Sample Date e Units e Unit conversion factors 13 2 Define A New Lab Quality Template To create a new lab quality analysis template click Tools gt Quality Control from the Main Menu then select the Manage Lab QC Templates option The Lab Quality window will open as shown in the following figure Lab Quality K x Template Description Lab Quality Templates Duplicate Settings imi iD Relative percent difference less than Coefficient of variation less than Highlighting Font Background olor Border Ealar Add Remove Help Apply OF Cancel E To create a new template click the Add button and enter a name for the template The newly created template will then appear in the Lab Quality Templates list To configure your template click on the to expand the template tree As shown in the 426 Chapter 13 Quality Control following example screenshot the three Check types Duplicate Spikes and Blanks will be listed To activate a Check type click in the checkbox beside
431. or the parent tables before the child ones For example Stations must be present in the database before you can import chemistry or lithology data for these stations Likewise for soil or groundwater chemistry data you must first define or import the sys_Sample_codes in the parent table then run through the DTS again to import the sample values into the correct fields In Step 2 of the DTS ensure that you have defined a unit for those fields that require units and also ensure that you have set the field to Use Ensure that your source file contains database ID s or station names All records in the source table must contain either the station ID or station name or both which is used to import the data to the appropriate HG Analyst station Appendices Q When trying to import my data using the DTS I receive an error message stating Microsoft ODBC Driver Manager Data source name not found and no default driver specified I then receive an error message stating Could not connect to current Data Source A This error happens due to a missing ODBC driver for your specific file type Please make sure you have the appropriate driver Follow these steps Click Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Data Sources ODBC This launches a dialog Click on the User DNS tab and verify if a driver for your file type is in the list If not Click on the ADD button Select the desired driver type from the list Provid
432. orresponding to a station group will load the Station List tab and display the appropriate stations belonging to that group An example is shown below i HydroGeo Analyst Demo_YGW Aschalew HGA_Projects Demo_Y GW Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help J ea2 SR tXBAaAlRBEBR SH BOOS 2409 El Station Groups ae x Y Elevation PA m m m Ba Monitoring Wells 535320 4814610 49999949 330 8 ca AE Station Data 535305 4814339 39999898 331 1 H E Queries 535504 7 4814750 19999949 329 9 HAD Maps 535472 4814704 69999949 330 6 EA Cross Sections 535548 4 4814637 29999949 331 1 18 Reports 535459 4 4814704 89999949 330 8 it a ae 535476 1000000 4814781 09999949 330 9 ae y 535469 5 4814652 69999949 330 6 ll Borehole Logs 535484 7 4814546 49999949 329 9 535626 8 4814652 89999949 329 5 535545 9 4814553 49999949 332 1 535637 7 4814582 89999949 330 2 535800 4814637 49999949 329 9 535674 6 4814799 99999949 330 4 535687 4 4814665 29999949 330 5 535390 4814741 89999949 329 9 535577 4 4814477 09999949 329 3 535677 1 4814416 19999949 330 5 535584 5 4814299 99999949 329 9 535599 7 4814371 79999949 330 2 535492 9 4814477 19999949 331 1 535635 2 4814503 79999949 330 8 535588 4 4814667 29999949 331 1 o o O OjOjO O oO o o ol oo ol ool ooo ojo ION 9 Borehole Logs If desired selected stations can be removed from a Station group or the Station group can be deleted as a whole Once the sta
433. ort Editor Hr Align to Grid Aligns the selected controls to the closest grid point F Size to Same Width makes all selected controls the same width as the last selected control O Os Size to Same Height makes all selected controls the same height as the last selected control cr Size to Same makes all selected controls the same height and width as the last selected control del Lock Controls Locks all controls on the designer so that they will not be resized or moved from their original location 11 2 2 Toolbox options for General Tools This section is designed to help familiarize you with the different options available in the toolbox for various tools The Toolbox is dynamic and changes depending on the object currently active in the Report Designer The vital options of select tools are described in this section however if you require further information please refer to the ActiveReport help file included with the installation in the Reports folder If you cannot find a description of a specific property see the previous descriptions in this section Label Angle Allows you to change the angle at which the text appears in the label ClassName Sets the overall text style of the label caption e g Heading1 Hyperlink Allows you to change the label into a hyperlink To do so enter an internet address inside the Hyperlink field Report Designer Window 355 356 Left Determines how far in pixels fr
434. orting Data aora 7 Data Mana CMe nt xi oie 55is ens en e 7 Template Mana Ger la tia 7 Customizable ists ands tandardS cis 8 Data Querying and Filtering with the Query Builder 2 0 0 0 ccceeeccssssssssesseseseeeneeeeeesceeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 8 Data Viua NZa HOM 2 NN catered ii 8 Map Manas CB a cep n Asa eee eign cu ert id a E a 8 TOSS SECHA PCI ON arc cie cie toallero dde liso 9 3D Subsurface Visualization with 3D Explorer ooccccnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnonononnnononnnn nono narran 9 Reporta andino esteis 10 Report Deso NE st ia 10 Interface to Visual MODFLOW and other WHI Software occcccccccncnoocncncncnnnnnnononaninocncnnnnnnos 11 Installing Hy droGeo Analyst sissies csccsccaceasssssavecscoavevscessevecsccacossesssecvsnsecsoeosassevsicessceeaseess 11 System REGUIEIMENIUS a A 11 IE A A o A O 11 Uimstalline HydroGeo Ana linia 12 Siar tiie Hydro CIc0 Anal yS ete ad moeennnices 13 Learning to use HydroGeo Analyst ccccccsssssssssssssccccsccssssssssssscccccscccsssssssscccsssssseees 13 HydroGeo Analyst On Line Help ia 13 Contents ari rose ale neadenacnnG ane eunaameenu aden 14 O A aan oan 14 CCCI aea cst Ruan a Uatiayea eran ata tcn a de aueaeuadeouetuasaddan 14 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc NS OENE AAE A ALEN EEEE DT A oD RR eR VY OC OR A 14 ADO t the Iterace au 14 Data Bes dd dd ii 16 Stations List Tay nn E AS 16 presa A A ten ou dea sane sess a Sadana tua se scaee seas abaseacseee sua A 16
435. ow will appear If your template included more than one Check Type you can use the pull down menu in the upper left corner to switch Generate QC Results 431 between each type and the Lab Quality Validation Results table will automatically update The results for Blanks analysis are displayed in the screenshot below ti VETA bla a i A TTD bla ELE E A IS A J Casas om i eses en aa n EE TT TOT fw CA EA CEKA E 1 RS CS LL CS LU aa ase ramon ved gt Jr Jm JE L CPE A CN CC CO J EA EEE EIC ARMA a AA S LL _ I CIS IR CR LS LI LS IE AE EEE iene IRIS CC 20000 O EAU E IS a ici ren fa PP is _ CEA EEE IEA EOS ARMAS CC 0000 A ECU LL _ DCAS EI EIA CC 00 AOS EA EL AE EA EE ECH wA 8 E E A aC OS E E IE ee A Sl A E Records that exceed the method detection limit will be highlighted with the color and font specified in the Template The results for Spiked sample analysis are displayed below Present BRL id su CCHS CJ CUALES LC 0 po an aca SM Sa Sa C 0 E IE 5M Beene 0 SSCs Sid Cid BCAA ECO IM 00 CI 000 BCAA ECO EC 0000 000 iyi did O EA AAC ECOS 000 CI CI 000 EEEE CI ECOS EC 000 CS 120000 LA Cra arca trenes 180 102 id 1 CELE Rare eo ECO EC 70000 0000 UI 0000 EL BCAA ECO IO E CS CU ALEA EIA EA LIM 200000 E 000 1 IEEE ELE su CIO E JU CI Cid E EE EA LC CIA 0000 E E BCAA ECOS cs APLI EAS ECT 0000 000 EC
436. ower model with the exponent equal to 1 Appendices 15 4 Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes None 1250 ANSI Central Europe Latin 2 1251 ANSI Cyrillic Slavic 1252 ANSI Latin 1 1253 ANSI Greek 1254 ANSI Latin 5 Turkish 1255 ANSI Hebrew 1256 ANSI Arabic 1257 ANSI Baltic Rim 1258 ANSI Vietnamese 437 OEM US Latin 708 OEM Arabic ASMO 708 720 OEM Arabic Transparent ASMO 737 OEM Greek formerly 437 G 775 OEM Baltic 850 OEM Western Europe Latin 1 852 OEM Central Europe Latin 2 855 OEM Russian IBM Cyrillic 857 OEM Turkish IBM 860 OEM Portuguese MS DOS 861 OEM Icelandic MS DOS 862 OEM Hebrew 863 OEM Canadian Frech MS DOS 864 OEM Arabic 865 OEM Nordic MS DOS 866 OEM Russian MS DOS Cyrillic II 869 OEM Greek 2 IBM Modern Greek 8859 1 ISO Latin 1 West European Danish Dutch English Faeroes Finnish French German Icelandic Irish Italian Norwegian Portuguese Spanish Swedish Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes 469 470 8859 2 ISO Latin 2 East European Albanian Czech English German Hungarian Polish Rumanian Serbo Croatian Slovak Slovene 8859 3 ISO Latin 3 Southeastern European Afrikaans Catalan Dutch English Esperanto German Italian Maltese Spanish Turkish 8859 4 ISO Latin 4 North European 8859 5 ISO English amp Cyrillic Based Bulgarian Byelorussian English Macedonian Russian Serbo Croatian Ukrainian 8859 6 ISO Arabic 8859 7
437. pear in the Display Screen Horizontal slice properties Ea 2 value 31 0 0 The Slider Bar moves the horizontal slice along the vertical Z axis and the corresponding slice elevation is displayed in the field labelled Z value When the desired location for the horizontal slice has been selected click the Close button to save the slice type and location The new horizontal slice will appear in the Surfaces window 10 4 3 Selecting a Cross Sectional Slice When adding a color map or isoline map you may also utilize cross section lines that were defined in the Map Manager provided they have been added to the current 3D project To select a vertical cross section through the site domain click the Cross section tab to open the Cross section window as shown in the following figure This window displays a list of the available cross sections for the current 3D project 342 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer 4 Select create slices iol Ej Slices CroseSectons Cancel Help Simply select the cross section from the list then click the Select button 10 4 4 Deleting a Slice If many different slices have been defined during the current session and the list is becoming too long and cumbersome to work with any entry in the Surface list can be deleted by highlighting the slice in the list and clicking the Delete button 10 4 5 Modifying a Slice The location or orientation of any slice can be modifie
438. perator M Source Condition Project y Basic Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry sample_date Type DATESTAMP Rows 15 Time 0 0 0 15 Under Group by List any field may be added for additional grouping options For example if the Query Results are to be grouped by County or City simply select this field and drag and drop the field into the Group By List Additional rows may be added to the Group options by right clicking and selecting Add Row Group By List Having Function Field Operator Value Operator Add Row Delete Row Add Station ID field Once the Group By conditional options have been specified an aggregate function must be defined for the Display Fields a common aggregate option must be selected for each Display Field as shown below 208 Chapter 7 Queries XH e Station Group Query Data Query A SQL View Preview l Select a Query Display Fields VCExceeds20 Y Expression station id id station x x Description E Location E description_addins station_guide pda_guide user_stamp photo purpose location_name location description station y y station name name station elevation 7 MAX_elevation Y ap and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Trichloroethane well_owner gt 10 AND 2003 11 28 address city or town county state province Zip Postal Code
439. played below with the well profile view activated 14 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Menu Data Bar Tabs 1 x T lb ject Ek View Berd Salig Toc Help OOIDal B one Sh tXRA SOR SDs ee y ad Profits GB 01 all State bli E an Suey T 5h om Dista pa the Eh wa constr Sati Name Piy Elevation TOC i a Lu m mi ta Dehaies DET ESAE AA 00 ex 3050 al 50d Doings q Gaz 53615563 4014050 00 326 00 127 00 all WO Stations t EENE 4614070 00 26 00 327 00 Pro ect val Chay thicker than 2 im ae S453 ba 57 410 001 cadi 230 J Al ceo 109 68 06 BRIS 6G 4060 00 330 00 32500 Em Staton Dela cam 563 04070 00 105 11 90 Browser SH Queries 16607 55b iiaiai 300 354 00 a z E AE ba 2814101401 001 Eas E EH SI a Croustab ET SHREE 1406000 2950 33050 Hapi 68 10 5525655 014050 00 30 00 38 00 Cross Sectors 6611 end 4614000 00 54 50 00 50 Meporiz 116014 EE mt Me 4214 51 Hil 3 E TA i 68 13 PHAN amaram 1H 505 Well red Lice roar SESTE 4320 20 VS 72 06 SE Pots 16615 SANIN 4614251 30 Hu 5 G15 TIE EH 24214345 41 32h hb T7 Gh Profile 62 17 515776 ES 4814293 00 70 129 30 68 18 5565 85 4753 10 109 mg 16613 555145 4614305 60 5015 31 13 cE AAA 21431 bil 1 E 1 fh Data 68 21 535288 76 201429 10 TE 16 5 TER 53 442030 10753 101 59 6823 CEWE 461465030 Hi 324 47 Grids EEN 163 06 2014641 50 2576 TE M 65 55 5150758 ETE 501 TEH 68 25 5504 60 4657 50 25 12 07 12 BE ry ESTNE 461465510 0
440. plays database and user settings Some of the features in the Template Manager are available only for database administrators referred to as Power Users in the context of HydroGeo Analyst These features include all operations that alter the database schema and table and field designs Features that are accessible only to Power Users include e Adding deleting tables and or fields defining primary keys defining relationships between tables e Save user templates as a new database schema structure e Export user templates to a stand alone XML file 130 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users e Rename fields add fields to data categories and modify the field formats e All features that are available to all users For more details please refer to Chapter 5 Template Manager 3 Data Transfer System The Data Transfer System DTS provides an easy to use interface for importing data into or exporting data from a HydroGeo Analyst project The DTS in HydroGeo Analyst is designed to allow for efficient data transfer between the database and external applications Data may be quickly imported into new or existing projects from various formats When creating a new project it may be necessary to import data from other sources into the HG Analyst database Data may exist in sources such as MS Access SQL server Oracle databases or in text files or spreadsheets The DTS is desig
441. plimented by state of the art tools for data interpretation statistical analysis GIS mapping data charting and two and three dimensional visualizations For most environment related projects whether they are contaminated sites or municipal water supply projects there is often an abundance of data that has been collected over the years How many times have you had to sift through several paper reports for that one piece of information when compiling monthly summaries on a project Can you be sure that you have not misplaced a report or failed to mention an important piece of data The HydroGeo Analyst package addresses these and many other needs in the industry The system enables you to create a project specific database or enhance and build upon your existing database It can collect all of your previous data and reports and consolidate them into a powerful relational database system that can be queried and referenced with ease HydroGeo Analyst also referred to as HG Analyst or HGA operates as a desktop application based on Microsoft SQL Server technology The package supports multiple user levels for controlled data management with structured access privileges for setting up project data structures checking out data to working sub projects and submitting new or modified data Sample Applications Typical applications for HydroGeo Analyst include e Regional water well management e Contaminant site inventory e Regulatory comp
442. plume animation over time isosurface or color map spanning to an AVI file for playback during presentations and demonstration using any compatible AVI file player 318 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer To record the AVI locate the Record button in the lower right corner of the window Click on this button and a Video settings window will appear as shown in the following figure e Yideo settings E i 2 xj Custom frame size Frame size Full window size Compression Full Frames Uncompressed Height 240 Frames per second f 0 OF Cancel The default AVI File name is the address of the V3D folder for the current project plus the name of the 3D project and a sequential number of the video made for this project followed by the AVI extension The AVI File name can be modified to any path and filename required by clicking the button beside the AVI File name field The Frame size setting has a selection of four options Full window size 640x480 e 320x240 e Custom If the Custom option is chosen the Custom frame size fields Width and Height will be activated and a frame size can be defined The Compression setting lists the various video compression techniques available A higher compression setting will reduce the AVI file size but it will also reduce the quality of the image The Frames per second setting defines the number of frames time steps that will be disp
443. ply The dialog allows you to add as many series as desired and select the fields that will be used as the data source for the horizontal X and vertical Y axes The fields are obtained by loading a data query into the report See the example below Indicate whether a series will be plotted on the primary on the left side or secondary on the right side vertical axis The properties of the chart can be set by right clicking on the chart control and selecting the Properties pop up menu option When you are finished designing the chart s and other parts of your report you can generate a report preview by clicking on the corresponding icon on the toolbar Plots of data can be grouped by location and or any other field by creating the necessary grouping 11 8 1 Example 380 The following example illustrates the procedure for creating a time series chart in the HGA Demo project For this example you will chart the TVOC chemical concentrations observed at the Monitoring Wells The first step is to create a data query which will contain the fields of interest To do this open the Demo project then load the Query Builder For help please see Chapter 7 Queries Tools Query Builder from the main menu Data Query radio button a r New button Define a name for the query in the dialog that appears type Chart TVOC Chapter 11 The Report Editor OK In the lower left corner of the Query Builder win
444. possible value for the isosurface based on the interpolated data set and will result in the largest isosurface The 100 percent value represents the highest possible value for the isosurface and will result in the smallest isosurface When you are satisfied with a view click on the Save Colormap button or Save Isosurface in the case of Isosurfaces to save this display element to the 3D Project under the Plumes node in the tree By doing so you will have access to more advanced options for the colormap or isosurface and this will enable displaying multiple colormaps and or isosurfaces Plume Browser Options Clicking the Options button will load the Plume Browser Options window as shown below Animation Properties X Rotate Time Plume Browser Humber of steps 20 Start value 5 jo Finish value 32 100 Animate in selected interval Cancel The Number of steps value may be increased to smooth the transition from one time to the next or it may be decreased to make the browsing proceed faster The Start value indicates the value at which the browser will begin must be a value gt 0 The Finish value indicates the value at which the browser will end must be lt 100 The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the specified start and finish values Recording Animation to AVI file HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer supports recording any animation rotation
445. ps 8 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst e Aquifer yield capacity e Aquifer vulnerability e Contamination risk assessment e Geologic cross sections e Completion diagrams Contour Mapping In addition to creating and displaying selected data on a map the Map Manager also allows you to create contour maps and other thematic maps for any selected data from your database For example you can create and run a query that returns the maximum concentration of a given chemical over a certain period of time and transfer the result to the Map Manager Once the map with this data is created you can create and view contour maps depicting the distribution of the selected chemical concentration over the site area Thematic Mapping A Thematic Map of any type of data may be created and displayed on the map view Thematic maps include Pie and Bar charts with options to customize their appearance and style Cross Section Editor Many geologic and or hydrogeologic site investigations require a detailed analysis of the available lithological data and the drafting and interpretation of cross sections The Cross Section editor can be used to perform these tasks The Cross Section editor provides a set of easy to use tools to interpret subsurface data Geological and hydrogeological interpretations as well as interpretations geared towards creating model layers can be created using the cross section module All model interpretations can be
446. pt button To reject the selected records click on the xl Reject button HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 103 104 Finalizing the Import Once you have removed or verified the errors Import button to import the data to the project After successfully importing the data a confirmation window will appear similar to the one shown below Information x a O records were updated and UL 44 records were inserted To close the import routine and return to HGA Analyst OK button in the confirmation dialog then Close button at the bottom of the window Export Use the Export option to export data from the HG Analyst project data may be exported to external files in various formats using the DTS Export Data This menu item will load the DTS with an option to export data from any grid to one of the following file formats e Text CSV TXT ASC TAB e Excel 97 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Any OLE DB compliant database such as MS Access Database MDB For more details on this utility please see the DTS section in Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Export Grid All HydroGeo Analyst data that can be displayed in any of the grids can be exported to a number of external destinations The data could be a station list from any station group a result of a query execution or any data from the data entry tabs HydroGeo Analyst allows exporting data displayed in grids to various output formats incl
447. quick retrieval of data stored in the database Station groups can be created based on any criteria Common examples include e Locations of the stations e g locations sorted by City Project Sites etc e Station type e g Monitoring Locations Boreholes etc e Purpose of Study e g remediation site monitoring All station groups created for a project are listed in the Project Browser under the Station Groups node Clicking any of the sub nodes corresponding to a station group will display the appropriate stations belonging to that group in the Station List tab Chapter 2 Getting Started Station Groups can be created manually or through the use of the Query Builder The following example demonstrates how create a station group manually containing the Borehole stations Example Creating a Station Group To create a Station Group Station List tab OW1 ensure this row becomes highlighted similar to the image shown below HydroGeo Analyst Sample__ D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects S ample_ Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help 1 ea27 OR tXRAaA ROE RS AMOO wf Station Groups il Station List al Data Query Station Data i Po ae el Nemes ms e y Eva les 4 z m m m m Queries BH1 535130 4814200 330 331 Maps BH2 535780 4813651 339 1 340 1 gt Cross Sections BH3 535111 4813600 338 1 339 1 m f Reports 4814890 S 2D Views 4811787 E Borehole Logs F OW eels 53689
448. r Fonts and Color are adequate in most cases however can be modified at the users discretion For more details on these features please refer to the DynamiCube3 chm on line help file Click on the Layout tab and you will see the following properties dialog x General Time Series Layout Fields Preferences Printer Fonts Color Page o Columns EXE Fields Rows Add Calculated Field Data Count of result_value Retrieve Fields Cancel Defining Fields The Layout property page allows you to set up the initial view Click on the Retrieve Fields button to obtain a list of all available fields from the selected data query You can drag fields from the Fields list and drop them into the Rows Columns and Data frames where the will appear in the view at runtime Multiples fields can be added to any frame NOTE A minimum of one field must be added to the Data frame to create your crosstab query Fields can be removed from a frame by right clicking on the field and selecting the Delete option In the Data frame you can right click on a field and select the Properties option to modify the settings as shown below Chapter 7 Queries Data Field Properties X Source Field result_value eae Sur of result value Summarize By Surn r Warame sumresult_ value Format 0 00 ki W Visible Cancel e Caption modify the caption for the field e Summarize by select a sor
449. r and all opened grids a E Copy button copies selected character s in a grid cell to the clipboard Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst About the Interface Paste button pastes text from the clipboard to the active cell Add button adds a new record this feature is available only if a grid is active Delete button deletes the selected record this feature is available only if a grid 1s active Post Data button saves posts all changes made to the project this button 1s activated 1f changes to a record have been made Find button displays a dialog for searching in a grid with a user specified criteria Filter by Value filters the grid using the value in the active cell Hide Selected button shows only the selected data records rows Inverse Selection button will select all records that are not selected and de select all records that are currently selected Sort Ascending button sorts records in ascending order based on the selected column Sort Descending button sorts records in descending order based on the selected column Template Manager button launches the Template Manager List Editor button launches the List Editor 19 14 11 Material Specifications button launches the Material Specifications Editor Query Builder button loads the utility for building simple and advanced queries Well Profile Viewer button loads a window displaying the profile view of the selected station
450. r 5 Template Manager List Editor This menu item loads the List Editor which provides options to set add and or delete items in a list table The button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see the List Editor section in this chapter Material Specifications This menu item loads the Material Specifications Editor which provides options for the material soil and geological formation specification that is currently used by the Project The a button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see the Material Specifications Editor section in this chapter Manage User Access Level This menu item loads the User Access Level Management System UALM these tools can be used to add edit users user groups and assign permissions to user groups and control how users access your projects and the HydroGeo Analyst application For more details see Chapter 4 User Access Level Management Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Change Password This menu allows you to change the project password this feature is available for administrators only The following dialog will appear ioli Old Password New Password Confirm Password Enter the Old Password in the first line Enter the New Password in the second line Confirm the new password in the third line When you are finished click OK For more details see Chapter 4 User Access Level Management 3 2 6 Tools The To
451. r own If the latter is selected the template manager can be used to create the new database structure from scratch All database structure templates that come with HG Analyst also come with their respective report and borehole log plot BHLP templates As such if one of the existing database templates is selected during the project creation these templates will be copied to your project by default You can later edit them or even remove them from your project if desired The Template Manager allows you to modify the current user view as well as create an Understanding the Template Manager 159 unlimited number of additional user views For example a geologist working on the project may only need to view tables that are related to geological investigation data The Template Manager allows you to hide all unwanted tables and or fields from such users and display only a smaller set of relevant tables and or fields All user modifications to the database views can be saved either in the currently active template or as a new name All such modifications to the project s database are automatically reflected in all copies of user settings The Template Manager allows you to export the currently active database structure as a new database structure for use in creating similar projects More information on the detailed options that are available in the Template Manager is provided later in this chapter 5 2 About the Interface 160 The
452. ra a ae ease 427 Chess p1ked S CHIESA IA eee eae oe eee ees 428 Check Blanks SCC SA aid 429 Applying a Lab Quality Template sscscssccsssssssssssssscccccccccccssssssssscccsssesssscsees 430 Mappins ELIAS ro secede E 431 Generate OC Results lada A E 431 Export Quality Control Analysis Results cocccooonooononcncnnnnnnncnonononononnnonnnnnononnnnnnncnncnnnnnos 433 14 Plotting A 435 About the Interface oscila 436 Descriptor or Designet Toolbar ems in 437 Viewer WINdOW SCENES decided 438 A PIOUS cenie n T E T E E 439 APIO aa E E ns cnecncac che snice peach ol 439 PVC LIVI A OM SS sce sict eth hale taatel a o O 440 O A O 443 General Sees SUMING did 443 Style and Display SENES O o 444 COMON NO 444 O A AA E E A 444 MELIA LAS aro 445 FLOM ZONA CX VA KAS ai dolia 446 Data Series Sern GS ol 446 COINS Lines to a Plot cio eiii 448 A A A e ten eiaustan 449 Savine and EXD OPUNG so aR 450 Saye POCPI e DESE aS aA A E 450 Savio PO as Templ al n AT 450 Deletine Plot Templates nin id idos 451 Export Flot Page to Graphics Pie esla ici 451 Copy Plotto CApbortmd nacidas 451 Export Flot Pageto DOCUMENT rail 452 P e E A Eten NTO LE RRC IA 452 PDs Appendices ici Appendix A HydroGeo Analyst File Types csssssssssccccssssssssssssccccccccsssssceees 453 HydroGeo Analyst Main Module ii A tea ae erie 453 Map MANS A A AA A hts dghslitcat et 453 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc TOSS SECON
453. ration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the measure amount of constituent that was recovered for every spiked parameter Both the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch Batch ID which relates the samples to each other Defining Quality Codes for Data When importing adding sample data quality codes need to be added to indicate the type of sample in order to be used in a Lab Quality Analysis The following are the codes required by HGA Sample Type Quality Code Chapter 13 Quality Control Sample Type Quality Code Using the Template Manager you can create a field that will store the quality codes This field may be added to any table but typically it is found in the Chem_sample table with the Sys_sample_code These quality codes are saved in the file Program Files HGAnalyst Whi QualityAC dll config If necessary the codes may be changed to reflect the codes used in your data Simply use a text editor to open the config file and modify the quality codes under the section lt QualityCodes gt 13 1 1 Data Requirements Quality Control starts with a data set before you can apply a quality control template you must generate a data set by building and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the Quality Control
454. reating a new template A new database template may be created during the project creation phase using the Project Wizard The new template will contain only the Stations table The template can be further enhanced using the procedures listed above It is not possible to create a new blank template using the Template Manager 5 4 2 Creating a copy of the current template Once a project is created based on a selected database template a copy of the database template will be added to the database for use as a user template As such the first time the Template Manager is opened it will only display this one user template Chapter 5 Template Manager As discussed earlier in this chapter multiple user templates can be created from this copy All users have the ability to make a copy of this template modify and save view settings in this newly created user template To create a copy of the current template select the E Copy Template As button at the top of the window A dialog will appear prompting for a template name and description Once a name is provided for the new template all changes will be saved to this template 5 4 3 Saving a template as default template Saving a template as the default template makes that user template the default for all users When HydroGeo Analyst opens your project 1t will utilize this default template for view settings To set the template as default select the Use as Project Default option a
455. rer can be selected and dragged and dropped into the desired section of the report 1f displaying data from these fields 1s desired Report Properties Toolbox The Report Properties toolbox as shown in the figure below provides the tools that can be used to edit properties of the report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain This window can be accessed by clicking on the Properties icon on the toolbar Report Designer Window 361 362 Custom Mame Alignment BackColor BackStyle Cansrow CanShrink ClassMame DataField Font ForeColor height hyperLink left MultiLine Property Toolbox a txtSTR_MUNICIPIC 7 alH EXESTR_ MUNICIPIO 0 ddT Let ES 0 ddBkTranspare False Normal STR_MUNICIPIOC Arial 205 75 True Identification of the active control Visualization options Name of the Property Property values OutputFormat Style Summary Distir SummaryFunc O ddSFSurn Summary Grou SummaryRunr 0 ddSRMone Summary Type 0 ddSMNone STR_MUNICIPIO Description of the property This window serves to access the properties of the controls that are present on the report and it contains an orderly list with the names and values of the properties of the objects in the report presented in the first and second column respectively A combo box with the list of objects whose properties can be edited is provided in the upper part of the window Additional informatio
456. ring observations where the weights are proportional to the borrowed areas The Natural Neighbor method is valid only with the convex hull of the Thiessen polygon formed by the data points and values outside the hull extrapolation should be used with caution The Natural Neighbor interpolation scheme may be visualized as a taut rubber sheet stretched to satisfy all the data points The interpolated value at any location is a linear combination of all Natural Neighbors of that location and the resulting surface is continuous with a slope that is also continuous Combining the gradients or slopes with the linear interpolation provides results that are more smooth and may anticipate the peaks and valleys between data Singularities and other undesirable effects may be lessened by incorporating the gradient factor The gradient influence on the results can be manipulated by two tautness parameters that the user can enter These parameters allow the interpolated surface to vary from purely linear interpolation to one which is well rounded and has the gradient factor In all cases the slope discontinuities are removed and the resulting surface has slope continuity everywhere The advanced settings parameters for the Natural Neighbor method are described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X_Nodes Number of grid nodes in the X direction Start Y Minimum Y co or
457. ription here Creation Date 2005 11 21 09 48 37 Privileges Database Project User Access Level OF Cancel When a project is open the Group Properties dialog for Project Level objects will be displayed as shown below 138 Chapter 4 Project Manager Group Properties Mame Sample Description Creation Date 20054 1 21 11 06 50 Privileges 3D View Backup Database Borehole Logs Charts Cross Sechons Crozstab Data Export Data Import Environmental List Editor Manual Data Entry Maps Maternal Specificat Project Properties Quality Control Queres Reporte Restore Database Template Manager ar a OF Cancel The Name and Description for the Group can be defined by the administrator the Creation Date is a read only field that is filled automatically by HGA the time stamp will be read from the computer s CPU at the time of creating the group The Privileges to the various HGA objects are described further below In HGA an object is any item that requires access control An object could be a dialog a database a table in a database a file a template etc An object may be classified into a group based on common properties such as a number of access levels e g a database and a dialog may have different levels Objects that have the same list of access levels may be grouped together For instance all objects that require only two levels of control e g Full or Read only access
458. ription of Menu Items 265 266 Each selection option is described below Pointer Allows to select stations one by one When a station 1s selected a red circle will appear on top of the station s symbol When another station is selected the previously selected station is un selected and the new station s symbol becomes selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Rectangle Allows to select stations within a drawn box To draw a rectangle place the cursor in the map window click once with the left mouse button in the area of interest and drag a window around the area then release the mouse button All stations within the box will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Polygon Allows to select stations within a drawn polygon Place the cursor in the map window at one point of interest click once with the left mouse button and digitize a polygon around the area of interest To add a vertex to the polygon continue to click with the left mouse button To close the polygon double click the left mouse button at the final vertex All stations within the polygon will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Circle Line Allows to select stations within a drawn circle To draw a circle place the cursor in the center of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and drag an expanding circle around the area then release th
459. riteria will be highlighted with user defined colors for each QC check Save assessment results to a MS Excel spreadsheet Time Series Charting Create Time Series X Y plots based on data queries Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst e Add legends and data marker labels to plots e Add best fit trend formula or statistical lines to the plot e Display non detect uncertainty or detection limits on the plot as lines or symbols e Display one or more water quality standard values as a line or symbol for quick detection of samples that exceed the standards e Define data series ranges and modify display properties for different data ranges e g define a data range where the data exceeds the water quality standard values and assign unique symbol line and display properties for this data Interact with plots and display multiple plot windows in the viewer window simultaneously Select fields for plot grouping or data series grouping Print plots in a report single or multiple pages e Save plot settings as templates for re use e Export plots to graphics format or copy plots to Windows clipboard Application and Project Management User Access Level Management e Manage access rights on an application and project level e Application Level used to control permissions to features such as creating new projects and deleting existing ones and e Project level used to control access to individual projects and the various mo
460. rom its respective station Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Intersecting Layers During a cross section interpretation knowledge of other interpretations is essential In this dialog you can define display options for intersecting cross sections Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen WLevel Intersecting Grid Intersecting Layer Symbo View ntersecting While Editin Outline Color E Outline Style width in Pixels 6 H Model Layer i Geology Layer e HudroGeology Layer Specify the color and line style under the Intersecting Layer Symbol frame In the View Intersecting While Editing frame specify the view options for different interpretation types By default all modules will be active The intersecting cross sections will be visible when you set one of the interpretation types to visible and editable In the example screen shot below you can see that cross sections EE and BB along with their interval locations are visible while interpreting cross section ZZ Description of Menu Items 289 Map Project Site map lel x srame ori Fie Edit view Tools Help ala MN AXA AK 28 o del uolgas sso15 330 340 320 FM E Model 310 Topography e y o viv Geology A OM C HydroGeology Elevation m 290 300 280 270 250 260 l 240 230 220 150 200 250 300 450 500 550 600 0 50 100 350 400
461. rs Urik MH projection type Select the appropriate projection dabum After impor all coordinates wall be converted to WGS 1984 for intemal use e gt Cancel Hep If the data to be imported contains the Well Section then some additional information may be required in order to allow proper data transfer The Station Related Settings window as shown below will only be displayed if data is imported to the Stations table Projection Settings Define the coordinate system the projection system and the units for the stations in the source file Following successful import the new stations will be converted to the projection system and units defined in the HydroGeo Analyst project A detailed description of the coordinate and projection systems available in HydroGeo Analyst is provided in Chapter 4 See Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location on page 153 NOTE It is important to know and select the correct project system during the import to prevent erroneous station co ordinates The LAS file allows to specify a place holder for NULL values common examples are 999 0000 Wherever this value is detected in the source HGA will insert NULL in the destination according to the field setting specified in the Template Manager When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Import LAS File Step 4 Data Preview Vali
462. rs control Coarse Gravel Clay rich 300 Fine sandy gravel Silty Sand HydroGeology Elevation m 280 Cross Section Window 260 240 220 200 Site Map 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 533 931 4 813 102 Distance m 538 305 4 814 234 937 18 382 97 X Z coordinates The Cross Section Editor window contains the following items e Menu Bar Contains program menu commands e Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used features in the Cross Section Editor e Layer Control Manages cross sections visibility and editability of interpretation layers e Cross Section Window Contains the cross section view for the selected cross section line 274 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor e Site Map Displays the selected cross section line as it appears in the map project The selected stations for the cross section are highlighted in this Map preview window e Coordinates Displays the X Z coordinate for the current mouse cursor location e Active Window Select between the Map Manager window and the Cross Section window 9 1 1 Description of Toolbar Items The Cross section editor contains a toolbar with short cut buttons to some of the commonly used features Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no optio
463. rting a list of fields in the template manager from an excel file To load the Data Link Properties window e Click on the Build Connection String button 7 The following dialog will appear E Data Link Properties xl Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Excel Files t Use connection string Connection string 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password T Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use Test Connection OF Cancel Help e From the top of this dialog click on the Provider tab as shown below Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 455 E Data Link Properties EI Prowider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE OB Providers Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DE Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for DTS Packages Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Internet Publishing Microsoft OLE DE Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSD ataShape SQL Server Replication OLE DB Provider for DTS OF Cancel Help e Select the Provider option For this example select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers this optio
464. s If there are no slices in the list then this window can be used to create the desired vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps For more details see Creating Slices and Cross Sections on page 340 below m Select create slices ioj xj Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal slice no 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Edi Delete Modify Select Cancel E To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A color map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Color map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Color Map Display Settings Once the Color map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below 332 Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer a wf 39999 9793 Min value 0 0 Upper limit 40000 Lower limit 0 Clip at limits LA J lt 1 Semitransparent Slice e Name is the name for the color map e Visible shows or hides the color map e Max value is the calculated maximum value for the plume e Min value is the calculated minimum value for the plume e Upper limit is the data value above which the color map may be clipped out not displayed e Lower limit is the data value below which the color map may be clipped out not displayed
465. s Layout Fields Preferences Printer Fonts Color date_ TCE Source Field date_ Orientation Row Rank Style None Rank On Cua chemical_name 21 Caption BTEX ECM 10 2 2000 12 10 2000 414 4 5 15 2000 5 21 2000 6 25 2000 8 29 2000 Sort Type fAscending MV Show Footer GB 19 Group Footer Settings ae Caption Maximum Conc for this Station Bitmap Empty x El Position Left Top y WarName _ Expression maxConcentration Max Load data items There are numerous style and sorting settings available for each field in the crosstab report Select the field from the tree on the left side of the frame to enable the respective options One of the more useful features in the Field properties are the Group Footer Settings at the bottom of the dialog Here you can control how the data for each field should be grouped in the footer For example if you are displaying concentration results for multiple stations over several sampling rounds you may want to see the maximum concentration at a given station and the maximum concentration at a given date To specify one of these statistical options Select the appropriate field from the tree Under the Expression column in the grid at the bottom of the dialog select the statistical function from the combo box choose from Max Min Sum Average Count or User defined formula Enter the Captio
466. s 3 Primary Asie Sered 4 Primary Asis Seret Add Remove Ok Cancel Apply This dialog allows you to add as many series as desired and select the fields that will be used as the data source for the horizontal X and vertical Y axes For this example only one series is required Use the Remove option to delete Series 2 3 and 4 388 Chapter 11 The Report Editor For Series 1 define the following settings For the Series Label type TVOC ug L For the X Axis Field sample_date from the combo box For the Y Axis Field result_value from the combo box The remaining settings can be left as is OK to return to the Report Designer When you are finished designing the chart s and other parts of your report you can generate a report preview E 5 Report Preview button from the toolbar Please be patient during this process as 1t may require a few minutes to pass the data from HydroGeo Analyst to the Report Preview the report contains approximately 25 pages Once this is complete you should see the preview window with the table of contents as shown below New Report result value m 11211996 O m 118 1996 O lp 211211996 411611996 911996 dan i 1 A TWOC ugl 0 Mar May Jul 1121996 IO 1181996 IO Creating Reports with Charts 389 390 The report preview displays the first station W 01 by default Since there are no observed concentrations for this
467. s 259 Copy Map to Clipboard Copies the entire Map Window to the clipboard The map window can then be pasted as an image in other applications 3 2 4 Tools 260 The Map Manager provides annotation tools which allow for drawing shapes and inserting text labels on the map The drawing tools are available in both the Tools menu and in the Map Manager toolbar The options for the annotation tools allow modifying the color and style of the annotation objects The annotation items are only available on map layers with the corresponding object type i e text line point polygon These are called annotation layers For example to draw polygons on the map a new map layer with the type Polygon Shape File SHP must first be created using the Layer New menu option or if a polygon layer already exists 1t has to be set to edit mode To add text to a map layer a new layer with the type Text Layer SHP must first be created using the Layer New menu option The following annotation options are available Polygon Provides the option to draw a polygon This option is available only when a polygon shape file layer is selected and set for editing Rectangle Provides the option to draw a rectangle This option is only available if a polygon shape file layer is selected and set for editing Circle Provides the option to draw a circle This option is only available if a polygon shape file layer is selected and set for edi
468. s and many other features to facilitate data entry and validation for virtually any type of Station data 6 Chapter 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst Importing and Exporting Data The Data Transfer System DTS 1s designed to assist in the process of importing exporting data to from the database Using the DTS station data can be imported from practically any source including delimited text files MS Excel spreadsheets MS Access Databases SQL Server Databases and more 1 2 2 Data Management HydroGeo Analyst supports virtually any database structure including those with multiple levels of relationships among two or more entities This provides an unparalleled flexibility for projects that may have variable needs For example the project database structure may need to satisfy requirements of the United States Environmental Protection Agency US EPA or Ontario s Ministry of the Environment MOE For these and many other needs HydroGeo Analyst comes with a number of customizable templates implementing various commonly used database structures These structures include e Ontario s Ministry of Environment Water Well Information System MOE W WIS Metric Units e Ontario s Ministry of Environment Water Well Information System MOE WWIS Imperial Units e Generic Environmental Metric e Generic Environmental Imperial e US E P A Region 2 Metric e US E P A Region 2 Imperial e US E P A Region 5 Metric e
469. s are greater than the isosurface value a In this case the entire cell volume is added to plume volume estimation 3 some values are greater than the isosurface value a and some are less In this case the isosurface crosses the cell green polygon on picture and the linearly interpolated portion of cell volume is added to plume volume estimation only a part of the cell volume is added to the plume estimation The volume estimation value will be in the length units for the X Y co ordinates specified in the database For example 1f you use UTM and X and Y are entered in meters then the volume estimation value will be in cubic meters Color Maps The Color maps elements allows you to create a color shaded map for the concentration data that will plot distributed colors A color legend for the Color map will also appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen Creating a Color Map To create a color map click on the desired element in the Model tree to highlight it Display Settings 331 then right click on the element and select the Add color map option from the pop up menu y Alternately color maps may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create color map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window shown below with a list of the available surfaces slices The color map can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section line
470. s dialog there are four columns e Order Layer order from top to bottom read only e Name Defines the layer name e Description Defines layer description e Pattern Defines line properties for the model layer In this dialog specify the total number of model layers and the properties for each layer Layers will be ordered from top to bottom the first layer will always be Top of Layer 1 1 e Ground surface followed by Bottom of Layer 1 Bottom of Layer 2 and so forth The top most layer represents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer 1 e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer excluding the top layer Additional model layers may be inserted at any location at any time Press the Add button to add a new model layer The new layer will be added ABOVE the currently selected layer Press the Delete button to remove the selected model layer e To edit an existing layer press the Edit button or double click on the row containing this layer Description of Menu Items 293 Each model layer does not need to appear in all cross sections NOTE The Model Layers options are not available when the Model Layer interpretation is set to edit mode in the layer manager Update Cross Section Use this option to update the screen water level and intersecting layer information displayed on the current cross section The corresponding map
471. s to a TXT file using the same file name and in the same Plume sub directory NOTE Currently there is no method of opening plume projects in the Interpolation tool to make modifications Therefore it is suggested that you save the data query so HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 117 118 the 3D project can be quickly re created Crosstab Report This menu item loads the Crosstab query component where you can generate crosstab query reports from your existing data queries Ensure that you have a valid data query selected in the Queries node in the HGA browser before selecting this option For more details please see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries Quality Control This menu item loads the Quality Control component with these tools you can manage Lab Quality Control templates and perform a quality control assessment For more details please see Chapter 13 Quality Control Unit Converter Use the Unit Converter to convert commonly used units from one form to another For more details on this tool please see the Unit Converter section in this chapter BackUp Database Use this option to create a backup copy of the SQL Server database used by the current project A backup of the database is helpful in order to preserve data or to detach and send the database to colleagues or WHI Technical support Select this menu item and provide a name and directory path for the file It will be saved with the BAK extension If t
472. se Browser If this option is selected the dialog shown below will be displayed requesting the user to provide the fields that should be linked Select desired set of fields 3 E x f Complete set of fields Short set of fields Value Unit field OF Cancel E Help The concept of linked fields is introduced in HydroGeo Analyst in order to enhance data integrity If two or three fields are linked together HydroGeo Analyst tracks changes made to values under one field and makes appropriate changes to all other linked fields as appropriate Currently a maximum of three fields can be linked together Linking three fields may be useful in storing data such as chemistry results e g chemical names result values and result units If such fields are linked you may change the result unit for any record and automatically see the result converted to the new unit This avoids the problem of changing result units without converting the result Chapter 5 Template Manager values to the appropriate unit At times it may be necessary to link only two fields For example when storing depth related data with variable units an additional field to store the unit for each record is required In those circumstances the two fields can be created as linked fields enhancing data integrity The Set Primary Key button is activated only when a table is active and receiving the focus It allows defining the primary key for the t
473. se structures should be adequate for your projects If not you may use the Create New Template option to create a new structure containing only the Stations table Then after the project 1s created you may use the Template Manager to create and define the required tables and fields for your project For more details on this feature see Chapter 5 Creating a new template If you select to Create a new template a prompt will appear for a name for the new template 152 Chapter 4 Project Manager 2 Template name q E xX Hame OF Cancel E Help The template will be created and will contain only the required table for an HG Analyst database This is the Station Table with the following fields e Name e ID e X Coordinate e Y Coordinate e Elevation e TOC Top of Casing If you select one of the existing Database structures you will see a list of the tables included with this template and the corresponding fields under the Database Structure Preview Take a few moments to review this database structure Next to create the project tables and proceed to the next step in the wizard Creating Projects in Existing Databases At the top of this window there is a list of Projects in the selected Database This option is only available if an existing database was selected in Step 1 If so you may choose from the available HydroGeo Analyst projects on this database and select a database template from an ex
474. selected it is possible to set the properties of the graph If a text column is selected the font attributes can be set Note that each column may utilize different data fields for 1ts start and ending depth information For example the start and ending depth information for Lithology patterns may be different from that of the well construction and may come from different tables For details on how to pre define the data mappings for some of the BHLP column types please see Chapter 5 Profile Settings Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Supported Column Types The borehole log plotter supports many data types including e Scale e Depth Point based data e g symbols for water level indicator etc e Depth Interval based data e g well screen indicators text etc e Geologic formation details e g patterns descriptions etc e Well construction details e Depth point and depth interval dependent plots e g chemistry results geophysical investigation results etc The column type may be selected from a pick list as shown below Choose Column Type E x Please Choose a Column Type Scale Scale Lithology Pl o Well Construction Interval Depth One or more instances of these column types can be displayed on a borehole log plot in any sequence Each column can have its own header BHLP Default Settings There are several default view settings and properties that can be defined for the BHLP To l
475. sessisecescecsscdieckebstnne d ceyedsccsieeeecosdicsdcerdess 1 OF Understanding the Template Manager ssssssscccssssssssssssssccccccccssssssssssccccssssssess 159 Aout the Interface yi csissstessciasseecscesseccsienssectcescavedbdsaccsstavsvcubenseancutunscacicenscssaevoccscantanens 160 Description of Toolbar ems ci res 161 Template Toolbar Global Template Options isic a a N 161 Tablesand Fields TOOL AR nds 163 Working With the Template Manager sssscsssccccsssssssssssscccccscccssssssssccccssssesees 166 Modityine Tables and View Settings a 166 Data Cate cones usa eek es ee oes 166 Table Property elnas dl adds 166 Detmins Table sk elos ads 170 Modifying Fields and View Sets ui ass 172 Linked Pte So seca caches as ctc aetheen cea E eau eats ee an asa soen te See eee 173 Manapino Templates raices 174 CTE ati ATE WCEP ALC locals 174 Creating a copy of the current template ooooonnnnnnnncnnnnnononononnnnnnonnnonononaninnncnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnnss 174 Sayine a template as detault template a NA 175 Exporting the current template as a Database template occcccccnnnononnnnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnanononnnnnoss 175 6 The Data Transfer System cccccsssscccsssscccssscccsssscccssssccsces L77 Copyright Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc a e O eee eases 177 Importing Data using the DTS esssossssssececocccssssccccccossssscccecoossssssecceceocossssssccessssssssssee 179 Choose a Data SOME o odas 179
476. sform button This option is required only 1f you are not sure that the CAD file has the same projection system as the current map project In this case click Transform to georeference the CAD image Once you are done click OK to return to the Import DXF dialogue In this dialogue select which layers you wish to import into the map and click OK Transforming Coordinates The CAD file must contain the same units and projection system as the current map project in order for it to be displayed properly If there are differences then the CAD file can be Transformed to the map project s projection and coordinate system From the Import DXF dialog click on the Transform button This will launch the Map Georeference window as shown below 240 Chapter 8 Map Manager Georeference CAD Georefere e a A Oj xj ao ela Georeference Paint 1 10 000 m Y1 10 000 m Se 1000 000 m wa 1000 000 m Distance Between Points 1414214 im Map Layer Extent 1 121 637 m 1 851 485 m 211125743 mi Ye 155 279 im X Cancel Transformation is performed using two points on the DXF file with known coordinates The Map Manager does not provide an error trap for invalid transformations Follow the procedure below to import a DXF file and use the coordinate Transformation option To set the georeference point click the Georeference button e Click on the first map location where the world coordin
477. sidered as included in the contract price V Governing Law This license agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario Canada and the United States Any terms or conditions of this agreement found to be unenforceable illegal or contrary to public policy in any jurisdiction will be deleted but will not affect the remaining terms and conditions of the agreement VI Entire Agreement This agreement constitutes the entire agreement between you and Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc A Schlumberger Company Table of Contents 1 Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst ccssccccssssccsssscccsssscceeees L Sample App aio dada l What s New in HydroGeo Analyst sseceecsssecccccsccccccoccecccecccscccecccseccecccsecceccssecceccssecceessoe 2 New Features TU a N E 2 Data Manat mentira aa iana 2 Application and Project Management dida 3 GIS IVT AP MDa Toe ieran a r O e A EAE 3 Cross Section Editor ainia sales 4 Borchole Eos Plotter ti di tii 4 HydroGeo Analyst SIDE Xplore ty sii Sonat iiaden toco alison EOTS 4 NEW PESAS Y 20 A ci 4 Dita model a 5 Data Transter system TS ies tl cart 5 A tactacss Mencinacts cae Nett tics toate ae cce cas aiae toa ke nist cae encatestah aN nats smieesenese a aac 5 CLOSS SeCUOM Ed sida 5 HOA SD EXPTE rca dt dt E Ra 5 Duero 5 BOrenOle 10S Plotter rales dies 5 A 6 ADOUE HydroGeo Analyst iii iaa 6 Dat ACUISTA Nociones 6 A a II A cetoats E EE 6 Importing and Exp
478. sing the DTS 181 Look in El My Computer Ej 3 Floppy A S Soft F 3 0 3 D y E Removable Disk H 3 0 File name fr est Files of type ms Access mdb y MS Access mdb Text txt csv tab asc Excel xls DBase db Cancel f Select the appropriate file type Browse to the folder containing the file Highlight the desired file Click Open Click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step Build a Connection String To build a connection string select the radio button beside the Build Connection String option then click on the 7j Build Connection String button to load the following dialog E Data Link Properties a X x Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE OB Providerfs ESRI GeoDatabase OLE DB Provider Microsoft 154 1 1 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 3 51 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE OB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for DTS Packages Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Js ese OLE DE Prandi for Interet utate epee OLE DE AE for ALE o Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider Microsoft Project 9 0 OLE DB Provider MSD ataShape OLE OB Provider for Microsoft Director Services SQL Server Replication OLE DB Provider for DTS OF Cancel
479. ss OK button 412 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter A node identifying the column will be added to the tree view under the Design node For some columns such as Lithology and Well Construction the BHLP attempts to obtain data for the borehole that is currently selected in the combo box and displays a preview in the viewer An example is shown below for a new Lithology column 15 x ag Elevation m TOC m 347 00 348 00 Borehole Log Designer Sample Select Station 1 m Y m BH1 m x 537381 50 4812036 33 E Design Lithology Lithology Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Gravel Close Export Y Print Y Help Edit Column Properties Column properties Entities can be set by expanding the Design node and clicking on the sub node to be updated For example to modify a Lithology column expand the Design node and select Lithology from the tree as shown in the following screenshot Designing a Borehole Log Plot 413 414 Borehole Log Designer Sample a ioj xj Select Station 1 m Y m Elevation m TOC m 537381 50 4812036 33 347 00 348 00 ES Design 3 6 Lithology Lithology ES LithologyEntities Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Text Lithology Horizontal Align Center Vertical Align Center Gravel Font Font Angle 0 Font Escape Angle 0 Close Espot Y Print Y Help
480. ss section and selecting the Remove Stations option Then simply click on a station to remove it from the cross section Stations can also be added to removed from a cross section line in the Map tab as described in Defining a Cross Section Line section on page 270 9 5 Querying Cross Section Interpretations In previous versions of HGA the cross section interpretations were saved in shape files and along the cross section line The cross section editor now saves the interpretation results to the database for various uses including e displaying the results of each interpretation in HGA e querying the interpretation table for any desired surface s or thickness data that can be used for groundwater modeling applications The final interpretation results may be queried for information such as layer thickness at selected station s top elevation s bottom elevation s layer type name and description When you create a Data Query in the Query Builder and expand the Description data category you will see the Interpretation Results table as shown below Querying Cross Section Interpretations 305 1 Query Builder a O x XAHS Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields Cross cion deta y Function Expression i station id id Description station x a Location y e station name name X
481. st Data Transfer System Import 1 o x Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name v gt 4 Description Select data source O Specify import file name Oe Note Build a connection string The Data Transfer System DTS allows you q to import data from external sources such as SARA ES SEDES SAA 2 OA TOS BECEL SOAS OS Mo ACCESS and other databases through a three to four step process Data source details In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations The DTS also allows exporting data from a project to one of the following formats e Text files CSV TXT ASC TAB e Excel 97 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Other databases For more details on how to import export data using the DTS please refer to Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System 3 2 HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar The HydroGeo Analyst menu items have been specifically designed for optimal flexibility and ease of use The items in the menu bar are context sensitive this means that one or more menu items may be greyed out if a specific feature is not applicable for a particular view The top menu allows access to all of the
482. st layer in the figure above In this example the model layer pinches out at the right side of the cross section Editing Model Layers Once the model interpretation layer lines are drawn it may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more vertices or add more vertices To move a vertex e Select the Mm Pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once on the desired model layer line to activate e Click on the vertices to be moved e Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex 304 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor e Select the Pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once anywhere on the line to activate the line e Select the 4 Add Vertex tool from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location on the line the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Other properties of model layers such as name pattern and description can be edited by using the Tools gt Model Layers menu option described in the Model Layers section on page 292 Linking Vertices between Model Layers Once Model Layer lines are drawn their vertices can be linked following the procedure described in the Link Vertex section on page 280 in the Edit menu 9 4 4 Remove Stations from Cross Sections When working with a cross section in the Cross Section tab one or more stations can be removed from the cross section line by right clicking on the cro
483. sual PEST e Visual Groundwater e WHI UnSatSuite Visual HELP Xv111 e Remediation ToolKit e Aquifer Test Pro e FLOWPATH Il Visual MODFLOW Pro 18 the largest time saving breakthrough since the release of MODFLOW for building calibrating and analyzing groundwater flow and contaminant transport models Setting the environmental industry standard Visual MODFLOW Pro is a pre and post processor for MODFLOW MODPATH and MT3D RT3D Visual MODFLOW Pro is the complete package for groundwater modeling and includes the Visual MODFLOW 3D Explorer and WinPEST see descriptions below Visual MODFLOW 3D Explorer 18 a built in 3D visualization system for displaying and animating Visual MODFLOW models using state of the art 3D graphics technology The advanced visualization capabilities of the Visual MODFLOW 3D Explorer provide you with all the tools you need to create impressive and informative 3D representations of your modeling data using vibrant colors and high resolution graphics WinPEST 1s exclusively designed for Visual MODFLOW Pro to help reduce the tedious hours spent calibrating model results to observations found in the field WinPEST is completely integrated within Visual MODFLOW Pro and offers a variety of benefits unparalleled in other calibration packages RISC WorkBench 1s an easy to use software package designed for performing fate and transport modeling and human health risk assessments for contaminated sites
484. sults For more details please refer to Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter 134 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst Project Management Project Management is an essential component of any environmental project HydroGeo Analyst provides the tools you need to manage user access to your projects selecting database schemas and geographical details The first section of this chapter 4 1 User Access Level Management describes tools for managing how users access your HGA projects The second section 4 2 Using the Project Manager describes the process of creating new projects and the options available 4 1 User Access Level Management 4 1 1 Introduction The User Access Level Management UALM component allows protecting both file based data e g model inputs outputs etc as well as database based data e g data stored in HGA The following features are available e Create and manage user groups 1 e create edit delete user groups e Manage users in user groups 1 e add remove edit users in existing user groups e Assign access rights to User Groups for each object Data Management Maps Cross Sections etc Set user ID names description and access passwords for users e Enforce access levels for each user group as per the specified security document e Store Users and User Groups in database templates for re use in future projects HydroGeo Analyst has two levels of user access management e Application
485. sults of a selected query right mouse click on the query and select Execute option The Query results will then be displayed in the Data Query tab as shown in the example below Chapter 2 Getting Started la x i HydroGeo Analyst Sample_Nov23 D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Sample_Novy23 Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help Ge7Zg Sh txBal RB BRE BO s ES amp ii mg Station Groups all Stati List Gk Data Query Jtation Data H E Station Data E 3 Qe Station Group Database Tables v bel ES SA El Maps RowlD x y _ name chemica 2 c J Secti gt 1 7 535646 829 4813320 22 BH6 Tetrachloro 1 49 iN NON 2 8536892 4813305 99 BH7 Tetrachloro 173 43 nE E Reports 3 21 536746 69 4814507 49 BH20 Tetrachloro 15 t 3D View 4 21 536746 69 4814507 49 BH20 Tetrachloro 120 H A Borehole Logs m 5 21 536746 69 4814507 49 BH20 Tetrachloro 3200 Charts mi 6 21 536746 69 4814507 49 BH20 Tetrachloro 540 El WN ar gt al Rows 6 Time 0 0 0 63 Borehole Logs With this data query you now have the option to generate a Crosstab query report This feature is outside the scope of this exercise For more details please see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries for more details If you have time varying data for one or more contaminants in your database you may generate data queries with these fields then generate Time Series charts This feature is outside the scope of this exer
486. t button in the bottom corner to proceed The Next gt button is activated only after the required information has been defined in the current window The following few sections present a detailed description of each window of the DTS 178 Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System 6 1 Importing Data using the DTS The DTS allows importing data from various sources into any HG Analyst database table The DTS allows importing data only for selected fields in the selected destination table however some tables have required fields such as ID from to etc which must be mapped in order for each record to be imported To load the DTS for importing data Project Import Data from the main menu The first window of the DTS will be displayed as shown below Data Transfer System Import 10 E oj xj Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name xX Description ve TS pac age m Select data source 277 MIN PET ATT TEA ATAR ETET ETOT o Specify import file name Note The Data Transfer System DTS allows you to import data from external sources such as text files excel spreadsheets MS Access and other databases through a three to four step process In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps f
487. t polygon rectangle circle line or text is selected Chapter 8 Map Manager Paste Pastes the clipboard item onto the current layer Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all objects from the current map layer Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to the selected object To add a vertex Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make it editable Select an object on this layer Click on the a Add Vertex button or select the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex This menu item is only available when an object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Delete Vertex Provides an option to delete a vertex from the selected object To delete a vertex Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make it editable Select an object on this layer all its vertices will be highlighted Click on the amp Delete vertex button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be removed the mouse cursor will change to an X Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object This menu item is only available when an object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Description of Menu Item
488. t Editor Fields Displays hides the control that displays a list of fields available for the report ER Properties Displays hides the properties control for the report a Toolbox Displays hides the toolbar hosting the toolbox icons ad Grid Displays hides grid lines on the Designer 5 Script Editor Launches the VBScript editor that may be used to enhance report automation Formatting Tools Normal a Text Style Selects a format style Arial Font Selects a font for the selected object 10 Font Size Sets the font size for the selected object Bl Bold Sets the bold status of the selected text T italics Sets the italics status of the selected text IS Underline Sets the underline status for the selected text i Detailed Font Launches a dialog that allows setting font details Left Align Aligns selected text on the left margin uu Center Align Centers selected text Report Designer Window 351 352 H Right Align Aligns selected text on the right margin DE it Bulleted List Formats the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list ity tf Outdent Outdents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list IF tf Indent Indents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list a Background color Sets the background color of the selected control ES Text Color Sets the forecolor of the selected text Line Color Sets the line color of the selected c
489. t Level Objects are shown below 140 Chapter 4 Project Manager Group Properties Mame Sample Description Creation Date 20054 1 21 11 06 50 Privileges oso Jere vie foore reso aon fe E 30 View D Backup Database Borehole Logs Charts Cross Sechons Crozstab Data Export Data Import Environmental List Editor Manual Data Entry Maps Maternal Specificat Project Properties Quality Control Queres Reporte Restore Database Template Manager OF Cancel The administrator may control user access to the following application level objects Backup Database Allow Yes or No Restore Database User Access Level settings Manually Add Remove data DTS Import Data Import Station Data DTS Export data Template Manager Database views Templates e g Environmental template Queries Read Write Delete and Execute Quality Control User Access Level Management 141 3D Explorer Read Write and Delete Borehole logs Charts Cross Sections Cross Tab Queries List Editor Map Manager Material Specifications Editor Reports Project Properties Read and Write When you are finished click OK to save the settings for the Group and close the dialog 4 1 5 User Properties 142 The UALM allows the administrator to add and edit the properties for the various Users in the project To load these settings e From the main UALM window select one user under the Users node i
490. t Process is explained in Exporting Data using the DTS on page 193 The first window in the DTS Import Process is shown in the figure below Data Transfer System Import E a a oj xj Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name v gt Description J Save changes to this DTS package Select data source f Specify import file name amp Note Build a connection string met Ese The Data Transfer System DTS allows you g to import data from external sources such as text files excel spreadsheets MS Access E PAP EAT and other databases through a three to four step process Name Value In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations Cancel i In most cases the DTS Import procedure will include four steps e Data Source Specify the source file and package options e Data Mapping Map source fields to destination fields e Station Related Settings Specify projection system and units for the new stations being imported e Data Validation Validate the source data and provides an error analysis report Each step will appear in a new window After specifying the required settings in each step click the Next g
491. t a surface for the draped map 10 3 5 Surfaces Display Settings The 3D Explorer supports Surfer Grid GRD files to be used as surfaces in the 3D project Common surfaces may be a contour map of ground surface elevations or a water table contour map Once a surface is loaded there is an option to drape a site map to the surface for a truly 3D perspective 326 gt gt gt Stay on top e 9 8 Cross Sections Data ES Ad Level for bitmap E Surface to bind Map jv Live Update Apply Chapter 10 HydroGeo Analyst 3D Explorer ef Default Settings n Na WBH Project The Surfaces category contains a list of the surfaces El Anis A B Site maps used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings nf VBX3D4 for each individual surface O g Be Cross Sections Data To load a surface into the project select File Import HE AA 2 3 BB Surface from the main menu The following settings E cc are available for surfaces aie e Name sets the surface name e Visible shows hides the surface e Color selects a color for the surface e View selects a style for the surface choose from wire or solid e Semitransparent sets the surface image as semi transparent e Color from palette assigns colors from a palette based on the surface value e g elevation gw elevation etc Setting Name Misible O O OOOO o PIE View Semitransparent P Color from palette Mikes grd s
492. t and summarize option for the field You may choose from e Sum e Count e Average e Max e Min e Standard Deviation e Standard Deviation Population e Variance e Variance Population e VarName modify the caption for the variable name e Format modify the display format for the field e Visible show hide the field Click OK when you are finished to return to the Properties dialog Calculated Fields With the crosstab query component you can easily add custom calculated fields at runtime that apply a formula to a field or combine and manipulate one or more fields Click on the Add Calculated Field button to create a calculated data field You can access calculated data fields properties by right clicking on the field in the Data area and selecting properties from the pop up menu Calculated Data Field Properties q x Caption calculated field Yar ame Formula Format 0 00 S 4 Visible Cancel Crosstab Queries 219 220 Caption modify the caption for the calculated field VarName modify the caption for the variable name Formula define a formula Format modify the display format for the field Visible show hide the field Click OK when you are finished to return to the Properties dialog Field Preferences You can further customize the fields in the crosstab report under the Fields property page Select the Field tab and the following properties will be displayed x General Time Serie
493. t can be quite time consuming to enter data manually If the source data is available in a text file spreadsheet or database it is much more efficient to import the data into the new HydroGeo Analyst project This option is explained in the next section 2 2 2 Importing Data using the Data Transfer System DTS 40 HydroGeo Analyst allows data to be imported from a variety of sources using the Data Transfer System DTS A few examples are provided below Example Importing Stations from an Excel File The following example demonstrates how to import data using the DTS You will import some additional borehole stations to the Sample project The DTS will be briefly covered in this section for more details on this feature please see Chapter 6 Importing Data using the DTS Chapter 2 Getting Started Project gt Import gt Data from the main menu This will load the Data Transfer System as shown below Data Transfer System Import g E E Of x Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name v x Description J Save changes to this DTS package Select data source Specify import file name E Note Build a connection string The Data Transfer System DTS allows you Z to import data from external sources such as text files excel spreadsheets MS Access Dala ssc dalale and other databases through a three to four step process Name Value In th
494. t series on the plot This is useful for quickly identifying which values exceed the standard When you load the options for standards the following dialog will appear Click on the Add button to add a standard value and select a field that contains the standard value Click on the Delete button to remove existing list items from the list When you are finished click on the Close button The new standards will appear as a plot series under the Plots node in the tree You can then modify the line symbol and label properties as shown below Settings Mapping Name test c EE Visible True Width 1 Color MA Red Style Solid El Marker Visible False Font Microsoft Sans Serif 8pt Font color Wl Black Symbol Triangle Color MA Blue Size 4 4 Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Chapter 14 Plotting Visible show hide the markers Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify the color Size Set the size of the markers along the line 14 3 Plot Settings Once a plot is selected and visible there are several settings that can be modified These settings are sorted into several groups explained below 14 3 1 General Series Settings Plot Settings Some of the most frequently used general plot settings are available when you right mouse click on a plot window
495. t should then appear in the main HGA window The first time the project loads the settings for User Access Management will be presented As the creator of the new project you will have Administrator rights where you can add remove users and assign access rights For more details on this feature please see User Access Level Management on page 135 You may return to the Project Manager settings window at any time 1f you need to modify any of the project settings defined above To do so select Project Properties from the main menu of HydroGeo Analyst This is explained in the following section 4 2 4 Modifying Project Properties Once a project is created there are certain settings and properties that may be modified some critical settings may be available as read only 156 Chapter 4 Project Manager To view the project properties select Project Properties from the main menu of HydroGeo Analyst In this menu there are two options Connectivity and Miscellaneous Settings Connectivity This option allows you to check the database connection settings for the current project If the connection is lost or the server is modified the connectivity settings can be redefined in the dialog shown below Set Connectivity a 4 E E xl Select Server and Database This dialog displays the server and database hosting your data Although the dialog allows all power users to modify the connectivity settings great car
496. t the settings Make sure the Visible box 1s checked and click OK to apply the renderer Label Renderer This renderer allows you to display various labels for the selected layer stations or contour map for example 246 Chapter 8 Map Manager Name Field Mame Propert e Allow Duplicates Font W Spline Text Sample Text Jw Flip OF Cancel Enter the Name for the renderer and choose the Field Name which will be displayed as a label Customize the settings as desired Click OK to accept the settings Make sure the Visible box 1s checked and click OK to apply the renderer You can add delete and edit different renderers using the toolbar located under the renderer list x 4t Lt Background Symbo OK Cancel H Help The renderer may also apply a background to the data symbols this background can be modified using the standard Point Style dialog Create Thematic Map This menu item allows the user to create a thematic map for any of the active Map Layers containing numeric data A thematic map shows the spatial distribution of one or more specific data values in the form of a Pie or Bar chart Thematic Maps can only be drawn on layers that contain data such as stations contour maps etc They are not applicable to annotation layers A common example of the applications for a thematic map would be displaying the distributions of multiple chemicals To create a Th
497. t the top of the window 5 4 4 Exporting the current template as a Database template Any user template can also be exported to a database template This feature allows you to modify the database schema and save it for future use To export the selected user template to a database template click on the Save as a database template button A dialog will appear prompting for a template name and description Once a name is provided for the new template all changes will be saved to this template The template will be saved with the extension XML and the corresponding lists and templates will be saved in an MDB file The Templates are saved in the folder Program Files HGAnalyst Templates In addition to the current database schema the following entities are saved to the database template upon exporting e Report templates e BHLP templates e Plot templates e User defined Soil Classification Systems SCS Lists defined in the List Editor e Project Level Security Document PLSD defined with the User Access Management Managing Templates 175 176 Chapter 5 Template Manager The Data Transfer System The Data Transfer System DTS 1s a flexible tool used for importing and exporting data into and out of a HydroGeo Analyst project When starting a new project it may be necessary to import data from other sources into the HG Analyst database Data may exist in such sources as Text Files MS Excel or other spreadsheets
498. t with the Edit Paste command Cut The Cut command moves the selected item to the Clipboard Use cut to move objects to a different grid or to move the selected values to another application Data may be cut from a grid cell or from a text box the entire record may not be cut with one operation Cut deletes the selected object after copying it to the clipboard The contents of the clipboard can be inserted into a grid with the Edit Paste command Paste The Paste command copies the Clipboard contents into the selected grid cell If no field is selected then this menu item will be inactive In addition if there is no data in the Windows clipboard then this menu item will be inactive Data may be pasted into a grid cell or a text box An entire record may not be pasted in a single operation Find This menu item loads the Find window with an option to search for records which satisfy the specified criteria The Find window is shown below Find Find What Eind Hest Cancel Look In id Match ny Part of Field mee Search Down Match Case H Help When the Find window is loaded the value in the current grid cell receiving the focus will be identified in the Find What field Beside Look In select from one of the columns in the current grid All columns which appear in the current grid will be available for selection HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 107 3 2 3 View 108 Beside Match
499. tab table from the grid Enter the following information in this grid For the ScreenID 1 from the combo box In the Date column type 5 5 2004 In the Time column type 1 00 00 PM In the Depth to Water Level m column Data Management 39 type 15 33 Once the data has been entered Record gt Post from the main menu or press the Ef Post button in the toolbar to save the data The remaining fields can be left blank Your table should be similar to that shown in the figure below HydroGeo Analyst Sample__ D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects S ample_1 Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help aesz OR XBaAl RGB 21203120038 ini E a Station Groups a Station List a Data Query Station Data Laie Data Category e Select Station lt coor m Y coor m Elevation m TOC m a Station Data Monitoring Event y OW m m m rn 535915 00000001 4813214 99999 lt 340 5 341 5 S Description PA Descrip Chemistry_Sample Chemistry_Results Field Props Water Level ell Constructior a date time depth_to_water_level Dry_indicator_ Yes_No S Soil Testing 2 m E Soil Sampling 5 5 04 1 00 00 15 33 fs Monitoring Event S Mining Exploratio S Geophysics S Well History Queries Maps Cross Sections Mi Sample Reports 3D Views a Borehole Logs Ke Well History As demonstrated here i
500. tabase fields now support images in all data categories Data Transfer System DTS e Source files require only the Station names It is no longer necessary to add numeric station ID s to each record in your source table e A number of map projection systems have been added Map Manager e Improved options for contouring including user defined contour intervals e Added Kriging and Inverse Distance interpolation methods for creating contour maps and gridded data sets e A number of map projection systems have been added Cross Section Editor e You can now display gridlines to aid in the interpretation e Dummy wells can be displayed at intersecting cross sections to aid in your cross sectional interpretations e When printing a cross section a legend for the cross section wells can now be displayed HGA 3D Explorer e You may display isolines contour lines for any surface that is included in the 3D project e You may specify a cut off for upper and lower contour values e You may change the color from palette for surfaces Query Builder e You may display map ready queries in the project s projection system When such queries are executed X and Y coordinates are displayed in the current projection system Borehole Log Plotter e Itis now possible to hide the well casing above ground surface 1 e display a flush mount well casing e Improved reporting features including displaying of borehole names in report What s New in Hy
501. tabase will be listed at the bottom the project list is read only and displayed in order to assist you to decide if the selected database can be safely deleted Click on the gt button to delete the selected database Click on the button to compress the file size of the database to save disk space After the database has been compressed you may continue to work with it NOTE Use caution when deleting databases since the data cannot be recovered once deleted and there is no undo option unless you have taken a backup Deleting a database does not remove all the files that are related to the projects using the deleted database NOTE Databases may be removed only from the WHI MSDE instance Databases from other instances of MSDE or on a SQL Server cannot be removed through HGA HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 119 3 2 7 Help Contents Displays the HydroGeo Analyst On line Help About Displays the HydroGeo Analyst Info dialog This contains the HydroGeo Analyst version number and information on how to contact Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc 120 Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst HydroGeo Analyst Components 3 3 Template Manager 3 3 1 Purpose The Template Manager provides the tools to modify the HydroGeo Analyst database structure and define user level views 3 3 2 General Description The Template Manager captures the schema of the database and displays database and user settings The following features are a
502. tails Crosstab reports see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries for more details 199 e 3D plume projects see Chapter 3 3D Interpolation for more details e Charts see Chapter 14 Adding Plots for more details e Customized Reports see Chapter 11 Creating Reports based on a Data Query for more details To create a Data Query select the Data Query radio button from the upper left section of the Query Builder window Then define the necessary conditions generate the SQL statement and execute the query Once the query has been created and saved the query will appear as a new node in the project browser under the Queries node For more information on how to build a Data Query see Data Query Example on page 200 7 2 2 Station Group Queries Station Group Queries provide the foundations for new Station Groups these queries can be built and executed for the purpose of organizing the stations into specialized groups To create a Station Group Query select this option from the upper left section of the Query Builder window Then define the necessary conditions generate the SQL statement and execute the query Once the query has been created and saved the query will appear as a new node in the project browser under the Station Groups node NOTE Station Group Queries do not have options for modifying the display fields or advanced grouping options For more information on how to build a Station Group Query see Station Gro
503. ted The Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is used to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access NOTE HG Analyst currently supports only a Microsoft OLE DB provider for MS SQL Server as specified in the Provider tab Use the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box to specify where your data is located and how to connect to 1t using an OLE DB provider The connection information can be represented using a common string format Note that the fields displayed on this tab depend upon the OLE DB Provider selected For example if you select the OLE DB Provider for Oracle the Connection tab displays fields for the server name and login If you select the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server then the server name type of authentication and database must be entered In the Connection tab there will be options to specify the server and database settings 1 Select or enter a server name Choose a server from the Server list at the top of the dialog The list will display all computers on the LAN that Using the Project Manager 149 150 Se e S have MS SQL Server 2000 support If the current machine is not networked then the list will display the name for the current computer provided the WHI MSDE instance is installed 2 Enter information to log on to the server If the selected server requires security validation enter the windows login information user name an
504. tement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string 1s invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the E Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string e Press the Save button to save the query e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the figure below Creating Queries 205 ES Query Builder of Xx xaa Sa C Station Group Query Data Query Design SQL View Preview Select a Query SELECT t0 id AS id t0 x as x t0 y as y tO name as name FROM Station as t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON t0 1D PStation SID LEFT JOIN lithology 45 t1 ON t0 id t1 Station WHERE t1 FROM_ gt 30 AND bedrock 30 7 t1 soil Limestone AND PStation ID 75 Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration y name 100010 80 5575320604263 43 4821142326773 BH 010 as 100011 80 5616076993998 43 4751191676727 BH 011 eee 100013 80 5613306964769 43 4812779610142 BH 013 E Well History 100019 80 5459026865231 43 4787262381272 BH 019 User Category Source Condition Project j Close Help Category User Rows 4 Time 0 0 0 80 You will
505. thE rtity Canti aee E eo A Description Depth ees DataField Depth jelete Entity Please Choose an Entity IrageE nity Ea OF Cancel Adding a Text Entity will allow you to display text in the column such as descriptions or numeric values An Image Entity will allow you to display a graphical representation such as an image photo or formation pattern in addition to text In the Settings frame select the field that contains the appropriate information for the entity you have chosen DataTable 64 in E log E DepthEntity Caption Depth Description Depth El TestEntity Caption Text Description Text DataF eld Value Settings The Depth Point based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Depth node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Columns 401 BHLP Settings l xj Depth e visible Header Color Column width 75 E Image Description H E Plot e Visible e Visible Draw Mode Tiled Text Font ENN lept A ES Depth width pixels fo H lai Fam HE Interval E E Depth Height pixels fio Horizontal Alignment Right id ES Depth Show Hint Iw En Vertical Alignment Bottorn Apply OF Cancel The Depth frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible chec
506. the result of a well formed query that contains sufficient information If a GIS layer is created using selected stations from any station group elevation and top of casings will be added to the layer Any query that has an ID station id x and y coordinates for the stations in addition to any number of columns displaying desired data can be displayed on a map Such queries should be created using the Query Builder with the Map Ready option selected HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 111 The GIS layer will be created with the same name as the station group or the query If there is an existing layer with the same name you will be prompted to overwrite the existing layer with the new data refresh the layer or cancel the operation When displaying stations from the Stations List grid you have the option of selecting one or more stations to be displayed on the map If no records are selected but the cursor is located within the Stations List grid then all displayed records will be included on the map For more details on the Map Manager please see Chapter 8 Map Manager 3 2 5 Settings The Settings menu item provides options for modifying various HG Analyst project and component properties Each menu item is described below Template Manager The Template Manager provides options for modifying the database settings The B2 button in the toolbar can also be used to load the Template Manager For more details please see Chapte
507. the DTS is that of grouping new stations as desired The DTS lists all station groups available for the project All newly imported stations will be added to the Project station group by default If selected these stations will also be inserted in one or more of the station groups listed in this tab You can also enter a name of a new station group in the last row and the stations will be inserted to this new group if desired Duplicate Stations Since Stations can use an ID as the unique identifier the DTS allows you to store stations with duplicate names in your database Duplicate Station names are common in larger projects that may involve stations from various sites If you attempt to import duplicate station names or import a station name which duplicates one already existing in the database the DTS will present the following interface Importing Data using the DTS 189 190 Preferences for Stations with Conflicting Names E E x Stations in Source Choose the Matching Station from the Destination Table All Stations y Filter Name y y BHT a Operation name x y Fe Match ID Name X Y Zone Append Y BHE 535646 83 4813320 23 2 153 BH11 80 56553 43 47207 Reject Y BH 536892 4813306 3 Update y BH8 536420 15 4813671 51 3 Append y BH9 537173 5 48139643 2 Update y BH10 535369 6 48147391 Update y BH11 535141 1 4813116 5 3 Update y BH12 536309 5 4814708 3 Append y BH13 536267 7
508. the combo box select the Code Page that should be used for the shape files in your map project The Map Manager provides several ISO standards For a complete list of which standard you should select based on your language and regional settings please see Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes on page 469 NOTE This option is available for new shapes files only existing shape files cannot be converted Click OK when you are finished 8 2 8 Help Contents Contains the contents of the Map Manager help 8 3 Defining a Cross Section Line Use the Map Manager to define the locations of cross section lines which can then be interpreted in the Cross Section editor To do this follow the steps below e In the Map Manager open an existing map project or create a new map project e Select a HydroGeo Analyst data layer 1 e station data and ensure this is visible and active selected If you do not have such a layer you may create one based on station groups that are available in your HydroGeo Analyst project To do this use the Layer gt Load HG Analyst Data option to select a station group The Map Manager creates a layer with stations that are available in the group 270 Chapter 8 Map Manager e Zoom in to the area of interest optional e Click the gg amp Cross Section Line button at the right end of the toolbar or select Tools Define Cross Section Line from the Main Menu e Place the mouse cursor at the starting point
509. the data Data Transfer System Import OF x Step 4 Data Validation Errors Warnings ErrorlD_ Description Field Name of records Preview X Y ne Latitude 1 GB01 80 554728761 7745 2 GB02 80 555419821155 3 GB03 80 5563705286688 4 GBO4 80 5579316744066 5 GB05 80 5592272673159 6 GB06 80 5605248334986 7 GB07 80 5616525616792 Note 8 GB08 80 5635559603042 f j 9 GB09 80 564939432078 This step allows you to accept reject 10 GB10 BO 5660664890569 records with warnings by selecting the 11 GB11 80 5668473471792 warning message in the Errors Warnings 12 GB12 80 5545485331505 grid Records with errors must be rejected to 13 GB13 80 5557312812136 activate the importing process 14 GB14 80 5565262842728 You can also select one or more records in 15 GB15 80 5578342692123 the preview table and exclude them from 5 ae one importing into your database 18 GB18 80 5619747219437 19 GB19 80 56329379537 74 X E Ero O Waring Y X lt Back Import Cancel EJ Help The data is checked against three conditions namely e Proper Station Locations e Specified conditions for each field if any e Data type compatibility NOTE All coordinates in the database are stored in latitude longitude format regardless of the projection system in the source file and project The Preview in this window displays the converted station co ordinates
510. the following info Screen ID 1 Screen from 15 to 30 m 0 3 m diameter Plastic material Slot Number 20 Next enter the Annular Fill information Annular Fill table from the grid You will be prompted to save the changes Yes For this well define the following info Data Management 37 sO ft Annular Seal Concrete to fB Annular Seal Bentonite Filter pack Peastone Once the data has been entered Record gt Post from the main menu or press the 4 Post button in the toolbar to save the data The grid should appear similar to the one shown below i HydroGeo Analyst Sample__ D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects S ample_1 Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help aez SP t XxXBaAl PROB 2 BOEl 8 lin wi Station Groups Station List A Data Query Station Data Project Data Category 93 Station Data CEEI 7 Select Station X coor m Y coor m Elevation m TOC m Queries BH1 535130 4814200 330 331 Maps il Cross Sections Drilling Protocol Casing Screen Annular Fill Monitoring Points filling_volume Description m Reports 3D Views Borehole Logs l 1 00 Annular seal Concrete i gt 1 00 8 00 Annular seal Bentonite E 8 00 13 00 Backfill Cuttings em 13 00 15 00 Annular seal Clay Ez Filter pack Pea Stone oc 9 Station Data ID 201271 name filling_volume
511. ting Line Provides the option to draw a line This option is only available if a line shape file layer is selected and set for editing Point Provides the option to add points to the map layer This option is only available if a Chapter 8 Map Manager point shape file layer is selected and set for editing Text Provides the option to add text labels to a map layer This option is only available if a text layer SHP is selected and set for editing Information Provides a dialog containing information about the selected station or other objects such as contour lines an example is shown below Info Window a xl Rec Ho 31 E ale ee ee PID 31 NAME 6831 ELEVATION 346 a TOC 347 E aa Save Close H Help To load the Information dialog e Select a layer containing HG Analyst station data e Select Information from the Tools menu or click on the Information button in the toolbar e Click once on any station within the selected layer This window will display Station ID Name Elevation TOC and any other fields depending on the layer type If there are stations that share the same ID and are hidden behind the selected station then the scroll arrow buttons in the lower left corner can be used to view the information for other stations NOTE The information tool can only be used on shape layers that are visible and active Measure Provides an option to measure distances on the map w
512. tions in a group are displayed a number of operations can be applied based on the selection For example loading a station group and then selecting the Display on Map option from the Record menu activates the Map Manager component and automatically creates a GIS layer containing all stations from this group Data Categories The tables in a HydroGeo Analyst database can be organized into a logical grouping by linking them to any one of the provided data categories HydroGeo Analyst provides nine data categories eight of which reflect the most common data categories found for environmental data A ninth category User Defined Category can be renamed as appropriate and used accordingly HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts 91 92 The Station Data categories can be accessed from two locations e From the Project Browser expand the Station Data node OR e From the main window select the Station Data tab and expand the Data Category combo box ensure that one or more stations are selected in the Station List tab Each of these options is displayed in the figure below P i HydroGeo Analyst Demo_YGW Aschalew HGA_Projects Demo_Y GW roject Edit View Record Settings Tools Help Bar OPA XRA OB B0 0 I2ad030 wa Station Groups B Station List amp Data Query Station Data E E E a Haa Data Category ta Boreholes Description y Select Station X coor m Yor i Ele r
513. tions or deleting existing vertices To draw model layers follow the directions below e Activate the Model Interpretation Layer in the Layer Manager e Select the Line draw button from the toolbar As soon as this option is selected the following Model Layers dialog will appear Select Model Line Top of Layer 1 Topography Topography Layer O Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquifer 0 Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer ao O Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquifer A DK Cancel H Help In this dialog choose the desired model layer by selecting the radio button from the first column in this grid Each model layer may be selected and assigned only once Interpretation layers that are already drawn in the cross section are colored in orange and are not selectable Click OK to continue e Place the mouse cursor at the left boundary at the desired depth of the intended model layer when the mouse cursor becomes close enough to the boundary line the cursor will snap to the boundary e Click once on the left boundary to add a vertex at this location and start the line e Slowly move the mouse cursor to the right across the cross section to the interval in the first station which represents the model layer When the cursor Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 301 is within the specified buffer distance from the station s lithology interval snapping will be activated e With a left mouse
514. to proceed to Step 3 of the DTS The next window is the Station Related Settings In here select the Projection Type and Units for the station coordinates in the source file 44 Chapter 2 Getting Started Data Transfer System Import 1983 UTM Zone 17N _ o o e MU For this example there is no need to change the projection since the station coordinates in the source are in the same projection system as the one defined for the project This step also allow you to specify the destination station group Next to proceed to the last step of the DTS The last step of the DTS is the Data Validation window and this provides a preview of the data to be imported Errors or warnings if any will be listed along with the data Data Management 45 46 Data Transfer System Import OF x Step 4 Data Validation Errors arnings Description Field Name Preview XK Y Latitude 7 BHG 80 5592724714619 8 BH 80 5438789290283 9 BH8 80 5496881 242797 10 BHI 80 54035380561 21 11 8H10 80 5626078477601 12 BH11 80 5655381650221 13 BH12 80 5509871345989 Note 14 BH13 80 5516285077133 o 15 BH14 80 5576698954446 This step allows you to accept reject 16 BH15 80 5672792095427 records with warnings by selecting the 17 BH16 80 5540966339337 warning message in the Errors Warnings 18 BH17 80 5527393290289 grid Records with errors must be rejected to 19 BH18
515. tor 12 Borehole Log Plotter The Borehole Log Plotter BHLP is a tool that can be used to display detailed information pertaining to a well borehole Information related to a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes e Lithology information for each formation e Description of the geologic formation e The depth and or elevation of each layer e Well construction details casing screens annular fill e Charts that display one or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc In a typical borehole log report there may be one or more instances of the items listed above The number of columns and their order of display is flexible and can be set at the time of designing the borehole log plot and edited at any point thereafter Borehole log plots can be created for one or more boreholes at once based on a desired borehole log plot design Once the design is acceptable a borehole log report can be generated for any or all boreholes in the selection through the use of the Report Editor Borehole log reports once generated can be exported to various formats including HTML RTF PDF that are supported by the Report Editor The borehole log plotter can also be used as a data entry assistant in HydroGeo Analyst by displaying well construction details as data is entered in tables that are rel
516. truction ell Co tio Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Well Construction Horizontal Align Center Vertical Align Center Font Font Angle 0 Font Escape Angle O Y O P O O Close Export Y Print Y Help 12 3 3 Add Plot Columns To add a plot column to your BHLP right click on the Design node and add a Plot column Once the Plot column has been added the Plot Series options must be defined 416 Chapter 12 Borehole Log Plotter Add Plot Series To add a plot series right click on the Plot column in the Design tree Alternately you can click on the Add button on toolbar after having highlighted Plot in the Design tree Select the Add Plot Series option as shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample 2 ioj x Select Station m r m Elevation m TOC m BH1 537381 50 481 2036 33 347 00 348 00 El ES Design E ES Lithology Lithology Well Construction E LithologyEntities H E Well Construction Save Save s Coarse Gravel Add Group Add Eolumn Add Plot Series Delete Visible E Header Text Horizont Show Settings Vertical Align Font Font Angle 0 Font Escape Angle O Gravel 30 PI 30 Close Expat Y Pint Y E Help The Add a Plot Series window will open as shown in the following screenshot Add a Plot Series J x Plot Seres Typ f Depth Interval Plot Propertie Label Description
517. ts and specify the SCS soil settings for the project The project wizard is designed in a sequential fashion after defining the necessary inputs in each window press the Next gt button to proceed The Next button will only become activated after the necessary fields have been defined These required fields are indicated by an asterisk Using the Project Manager 145 4 2 1 Step 1 Set Database Environment 146 The Set Database Environment window shown below is the first step in the Project Wizard and provides the controls needed to select a MS SQL Server and create select a database for the new project iol xi Step 1 Set Database Environment e Select Server and Database SAY The Project Manager allows you Server to create a database for your J Windows NT Integrated Authorization abe oar a ceda zo aoe User Name sa Lp In this first step select a SQL Password Server on which your project s database will be created and Database SS A v select create the database on ESE SS Se Ss a A e Sus that server Build Connection String F HydroGeo Analyst requires a MS SQL server to host the project database A server can be any computer on your network which has MS SQL Server 2000 installed or an installation of WHI MSDE Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine installed The WHI MSDE can be installed on your hard drive as part of the installation process If the WHI MSDE is installed
518. tton they return to the default state white This feature allows you to easily distinguish between permanent changes and the recent ones that have not yet been saved to the database Once you are finished remember to save the new data The stations should now appear in the Station List similar to the image shown below HydroGeo Analyst Sample__ D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects S ample_ Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help BAA Rh xXBalROCh 21803 Sa Olin Elg Station Groups 44 Project LES Station Data 7 m m Queries 535130 4814200 Maps 535780 4813651 i Cross Sections 535111 4813600 E Reports 538544 4814890 3D Views Praha 533866 4811787 6 13 Borehole Logs 535915 4813215 Station List wa Data Query Station Data 9 Station Data As each station is added to the database 1t 1s assigned a unique station ID value The station ID for the selected station can be seen in the task bar in the Station List window an example is circled above for station OW 1 the station ID is 6 The station ID is the primary key 1t is required in all source tables during import so that data can be Chapter 2 Getting Started matched to the appropriate station If your source tables do not contain station ID s you may use the station names and HGA will map the data to the appropriate station ID Next you will enter additional data for one of the new stations
519. uating visualizing and modeling natural attenuation processes AquiferTest Pro 18 the most complete and easy to use software package for graphical analysis and reporting of pumping test and slug test data analysis The software comes with a comprehensive selection of built in solution methods for estimating transmissivity hydraulic conductivity and storage properties for confined unconfined leaky and fractured rock aquifers The Pro version now includes new forward predictive solutions which allow you to predict drawdown under a new set of stresses including the influence of multiple pumping wells barrier recharge boundaries and well effects Flowpath II 18 a popular two dimensional steady state groundwater flow pathline and contaminant transport model that computes hydraulic heads pathlines travel times velocities water balances and contaminant concentrations approved by the US EPA and recommended by the UK Environmental Agency At Waterloo Hydrogeologic we are continually developing new modeling and visualization applications for the environmental professionals For more information please contact us Introduction to HydroGeo Analyst HydroGeo Analyst is the most comprehensive and yet easy to use environmental data management system providing data validation analysis and visualization The HydroGeo Analyst package integrates a list of flexible and customizable database structures used around the world com
520. uding e Comma separated text file CSV Chapter 3 Using HydroGeo Analyst e Extensible Markup Language XML e MS Access Database MDB ESRI Shape file SHP e Hypertext Markup Language HTM All or part of the data currently displayed in a grid can be exported To export selected data from a grid the data must first be selected Data selection can be performed by either selecting desired rows or using the tools provided in HydroGeo Analyst These tools include those that are used to filter data such as Filter By Selection and Hide selected rows The selected data can then be exported by either selecting the Export option from the Project menu or by right clicking in the grid and selecting the Export pop up menu item Once the file dialog appears the desired export destination can be selected by choosing one of the file types corresponding to the supported destination listed earlier in this section Properties This menu item will load a window displaying the properties for the current project Once a project is created there are options to modify some of the project settings These are explained below Connectivity This option allows you to check the database connection settings for the current project If the connection is lost or the server is modified the connectivity settings can be redefined in the dialog shown below Set Connectivity E x e Select Server and Database
521. ue identifier in source tables in order to map data to the correct stations When you import stations and only the Station Name is mapped the following confirmation message will appear before Step 3 in the DTS Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System CA Station ID not currently mapped is used to uniquely identify stations in HGA 2 Would you like to use Station Names as unique identifiers For this transaction You will be prompted for action if stations with same names exist in the database When importing additional data from child tables and the source files contain only the station names the DTS will search for the appropriate Station IDs in the station table based on station names and map the data to appropriate stations In the case where there are duplicate station names please see the explanation listed in Duplicate Stations on page 189 Import Order NOTE When importing be sure to import data for the parent tables before the child ones For example Stations must be present in the database before you can import chemistry or lithology data for these stations Likewise for soil or groundwater chemistry data you must first define or import the Sys_Sample_codes in the parent table then run through the DTS again to import the sample results into the correct fields How to Map Fields Follow the directions below to map fields in the source table to a destination table Select the Destination Category from t
522. ugh the project domain click the Vertical button to open the Slice Properties window as shown in the following figure A yellow outline of the vertical slice will appear in the Display Screen ertical Slice Properties E ial 481 4493 0 Te 481 4493 0 both sliders synchronized The Slice type options define the planar orientation of the slice e Vertical XZ refers to the plane along the X axis extending through the entire depth of the site e Vertical YZ refers to the plane along the Y axis extending through the entire depth of the site For a Vertical XZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the Y axis and the Y axis values are displayed in the fields labelled Y1 and Y2 Alternately a Y axis value can be typed directly into this field Creating Slices and Cross Sections 341 For a Vertical YZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the X axis and the X axis value is displayed in the field labelled X1 and X2 Alternately an X axis value can be typed directly into this field When the desired location for the vertical slice has been defined click the Close button to save the vertical slice type and location The new vertical slice will appear in the Surfaces window 10 4 2 Creating a Horizontal Slice To create a horizontal slice through the domain click the Horizontal button to open a Horizontal slice properties window as shown below A yellow outline of the horizontal slice will ap
523. ults button and enter a filename for your exported data Generate QC Results 433 434 Chapter 13 Quality Control Plotting The plotting component in HydroGeo Analyst allows users to create hydrochemistry and statistical plots of data stored in the HydroGeo Analyst database The plotting provides the following features Create Time Series X Y plots using data from data queries Add legends and data marker labels to plots Add best fit trend formula or statistical lines to the plot Interact with plots and display multiple plot windows in the viewer window simultaneously Display non detect uncertainty or detection limits on the plot as lines or symbols Display one or more water quality standard values as a line or symbol for quick detection of samples that exceed the standards Define data series ranges and modify display properties for different data ranges e g define a data range where the data exceeds the water quality standard values and assign unique symbol line and display properties for this data Select fields for plot grouping or data series grouping Modify display properties including axis labels symbols legends and intervals Print plots to a single or multiple pages Save plot settings as templates for re use Export plots to graphics format Copy plots to Windows clipboard 435 14 1 About the Interface Once you have created and selected a data query you may create a plot with the data set Th
524. ults in the database e A given layer may not be allowed to intersect a given station more than twice When this rule is violated HGA will consider the two top most intersection points as defining the layer e All layers in a cross section must be uniquely identified by the layer name HGA may pick the top most layer and ignore all other layers with the same name e If a station is removed from a cross section related saved interpretations contacts are removed as long as this station is not involved in any other cross sections e Ifa layer is deleted from a cross section all related interpretations contacts are removed from all stations that are involved in the cross section as long as this layer does not appear in another cross section for any of the stations involved in the current cross section e Ifa given well appears in more than one cross section interpretation results are updated with interpretations from the cross section that is last updated Model Layers Before drawing model layers the model layer attributes must first be defined in the dialog shown below Model layers can be added deleted or edited in this dialog 292 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Top of Layer 1 Topography Topography Layer oo Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquifer Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer HA a Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquifer A P x e Save Cancel 53 Help O In the Model Layer
525. umerous stations and define the basic attributes for each station HydroGeo Analyst Demo_ VGW Aschalew HGA_Projects Demo_VGW Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help JeeP ShtxBaAl RGB B BOMSs 2090890 ai Station Groups wi Project wi Boreholes EE roe a Monitoring Wells 535320 4814610 49999949 0 Ez Station Data Ew 535305 4814339 39999898 0 El Description X 535504 7 4814750 19999949 0 S Geologic Description 535472 4814704 69999949 0 E Well Construction W 535548 4 4814637 29999949 0 aes 535459 4 4814704 89999949 0 eden 535476 1000000 4814781 09999949 0 aie 535469 5 4814652 69999949 0 E Monitoring Event 7 535484 7 4814546 49999949 0 E Mining Exploration 535626 8 491 4652 99999949 0 Geophysics 7 535545 9 4814553 49999949 0 well History 5 535637 7 4814582 89999949 0 25 Queries 7 535800 4814637 49999949 0 H E Maps 535674 6 4814799 99999949 0 M Cross Sections 535687 4 4814665 29999949 0 En 535390 4814741 89999949 0 H 4 Reports a 535577 4 4814477 09999949 0 H a 3D Views 535677 1 4814416 19999949 0 Bl Borehole Logs a 535584 5 4814299 99999949 0 535599 7 4814371 79999949 0 535492 9 4814477 19999949 0 535635 2 4814503 79999949 0 535588 4 4814667 29999949 0 9 Geologic Description 1 05 ID 5 HydroGeo Analyst Fundamental Concepts 93 Station Data Tab For a more detailed view of a single Station s attributes the Station Data tab
526. up Query Example on page 210 7 3 Creating Queries 7 3 1 Data Query Example 200 Follow the steps below to create a data query e If the Query Builder is not yet loaded select the Query Builder option from the Tools menu e Select Data Query as the type in the upper left corner of the window e In the toolbar click on the New button and the following window will appear Chapter 7 Queries Creating Queries New Query E f E x Hame Description OF Cancel E Help e Enter a Name for the new query e g TOC Exceeds 320m for this example and a Description optional e Click OK NOTE Query names should contain alphanumeric characters only Do not use characters such as lt gt 1 etc e In the lower left corner of the Query Builder window select the Source Conditions The options are Station Group Project and Database If Station Group is selected then a second combo box will become active From here select the appropriate station group to query If Project is selected then all stations in the current project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database e Expand the tree on the left side of the window Locate the desired data category table and field For this example select the Description category then the Location table and locate the TOC field An example is shown below 201 Query Builder T O
527. up the data by station name To do this Right click on Detail in the report design window as circled in the image above A pop up menu will appear Insert Group Header Footer A new Group Header and Group Footer will appear in the Report Designer window GroupHeader1 in the report design window e Properties button from the toolbar The Property Toolbox frame will appear as shown below Creating Reports with Charts 385 New Report E SS UPA A l E LOs EL RRR BERRES Deb Srp sree Heb A OS O OS A ON 14 REM E a El MainReport GroupHeader 1 H PageHeader H GroupHeader Hi H Hui nupun F EE Name Gi Hi d 1 H PageFooter Es a BackStyle O ddBKTrar CanGrow True CanShrink False TI URGE i U height KeepToge False NewColurr 0 None NewPage 0 None Repeat 0 None Underlayh False Visible True Locate the DataField entry in the Property Toolbox this 1s circled in the image above Expand the combo box beside DataField and select Name from the list If there are no fields available in the list type Name in this field By specifying this option the Report Editor will group the data by the station Name field The chart can now be added to the report GroupFooter1 in the report design window and enlarge the space allocated to this component see the design below The GroupFooter will contain the time series chart and as such there
528. ure properties such as font alignment etc for the template Once a report template is created it will be listed under the Reports node in the Project Browser of HydroGeo Analyst 11 6 2 Opening a Report Template 376 Report templates can be opened by double clicking on them in the Project Browser of HydroGeo Analyst A template can also be opened using the report editor directly by selecting the Open button from the Designer window s toolbar and setting the file filter to WTP Once a report template is opened it can be edited and saved Chapter 11 The Report Editor 11 6 3 Deleting a Report Template In HG Analyst right click on a report template in the project browser and select the Delete option from the menu to delete the template The selected template will be deleted both from the project browser as well as from storage 11 6 4 Setting a Report Template as Default Template To set a selected template as the default template right click on the template and select the Set as default option from the pop up menu in HydroGeo Analyst The selected template will be set as the default template Every time a new report is created the default template will be used to furnish the header and footer sections 11 7 Import Reports from MS Access The Report Editor allows you to import reports that are created in an MS Access 2000 database environment This may be useful in cases where you migrate existing data
529. urrently not supported e Multiple log runs is currently not supported When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step The next step is Data Mapping HydroGeo Analyst Main Menu Bar 99 100 Import LAS File TER Step 2 Data mapping SS SS y ae 7 Note Select Section Field 3 y Select Table Field gt The second step requires field r mapping from the source file to F Well E Description destination fields in ore or more Log Geologic Description HydroGeo Analyst database Parameter ell Construction tables ae Select one held from the gt Sod Sampling source file in the left frame E Monitoring Event gt Mining E xploration Map Select the appropriate gt Geophysics matching field from destination Well History ni the right Click on the Map button Mapped fields val then be added to the Preview grid at the botban af the window To remove the mapping for a selected field select the Destination Fields appropriate row in the grid then click on the Delete Mapping button Location Location Y resistviy_oh depth resishvity_oh resistivity net cme geo The next step in the data transfer operation is to match a source table with a destination table You may map the entire LAS file including the Well Section or just downhole parameters if you do not include the well section you must have the appropriate station
530. used for breaking the vertex link between two or more polygons or lines This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected For more information see Link Vertex on page 280 Zoom In option is used to zoom in on an area of the cross section defined by a rectangle Zoom Out option is used to zoom out from the current cross section view Pan button allows the user to pan the current view left right up or down Full Extent button restores the cross section view to the full extents of the Cross Section s coordinates Previous Extent button restores the cross section view to the previous zoom extent Next Extent button switches the cross section view to the next zoom extent Information button displays information for the selected station Moving the mouse cursor overtop of a station will display the information View 3D button loads selected cross section s into 3D Explorer Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor a View BHLP button loads a BHLP for the selected station 9 2 Description of Menu Items 9 2 1 File Save This menu item will save all current edits for the cross section to the current cross section project file VCP Close Closes the currently open cross section Export Model Layers This option allows you to export the model layer lines for all cross sections to XYZ text file format These files can in turn be used
531. ute To see desired data from a selected table e Select a Station Group from the combo box and any table from the Database Tables combo box e Pressthe Execute Query button at the bottom of the window and the grid will be populated with all records which satisfy this query For example select the Boreholes station group and view all Lithology data that belong to this group In addition through this interface you may delete all records from a selected table This is useful if you mistakenly import numerous records to the wrong table To delete records from a selected station group and table e Select a Station Group from the combo box and any table from the Database Tables combo box e Press the Execute Query button at the bottom of the window and the grid will be populated with all records which satisfy this query e Press the x Delete button 214 Chapter 7 Queries Note Use this feature with caution as records will be permanently deleted from your database 7 6 Exporting Query Results Data Query results may also be sent to the Map Manager or to a Report To load the results of a Data Query into a map project select the Record Display on Map menu option To load the Data Query results grid into the Report Manager see section 7 7 on page 215 below The data displayed in the grid may be exported to an external file or to the Report Manager Right mouse click on the grid and select Export Grid or use the m
532. utton Finalizing the Import Once you have removed or verified the errors Import button to import the data to the project After successfully importing the data a confirmation window will appear similar to the one shown below a O records were updated and 1 44 records were inserted 192 Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System If all desired data transfer operations are done the DTS can be closed by clicking on the Close button If however that is not the case the Back button can be selected to go back to previous tabs and specify a new data source and or table for importing To close the DTS and return to HG Analyst Close button at the bottom of the DTS window 6 2 Exporting Data using the DTS HydroGeo Analyst supports exporting data to other destinations in two ways e The first and more direct way of exporting data uses a gridded data format This option is available under the Project menu Export Grid The current active grid can be saved in CSV XML MDB SHP or HTM formats e The second method of exporting data allows data transfer from one or more selected tables to practically any OLE DB supported destination These destinations may include MS Access database SQL Server database Oracle databases and many others A dialog similar to that used for importing data into HG Analyst database is launched whenever this feature 1s requested To export data using the DTS select the menu option Project
533. utton to close the polygon the Geology Layer Pattern window will appear Geology Layer Pattern Ea Mame Z Description Pattern OK Cancel 53 Help In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the layer a brief Description and select a soil Pattern If the geologic layer you have just digitized in the current cross section has already been created you may select 1t from the combo box instead of typing a new name Click on the blank area beside Pattern to load the pattern options as shown in the following figure Interpreting and Viewing Cross Sections 79 Fill Patterns Select a pattern sand is located in the top right corner of this dialog OK OK once more The polygon will be filled with this pattern an example 1s shown below 05 LD Hilado _ SSS SS r Rasgos amio 1000 80 Chapter 2 Getting Started Repeat the same sequence of operations for other layers within the active cross section The result will be a layered structure of the geological domain The cross section may contain some gaps where polygons do not completely touch adjacent polygons this can be easily fixed by selecting a vertex on a polygon and using the pointer tool to re position the vertex Alternately gaps between polygons can be filled by using the Link Vertex option These options are explained in Chapter 9 Once a layer is created in one cross section 1t will be available for selection in all oth
534. vailable to all users Adding and deleting tables fields Altering the properties of each table and field Grouping tables under logical data categories Defining visibility of tables and or fields Defining user level table and or field names units and data formats where applicable Some of the features in the Template Manager are available only for database administrators referred to as Power Users in the context of HydroGeo Analyst These features include all operations that alter the database schema and table and field designs Features that are accessible only to Power Users include Adding deleting tables and or fields defining primary keys defining relationships between tables Save user templates as a new database schema structure Export user templates to a stand alone XML file Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users Rename fields add fields to data categories and modify the field formats All features that are available to all users For more details please refer to Chapter 5 Template Manager 3 4 List Editor The HydroGeo Analyst package includes a List Editor tool that provides the ability to create and customize lists for any field allowing for efficient and effective data entry A list in HydroGeo Analyst may be considered as a lookup table Template Manager 121 Linked Lists contain a specific list of values that may be used to supply a list of potential values for one
535. values when you define the min and max format you must select these values from a calendar 14 3 3 Data Series Settings Data Series Range settings can be accessed by right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Edit Range Settings from the pop up menu The following Series Settings dialog will appear Within quidelin 100 Text p Exceedences 120 r Fort Color Alignment y Custom Use Different Label Source Label Source V Include Post fix Post fix Exceedence Preview Tl Include Pre fix Pre fix Sample Preview Exceedence Min 0 Max 120 F KE cue 446 Chapter 14 Plotting On the left side of this dialog there is a list of available data series for the selected plot You may also Add Data Range series and specify Data Series options for this Series This is useful if you want to identify data on the plot that exceeds a guideline or standard value and assign unique symbol or label properties to this data set only e Click on the Add button to add a new range e Click on the x Delete button to delete the selected range When you add a new Range enter the Breaking Value this is the upper limit for the range For the example shown in the screenshot above there will be two ranges e Within guidelines Values 0 100 inclusive will have unique symbol and label properties e Exceedences Values greater than 100 to
536. vanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name SE Betresh Use connection string Connection string DEG D Pragram Filess HydroGeoBazesSam Build 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password T Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use Test Connection OF Cancel Help e Next you must select the initial catalog to use from the bottom of the Connection tab as shown in the figure below Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 461 E Data Link Properties Ed Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name a Betresh Use connection string Connection string DEG D Program Files HydroGeoBasesSam Build 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password l Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use D Program Files HydroG eoB ase 4nnular fill nevy final D Program Files HydroGeoB ase Annular fill new niulti D Program Files HydroG eoB ase Annular fill nevy riult cr D Program Files HydroGeoB ase drilling type D Program Files HydroGeoB ase open list D Program Files HudroGeoB ase ample_Stations m Help Cancel e Select the Excel file once more
537. ve any problems with your particular system configuration please make sure that you followed the installation instructions precisely If the problem is still unresolved contact your hardware experts Finally if you are still having trouble see the section in Preface on How to Contact Waterloo Hydrogeologic 1 3 2 Installation Please refer to the HGA_Dongle_Install_Guide pdf for details on the installation of HydroGeo Analyst This file can be found on your installation CD ROM or can be downloaded from the FTP site The following is a brief excerpt HydroGeo Analyst must be installed on your hard disk before you can start to use the software Please read the section on system requirements at the beginning of this section to ensure that your system meets the requirements before you start installing the software Place the CD into your CD ROM drive and the initial installation screen should load automatically Once loaded an installation interface with several different tabs will be presented Installing HydroGeo Analyst 11 Please take the time to explore the installation interface as there is information concerning other Waterloo Hydrogeologic products our worldwide distributors technical support consulting training and how to contact us From the Installation tab you may choose from the following two buttons e HydroGeo Analyst User s Manual e HydroGeo Analyst 3 0 Installation The User s Manual button will display a PDF
538. w e Select wells drilled later than 1995 and earlier than 2000 e Select wells with discharge over 250 gpm e Select boreholes deeper than 150 feet and penetrating a sandy gravel layer e Select boreholes with the overburden thickness more than 10 m Major Components 131 132 The Query Builder is capable of creating two types of queries e Station Group Queries Used to sort HydroGeo Analyst stations into logical groups e Data Queries Used for creating specialized reports or map layers For more details please refer to Chapter 7 Queries 5 Map Manager The Map Manager is an easy to use GIS tool for mapping HydroGeo Analyst station data The mapping component associated with HydroGeo Analyst is designed to provide a tool for overlaying and displaying site maps so that station data may be related to surficial base map features The Map Manager allows site maps to be imported from various formats including DXF BMP JPF GIF and ESRI Shape SHP files from other applications In addition to loading base maps the Map Manager tool also provides the following options e Georeference and import raster image maps e Create Annotation layers for drawing and labeling e Display Station Groups or Station Queries from the HydroGeo Analyst project as a Map Layer in the Map Project e Create contour maps of selected fields eg Elevation GW Elevation concentrations e Create Thematic Maps Bar and Pie Charts of selected fields
539. w borders and display volume estimation When Plume Browser tab is selected the following options will appear El Rotate Shit Light Position Time Plume Browser z gt ala Y Plume result_value i z z E Options A a x i style Colormap on Plane 0 Perini 100 veke Ta ave Colormap When the 3D project was created 3D Explorer will display the plume in the form of an isosurface by default The default isosurface value will be 5 of the maximum concentration value calculated as a result of the 3D Interpolation In the Plume combo box you may select the plume data field used for visualization you will recall that 3D projects supports multiple plumes for one or more contaminants In the Style combo box select the desired display element Select from Colormap on XY XZ or YZ planes or Isosurface The Visible checkbox shows hides the current plume browser display element To the right of these controls you will find a scroll bar that is used to animate the selected display element When a color map is selected the scroll bar Position is used Working with 3D Explorer 317 to slide the color map along the selected plane through the project s site domain from one side to the other or in the case of an XY color map from the top to the bottom When an Isosurface is selected the scroll bar is used to span through different isosurface Values or shells The O percent value represents the lowest
540. will adjust the image proportions to fit the frame even if it means distorting the picture Zoom will adjust the size of the picture until the entire image is visible in the frame and there is the least amount of unfilled space possible AnchorBottom Anchors bottom of vertical lines to section bottom x1 yl x2 y2 Specify the coordinates in pixels of the start and end of the line Shape Shape Specify which shape you wish to display rectangle ellipse or rounded rectangle Rich Text MaxLength Specifies the maximum number of characters a user can enter in the control The default for MaxLength is 0 indicating that the text is limited only by available system resources Any number greater than O indicates the maximum number of characters Frame CloseBorder Specify whether or not the bottom border line will be displayed if the frame spans across multiple pages Sub Report ReportName Sets gets name for the sub report Chapter 11 The Report Editor Page Break Enabled Allows you to enable or disable the page break OLE PictureAlignment Set the alignment of the contents within the frame Barcode BarWidth Set the width of the thinnest line in the code Caption In barcode the caption is the set of symbols alphanumeric you want to code Direction Set the direction in which the code will be written EnableCheckSum Set whether the checksum 1s used when the code 1s rendered
541. will hide the Boreholes station group layer Therefore the new map layer must be moved down To do this Right mouse click on the Site Map layer in the Layer Control list Move Down from the pop up menu This option is demonstrated below Mapping the Data 69 Bm ES Map Project Sample Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help domal RON AO XA Aida lr ARNO AE F E AMA a a Sample_Mapar bmp 3 a Boreholes Delete E M Zoom To Active Layer 5 Moye wp Move NG Ian Move To Bottom sa ans 5 Fe So GEcsparirenl ae Mafe provided Peete se Layer Informatio Image Layer 533 891 4 814 128 1 31 741 NAD 1927 UTM Zone 17N After doing this the Boreholes station group layer will be displayed on top of the site map as seen in the figure below Map Project Sample Al ES Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help Smar ame AO xl dara lor ARO eae del uolgas sso15 Layer Informatio Image Layer 534 080 4 812 059 1 31 741 NAD 1927 UTM Zone 17N At this time feel free to experiment with the properties of the Boreholes layer by modifying the symbol properties 70 Chapter 2 Getting Started Adding Labels To add labels to the Boreholes Layer gt Renderer from the main menu of the Map Project window The Renderers dialog will appear D A txA pt Background Symbo IY Show Background Do E Cancel daj Add button to
542. xample assume you have data for the following sample dates e 5 stations sampled on 03 05 99 e 6 stations sampled on 03 14 99 could be from the same or other stations e 4 stations sampled on 03 19 99 e 5 stations sampled on 03 27 99 e 6 stations sampled on 04 04 99 e 5 stations sampled on 04 15 99 e 4 stations sampled on 04 25 99 If you select Day for date granularity you will obtain 7 data sets to interpolate and If you select Month for date granularity you will obtain 2 data sets to interpolate e 20 stations sampled on 03 01 99 and e 15 stations sampled on 04 01 99 In this case the first observation from a well will be selected If you select Year for date granularity you will obtain only one data set that will essentially be a static plume In this case the first 1 data set When you have defined the settings press the oF Add button to add the mapped fields the values should then be displayed in the table at the bottom of the window To delete an existing 3D Plume simply click on the x Delete button When you are finished click on the OK button HGA will create a 3D plume file in the Plumes sub directory for your project with the file name provided and the extension nc For example TVOC nc in the directory D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Plumes To display the plume please proceed to the instructions in Chapter 9 View 3D In addition HGA will save the gridded 3D result
543. xpression evaluated Creating Queries 209 over a Set using the unbiased population formula e VARP Returns the population variance of a numeric expression evaluated over a set using the biased population formula Reference http msdn microsoft com library e Specify a Group Field the group field must be selected from one of the fields specified in the Group By List e Select an Operator and a corresponding Value e Repeat for additional conditions e Multiple conditions must be linked by selecting an appropriate Operator AND OR e Press the Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string 1s invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query e Click Close to exit the Query Builder and click Yes when prompted to save changes NOTE For Data Queries 1f aggregation options are selected then the same fields in the Display Fields must also appear in the Group By options 7 3 2 Station Group Query Example A Station Group query is used to segregate stations that meet specified criteria into a separate station group The stations groups that are generated using a query are called Dynamic because the station compliment of these groups may change
544. y Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Color Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Metafiles EMP Print Loads the current cross section into the report editor s runtime designer Please refer to Chapter 11 The Report Editor for more details on managing reports Exit Exit the Cross Section Editor and return to the main window of HydroGeo Analyst Note that this menu option also closes the map manager 9 2 2 Edit Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all shapes from the currently active cross section interpretation Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to the selected object To add a vertex e Activate the desired cross section interpretation make it editable e Select an object that is a polygon or a line depending on the active interpretation type e Click on the a button or select the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Description of Menu Items 279 e Repeat the last two steps to add more vertices at other locations on the selected object Delete Vertex Provides an option to delete a vertex from th
545. yer name in the Map Manager Click Save to continue and the Georeference window will appear as shown in the following figure si Description 10 x File Options Georeference Point In order to map the pixels of the image to a coordinate system the image must have two georeference points with known coordinates These georeference points can be defined using the procedure described below To set a georeference point e Click on the first map location where the X and Y world coordinates are known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y1 world coordinates of the selected location Description of Menu Items 237 238 ml 1000 1 foon x Cancel Help e Enter the X1 and Y1 coordinates for this point Click OK e Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point Click OK A box will appear around the map region similar to the window shown below i Description File Options a a ce ap Georeference Point xi D The Georeference utility will convert the Raster Image to project coordinates in the top right corner of the window the two Georeference Points will be displayed These values cannot be modified unless one of the georeference points is deleted and a new georeference point is assigned A box will appear in the map window def
546. you may either double click on the desired report or select the Open Report pop up menu item by right clicking on the desired report All reports are opened in the Report Designer by default The designer displays the report layout and allows you to modify it before generating the report The print preview of the report can be generated by clicking on the Print Preview button on the toolbar 11 5 2 Deleting a Report To delete a report that is registered with HydroGeo Analyst select it in the project browser right click on it and select Delete from the pop up menu The selected report will be deleted both from the tree view as well as from the file 374 Chapter 11 The Report Editor 11 5 3 Saving a Report A report can be saved at any time by clicking on the Save icon on the runtime report designer An existing report will be saved using the same file name When saving new reports your will be prompted for a file name Saving a Report As To save a report with a different name and or as a report template click on PJ Save As icon on the Report Designer s toolbar You will be prompted for a file name and type The report or report template will be saved to the Reports sub folder of the folder storing your project related information The report or report template will also be saved in the project s database and will be made available in the appropriate node in the project browser The report or template c

HydroGeo Analyst v.3.0 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents